![]() |
Photograph by Bettman/Corbis Rooney, who bought the Steelers, hit it big at the racetrack in 1936.
|
Month: January 2008
-
The Official Line vs. the Betting Line
-
Desktop,Boston, Eli Manning,Kennedy Mystique,Today’s Papers,McCain,60′s,MAUREEN DOWD,Superbowl
Needing a Hail Mary, Fans Find a Monastery
Chang W. Lee/The New York TimesThe Benedictine nuns are converting their 10-bedroom spiritual retreat into a place to stay for Super Bowl fans
January 31, 2008Needing a Hail Mary, Fans Find a Monastery By KATIE THOMASPHOENIX — There is no sauna, no heated pool, no chauffeur or sommelier. In fact, no alcohol is allowed on the premises, and guests share a bathroom with their next-door neighbor.
But for $250 a night in a city where Super Bowl rentals are topping out at $250,000 a week for a mansion in Scottsdale, the sisters at Our Lady of Guadalupe Monastery figure they have an offer that cannot be beat.
In debt from the recent purchase of a nearby parcel, the Benedictine nuns are hoping to make a dent in their mortgage by converting their 10-bedroom spiritual retreat into a crash pad for Super Bowl fans this weekend.
“A Super Bowl doesn’t happen in a city very often,” said Sister Linda Campbell, the prioress of the monastery where rooms usually go for $105 a night. “Then we heard of all the folks that were renting out homes and we thought, wow, that would be something that would be beneficial to the monastery and help us to help others.”
With 125,000 fans expected to arrive from out of town this weekend, even midlevel hotels are charging more than $500 a night for rooms. A Hampton Inn, for example, is sold out for the weekend at prices up to $799 a night. Not far away, a Residence Inn by Marriott on Wednesday still had a two-bedroom suite available for $999 a night.
With its posters of Mother Teresa, vinyl tablecloths and second-hand furniture, the monastery’s offerings do not match up to some of the Super Bowl packages that nearby hotels and resorts are offering, with free cocktail hours, personal concierge service and sometimes even a meet-and-greet with N.F.L. players. Though there is no curfew at the monastery, some Super Bowl visitors may be dismayed to learn that along with the ban on alcohol (forget about keg stands or late-night drinking games), overnight guests cannot smoke.
Guests at the monastery will sleep in single beds in rooms named after Saints Hildegard, Helen, Monica and Ann. Most of the rooms sleep three people, and there is no telephone or television in the rooms.
Still, the retreat has its charms. The nine-year-old monastery is only three and a half miles from University of Phoenix Stadium in Glendale, Ariz., and is nestled improbably in a working-class suburban neighborhood. Bottlebrush and palm trees shade the monastery, and a peacock roams the grounds. A yellow Labrador named Bonito greets guests at the front door.
Clint Mills Jr., 38, of Shrewsbury, Mass., said he knew he would travel to Arizona if the Patriots won, but he was dreading the cost of a hotel room for him and his 6-year-old son, Clint Mills III. This will be Mills’s fifth Super Bowl, and he was aware that even the most basic hotel rooms would be $500 a night. Then he saw a story on his local television station about the monastery.
“When I saw it on the news, I was like, Oh my god,” Mills said. “I don’t have to worry about who’s coming down the hallway at 2 a.m. on Sunday morning.”
Sister Linda, 59, works as a guidance counselor at St. Mary’s High School, a local Catholic school, and lives at the monastery with another nun and a live-in associate, a woman who has dedicated herself to a spiritual life but has not taken vows to join the order. Throughout the year, the sisters play host to church groups, nonprofit organizations and individuals who arrive seeking spiritual renewal and contemplation. The retreat is so popular that it has outgrown its space, and the order spent $550,000 on a nearby parcel last April so the monastery could be expanded.
The mood at the monastery may seem more prayerful than pumped up, but football fans will find a kindred spirit in Sister Linda, who has season tickets to the Arizona Cardinals and loves to lose herself in the shoves and grunts of a hard-fought game.
“It is violent, but not as violent as some others,” she said. “Now, I’m not into boxing or some of those. But football, yeah, I like football. For the most part, it’s a down time for me, and a time to just sit back and just enjoy it.”
Sister Linda said she admired Eli Manning and Tom Brady — “they’re both talented men,” she said of the two quarterbacks — but added that she was rooting for the Patriots. “They’ve had a perfect season, and it would be so sad to lose at this point,” she said.
Seven of the 10 rooms are already booked. None of the guests were bothered by the ban on alcohol or the monastery’s subdued setting, Sister Linda said.
“I think there’s a uniqueness about the people who are coming,” she said. Some of the guests, including a nun from New York, are Catholic; others are not. “It’s just like there was a reason for them to come to this area, for this purpose.”
The arrangement worked perfectly for George Huntoon, a Patriots fan from Dover, Mass., who does not drink alcohol and was shocked at some of the hotel prices he saw when planning his trip. “You know it’s going to be nice and clean,” said Huntoon, who is 50 and owns a building-supply store. “It’s a good thing just to get a little peace of mind before the game. I’m kind of looking forward to it.”
If those who arrive seek spiritual guidance, Sister Linda and her colleagues can provide it. But if they just want to enjoy the game, she said, that is O.K., too.
Still, several visitors have told her they would like to participate in Sunday Mass. If the guests pray for their own team to win, Sister Linda will understand; she admitted to praying once or twice for her beloved Cardinals.
“The way I do it is I pray for them to do the best they can,” she said, before offering a word of caution.
“Everyone has to understand,” she said, “that God listens to both sides.”
Battle Concussions Tied to Stress Disorder
January 31, 2008Battle Concussions Tied to Stress Disorder About one in six combat troops returning from Iraq have suffered at least one concussion in the war, injuries that, while temporary, could heighten their risk of developing post-traumatic stress disorder, researchers are reporting.
The study, in The New England Journal of Medicine, is the military’s first large-scale effort to gauge the effect of mild head injuries — concussions, many of them from roadside blasts — that some experts worry may be causing a host of undiagnosed neurological deficiencies.
The new report found that soldiers who had concussions were more likely than those with other injuries to report a variety of physical and mental symptoms in their first months back home, including headaches, poor sleep and balance problems. But they were also at higher risk for the stress disorder, or PTSD, and that accounted for most of the difference in complaints, the researchers concluded. Symptoms of the disorder include irritability, sleep problems and flashbacks.
Experts cautioned that the study had not been designed to detect subtle changes in mental performance, like slips in concentration or short-term memory, that might have developed in the wake of a concussion and might be unrelated to stress reactions. Many returning veterans are still struggling with those problems, which can linger for months.
The findings are in line with previous research linking concussions to post-traumatic stress disorder that develops after frightening events outside a military context, like car accidents; concussions from athletic collisions rarely lead to the disorder.
“This study is a very good first step, and an important one, but like any first step it should lead us to ask further questions about these injuries,” said Brian Levine, a neuropsychologist at the Rotman Research Institute and the University of Toronto, who was not involved in the study.
Now that the prevalence of combat concussions is better known, Dr. Levine said, the next step should be to assess troops’ cognitive functioning early on and track it over time, before and after combat.
In the study, military psychiatrists had 2,525 soldiers from two Army infantry brigades fill out questionnaires asking about missed workdays and dozens of kinds of physical and emotional difficulties, including symptoms of PTSD. The soldiers had been back home from Iraq for three to four months.
The questionnaires also asked about concussions and their severity. A concussion is an injury from a blow or shock to the head that causes temporary confusion or loss of consciousness, without any visible brain damage. The investigators found that 384 of the soldiers, or 15 percent, reported at least one concussion. One-third of that 15 percent had blacked out when injured.
The severity of the concussion was related to the risk of developing the stress disorder, the survey showed. Nearly 44 percent of the soldiers who had blacked out qualified for the diagnosis, about three times the rate found in soldiers with other injuries. Among soldiers who did not black out, the rate of PTSD was 27 percent, significantly higher than the 16 percent rate among veterans with other kinds of injuries.
“There’s a lot we don’t know about these injuries, but we do know that context is important,” said the lead author, Dr. Charles W. Hoge, director of the division of psychiatry and neuroscience at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research. “Being in combat, you’re going to be in a physiologically heightened state already. Now imagine a blast that knocks you unconscious — an extremely close call on your own life, and maybe your buddy went down. So you’ve got the trauma, and maybe the effect of the concussion is to make it worse.”
In an editorial that accompanied the study, Richard A. Bryant, a psychologist at the University of New South Wales in Australia, emphasized that concussed troops “should not be led to believe that they have a brain injury that will result in permanent damage.”
On the contrary, Dr. Bryant and other experts say, the link to post-traumatic stress suggests that mild brain injuries have a significant psychological component, which can improve with treatment.
Paul Rieckhoff, executive director of Iraq and Afghanistan Veterans of America, said the study, and the interest of doctors and military officials in brain trauma, were long overdue.
Wednesday, January 30, 2008
Seeing Red Over Hillary,Maureen Dowd
Fred R. Conrad/The New York TimesMaureen Dowd
January 30, 2008Op-Ed Columnist Seeing Red Over Hillary By MAUREEN DOWDWASHINGTON
Even newly armored by the spirit of Camelot, Barack Obama is still distressed by the sight of a certain damsel.
It’s already famous as The Snub, the moment before the State of the Union when Obama turned away to talk to Claire McCaskill instead of trying to join Teddy Kennedy in shaking hands with Hillary.
Nobody cared about W., whose presidency had crumpled into a belated concern about earmarks.
The only union that fascinated was Obama and Hillary, once more creeping around each other.
It would have been the natural thing for the Illinois senator, only hours after his emotional embrace by the Kennedys and an arena full of deliriously shrieking students, to follow the lead of Uncle Teddy and greet the rebuffed Hillary.
She was impossible to miss in the sea of dark suits and Supreme Court dark robes. Like Scarlett O’Hara after a public humiliation, Hillary showed up at the gathering wearing a defiant shade of red.
But the fact that he didn’t do so shows that Obama cannot hide how much the Clintons rattle him, and that he is still taking the race very personally.
On a flight to Kansas yesterday to collect another big endorsement, this one from Gov. Kathleen Sebelius, Obama said he was “surprised” by reports of The Snub.
“I was turning away because Claire asked me a question as Senator Kennedy was reaching forward,” he said. “Senator Clinton and I have had very cordial relations off the floor and on the floor. I waved at her as I was coming into the Senate chamber before we walked over last night. I think there is just a lot more tea leaf reading going on here than I think people are suggesting.”
But that answer is disingenuous. Their relations have been frosty and fraught ever since the young Chicago prince challenged Queen Hillary’s royal proclamation that it was her turn to rule.
Last winter, after news broke that he was thinking of running, he winked at her and took her elbow on the Senate floor to say hi, in his customary languid, friendly way, and she coldly brushed him off.
It bothered him, and he called a friend to say: You would not believe what just happened with Hillary.
Again and again at debates, he looked eager to greet her or be friendly during the evening and she iced him. She might have frozen him out once more Monday night had he actually tried to reach out.
But now Obama is like that cat Mark Twain wrote about who wouldn’t jump on the stove again for fear of being burned.
It was only after the distortions of the Clintons in South Carolina that he changed his tone and took on Hillary in a tough way in the debate there. Afterward, one of his advisers said that it was as though a dam had broken and Obama finally began using all the sharp lines against Hillary that strategists had been suggesting for months.
Why had it taken so long for Obama to push back against Hillary? “He respected her as a senator,” the adviser replied. “He even defended her privately when she cried, saying that no one knows how hard these campaigns are.”
But Obama’s outrage makes him seem a little jejune. He is surely the only person in the country who was surprised when the Clintons teamed up to dissemble and smear when confronted with an impediment to their ambitions.
Knowing that it helped her when Obama seemed to be surly with her during the New Hampshire debate, telling her without looking up from his notes that she was “likable enough” — another instance of Obama not being able to hide his bruised feelings — Hillary went on ABC News last night to insinuate that he was rude Monday.
“Well, I reached my hand out in friendship and unity and my hand is still reaching out,” she said, lapsing back into the dissed-woman mode. “And I look forward to shaking his hand sometime soon.”
Something’s being stretched here, but it’s not her hand. She wasn’t reaching out to him at all.
The New York State chapter of NOW issued an absurd statement on Monday calling Teddy Kennedy’s endorsement of Obama “the ultimate betrayal”: “He’s picked the new guy over us.”
But Obama is the more emotionally delicate candidate, and the one who has the more feminine consensus management style, and the not-blinded-by-testosterone ability to object to a phony war.
As first lady, Alpha Hillary’s abrasive and secretive management of health care doomed it. She voted to enable W. on Iraq so she could run as someone tough enough to command armies.
Given her brazen quote to ABC News, Obama is right to be scared of Hillary. He just needs to learn that Uncle Teddy can’t fight all his fights, and that a little chivalry goes a long way.
John F. Kennedy sent the National Guard to Tuscaloosa, 60’s
The Esquire Decade
During a decade of war, assassination, and racial fear, Esquire editor Harold T. P. Hayes and his talented staff brought a revolutionary barrage of literary and visual firepower to America’s newsstands. Gay Talese, Tom Wolfe, and other stars of the nascent New Journalism recapture Hayes’s rise and reign, which cracked the code of a changing culture.
by Frank DiGiacomo January 2007
Harold Hayes, 1965. Photograph by Walter Bernard.
Along with the heat, the summer of 1963 brought a palpable tension to the so-called United States. The May images of black demonstrators terrorized by fire hoses and police dogs in Birmingham still resonated on June 11, when President John F. Kennedy sent the National Guard to Tuscaloosa to thwart segregationist governor George Wallace’s attempt to block two black students from enrolling at the University of Alabama. That night, Kennedy appeared on national television to announce that he would introduce a civil-rights bill in Congress the following week, but the hope that his speech promised was undercut the very next day by the murder of N.A.A.C.P. field secretary Medgar Evers in the driveway of his Jackson, Mississippi, home.
By late June, race was Topic A in America. But up on the fourth floor of 488 Madison Avenue, in a corner office with a wraparound view of the Midtown Manhattan skyline, Harold Thomas Pace Hayes, the managing editor of Esquire magazine, was preoccupied with Christmas. At a time when typewriters, carbon paper, color transparencies, and hot type still constituted the primary tools of the publishing business, a single issue of a full-color monthly magazine took a minimum of three to four months to produce—”lead time” in industry parlance. This meant that, in order to get the December 1963 issue of Esquire onto the newsstands and into the hands of subscribers ahead of the post-Thanksgiving shopping rush, Hayes and his staff of editors and art directors needed to close the issue in the middle of August. There was one other factor to consider as well. The December Esquire was the parent company’s cash cow, carrying twice as many ads as a typical issue, and Hayes had been at the magazine long enough to know that the men who controlled the purse strings expected him to invoke the comforting spirit of Christmas on that year-end cover—the better to put the magazine’s readers in a receptive mood for the onslaught of liquor, fashion, and cologne pitches that awaited them inside.
So, with his ginger suede wing tips up on the desk and an inscrutable smile on his face, Hayes picked up the phone and placed a call to the man who did Esquire’s covers, a Runyonesque character named George Lois who swore like a longshoreman but exuded the confidence of a shipping magnate. Lois did not work at Esquire, or even in publishing. He ran one of the most sought-after advertising agencies in the business—Papert, Koenig, Lois, which he’d formed in 1960 after blazing trails as an art director at Doyle Dane Bernbach. But, back in 1962, after a lunch with Hayes at the Four Seasons Restaurant, Lois had taken on the job of designing Esquire’s covers in between servicing such agency clients as Xerox and Dutch Masters cigars.
To a magazine industry that, like the rest of the culture, was still throwing off the dull, mannered strictures of the 50s, Hayes’s arrangement with Lois was shocking. Admen sold soap, not magazines. But provocation, on many levels, was exactly what Hayes sought. Since taking the reins of Esquire two years earlier, he had pushed to make every column inch of the magazine sing with a brash authority that made news and upset the powers that be. In Lois, he had struck gold. Here was someone who could articulate that irreverence—in visual terms—on the most important page of the magazine. Once a month, Hayes provided Lois with the editorial lineup and his thoughts about what that issue’s cover story might be. And then Hayes did what he did with his writers: he stepped back and let Lois do his thing.
Given that December was the biggest issue of the year, however, Hayes exerted a little extra finesse once he got Lois on the phone. “George? Hey, buddy, I could really use a Christmasy cover for December,” he told Lois in his elegant North Carolinian accent. The ad-sales guys were putting his feet to the fire.
“You got it,” replied Lois, who, after some brainstorming, got on the phone with photographer Carl Fischer. According to the soft-spoken Fischer, the conversation began as it usually did when Lois called with one of his Esquire cover concepts: “I got a wild idea! Listen to this crazy idea!” the adman told the photographer in his staccato Bronx growl.
The December 1963 cover photographed by Carl Fischer, with Sonny Liston, “the last man on earth America wanted to see coming down its chimney.”
The idea required that Fischer and an assistant grab a plane to Las Vegas, where they turned a room at the Thunderbird Hotel into a makeshift studio. When the knock at the door finally came, world heavyweight boxing champion Sonny Liston stood in the doorway with a little girl, who Fischer guesses was eight, and another boxer, former heavyweight champ Joe Louis, the Brown Bomber.
Louis had been enlisted by George Lois to get Liston to the shoot and facilitate his cooperation, which began to evaporate around the time Fischer presented the hulking fighter with a Santa hat and suit to wear before the camera.
In 1963, Sonny Liston wasn’t just the heavyweight champ; he was, as Lois says, “the baddest motherfucker” ever kissed by fame. Frightening in and out of the ring, Liston—who had beaten the gallant Floyd Patterson in the fall of 1962—was an ex-con who had done time for armed robbery and assaulting a police officer. His ties to organized crime weren’t alleged; they were fact. The N.A.A.C.P. perceived his dark past to be a liability to the civil-rights movement.
Christmas would never be the same.
Liston didn’t exactly channel the spirit of Saint Nick when he learned what was expected of him. “[He] was very cranky,” Fischer says. “He was not going to put on any fucking hat”—let alone a velvety red tunic trimmed in white. But by the end of the shoot, using Louis and the little girl as a persuasive Greek chorus, Fischer had the image Lois wanted—and it landed like a stick of dynamite in Harold Hayes’s lap. Beneath the droopy Santa hat, Liston’s dead eyes stared sullenly at the reader. His festive apparel seemed only to accentuate his hostility. Writing about the incident years later, the editor recalled showing the cover to the executives who worked in Esquire’s business department. The magazine’s advertising director suggested that Esquire refrain from putting a black Santa on its cover until Saks Fifth Avenue put one in its stores. The magazine’s circulation director was stunned.
“Jesus Christ, Hayes,” he said. “You call that Christmasy? What the hell are you trying to do to us?”
“It is Christmasy,” Hayes told the executive. “Look at the Santa Claus hat.”
Ultimately, nobody at Esquire tried to stop Hayes from running the cover. After all, under his leadership, the magazine was clearly thriving and would hit an all-time high circulation of just under 900,000 that fall. More important, Hayes didn’t second-guess himself. “He had the exact thing that all of the great editors and producers and studio heads and politicians have, which is that he absolutely trusted his gut,” says Nora Ephron, who worked with Hayes when she was a columnist and feature writer for Esquire in the early 70s. “He knew what he wanted. He acted on it.”
Hayes lit the fuse, and Sonny Liston exploded a ragged hole in the country’s Norman Rockwell preconceptions of Christmas. Save for the magazine’s logo and dateline, the cover ran without any type, or even a caption identifying the fighter. None was necessary. Years later, Sports Illustrated recalled that Liston looked like “the last man on earth America wanted to see coming down its chimney.” An art-history professor at Hunter College proclaimed the cover “one of the greatest social statements of the plastic arts since Picasso’s Guernica.” The angry letters began to roll in, and stunned advertisers proceeded to pull out. Esquire’s advertising director would eventually estimate that the magazine lost $750,000 due to the cover.
For Hayes, the gains outweighed the losses. Liston-as-Santa was “the perfect magazine cover,” he wrote, looking back in a 1981 article in Adweek magazine, “a single, textless image that measured our lives and the time we lived them in quite precisely to the moment.” Published in a national climate “thick with racial fear,” he explained, “Lois’ angry icon insisted on several things: the split in our culture was showing; the notion of racial equality was a bad joke; the felicitations of this season—goodwill to all men, etc.—carried irony more than sentiment.”
Adman George Lois, who designed and produced Esquire’s provocative covers, 1964. Photograph by Timothy Galfas.
With the December 1963 issue, Esquire’s metamorphosis was complete. Not only was it the first issue to carry Hayes’s new title, editor—he had been running the magazine since mid-1961 under the lesser honorific of managing editor—but it was also the first to display the full range of literary and visual firepower that would make Esquire the great American magazine of the 1960s, if not the great American magazine of the 20th century.
Certainly, Esquire did not begin in the 60s. By the time John Kennedy was exploring his New Frontier, the monthly was more than 25 years old and had published Ernest Hemingway’s “The Snows of Kilimanjaro” and F. Scott Fitzgerald’s “The Crack-Up” series, along with a formidable list of writers who need be identified by only their last names: Dos Passos, Salinger, Camus, Huxley, Steinbeck, Waugh, Mencken, and Pirandello, to name just a few. Still, by the 1950s, the magazine had grown as dull as the Eisenhower administration. Enter Hayes, who, after a brutal four-and-a-half-year contest for control of the magazine, emerged—hardened and battle-ready—to lead Esquire into a new era. And what an era it was.
The Magazine of the New
Hayes’s Esquire would identify, analyze, and define the new decade’s violent energies, ideas, morals, and conflicts—though always with an ironic and, occasionally, sardonic detachment that kept the magazine cool as the 60s grew increasingly hot. Esquire would become the magazine of the New: “The New Art of Success,” “The New Seven Deadly Sins,” “The New Sophistication,” and, ultimately, the New Journalism, the fancy term given to nonfiction that’s written like a novel.
Even a very short list of Esquire contributors in the 1960s reads like a roll call for the profession’s pantheon. James Baldwin dissected Norman Mailer in “The Black Boy Looks at the White Boy.” William Styron analyzed “My Generation.” Philip Roth visited “Iowa: A Very Far Country Indeed.” And Mailer twitted them all in “Some Children of the Goddess.” Bruce Jay Friedman asked model Jean Shrimpton if she had any fantasies and watched her rummage through her purse in “The Imposing Proportions of Jean Shrimpton.” Rex Reed braved the force of nature known as Ava Gardner in “Ava: Life in the Afternoon.” Susan Sontag took a “Trip to Hanoi.” Saul Bellow contributed “Literary Notes on Khrushchev.” Edmund Wilson published “The Rats of Rutland Grange.” Terry Southern juggled racism, majorettes, and moonshine in “Twirling at Ole Miss.” Dorothy Parker captured “New York at Six-Thirty P.M.” William F. Buckley Jr. explored the politics of Capote’s 1966 Black and White Ball. Kenneth Tynan explained why “Dirty Books Can Stay.” Anthony Lukas chronicled “The Life and Death of a Hippie.” Dan Wakefield and Thomas B. Morgan profiled, respectively, Robert F. Kennedy and his younger brother, Ted, for a package called “Bobby & Teddy.” Brock Brower examined “Mary McCarthyism.”
Measured against the streamlined, A.D.D.-friendly magazine writing of today, not all of Esquire’s 60s canon has aged well. Some of the prose is excessively woolly, some exceedingly self-important, and in a publication where articles in excess of 10,000 words were not uncommon, some stories come off as just plain interminable. There is also the sense that, toward the end of the decade, the magazine struggled with its own success—particularly when it came to finding new ideas and writers to top its previous achievements. For example, as smart as it may have sounded for the magazine to include author and political activist Jean Genet and macabre Beat author William Burroughs on the Esquire team that covered the 1968 Democratic convention in Chicago, their contributions, today, seem more wacky than worthy. Genet’s piece was titled “The Members of the Assembly” because he spent several sentences focusing on the crotches of Chicago’s police force.
The May 1969 cover, with Andy Warhol.
But what’s really remarkable about Esquire’s coverage of the 60s is how much does still hold up. Get past the gooey wave of nostalgia that reading old magazines inevitably delivers and the writing, photography, and art still crackle with telling details, unexpected insights, and laugh-out-loud humor.
As Nora Ephron says, Esquire and the 60s were “the perfect moment of a magazine and a period coming together—not trying to say the period was something other than what it was, but telling us everything about it.” And though the decade climaxed in violence and hysteria that no monthly magazine could stay ahead of, Harold Hayes and his troops at Esquire not only cracked the code of the new culture but also engineered the genome for the modern magazine. Traces of its DNA can still be found in today’s magazines, including this one.
Harold Hayes died in 1989. Like the chapters of his unfinished book, Making a Modern Magazine, the clues he left behind about his life and his work at Esquire are frustratingly incomplete and, like the man himself, hard to fathom. They—the chapters and the clues—are filed, along with a career’s worth of correspondence, notes, and clippings, in the rare-manuscripts department of the Z. Smith Reynolds Library, at Hayes’s alma mater, Wake Forest University. (This trove of information is also featured at length in Carol Polsgrove’s 1995 book, It Wasn’t Pretty, Folks, but Didn’t We Have Fun: Esquire in the Sixties.) The files show that Hayes was born April 18, 1926, in Elkin, North Carolina, but spent roughly half his childhood in coal country, Beckley, West Virginia, before moving, at 11, to the considerably more cosmopolitan environs of Winston-Salem, North Carolina. The middle child of three, Hayes was the product of a nurturing, culture-loving mother—who, Hayes once said, wished her children “would be middle class gentility”—and a strict fundamentalist Baptist-minister father who insisted his offspring attend prayer meetings and revivals, and wouldn’t let Esquire magazine into the house during Harold’s childhood. This dogmatic upbringing left Hayes with what he called a lasting “moral hangover” that he resented by the time of his adolescence. He was somewhere between a hick and a naïf when he landed at Wake Forest—and as square as the trombone he had played in his high-school band.
He did not exactly catch fire at college. Hayes characterized himself as a “happy-go-lucky” C student whose education was interrupted by a stint in the navy reserve. He worked on student publications and after graduating, in 1948, headed for Atlanta, eventually landing at United Press, where he covered the Georgia legislature and re-wrote wire copy. When the Korean War flared in the summer of 1950, Hayes enlisted in the Marines, where he rose to the rank of first lieutenant but never saw action. Once his hitch was up, a mutual friend helped arrange his first audience with Arnold Gingrich, the founding editor of Esquire, who, after years away from the magazine, had just returned as its publisher. Gingrich, an impeccably dressed Renaissance man who collected rare violins and played them badly, didn’t have a position for Hayes and sent him on to a publisher developing a new magazine called Picture Week. Hayes was put in charge and nervously ran the show until, about two years into the job, he produced an end-of-the-year feature that foreshadowed the perverse point of view that would come to distinguish Esquire from its competition. While most editors used their year-end issues to recap the highlights of the last 12 months, Hayes had astutely sensed that there was much more entertainment value in looking at the low points and put together a piece that in an interview years later he called “The Hundred Bombs of the Year.” The publisher took one look at the layout and fired the entire editorial staff.
Hayes was soon back on Esquire’s doorstep, and this time Gingrich took him on as his assistant—hardly an illustrious title, but Esquire’s publisher had plans for this new hire. Between 1933 and the end of that decade, Gingrich and a group of Chicago-based businessmen, led by a cunning hypochondriac named David Smart and his partner William Weintraub, had turned Esquire into one of the great magazine success stories of the early 20th century. (They also created Gentlemen’s Quarterly, now owned by Condé Nast.) Their Esquire was an innovative mix of high and low culture—akin to “having Thomas Mann or Ernest Hemingway read their work aloud at a burlesque house,” according to one critic of the time—delivered in a big, 13-inch-by-10-inch format and presided over by “Esky,” a pop-eyed dandy with a walrus mustache who appeared on every cover and bore more than a passing resemblance to Gingrich.
But Esquire’s original luster had long since faded by the early 50s, when the magazine moved from Chicago to New York to take advantage of the resurgent city’s new status as both the center of the advertising universe and the clearinghouse of American culture. The appearances in 1953 of Playboy—founded by former low-level Esquire employee Hugh Hefner—and, the following year, Sports Illustrated only worsened matters. Management eventually realized that the magazine’s future would have to be determined by someone younger and more in tune with the times. And so, in 1957, Gingrich began ushering Hayes and a handful of young, ambitious editors he called the “young Turks” into his cramped office, where he refereed one of the most vicious weekly story meetings in modern journalism. “I’m turning the magazine over to you,” Gingrich told the Turks at one of those first meetings, which really meant that he would preside over them as they battled one another to place their respective story ideas in Esquire. Though it wasn’t exactly stated that the last man standing would ascend to the top of the masthead, the combatants couldn’t help but notice that the corner office that had belonged to the magazine’s last editor—swept out in a purge of the previous regime—was being kept vacant. With this “beautiful red apple suspended way up at the top of the tree,” Hayes wrote, the editorial meetings quickly turned brutal, loud, and even personal. “They were very bloody,” said Ralph Ginzburg, another young Turk, who went on to start Eros magazine and push against the boundaries of the First Amendment. (Ginzburg, who spoke to Vanity Fair last spring, died in July.) “There was no predicting how nefarious, dirty, or low they would get.”
“The Big Change”
The contest ultimately boiled down to Hayes and a well-connected former Life-magazine editor named Clay Felker, a St. Louis native and Duke University graduate whose father was managing editor of The Sporting News and whose mother was also an editor. Felker stirred Hayes’s competitive instincts, but he intimidated him, too. In addition to possessing the more authentic-sounding title of features editor, Felker was known around the office as the “drinking editor,” because he attended so many parties. He was also a remarkably fertile source of good ideas. “He had the keenest distant-early-warning system of any editor I ever knew,” said Ginzburg. “He could spot something that was going to be a major trend six months before it happened.”
Felker could be forceful and engaging when pitching his own ideas and politically lethal when torpedoing somebody else’s. Hayes learned this early in the competition when, after he sold the idea of profiling the Communist Daily Worker newspaper, Felker embarked on a no-holds-barred (but ultimately unsuccessful) campaign to kill the story, and his tactics included a well-aimed swipe at Hayes’s feelings of intellectual inadequacy. “The trouble with you is, you just don’t know,” Felker told his rival. Years later, Hayes would admit, in a 1988 interview with University of Kansas student Joseph Rebello, that the remark was “the most damning and insulting thing anybody had said to me in a working relationship,” and it played a key role in his decision to apply for a Nieman Fellowship at Harvard. He was accepted, and, in 1958, left for Cambridge with Gingrich’s blessing. This time, the C student did A work and returned the following year a much more confident and connected man. (According to Felker, however, Hayes “still seemed threatened by me.”)
Hayes sometimes referred to the battle of the young Turks as “the Big Change,” and by the end of 1960 one of the last remaining vestiges of the old Esquire was the caricature of Esky that dotted the i in the magazine’s logo. A new Esquire had evolved, and it was a hybrid of Hayes’s and Felker’s respective editorial visions. Hayes wanted Esquire to be a magazine of ideas—politics, science, law, religion, sophistication. Felker saw power—and the powerful—as his unifying theme. Save for the fact that neither man wanted to share the reins, their worldviews weren’t incompatible. They were both outsider perspectives built on smart writing, strong reporting, provocative visuals, and bringing a new sensibility to old subjects. Gingrich’s mad plan had worked. Through all the infighting and backstabbing, Esquire had become a stronger magazine with an impressive roster of stars and newcomers. Felker had hired Gore Vidal as a political columnist and David Levine as an illustrator. He had also enticed Norman Mailer to cover the 1960 Democratic convention, from which the author of The Naked and the Dead produced an evocative and groundbreaking piece of literary nonfiction, “Superman Comes to the Supermarket,” which has since been heralded as one of the earliest examples of the New Journalism.
Hayes brought in William F. Buckley Jr. to write for the magazine. He was also instrumental in the production of Art Kane’s historic 1958 photo of jazz greats gathered on a Harlem stoop, and the first magazine editor to employ Diane Arbus. In the July 1960 issue, as part of a special package devoted to New York, Arbus made her first Esquire appearance, with a photo-essay of the city’s eccentrics called “The Vertical Journey,” as did another future Hayes favorite, New York Times reporter Gay Talese, whose pointillist portrait of the city, told through little-known facts and observations, was the backbone of the issue.
Had not fate—in the form of The Saturday Evening Post—intervened, Gingrich probably would have let Felker and Hayes battle it out until one quit or killed the other. (Those who worked with Esquire’s publisher often described his management style as “laissez-faire.”) But after Hayes received a series of increasingly enticing offers to join the Post as an editor, Gingrich finally appointed him managing editor in the summer of 1961, the promotion reflected on the masthead in Esquire’s September issue. Hayes moved into the coveted corner office. Felker began to look for a new job. “I was naïve,” Felker says curtly, more than 40 years after the decision. “Hayes cultivated Gingrich. I thought that all I had to do was keep coming up with good ideas.” Instead, in the fall of 1962, Felker moved on, and in 1963 resurfaced as a consultant at the New York Herald Tribune, where he eventually took over the newspaper’s Sunday magazine, which had been revamped and renamed, simply, New York. There, he would soon demonstrate that his rise at Esquire had been no fluke.
Hayes did not wait for Felker to leave before he consolidated his power and got down to the business of expanding his staff. In late 1961, he hired a preppish Harvard graduate named John Berendt as an associate editor. Around this time, fiction editor Rust Hills hired an assistant named Robert Brown, who came with a master’s in English literature from Yale (and would eventually succeed his boss). The following year, Hayes promoted Alice Glaser, a neurotic but brilliant Radcliffe-educated secretary, to the same station, and after Felker left, Hayes replaced him with former Time-Life Books editor Byron Dobell as his assistant managing editor. In 1963, Hayes hired a self-described North Carolina “hillbilly” named Robert Sherrill as an associate editor. Hayes and Sherrill had met at Wake Forest and become even closer friends when they both moved to Atlanta and lived in the same apartment complex. But when Sherrill arrived at Esquire, he found that his former schoolmate had changed.
“It was sort of dramatic, because the last time I saw him, he’s one character, and the next time he’s another one,” Sherrill says, explaining that at Wake Forest Hayes was still “naïve, sweet, curious. He went wild over Tender Is the Night. He was almost a cheerleader.” Nearly 20 years later, Hayes was “the same person, but he’s tough,” Sherrill says. “You’ll have a hard time moving him.”
The triple-witching effect of the Marines, Gingrich’s boot camp, and Harvard had both hardened and emboldened Hayes, and the city had buffed him to a fine luster. An unconventionally handsome man with a full head of fair brown hair and bushy eyebrows that could look as untamed as the Manhattan skyline, he moved through Esquire’s offices at a forward tilt, the metal taps on his shoes heralding his arrival, his mood, and his utter confidence in the task at hand. “There was a specific Harold clickety-click,” says Kitty Krupat, who in the late 60s served as the magazine’s chief editorial researcher.
Hayes edited Esquire as if he were its most fervent reader. And he was. “He had an innate sense of the way a magazine should be—his magazine,” Sherrill says. “He loved structure and he loved the way people wrote. He could read something and almost immediately say ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’ and throw it over his shoulder.”
And as he tweaked Esquire to reflect his vision, Hayes also indoctrinated the staff. “We never wondered what he wanted. We absolutely knew,” says John Berendt. Though Hayes’s Esquire retained many of the hallmarks established during the young Turks’ turf war, its irreverent tone and sense of humor—”from black wit to custard-pie burlesque,” as the editor once put it—evolved, particularly with the debut of a franchise feature called the Dubious Achievement Awards that Hayes had asked his art director, Robert Benton, and an associate editor named David Newman to pull together for the January 1962 issue. Though inspired by a Harvard Lampoon staple that recognized the worst acting and movies of the year, Dubious Achievements was really just another run at the “Hundred Bombs of the Year” piece that had gotten Hayes fired from Picture Week. A wry look at the Bay of Pigs fiasco and other low points of Kennedy’s first year in office, Dubious Achievements was built around a recurring photo of the usually glowering Richard Nixon laughing maniacally. The caption beneath the photo read: “Why is this man laughing?” Benton says the juxtaposition of image and text was simply a reference to the turmoil of Kennedy’s first year. “[Nixon] was laughing because he wasn’t president,” he says. And yet, the joke still seemed to be on the former vice president.
By using Nixon—an embodiment of the Eisenhower era—as the highbrow equivalent of Mad magazine’s Alfred E. Neuman, Esquire had declared itself a brash corrective to the square sobriety of the 50s, and Hayes had taken a significant step forward in defining his magazine.
Ultimately, he wanted every column inch of Esquire’s editorial content to reflect that tone. So, on Fridays, Hayes broke out the liquor and presided over a casual brainstorming session disguised as a cocktail party that would be attended by the staff and any contributors who happened to be in the building. When Berendt had started, Hayes used a copy of the day’s New York Times to show him and Glaser how to convert daily news and feature stories into Esquire ideas by, Berendt says, “giving articles a special slant, by getting a principal in the story to write the piece, or by assigning a well-chosen writer with a specialty that fit the story.” Not long after that, the editors were having Friday drinks in Hayes’s office when, Berendt says, “Harold brought up the Times thing again and said, ‘It’s child’s play. Anyone can do it.’?” This prompted one of the staffers to devise a challenge: pages of the Times were affixed to corkboard that covered part of the wall in Hayes’s office, and darts were flung at them. The goal was to come up with an Esquire-worthy story wherever the dart landed. “It became very competitive,” Berendt says. “People shouted out ideas and were very clever and hilarious about it, but Harold was absolutely ingenious.”
“Point of view,” “tone,” “perspective,” and “irreverence” were terms that got thrown around a lot on the fourth floor of 488 Madison. “Great P.O.V.,” Hayes might scrawl on an idea memo when he came across something he liked. Or, after hearing a story idea, he might raise his hand in front of his face and rotate it, which meant that the editor needed to do the same with his idea. These qualities distinguished Esquire from the jaunty suburban earnestness of The New Yorker, or its duller competitors Harper’s and The Atlantic. They also gave the magazine an urgency and a timeliness that monthlies didn’t ordinarily have.
And with the July 1963 issue, Esquire made news with a feature called “The Structure of the American Literary Establishment,” which was pure point of view. The focus of the feature was a two-page spread that looked like a cross between a chart and a lava lamp. Onto these pages, fiction editor Rust Hills had grouped dozens of writers, agents, playwrights, and critics into such categories as “Writers Who Get in Columns” and “The Cool World.” The pinnacle was “The Hot Center,” which spanned the centerfold of the magazine under a splash of red-orange ink. The chart was satirical and keenly observed—for one thing, a writer’s heat seemed to have more to do with his agent than his writing—and it threw the thin-skinned literary world into a tizzy, particularly The New York Times Book Review, which had been relegated to “Squaresville” (and which then published a squarely earnest rebuttal that seemed to miss the humor of the piece). In addition to being the first of many Establishment charts to come—covering various industries and hierarchies—the feature “was an important turning point for Esquire,” Berendt says. “It was Esquire taking charge and calling the shots.”
Bracing as the Sonny Liston cover was in a country that had gone to the barricades over racism, it was swiftly eclipsed by the shock and grief produced by another national tragedy. On November 22, 1963, about a week after the December issue of Esquire reached newsstands, President Kennedy was assassinated in Dallas. For the first time since Hayes had taken over the magazine, Esquire’s three-month lead time looked like it might become a liability. The January issue was at the printers, which meant that photos and text made inaccurate or tasteless by the assassination had to be literally blacked out of copies that hadn’t already shipped. It was too late, however, to remove Kennedy’s picture from the Dubious Achievement–themed montage cover. Worst of all, the magazine would not be able to weigh in on Kennedy’s death until 1964. Its coverage would have to be original.
But as Hayes watched news reports of Kennedy’s death and its aftermath, he sussed out the direction he needed to take. He had noticed that the excessively moist media coverage of Kennedy’s life had all but deified the man. So, in the waning days of 1963, he wrote to New York Times correspondent Tom Wicker and asked him to write about “Kennedy without tears.” In a letter dated December 22, 1963, Wicker responded, “Some of those myths are going to take a hell of a lot of unsentimentalizing,” but he agreed to the assignment and produced a memorably clear-eyed assessment of Kennedy’s political life for the June 1964 issue.
“Kennedy Without Tears” served as both headline and cover line for the story, and George Lois provided a sly riff on that thesis. A full-page, sepia-toned photograph of Kennedy stared straight out at the reader while, from the bottom of the page, a man’s hand holding a white handkerchief—both depicted in full color—dabbed at a spot beneath the president’s left eye. Above the handkerchief, spilled tears beaded up on the photograph. Was the man attached to the hand weeping? Or was the slain president crying for his lost legacy? Soon after the issue went on sale, the New York Herald Tribune, a newspaper known for its own brand of insouciance, threw a third question into the mix: “Has Esquire magazine leaped off the bridge of good taste?”
Actually, it had moved so far ahead of the curve that the laggards could not see it, and in the July 1964 issue Hayes published what proved to be a profoundly prescient feature by Benton and Newman. “The New Sentimentality” proposed that a new sensibility had quietly but firmly taken hold in America—an ironic, unsentimental, self-interested sensibility that had roots both in the Kennedy administration and in the French New Wave films of Godard and Truffaut. Eisenhower was “the last bloom of Old Sentimentality.” Lyndon Johnson, Jackson Pollock, Frank Sinatra’s Rat Pack, and the children’s-book character Stuart Little were other symbols of the Old Sentimentality. English model Jean Shrimpton, artist Roy Lichtenstein, the Beatles, Sonny Liston, and Charlie Brown signified the New. Marilyn Monroe and Humphrey Bogart were among the few who were relevant in both categories.
Benton and Newman did not reference Esquire in the piece, but like Monroe and Bogart, the magazine moved in both worlds without really embracing either. Esquire dwelled in the conflict between the new world that was rushing in and the old ways that were shuffling out. “With Harold, I think, it was just one big carnival,” says Tom Wolfe. “I don’t think he ever cared for a second who won an election, any of that stuff. I think it all seemed amusing. It all offered such great journalism. And I think that’s really the only form of objectivity in journalism: that you are either having so much fun with the material, or you feel what you’re doing is so important that you don’t care about any political gains.”
On paper, Norman Mailer sounded like Esquire’s literary soul mate: the Great American Novelist who had switched to great American nonfiction in the 60s, a man who challenged political correctness with every angry breath, as well as a writer who could give perspective to a paper clip. But his relationship with the magazine was star-crossed at virtually every turn. In 1960, after writing “Superman Comes to the Supermarket,” he had a public falling-out with the magazine, in part because Gingrich had altered Mailer’s headline to “Supermart.” After Esquire apologized to the writer within its own pages in 1962, Mailer returned to write a regular column, “The Big Bite,” and, beginning in January 1964, a serialized novel, An American Dream. Esquire ran the book over eight issues, with Mailer writing on deadline, and the two parties drove each other nuts. Mailer’s attempts to bull through the limits of sexual and scatological language in a commercial magazine brought out the Marine in Hayes and the prude in Gingrich, who had not forgotten Esquire’s bruising—though eventually successful—landmark Supreme Court battle in the 1940s; the nation’s staunchly Catholic postmaster general, Frank Walker, had attempted to revoke the magazine’s precious second-class mailing permit because, he claimed, Esquire was publishing obscene material. Exhausting bargaining sessions involving Hayes, Mailer, and the magazine’s lawyers ensued, and Sherrill recalls the day that managing editor Byron Dobell appeared at his cubicle with a smile on his face and jerked his head toward Hayes’s office. Sherrill got up from his desk and quietly joined the other editorial staffers eavesdropping outside Hayes’s office as their leader haggled by phone with Mailer over expletives contained in his latest installment. When Hayes saw his staff lurking, Sherrill says, he smiled and rolled his eyes before presenting his latest offer to the novelist on the other end of the line. “Norman,” Hayes said, “I’ll trade you two ‘shits’ for a ‘fuck.’?”
The breaking point came that same year when Mailer wrote about the Republican convention in San Francisco. Again, he wrangled with Esquire’s lawyers. Mailer wanted to call the piece “Cannibals and Christians,” but the lawyers worried that the Republicans might claim malice. Mailer settled for “In the Red Light,” but split again with the magazine. In later years, he seemed to carry a grudge. Hayes’s son, Tom Hayes, remembers Mailer once refusing to get on an elevator with his father, and when associate editor Tom Hedley tried to get the writer to profile Fidel Castro, Hedley says, Mailer told him, “It probably could be one of the best pieces I’ve ever written, [but] I’ll never do it for Harold Hayes. You know why? Because he’ll put my asshole over Castro’s eyebrow on the cover.” (Mailer declined to be interviewed for this piece.)
If Esquire was a magazine where novelists could apply their literary talents to nonfiction, it was also a place where a handful of journalists wrote articles that read like short stories. The writer most identified with that legacy is Gay Talese, a man whose Calabrian profile is as sharp as his tailored clothing. Having made his bones in journalism at the stylistically restrictive Times, Talese found the freedom that Esquire gave its writers “narcotic,” he says, and he particularly excelled at profiling achievers who had fallen a little—or a lot—from the pinnacle. Thus, in November 1965, at Hayes’s behest, Talese embarked on the long, harrowing trip that would lead him to produce the greatest literary-nonfiction story of the 20th century. Talese flew to Los Angeles and checked into the Beverly Wilshire Hotel to prepare for an interview the following day with Frank Sinatra.
“A Kind of Psychosomatic Nasal Drip”
The April 1966 cover, touting Talese’s “Frank Sinatra Has a Cold,” illustrated by Ed Sorel.
Sinatra—in the second decade of a comeback that had begun with the 1953 film From Here to Eternity—was Talese’s kind of subject, but not long after the writer had settled into his hotel room, a call came telling him the interview was off and that in order to reschedule it Talese would have to agree to submit his profile to Sinatra’s handlers prior to publication. This was unacceptable, of course, but Hayes told Talese to keep working. As the days turned into weeks, Talese relayed his progress, or lack thereof, in a series of letters to Hayes that are filed at Wake Forest. They show a writer bouncing from hope to despair to paranoia and back as he works furiously to deliver the goods by shadowing the notoriously controlling Sinatra and talking to everyone who might be able to shed light on the entertainer without setting off any alarms. “I may not get the piece we’d hoped for—the real Frank Sinatra,” Talese wrote in one letter, “but perhaps, by not getting it—and by getting rejected constantly and by seeing his flunkies protecting his flanks—we will be getting close to the truth about the man.”
That last sentence provides the key to “Frank Sinatra Has a Cold,” the piece that Talese published in the April 1966 issue of Esquire, after three months of writing and research. Talese built his story on the conceit that Sinatra’s attempts to record a song for an NBC television special had been thwarted because he had a head cold. “Sinatra with a cold is Picasso without paint, Ferrari without fuel,” Talese wrote. It “affects not only his own psyche but also seems to cause a kind of psychosomatic nasal drip within dozens of people who … depend on him for their own welfare and stability.”
Talese’s story doesn’t just capture the essence of Sinatra, it reveals the inner workings of the climate-controlled biosphere the singer had constructed around himself—and the inhospitable atmosphere coalescing outside its shell. It is clear in the reading that by late 1965 the hat-suit-and-tie culture that enabled Sinatra’s 50s comeback was fast being replaced by something closer to a Nehru jacket. “In a sense, he was battling The Beatles,” Talese wrote of the purpose behind the NBC special, but the Fab Four were just a part of the problem. Having already fallen once from the public’s favor, Sinatra was fighting like hell to remain relevant, and beneath his sometimes obnoxious swagger, Talese divined the pathos of an increasingly vulnerable entertainer.
What’s not evident from reading the piece is the conflicted relationship that Talese had with his editor while he was writing it. On one hand, he says, the backbone that Hayes showed during the reporting process was reassuring. “I was really worried about how much money I was wasting” while waiting and waiting at the top-shelf Beverly Wilshire, Talese says, but Hayes told him to keep his eye on the prize. “If you needed any support, he was tough,” the writer says. “He would back you up. I loved that about Hayes.”
On the other hand, Talese saw his boss’s smile as a “tricky” one, especially after a blowup he’d had with him over a 1962 piece entitled “Harlem for Fun.” Hayes had originally assigned the story to the novelist James Baldwin, asking him to build it around illustrations by artist Tommy Keogh. But when Baldwin turned in his manuscript, his narrative had nothing to do with the art, which was already at the printer. Hayes turned to Talese, who checked into a Harlem hotel and banged out a piece to his editor’s specifications. “You know that term ‘Take one for the team’?” Talese says. “Well, I got hit in the head.” Sometime later, when the two men were haggling over Talese’s contract, Hayes told him, “Look, we published that ‘Harlem for Fun,’ which was not your best piece.” Talese was furious. “I said, ‘Listen, you fuckhead. I did that as a favor to you. It wasn’t my assignment. You only gave it to me because Baldwin screwed up.’?”
From that point on, Talese says, he never trusted Hayes, and he secretly vented some of his anger over that mistrust in the issue in which “Frank Sinatra Has a Cold” appeared. That month, a small item about Talese ran in the “Backstage with Esquire” column, a behind-the-scenes look at the stories and writers in the issue. The “Backstage” piece was illustrated with a photo of the two shirt boards on which Talese had written the final outline for his Sinatra piece, and while it’s not visible to the naked eye, a magnifying glass placed over the left shirt board reveals the words, scrawled in Talese’s handwriting, “Fuck Hayes.”
Talese says the complexity of his relationship with his editor is best described by something his Italian great-grandfather used to say: “Those who love you make you cry.” Despite their skirmishes, Hayes “was the editor who had the most meaning in my life,” Talese says. “I never had another relationship like that. Never.”
Tom Wolfe’s relationship with Hayes was not as intense, but it did have its memorable moments, particularly the cunning way in which Hayes brokered the first piece that Wolfe published in Esquire, in the October 1963 issue—a profile of the boxer Cassius Clay called “The Marvelous Mouth.”
Clay was still months away from his February 1964 heavyweight-championship upset of Sonny Liston, immediately after which he would change his name to Muhammad Ali, but, again exhibiting his prescience, Hayes wanted Clay in the magazine. So, Wolfe says, the editor personally got the fighter on the phone, and found that Clay expected to be paid for his cooperation. He was coming to New York to make a spoken-word recording, but his backers weren’t going to give him much spending money to enjoy his stay. Hayes explained that he didn’t pay for stories, that it was “an honor” to appear in Esquire, but Clay wouldn’t budge. “Get this,” says Wolfe, who was working full-time as a reporter at the New York Herald Tribune when the assignment came through. “Harold says [to Clay], ‘O.K., I’ll give you $150. I’ll give you $50 when you first meet our man on Monday, $50 on Wednesday, $50 on Friday when he finishes up.’?”
Clay took the bait, the first $50 installment was forked over, and “off we went,” Wolfe says. “He’d made a deal, and he was going to tolerate me,” but just barely. On Tuesday, however, the two men were in a taxi crossing Central Park when, out of the blue, Clay “gets real chummy.” As the pair were walking through Central Park, Clay “puts his arm around me and he says, ‘This is a great day. It feels like Wednesday, doesn’t it?’ I didn’t catch on at first,” Wolfe says with a laugh. “He wanted his next $50. So, I said, ‘I’m sorry. They don’t give it to me until the day I give it to you.’?” Even more astute than Hayes’s deal with Clay was the editor’s decision to use his most flamboyantly nimble writer to nail down the giddy, kinetic outlandishness of boxing’s most flamboyantly nimble fighter. In that sense, “The Marvelous Mouth” has a nice cosmic symmetry to it. It marks the Esquire debuts of two men who would bring an unmatched level of showmanship to their respective professions.
When Wolfe became a sensation at Esquire—where he would meet his wife, the former Sheila Berger, in the art department—he was already working hard for both the Herald Tribune’s daily paper and its Sunday magazine, New York, where Clay Felker had taken over as editor. So, when Esquire began vying for Wolfe’s byline as well, Felker reportedly was not happy. But if the ingredients were there for Hayes and Felker’s earlier rivalry to turn into something more public, and ugly, that’s not what happened. Though the two editors’ paths would continue to cross in odd and ironic ways, any lingering tensions between them tended to be expressed—at least for public consumption—under the guise of friendly competition or blithe ignorance. For his part, Felker says, he never read Esquire much after he left the magazine. And though Wolfe doesn’t recall this episode, Hayes wrote in one of the chapters of his unfinished book that, once, when Wolfe owed assignments to both Esquire and New York, “and was ducking us both,” he sent the writer “a wire suggesting the pressure had eased up on his New York deadline” and that the writer should go ahead and finish his Esquire assignment. “I signed it ‘Felker,’?” Hayes wrote, adding, “He still turned his piece in late.”
By the end of 1966, Harold Hayes had watched approvingly as a number of his star writers established footholds in longer forms. Gay Talese was working on his fourth book, an opus about The New York Times called The Kingdom and the Power that had begun as a 1966 Esquire piece. Tom Wolfe had put out his first collection of articles, The Kandy-Kolored Tangerine-Flake Streamline Baby, and was working on a book about Merry Prankster Ken Kesey. And Peter Bogdanovich had moved to Los Angeles to work in the very medium he covered for Esquire: film. Bogdanovich had charmed his way into the magazine four years earlier after getting into a spirited argument with Hayes over motion pictures at the 1962 premiere of Howard Hawks’s Hatari. “I said, ‘God, you have bad taste in movies,’?” Bogdanovich recalls. “I was very flippant with him.” But Hayes remembered his tormentor when Bogdanovich called days later to sell a piece he’d written on Hollywood. The story, “Talkies,” ran in the August 1962 issue. “It was one of the great, exciting moments of my life,” Bogdanovich says.
“The masculinization of the American woman,” March 1965.
As he became a regular presence in Esquire, Bogdanovich and his then wife, Polly Platt, became close friends with Hayes and his first wife, the actress Suzette Meredith. The Bogdanoviches lived near the Hayeses’ apartment, which was on Riverside Drive and West 100th Street, and often the couples would meet for dinner. “I remember one time when we went over. He had just seen Hello, Dolly! [which premiered on Broadway in January 1964], and he had the original-cast album,” Bogdanovich recalls. “He said, ‘Listen to this! This is terrific.’ And he played me that tune, the title song. He played it three times. ‘Isn’t that great!’?” Bogdanovich laughs, as if he still can’t quite believe that Harold Hayes, the man who loved to puncture pomposity in Esquire, could fall for such an overinflated musical. “I said, ‘It’s O.K., Harold.’ But he just loved it.”
Because Hayes’s talent as an editor seemed to come from such an instinctual place—a realm defined and colored by his personal tastes and experiences—he had some definite blind spots. “There was nobody smarter than Harold on certain things and nobody dumber than him on certain things,” says Robert Benton. “What Harold was comfortable with, he was brilliant at. And what he wasn’t comfortable with made him uneasy.” Hello, Dolly! was something that the jazz-loving, trombone-playing husband of a stage actress could understand. Rock ‘n’ roll was another story. And so Esquire devoted comparatively little space to it. Hedley recalls the time Hayes “embarrassed me in a meeting when I said Bob Dylan was one of the most important poets, musical writers, of any time.” “How old are you, again?” Hayes asked him after a good laugh.
Hayes may not have grasped the cultural influence of Bob Dylan, the Beatles, or even Sonny and Cher, but in 1965 his instincts as an editor, and, perhaps, as a former Marine, established Esquire as an authority on the escalating war in Vietnam. By 1965 the U.S. had committed 200,000 troops and begun Operation Rolling Thunder, a three-year bombing campaign against the Vietcong. Esquire had run some coverage of the conflict, but nothing like the story that John Sack, a former CBS News bureau chief in Madrid, pitched in a letter to Hayes. Sack, who had been a soldier in the Korean War, proposed to follow an infantry company through boot camp and into its first battle in Vietnam and write about it for Esquire.
His story led the October 1966 issue, and, like the best Esquire stories, it was suffused with humor. But as the soldiers of M Company traded the jitters of basic training for the insanity of real, live war, Sack’s tone grew progressively darker, before finally going black when a grenade thrown, on orders, into a hut killed a seven-year-old Vietnamese girl.
From the cold horror of this scene came Esquire’s starkest cover. Against a black background, the words of the soldier who discovered the child’s body were printed in white:
“Oh my God
—we hit
a little girl.”It was a knockout combination of art direction and literary journalism that brought the horror and the humanity of a distant war home in a way that no three-minute TV report could.
Nineteen sixty-six was a very good year for Esquire. According to Carol Polsgrove’s It Wasn’t Pretty, Folks, but Didn’t We Have Fun?, The Sunday Times of London named Esquire one of “the world’s great magazines,” circulation topped one million, and advertising revenue jumped 25 percent to $10.5 million—still a far cry from the $17 million that Playboy raked in, but remarkably good for a magazine aimed for its readers’ heads without the added value of a centerfold.
The following year, Bond girl Ursula Andress appeared on July’s cover with a Band-Aid slapped over her brow for a special issue on violence, an increasing and troubling feature of American life. The package included a photo-essay about violence in the arts called “Now Let the Festivities Proceed,” by then contributing editors Robert Benton and David Newman, who were just weeks away from seeing the premiere of their own groundbreaking contribution to the topic. The duo had written the script for Bonnie and Clyde, which was released to U.S. audiences in August 1967. Directed by Arthur Penn and starring Warren Beatty and a radiant Faye Dunaway, Bonnie and Clyde was more than just a violent movie.
It was an Esquire movie—its characters, dialogue, and detachment all expressions of the New Sentimentality that Benton and Newman had diagnosed three years earlier. “We had written the treatment for Bonnie and Clyde when we did ‘The New Sentimentality,’?” Benton says. “One was an expression of what we felt about the other.” The film contained no traditional heroes. Its main characters were a couple of beautiful but inept criminals who became celebrity revolutionaries by robbing banks—The Man, in the jargon of the times—then succumbed in a blood-soaked, bullet-riddled, balletic climax. Along the way, people died gruesomely to the madcap bluegrass sounds of Flatt and Scruggs’s “Foggy Mountain Breakdown.” Sex was depicted with a perverse frankness. It was the seminal statement of a new, unsentimental era of moviemaking. Says Benton, “One of the reasons I think Bonnie and Clyde worked is that we came out of a magazine culture. We came out of the urgency and the irreverence of that specific Esquire world.”
The Chinese Curse
Muhammad Ali, as Saint Sebastian, on the April 1968 cover photographed by Carl Fischer, a comment on his refusal to serve in Vietnam and the subsequent loss of his heavyweight crown.
After witnessing the carnage of the Tet offensive, in January 1968, a gifted young writer named Michael Herr wrote Hayes from the city of Hue on February 5 to plead that Esquire scrap two stories he’d written on the war—including one on the Vietnam Establishment—and let him crash a new one. “Before the Tet offensive, the war had a kind of easy sameness to it, and writing against [Esquire's] lead time was no problem,” Herr explained to his editor. “Now, all the terms have changed, all the old assumptions about the war, about our chances for even the most ignoble kind of ‘victory’ in it, have been turned around.” The year had just begun and the U.S. seemed caught in a frightening tailspin—but not Esquire. For spring, Lois had come up with two classic covers. April depicted Muhammad Ali, photographed by Carl Fischer, as the arrow-pierced Saint Sebastian, martyred for refusing to fight in the Vietnam War. For May, Lois had taken a stock picture of Nixon asleep on Air Force One during his vice-presidential years and merged it with a custom photo of a cluster of hands wielding makeup tools, including a tube of lipstick. “Nixon’s Last Chance. (This time he’d better look right!)” read the cover line, a nod to his sweaty performance during the 1960 debates with Kennedy.
But reality quickly became more shocking and unpredictable than any story or cover image that Esquire’s brain trust could produce. On March 31, faced with the escalating disaster of Vietnam and the prospect of a drawn-out and divisive battle for the Democratic nomination, Lyndon Johnson announced that he would not seek re-election. On April 4, while the Ali cover was still on the stands, Martin Luther King Jr. was truly martyred in Memphis. And in the early morning of June 5, presidential candidate Robert F. Kennedy was shot and mortally wounded at the Ambassador Hotel in Los Angeles.
The magazine’s 35th Anniversary Issue, October 1968.
America was coming unmoored, and Esquire’s lead time made it look slow, even callous. “What can you do when the coverage of one assassination comes out after the next one?” Hayes asked the writer Garry Wills. Though a number of staffers and writers who worked with Hayes in 1968 don’t recall seeing him unnerved by these events, Hayes began to invoke a traditional Chinese proverb—a curse, actually: May you live in the most interesting of times. “He would say that all the time, and shake his head, [as if asking] ‘What is going on?’?” Hedley remembers.
In the ensuing months, Esquire muted some of its wilder satirical impulses. “The best we could provide was a bleak grin,” Hayes wrote in the introduction to the magazine’s aptly named anthology of 60s articles, Smiling Through the Apocalypse (which was prefaced by the Chinese curse). For the October 1968 issue—Esquire’s 35th anniversary—the magazine displayed a cover depicting John and Robert Kennedy and Martin Luther King Jr. standing together at Arlington National Cemetery. The casualties of a decade condensed into one solemn image, without tears, but also without Esquire’s trademark irreverence.
“Nixon’s last chance. (This time he’d better look right!),” May 1968.
At the end of 1968, Hayes had sent a memo to the staff in which he’d written, “I’m scared.” Newsstand sales were down 20,000 from 1967, the magazine was hiring too many “hacks,” and the competition was not. Willie Morris’s Harper’s—which had scored big that year with Norman Mailer’s “On the Steps of the Pentagon”—was surging. So was New York, which Felker had spun off into a stand-alone magazine in April 1968 shortly after the Herald Tribune folded. With Wolfe on board, as well as Gloria Steinem and a provocative new writer named Gail Sheehy, New York was poised to become one of the great magazines of the 70s, and the blueprint for every other city magazine that would follow it. (It would also take on a number of former Esquire employees, including managing editor Byron Dobell, assistant art director Walter Bernard, and editor-writer Aaron Latham.) And though Hayes didn’t mention it in his memo, there was also an upstart out of San Francisco called Rolling Stone that was using New Journalism techniques to explain the burgeoning rock ‘n’ roll culture.
But Hayes rallied the troops once more, and by 1969, Esquire was showing signs of its old self. Michael Herr’s fever-dream dispatches from Vietnam were the best writing on the subject. A Hayes discovery named Jean-Paul Goude had arrived from Paris with his Bentley and was shaking up the magazine’s look as its new art director. An unorthodox new fiction editor, Gordon Lish, who signed his office memos “Captain Fiction,” was doing the same with Esquire’s literary pages. And a sardonic writer named Nora Ephron debuted in the February 1970 issue with a profile of Helen Gurley Brown. At one point, Hayes would even assign his new associate editor, Lee Eisenberg, the impossible task of wooing New York’s hot women writers—such as Sheehy (whom Felker would marry in 1984)—over to Esquire.
Esquire’s resurgence could not last, of course. The economy was slumping, and Hayes would soon lose a distracting battle against the business side’s move to shrink the publication to the smaller size that had become standard for magazines. August 1971 was the last oversize issue and featured a solemn, elegant sepia-toned photo of Mafia kingpin Joe Bonanno, dressed to the nines. The cover story was an excerpt from Gay Talese’s new book, Honor Thy Father. Talese had become a best-selling book writer, as had Tom Wolfe. And though they still kept in touch, both had moved on, as had John Berendt, Tom Hedley, and Hayes’s friend Robert Sherrill. Berendt would edit New York magazine and become a best-selling author, too, with the publication of Midnight in the Garden of Good and Evil, in 1994. (His most recent book, City of Falling Angels, is dedicated to Hayes and Felker.) Tom Hedley would conceive the story and co-write the script for Flashdance. Benton and Newman had embarked on a successful career in Hollywood, which would include the original Superman movies, and so had Bogdanovich, who in 1971 would release his masterpiece, The Last Picture Show. All three would collaborate on the 1972 film What’s Up, Doc? In 1973, Hayes moved on, too, forced out of Esquire after management sought to bump him upstairs with the title of publisher and he insisted on retaining editorial control. George Lois broke with the magazine soon afterward.
Some of the materials found in the Wake Forest archives suggest that the 70s must have been humbling for Hayes as he attempted to get back into the red-hot center of the magazine world. Though in later writings Hayes professed a begrudging admiration for Clay Felker, he didn’t shy away from his former rival’s old turf. There is a typed, undated one-paragraph memorandum addressed to “Rupert,” presumably Rupert Murdoch, whose 1976 purchase of New York magazine and The Village Voice led to Felker’s unplanned departure as the editor of the former. In the memo Hayes writes: “I don’t know how you feel about New York at the moment, but it looks weak to me.” Give him two years and a free hand, he adds, and “I could make it into a very strong magazine for you.” It’s unclear if Hayes even sent his letter; at any rate, he never got the opportunity to prove his assertion. (In 1978, Felker returned to his old stomping grounds to edit the short-lived Esquire Fort Nightly, which was published every two weeks instead of monthly.) A foray into television met with mixed results: Hayes was well received as host of an interview show that ran on New York’s local PBS station in the 70s, but his and art critic Robert Hughes’s debut as the original co-hosts of ABC’s 20/20 newsmagazine, on June 6, 1978, would go down as one of the great disasters of network television. The New York Times’s TV critic branded the show “dizzyingly absurd,” ABC News chief Roone Arledge went on record saying he “hated the program,” and Hayes and Hughes were replaced the following week by Hugh Downs. In the 80s, Hayes would move to Los Angeles to take a stab at editing another of Clay Felker’s creations: California magazine, which Felker had founded as New West.
But Hayes’s second act would not come from editing, it would come from writing about a subject as impenetrable as he was: Africa. Hayes had ventured to the continent in late 1969 at the urging of longtime Esquire photographer Pete Turner and “fell in love with it,” says his second wife, Judy Kessler. “He had to know everything about it.” Beginning in 1977, he wrote three books on the subject. The last, which was finished and published after his death from a brain tumor in 1989, dealt with Dian Fossey, the subject of Gorillas in the Mist, a movie adapted from a Life-magazine article Hayes wrote about her murder. Africa would also become his final resting place. Late in the summer of 1989, Tom Hayes took his father’s cremated remains up in a helicopter and released them over the Masai Mara game park, on the border of Tanzania and Kenya.
Hayes always had “a keen eye for the mood changes,” as Arnold Gingrich once wrote, so maybe he foresaw some of the curves ahead. But back in the summer of 1970 he was still very focused on his one true ambition: editing his magazine. And the November 1970 issue was going to be a Molotov cocktail. Hayes had brokered a deal for exclusive rights to the story of Lieutenant William L. Calley Jr., the soldier facing trial for the My Lai massacre, in which he stood accused of murdering more than 100 villagers, some of them children. Hayes had paid Calley a lot more than the $150 he’d given to Cassius Clay—$20,000 for his participation with three exclusive articles written by M Company’s John Sack; the first would run as the cover story. The cover, by the way, was a masterpiece. It made the Sonny Liston cover look like a Disney cartoon. The image showed Calley in uniform, surrounded by Vietnamese children. He was the nation’s Frankenstein monster. And in the photo, he was smiling.
For Harold Hayes, Christmas had come early.
Frank DiGiacomo is a Vanity Fair contributing editor.
Why Women Aren’t Funny
Provocation
Why Women Aren’t Funny
What makes the female so much deadlier than the male? With assists from Fran Lebowitz, Nora Ephron, and a recent Stanford-medical-school study, the author investigates the reasons for the humor gap.
by Christopher Hitchens January 2007
From the John Springer Collection/Corbis.
Be your gender what it may, you will certainly have heard the following from a female friend who is enumerating the charms of a new (male) squeeze: “He’s really quite cute, and he’s kind to my friends, and he knows all kinds of stuff, and he’s so funny … ” (If you yourself are a guy, and you know the man in question, you will often have said to yourself, “Funny? He wouldn’t know a joke if it came served on a bed of lettuce with sauce béarnaise.“) However, there is something that you absolutely never hear from a male friend who is hymning his latest (female) love interest: “She’s a real honey, has a life of her own … [interlude for attributes that are none of your business] … and, man, does she ever make ‘em laugh.”
Now, why is this? Why is it the case?, I mean. Why are women, who have the whole male world at their mercy, not funny? Please do not pretend not to know what I am talking about.
All right—try it the other way (as the bishop said to the barmaid). Why are men, taken on average and as a whole, funnier than women? Well, for one thing, they had damn well better be. The chief task in life that a man has to perform is that of impressing the opposite sex, and Mother Nature (as we laughingly call her) is not so kind to men. In fact, she equips many fellows with very little armament for the struggle. An average man has just one, outside chance: he had better be able to make the lady laugh. Making them laugh has been one of the crucial preoccupations of my life. If you can stimulate her to laughter—I am talking about that real, out-loud, head-back, mouth-open-to-expose-the-full-horseshoe-of-lovely-teeth, involuntary, full, and deep-throated mirth; the kind that is accompanied by a shocked surprise and a slight (no, make that a loud) peal of delight—well, then, you have at least caused her to loosen up and to change her expression. I shall not elaborate further.
Women have no corresponding need to appeal to men in this way. They already appeal to men, if you catch my drift. Indeed, we now have all the joy of a scientific study, which illuminates the difference. At the Stanford University School of Medicine (a place, as it happens, where I once underwent an absolutely hilarious procedure with a sigmoidoscope), the grim-faced researchers showed 10 men and 10 women a sample of 70 black-and-white cartoons and got them to rate the gags on a “funniness scale.” To annex for a moment the fall-about language of the report as it was summarized in Biotech Week:
The researchers found that men and women share much of the same humor-response system; both use to a similar degree the part of the brain responsible for semantic knowledge and juxtaposition and the part involved in language processing. But they also found that some brain regions were activated more in women. These included the left prefrontal cortex, suggesting a greater emphasis on language and executive processing in women, and the nucleus accumbens … which is part of the mesolimbic reward center.
This has all the charm and address of the learned Professor Scully’s attempt to define a smile, as cited by Richard Usborne in his treatise on P. G. Wodehouse: “the drawing back and slight lifting of the corners of the mouth, which partially uncover the teeth; the curving of the naso-labial furrows … ” But have no fear—it gets worse:
“Women appeared to have less expectation of a reward, which in this case was the punch line of the cartoon,” said the report’s author, Dr. Allan Reiss. “So when they got to the joke’s punch line, they were more pleased about it.” The report also found that “women were quicker at identifying material they considered unfunny.”
Slower to get it, more pleased when they do, and swift to locate the unfunny—for this we need the Stanford University School of Medicine? And remember, this is women when confronted with humor. Is it any wonder that they are backward in generating it?
This is not to say that women are humorless, or cannot make great wits and comedians. And if they did not operate on the humor wavelength, there would be scant point in half killing oneself in the attempt to make them writhe and scream (uproariously). Wit, after all, is the unfailing symptom of intelligence. Men will laugh at almost anything, often precisely because it is—or they are—extremely stupid. Women aren’t like that. And the wits and comics among them are formidable beyond compare: Dorothy Parker, Nora Ephron, Fran Lebowitz, Ellen DeGeneres. (Though ask yourself, was Dorothy Parker ever really funny?) Greatly daring—or so I thought—I resolved to call up Ms. Lebowitz and Ms. Ephron to try out my theories. Fran responded: “The cultural values are male; for a woman to say a man is funny is the equivalent of a man saying that a woman is pretty. Also, humor is largely aggressive and pre-emptive, and what’s more male than that?” Ms. Ephron did not disagree. She did, however, in what I thought was a slightly feline way, accuse me of plagiarizing a rant by Jerry Lewis that said much the same thing. (I have only once seen Lewis in action, in The King of Comedy, where it was really Sandra Bernhard who was funny.)
In any case, my argument doesn’t say that there are no decent women comedians. There are more terrible female comedians than there are terrible male comedians, but there are some impressive ladies out there. Most of them, though, when you come to review the situation, are hefty or dykey or Jewish, or some combo of the three. When Roseanne stands up and tells biker jokes and invites people who don’t dig her shtick to suck her dick—know what I am saying? And the Sapphic faction may have its own reasons for wanting what I want—the sweet surrender of female laughter. While Jewish humor, boiling as it is with angst and self-deprecation, is almost masculine by definition.
Substitute the term “self-defecation” (which I actually heard being used inadvertently once) and almost all men will laugh right away, if only to pass the time. Probe a little deeper, though, and you will see what Nietzsche meant when he described a witticism as an epitaph on the death of a feeling. Male humor prefers the laugh to be at someone’s expense, and understands that life is quite possibly a joke to begin with—and often a joke in extremely poor taste. Humor is part of the armor-plate with which to resist what is already farcical enough. (Perhaps not by coincidence, battered as they are by motherfucking nature, men tend to refer to life itself as a bitch.) Whereas women, bless their tender hearts, would prefer that life be fair, and even sweet, rather than the sordid mess it actually is. Jokes about calamitous visits to the doctor or the shrink or the bathroom, or the venting of sexual frustration on furry domestic animals, are a male province. It must have been a man who originated the phrase “funny like a heart attack.” In all the millions of cartoons that feature a patient listening glum-faced to a physician (“There’s no cure. There isn’t even a race for a cure”), do you remember even one where the patient is a woman? I thought as much.
Precisely because humor is a sign of intelligence (and many women believe, or were taught by their mothers, that they become threatening to men if they appear too bright), it could be that in some way men do not want women to be funny. They want them as an audience, not as rivals. And there is a huge, brimming reservoir of male unease, which it would be too easy for women to exploit. (Men can tell jokes about what happened to John Wayne Bobbitt, but they don’t want women doing so.) Men have prostate glands, hysterically enough, and these have a tendency to give out, along with their hearts and, it has to be said, their dicks. This is funny only in male company. For some reason, women do not find their own physical decay and absurdity to be so riotously amusing, which is why we admire Lucille Ball and Helen Fielding, who do see the funny side of it. But this is so rare as to be like Dr. Johnson’s comparison of a woman preaching to a dog walking on its hind legs: the surprise is that it is done at all.
The plain fact is that the physical structure of the human being is a joke in itself: a flat, crude, unanswerable disproof of any nonsense about “intelligent design.” The reproductive and eliminating functions (the closeness of which is the origin of all obscenity) were obviously wired together in hell by some subcommittee that was giggling cruelly as it went about its work. (“Think they’d wear this? Well, they’re gonna have to.”) The resulting confusion is the source of perhaps 50 percent of all humor. Filth. That’s what the customers want, as we occasional stand-up performers all know. Filth, and plenty of it. Filth in lavish, heaping quantities. And there’s another principle that helps exclude the fair sex. “Men obviously like gross stuff,” says Fran Lebowitz. “Why? Because it’s childish.” Keep your eye on that last word. Women’s appetite for talk about that fine product known as Depend is limited. So is their relish for gags about premature ejaculation. (“Premature for whom?” as a friend of mine indignantly demands to know.) But “child” is the key word. For women, reproduction is, if not the only thing, certainly the main thing. Apart from giving them a very different attitude to filth and embarrassment, it also imbues them with the kind of seriousness and solemnity at which men can only goggle. This womanly seriousness was well caught by Rudyard Kipling in his poem “The Female of the Species.” After cleverly noticing that with the male “mirth obscene diverts his anger”—which is true of most work on that great masculine equivalent to childbirth, which is warfare—Kipling insists:
But the Woman that God gave him,
every fibre of her frame
Proves her launched for one sole issue,
armed and engined for the same,
And to serve that single issue,
lest the generations fail,
The female of the species must be
deadlier than the male.The word “issue” there, which we so pathetically misuse, is restored to its proper meaning of childbirth. As Kipling continues:
She who faces Death by torture for
each life beneath her breast
May not deal in doubt or pity—must
not swerve for fact or jest.Men are overawed, not to say terrified, by the ability of women to produce babies. (Asked by a lady intellectual to summarize the differences between the sexes, another bishop responded, “Madam, I cannot conceive.”) It gives women an unchallengeable authority. And one of the earliest origins of humor that we know about is its role in the mockery of authority. Irony itself has been called “the glory of slaves.” So you could argue that when men get together to be funny and do not expect women to be there, or in on the joke, they are really playing truant and implicitly conceding who is really the boss.
The ancient annual festivities of Saturnalia, where the slaves would play master, were a temporary release from bossdom. A whole tranche of subversive male humor likewise depends on the notion that women are not really the boss, but are mere objects and victims. Kipling saw through this:
So it comes that Man, the coward,
when he gathers to confer
With his fellow-braves in council,
dare not leave a place for her.In other words, for women the question of funniness is essentially a secondary one. They are innately aware of a higher calling that is no laughing matter. Whereas with a man you may freely say of him that he is lousy in the sack, or a bad driver, or an inefficient worker, and still wound him less deeply than you would if you accused him of being deficient in the humor department.
If I am correct about this, which I am, then the explanation for the superior funniness of men is much the same as for the inferior funniness of women. Men have to pretend, to themselves as well as to women, that they are not the servants and supplicants. Women, cunning minxes that they are, have to affect not to be the potentates. This is the unspoken compromise. H. L. Mencken described as “the greatest single discovery ever made by man” the realization “that babies have human fathers, and are not put into their mother’s bodies by the gods.” You may well wonder what people were thinking before that realization hit, but we do know of a society in Melanesia where the connection was not made until quite recently. I suppose that the reasoning went: everybody does that thing the entire time, there being little else to do, but not every woman becomes pregnant. Anyway, after a certain stage women came to the conclusion that men were actually necessary, and the old form of matriarchy came to a close. (Mencken speculates that this is why the first kings ascended the throne clutching their batons or scepters as if holding on for grim death.) People in this precarious position do not enjoy being laughed at, and it would not have taken women long to work out that female humor would be the most upsetting of all.
Childbearing and rearing are the double root of all this, as Kipling guessed. As every father knows, the placenta is made up of brain cells, which migrate southward during pregnancy and take the sense of humor along with them. And when the bundle is finally delivered, the funny side is not always immediately back in view. Is there anything so utterly lacking in humor as a mother discussing her new child? She is unboreable on the subject. Even the mothers of other fledglings have to drive their fingernails into their palms and wiggle their toes, just to prevent themselves from fainting dead away at the sheer tedium of it. And as the little ones burgeon and thrive, do you find that their mothers enjoy jests at their expense? I thought not.
Humor, if we are to be serious about it, arises from the ineluctable fact that we are all born into a losing struggle. Those who risk agony and death to bring children into this fiasco simply can’t afford to be too frivolous. (And there just aren’t that many episiotomy jokes, even in the male repertoire.) I am certain that this is also partly why, in all cultures, it is females who are the rank-and-file mainstay of religion, which in turn is the official enemy of all humor. One tiny snuffle that turns into a wheeze, one little cut that goes septic, one pathetically small coffin, and the woman’s universe is left in ashes and ruin. Try being funny about that, if you like. Oscar Wilde was the only person ever to make a decent joke about the death of an infant, and that infant was fictional, and Wilde was (although twice a father) a queer. And because fear is the mother of superstition, and because they are partly ruled in any case by the moon and the tides, women also fall more heavily for dreams, for supposedly significant dates like birthdays and anniversaries, for romantic love, crystals and stones, lockets and relics, and other things that men know are fit mainly for mockery and limericks. Good grief! Is there anything less funny than hearing a woman relate a dream she’s just had? (“And then Quentin was there somehow. And so were you, in a strange sort of way. And it was all so peaceful.” Peaceful?)
For men, it is a tragedy that the two things they prize the most—women and humor—should be so antithetical. But without tragedy there could be no comedy. My beloved said to me, when I told her I was going to have to address this melancholy topic, that I should cheer up because “women get funnier as they get older.”
Observation suggests to me that this might indeed be true, but, excuse me, isn’t that rather a long time to have to wait?
Christopher Hitchens is a Vanity Fair contributing editor.
Supreme arbiter of aristocratic London nightlife, Mark Birley
Hurly Birley
Supreme arbiter of aristocratic London nightlife, Mark Birley poured all his charm, generosity, and taste into his portfolio of clubs, including the fabled Annabel’s, until he abruptly sold them right before his death, last August. But, as a battle over his $200 million estate reveals, he left his own family tragically damaged. The author asks Birley’s feuding children, Robin and India Jane, and his ex-wife, Lady Annabel Goldsmith, why he was so good at business and so bad at home.
by Maureen Orth February 2008
Mark Birley in his living room at Thurloe Lodge in 2001. Photographs by Jonathan Becker.
In his obituaries, last August, it appeared that Mark Birley, the London club owner who died at the age of 77, might go down in history as the man who first wrapped muslin around lemon halves to prevent them from squirting randomly or spilling seeds on his patrons’ perfectly prepared turbot. That horrified his aristocratic friends, for to them Mark had always been so much more—a towering, sardonic, pampered monument to English style, who managed to exemplify the cultivated manners of the playing fields of Eton while introducing edible food in beautiful surroundings and replacing stuffiness with sexiness in Mayfair nightlife. In 1963, when he opened Annabel’s, the first of his string of exclusive, members-only clubs and restaurants—which would eventually include Mark’s Club, Harry’s Bar, the Bath & Racquets, and George—Swinging London had not yet exploded onto the scene, and when it did, it was largely a working-class phenomenon. Birley made the Beatles the first and only exceptions to the strict dress code at Annabel’s, where men were required to wear jacket and tie. If Frank Sinatra or Ari Onassis happened to be in the house, Birley would make sure he was well taken care of, but would never drop by his table to chat. “That would be the headwaiter’s job,” David Metcalfe, the Duke of Windsor’s godson and a founding member of the club, informed me.
Annabel’s had no cabaret, but occasionally performers such as Ray Charles and the Supremes would play one-night stands. When a promoter for Ike and Tina Turner demanded a table for a sold-out performance of theirs at Annabel’s, he was denied. After he stormed out and threatened to cancel the performance, a compromise was reached whereby he would be greeted profusely upon entering and taken to a seat at the bar. In the process, however, he overheard Birley say, “I don’t care if he comes down the fucking chimney,” and so Ike and Tina Turner did not appear that night.
Birley became a familiar sight around Berkeley Square, seated in his chauffeur-driven Mercedes, puffing a Cohiba, with Blitz, his Rhodesian Ridgeback, seated up front. For many in London’s disappearing tribe of old-boy toffs, he represented the quintessential English gentleman, exquisitely turned out, providing impeccable quality and service through a deeply loyal and perfectly trained staff. His eagle eye missed nothing, be it the careless fold of a napkin or the slightly crooked angle at which a painting was hung. He was the upper-class social set’s final arbiter of taste, and cost was never a concern. At Mark’s Club, for example, each silver pepper mill was valued at $800; each mustard pot, $1,000; each blue-striped Murano glass, $100. At Harry’s Bar, the flowers cost $120,000 a year. Birley wandered the world—especially Italy—seeking the best new cocktails and recipes, meeting with world-class chefs, and poaching exceptional waiters. Over the years and all during his marriage, he seduced numerous women, but his real loves were his clubs and his dogs. People could never tell what he was thinking as they bowed, scraped, and competed for his favor, because his stiff upper lip never so much as quivered, even when he endured unimaginable family tragedies.
In 1970, on a visit to the private zoo of John Aspinall, owner of the Clermont Club, the casino above Annabel’s, Birley’s 12-year-old son, Robin, entered a pregnant tigress’s enclosure with his mother and brother and Aspinall and his family. The animal grabbed Robin’s head in her mouth, and the boy’s face was left permanently disfigured. In 1986, Birley’s handsome firstborn, Rupert, 30, ventured out into dangerous waters off the coast of Togo, in West Africa, and was never seen again. Though Rupert was his father’s favorite, any discussion of his demise was strictly forbidden. Similarly, Mark never uttered a word about his wellborn wife, Lady Annabel Vane Tempest-Stewart, for whom his tony club was named, having two children with James “Jimmy” Goldsmith, the late billionaire, before she and Mark were divorced. (She later married Goldsmith and had a third child with him, and he would have two more children with another mistress during their marriage.)
Mark and Annabel remained friends and soulmates until his death, united in their love of dogs as much as in the parenting of Rupert, Robin, and their daughter, India Jane (so named because Mark loved the word India). “He never commented on anything except dogs or something funny—a painting, food, or wine,” India Jane, who is a painter of portraits and dogs, told me of her “formidable” father. “He never showed his deck of cards.” She added, “We all had our work cut out for us with Pup. He could scowl and smile at the same time. For a child it’s a very, very odd feeling. With an adult it’s bliss, because you can figure out the subtlety, but with a child it’s terrifying.”
“Mark really wanted his children to be born at age 21. He liked the children when they were grown,” Lady Annabel explained to me at Ormeley Lodge, her house in southwest London. In fact, she said, he didn’t really want children at all. “Rupert was a mistake—I became pregnant totally by mistake,” she said, adding, “Mark was O.K. with one, but he never really wanted another.” In her 2004 book, Annabel: An Unconventional Life, Lady Annabel writes of how Mark tapped her on the shoulder in the hospital shortly after Robin was born and exclaimed, “Darling, you must wake up. There must have been a mistake. I think you’ve been given the wrong baby—this one is simply hideous.” Lady Annabel told me, “I can’t blame him for not being a brilliant father, because he never really asked to have any of them.”
Given the eccentric family dynamics, it is perhaps less than surprising that a huge fight is now simmering between India Jane, 47, and Robin, 50, over their father’s will, in which he left more than $240 million before taxes. Robin is challenging the will, which gives the bulk of the estate to India Jane’s two-and-a-half-year-old son, Eben, whom she had by a lover, a Canadian named Robert Macdonald, a voice coach and teacher of breathing techniques who was studying to become a psychiatrist. She was married at the time to her second husband, Francis Pike, a banker turned writer and real-estate developer, who currently lives in Berlin. India Jane is now divorced from Pike and no longer with Macdonald. In the will, Robin was left two tax-free bequests, for £1 million ($2,039,400) and £5 million ($10,197,000). Robin’s four-year-old illegitimate daughter, Maud, who lives in charity housing with her mother and who never met her paternal grandfather, was left nothing.
Mark Birley apparently anticipated that his will might be challenged. Vanity Fair has learned that he wrote a letter to India Jane, to be disclosed with the will, in which he explained why he had done the unthinkable. Last June, shortly before he died, Birley—without notice and against the wishes of his family, close friends, and staff—abruptly sold his clubs for $207 million, a far higher price than anyone could have predicted. Even though his esteemed friend and adviser Sir Evelyn de Rothschild was willing to see if the offer could be matched, Birley went ahead and sold to one of those outsiders who are becoming so prominent in the acquisition of London’s high-end properties, the self-made millionaire Richard Caring, son of an American G.I. and a British nurse, whose fortune came from the garment trade in Hong Kong, and who has bought a number of the most fashionable restaurants in London, including the Ivy, Le Caprice, J. Sheekey, and Daphne’s.
Mark said in the letter that he had sold the clubs to protect them from Robin. “If Robin would have control of the clubs, the clubs ultimately would not be worth anything, and Robin certainly would not be looking out for his sister,” Miranda Brooks, a close friend of India Jane’s, explained to me.
There had been a previous will, by which Robin and India Jane would each have received 50 percent of the estate. However, in that will, Mark also left his valuable London house and property to India Jane. Peter Munster, one of Mark and his family’s closest friends and the executor of that will, says, “Robin was less than satisfied with anything other than a completely equal distribution.” Regarding the current situation, Munster adds, “Mark had reservations about Robin’s judgment in relation to his future expansion plans for the clubs and the risk that might have entailed. But he never would have brought Robin in if he hadn’t trusted him. The message is: There was no hate in the family. There was no vendetta.”
The Dodgy Detectives
Mark lost faith in his son after Robin used more than $400,000 from Annabel’s accounts to pay former London policemen claiming to be private detectives to supply him with what turned out to be totally false information about Robert Macdonald, in an investigation that Robin had instigated. In 2003, following a series of health setbacks—a knee operation, two serious falls, and a broken hip—that made it impossible for him to walk, Mark had brought Robin and India Jane into the business for the first time. “My sister and I got on very well and worked well together,” Robin told me in an exchange of e-mails. “Basically, I ran the company, and she attended to the look of the clubs.” By all accounts Robin did an excellent job of bringing in a younger, more with-it crowd to Annabel’s, which in the 90s was being described as a place where “the middle-aged meet the Middle East.” Robin had previously been running Birley Sandwiches, a chain he founded, which had shops in London and San Francisco. According to friends of Robin’s, Mark forced him to sell the two in San Francisco in order to concentrate on Annabel’s. (There are currently eight in London.) Then, in 2004, quite unexpectedly, India Jane, who was 43 and childless, became pregnant by Macdonald. Shortly after the birth of her son, who was a potential heir, Robin, suspicious of Macdonald and the situation, secretly gave the go-ahead to the former cops to find out whether India Jane’s boyfriend was out for her money. (At that time, India Jane did not have much income and Macdonald lived modestly.)
India Jane and Robin, Mark’s children, at Thurloe Lodge, their father’s London house, 2005.
“He was from a completely different social set … and I also think Robin did not want him in the business,” one of Robin’s friends said of Macdonald, adding that he was “a Canadian.” The alleged detectives provided Robin with tapes of women tearfully claiming to be wronged ex-lovers of Macdonald’s and saying he had fleeced them. Actually, the women were out-of-work drama students. The hired investigators also called on India Jane in the summer of 2006, frightening her when they insinuated that they had a lot of information about her. “It was highly improbable, unreal, and very, very unpleasant,” she told me. “It was very sinister. These people were thugs.” India Jane hired her own detective, who managed to track down one of the people involved. “He said it was Robin,” she told me. She subsequently listened to the tapes, which were “crackly and fuzzy,” she said. “I can’t imagine anyone being taken in by that crap.” She added, “It was very cruel. The intent was to ruin Robert Macdonald. I would then seem to be influenced by a famous financial fraudster.”
Meanwhile, that summer, David Wynne-Morgan, Mark’s longtime P.R. man and friend, who had started working with Robin at Mark’s behest, delivered a dossier of the material on the tapes to Keith Dovkants, a reporter at the London Evening Standard. The idea was to break the sensational story in the papers before Mark or India Jane knew about it. Wynne-Morgan said that, although he felt certain that Robin was sincere in his belief that his sister was being taken, he suggested that he tell his sister what he had learned from the investigators, but Robin demurred, thinking she would not believe him. India Jane says her brother told her the same thing later, when she confronted him. “But you were so infatuated,” she says Robin explained. “I believed I was acting in the best interest of my sister,” Robin informed me. “My father was too ill at the time to have any additional worries.”
In the course of fleshing out his story, Dovkants spoke to India Jane, and to Robert Macdonald—in the presence of lawyers Macdonald had to hire—and he was introduced by one of Robin’s investigators to two of the women on the tapes. After concluding that they were frauds, Dovkants notified Robin, who, according to the story that ran in the Evening Standard on October 13, 2006, met with the man who had supplied him with the tapes and also concluded that he had been duped. The story quoted Robin apologizing, saying he was in “absolute despair,” because he had believed he was, as he later told me, “acting in the best interests of my sister. She refuses to accept that, but it’s true.” I asked Dovkants if he felt he had been set up. “I am not going to tell you what I think the motive was [for giving the story to him]. It appeared to be an honorable motive at the time,” he said.
Macdonald received a cash settlement from Robin and had all his legal costs paid; he also got an official apology. So did India Jane. Characteristically, she never discussed the matter with her father. “I’m having a bit of a problem with Robin” was all she told him, she says. “Sort it out” was all he replied. It’s worth noting that nobody involved has sought to recover the $400,000 Robin paid the hired investigators. “Nobody wants to draw it all out,” India Jane said.
By then, Robin had also used hundreds of thousands of pounds more from the business for his own expenses, without telling his father or India Jane, who was all this time his partner in running the clubs. According to India Jane, she learned about the missing funds only when Kam Bathia, the finance director of Annabel’s, came forward to say he was planning to resign because he could no longer continue to dole out cash to Robin. Robin, however, is arguing that he had every right to take the money for his expenses because of a deal he had struck with his father—a deal, Robin says, his father later forgot he had made. Robin, according to the agreement, would halve his salary of more than $200,000 in exchange for 10 percent of the profits from Annabel’s. In fact, those profits had doubled since he started managing the business. The deal, an associate of Robin’s says, was contained in a letter that Bathia sent to Robin’s accountant. “I know nothing of such a letter, and Kam never mentioned it to me,” says India Jane. A person close to Robin summarized his position: “Robin’s not looking for charity. He’s not like a dog being given a bone from the table. He feels he’s created something and should be compensated. The will was changed on a false premise. He didn’t steal the money his father thought he did.” Bathia is not commenting.
In September 2006, after Mark learned about the money Robin had used, he threw him out of the business, and India Jane took over completely. The staff was told Robin was taking a sabbatical. On October 26, two weeks after the Evening Standard story hit, Robin married Lucy Ferry, who had formerly been the wife of Bryan Ferry, the lead singer of Roxy Music, with whom she had four sons. Mark was invited to the wedding but did not attend. India Jane, however, did. It was yet another rocky misstep for Robin in a father-son relationship long fraught with tension. “Robin desperately wanted his approval, and Pup’s approval was very spare,” India Jane told me. She added, “He was highly motivated, Robin, and his motives were dubious.”
Growing Up Birley
Adding to this dysfunctional stew is the perception among India Jane’s friends and Robin’s that their mother always favored her sons. “Annabel is unabashedly on Robin’s side,” someone close to Robin told me. “India Jane was always a Cinderella figure in the background,” explained Lynn Guinness, a longtime, dear friend of Mark’s; the young woman apparently did not marry well enough or behave to suit her family. India Jane refers to herself as “an old hippie.” Lady Annabel told me the relationship between her children is “not a subject I can discuss. As a mother, I want to keep myself out of it.” India Jane calls Lady Annabel and Mark “quite eccentric parents,” whom she claims to have “adored,” and Lady Annabel in turn describes India Jane in her memoirs as “wonderfully eccentric.”
“I was always being shunted around,” India Jane says of her childhood. At one point she had to give up her small bedroom so that her father would have more room for his boots and shoes. She later became a model for the painter Lucian Freud and began collecting antique erotica. Her first husband, Jonty Colchester, was an interior decorator whom she had met when she was an art student. Despite her pedigree, India Jane did not make much money as an artist, and her marriage to Francis Pike, during which she went off to India for a period, was, one of her friends told me, her attempt to discover “the discreet charms of the bourgeoisie.”
Robin was an ongoing source of sadness and guilt to Lady Annabel after she allowed him to enter the tigress’s enclosure at Aspinall’s. She tended him through the “years and years of surgeries” that could begin only when his face was fully formed, at 16. Despite his disfigurement, Robin never had any trouble getting girls, but he always bore the scars of his father’s neglect. “He got more overt attention from Jimmy [Goldsmith] than from Mark,” says a friend of Robin’s who is close to the family. “He felt that a betrayal.” According to Lady Annabel, “Robin and Jimmy did have a very close relationship. I don’t know whether that affected Mark. Mark never said anything.”
Robin, whom friends describe as impulsive and quick to anger, took up his stepfather’s cause when Goldsmith formed the Referendum Party, an anti–European Union offshoot of the Conservative Party. In the early 1990s, Robin supported Renamo, a far-right-wing political group in Mozambique. Robin also became convinced that Augusto Pinochet, the former Chilean dictator, was being wrongly hounded by Spanish prosecutors seeking to try him for human-rights abuses, and in 1998 Robin helped arrange for him to stay in a fancy estate outside London. In the 1970s, Goldsmith had gotten Robin a position in the U.S., with his Grand Union supermarket chain, and some years later Robin started his sandwich business there and in England. When David Wynne-Morgan delivered a letter of apology from Robin to Mark after the debacle of the tapes and suggested that Mark should forgive Robin, Mark in turn showed Wynne-Morgan a letter from 20 years earlier in which Robin had written, “I wish with all my heart that Jimmy Goldsmith had been my father.”
Today, Lady Annabel is 73. When she and Mark married, she was 19, the daughter of the Eighth Marquess of Londonderry. Her father, who did not much care for Mark, was on his way to drinking himself to death, after his adored and exceptionally beautiful wife, Romaine, died of cancer at 47. In her fascinating memoirs Lady Annabel recalls Mark’s first Christmas at Wynyard Park, her family’s vast estate. “Mark remained quite calm one evening when Daddy persuaded the local vet’s daughter to remove her clothes and dance naked on the dining-room table while he drank champagne from one of her shoes, held impassively by Robert the butler.”
Mark had grown up “unloved,” Lady Annabel told me. “I think he had a miserable childhood. Because of his childhood, he was a fairly closed-up person. There was a reserve that people couldn’t quite penetrate.” Mark’s New Zealander father, Sir Oswald Birley, was a painter of portraits of the British nobility. He was 50 when Mark was born, and unhappy with his striking and dramatic wife, Rhoda, whom Lady Annabel describes in her memoirs as a “bohemian hostess” with a large circle of artistic friends. Rhoda reputedly maintained an affair with a Scottish lord. Mark’s sister, Maxime, was a renowned beauty who later married Count Alain de la Falaise and became an international society figure and fashion leader. “Mark never stopped loving me,” Lady Annabel said. “He took on a paternal role and signed his letters Dad. I think he was absolutely incapable of being faithful. He was a serial adulterer. Like a butterfly, he had to seduce every woman.” Throughout, she added, he was always discreet. “He hid it very well, because he loved me, and he was heartbroken when I left.”
Mark graduated from Eton—where he showed that he had inherited his father’s ability to draw—in 1948, after which he lasted only a year at Oxford. “He was a sophisticated child,” his old Etonian housemate Michael Haslam remembers. “He told me once his ambition in life was to have a nightclub—I guess because it was very glamorous. He had this passion for glamour and good things in life.” He also had a penchant for getting people to do his bidding and make themselves look silly. “He would make me these horrid bets, like walking around the square in my dressing gown,” Haslam recalls. “I got quite a lot of the way before I got caught.”
During his National Service, from 1948 to 1950, Mark ended up with British troops in Vienna. According to his fellow serviceman Elwyn Edwards, “He was very amusing. He told me he had wanted to be in the Intelligence Corps, as his father had been in World War I, but the next thing he knew he was sent to camp Catterick, in Yorkshire, shoveling coal. His father was painting Monty [Field Marshal Bernard Montgomery] at the time and happened to mention it, so Mark was removed from Catterick and sent to us. He never made the Intelligence Corps.” Edwards says that Mark supported himself while in the service by selling “gentlemen’s white handkerchiefs,” which he bought at the military PX and then exchanged for dollars on the black market. “Even then he had the makings of a good businessman.”
A dining area in Annabel’s.
By the time Mark was 30, he was married with two young children, managing the first Hermès store in London. In 1961 he was approached by John Aspinall, who was planning to open the Clermont Club in an attractive Palladian house designed by William Kent at 44 Berkeley Square (later made notorious as the locale frequented by Lord Lucan before 1974, when he killed his children’s nanny—having mistaken her for his wife—and then allegedly escaped the country with the help of his very rich friends from the club). Aspinall asked Mark if he wanted to start a nightclub in the basement. “He had to go cap in hand to raise money for Annabel’s, but I was always certain of success because of the way he did up houses,” Lady Annabel said. The founding members were charged five guineas ($14) annually to belong, and many of them continue to pay that fee today. Annabel’s now has 9,000 members, each of whom pays up to $1,500 in annual dues. Thus, Mark was able to attract those who would not only pay annual dues—even though they might not eat there more than a couple of times a year—but also pay top prices for the drinks and dinner served. In his eulogy at Mark’s funeral, Peter Blond, a fellow old Etonian, remembered running into Mark on the street before the opening and being taken to the unfinished basement: “In the gloom of the cellar, lit only by a string of naked lightbulbs looped around a vaulted ceiling, he outlined his plans for what was to become the most famous nightclub in the world.”
From its overcrowded opening night, Annabel’s transformed London social life. Some of the old snobbish clubs, such as the 400, in Leicester Square, which required dinner clothes, were already on their way out, and Mark’s more raffish set didn’t have many places left to go to, apart from the Milroy, on Park Lane, a private establishment with a nightclub upstairs called Les Ambassadeurs, and Siegi’s, on nearby Charles Street, which had a back room for gambling. Soon Mark was presiding over his own private zoo of social lions. “Annabel’s quickly became the place to go,” David Metcalfe said. Men could gamble half their fortune away upstairs and pop down for a drink or a dance. European royalty and dowagers would rub elbows with, in Wynne-Morgan’s phrase, “the right sort of young.”
The Taste-Maker
Mark Birley was there every night, watching the good and the great mingle, couple, and uncouple. Part of his genius at Annabel’s was to create a dramatic ambience that felt both elegant and cozy, a series of marvelously scented small sitting rooms with comfortable sofas and big pillows, a bar on the side and the dance floor at the back, with an eclectic mix of witty cartoons and dog paintings on the walls. Nina Campbell, the young decorator he took on, who stayed with him through every establishment, told me, “As a woman, you could go to Annabel’s and they would look after you. The staff would make you a special drink. It was like a great big wonderful family—you felt embraced as you arrived.”
Annabel’s was certainly a great big wonderful family for one special crowd, and Birley accrued major glamour and social power. He never allowed the press inside unescorted, so nothing got leaked and celebrities were left alone. “In the beginning, everyone vaguely knew each other, which was not the case thereafter,” says Mark’s old friend Min Hogg, the founding editor of The World of Interiors. “It was a terribly good place for ‘the gang’ to meet each other.” She adds, “You were attended to like mad, in surroundings that could be someone’s house.”
Throughout his four decades in business, Birley watched every penny but spared no expense. He spent a year making trips to Brazil in order to create three weeks of Carnival at Annabel’s, complete with samba musicians and topless showgirls. Valentino staged fashion shows at the club, and there was a New Orleans fortnight with the Preservation Hall Jazz Band and food from Antoine’s, as well as a Russian fortnight, when Viscount Hambleden came every night and danced on the tables in Cossack boots, while Gypsies warbled “These Boots Are Made for Walkin’?” in Russian.
On the gala opening night, Annabel met Jimmy Goldsmith, who was already a widower with a child and a remarried husband with a girlfriend. By 1965 their romance had taken flight. “Jimmy was such a larger-than-life figure he just swept me off my feet,” Lady Annabel said. “I didn’t mean it to go as far as it did.” In the British upper-class tradition, the Birley boys were packed off to boarding school when they were eight, but India Jane was allowed to stay home until her teens. As a result, she saw more of her father than her brothers did, and he was always interested in her talent. When India Jane entered a series of art schools, he continued to be very supportive. Growing up, India Jane said, she was not particularly aware of her family’s unconventional arrangement and structure. “When little children go to bed, they don’t know what their parents are doing.” Pup, she recalled, was around “for tea. He was a familiar figure when I was little.”
Robin was a different story. “I think what Robin needed was someone to put his arm around him and tell him he would be all right,” a friend of Mark’s said. “Mark couldn’t do that. It was contrary to his whole nature. When Annabel went off with Jimmy, Jimmy was the complete opposite. He was very good at wearing his emotions on his sleeve, and he built Robin’s confidence up. Robin and Mark had a sort of love-hate relationship.”
An interior at the Bath & Racquets, which Birley opened in 1990.
Mark lavished his attention on his growing business. “You were buying into a world: Mark Birley’s life and how it should be lived,” says his onetime number two Gavin Rankin. “Mark completely changed the face of civilized dining in London—revolutionized it.” With Mark’s Club, which opened after Mark bought out Siegi’s, in 1973, Rankin says, “he took the concept of an English men’s club, turned it on its axis, and made it far nicer than any gentlemen’s club.” In 1990, when Mark could not find a health club to meet his requirements, he opened the Bath & Racquets, complete with onyx-lined shower rooms. Harry’s Bar, which he opened in 1979, is still one of the most elegant and expensive restaurants in London, while George, which opened in 2001, is far more casual and attracts a younger crowd. “People would always pay for the frills,” Rankin says, “and if you could be unassailably the best, then the market was yours.”
All the clubs and restaurants are located in Mayfair near Berkeley Square. Although Birley traveled to Hong Kong, Brazil, and New York with the stated intention of duplicating Annabel’s, he really just wanted “to see what was going on,” says Wynne-Morgan. “He never started anything he couldn’t walk to.” According to Willie Landels, who did graphic design for Mark, “Having lunch was one of his great occupations. He lunched mainly at the clubs, and one ate much better when one dined with him, because all would try to outdo each other trying to please him. He was very spoiled that way.”
Staff and Dogs
The indispensable element that permeated all of Birley’s establishments was a carefully chosen staff, who tended to stay for years and thus could be counted on not only to greet members by name but also to know their likes and dislikes. “Mr. Birley was ahead of his time,” says Alfredo Crivellari, the former manager of Annabel’s, who worked there for more than 35 years, until his retirement at the end of 2007. “He headhunted earlier than anyone else. He would go round and find the best.” When Birley interviewed Crivellari f or a waiter’s job, he asked only two questions. Are you married? Yes. Do you have a mortgage? Yes. “?’You start work on Monday,’ he said. He knew I was committed.” Although Birley was “slow to bless and quick to chide,” Rankin said, he was also keenly aware of the staff’s importance. “Everyone was made to feel vital.” He once revoked the membership of one of his best customers at Annabel’s because the man had been rude to a waiter: “I can always replace you, but not a waiter.”
In the manner of a feudal lord, Mark took care of his own—provided doctors, paid for weddings, gave extravagant gifts, wrote gracious notes. When a waiter left to go back to Thailand to begin a restaurant and the business failed, Mark went to Thailand, paid his debts, and brought him back. No one was ever told to retire, but after they stopped working for him, he would pay for a taxi to bring them back for one hour a day so that they would have to get dressed and have a good meal. Bruno Rotti, the manager of Mark’s Club, said that when he stopped working full-time Mark had a small bronze bust cast of him and kept it on a table at the club, “?’so there will always be a Bruno,’ Mr. Birley told me.”
The motto for Birley’s staff was “It shall be done.” “Quality is only met with precision,” said Sir Evelyn de Rothschild. “We couldn’t do anything without his notice,” said Rotti. “?’That young lady’s hair has grown a bit too long—have it cut or put it up. It’s a bit untidy.’ ‘There is a basket left out in gents.’ He was a perfectionist.” David Metcalfe added, “If he was there, they always knew it—he’d always watch and not hesitate to comment, often in a very caustic way. ‘I would have thought by now … ‘ ‘I would have thought the very least you could do … ‘ ‘I’d be rather grateful if … ‘ That meant he was furious.” Mohamed Ghannam, a barman at Annabel’s who functioned as Mark’s butler, concurred: “Such sarcastic remarks he made—you’d never forget the bollocking and you’d never do it again.”
Hostesses trembled in Birley’s presence. “People were very nervous to have him stay or eat,” Landels said. “He was quite severe. I remember once we stayed somewhere and in the middle of the morning he told the hostess, ‘The way the breakfast tray was laid was very bad. The napkin must be very white and very starched. Orange juice should be served in glasses of this shape, not that.‘?”
Despite the scowls and judgments, Mark had many friends who were awed by his taste and adored him. “He was always coming to the rescue of people,” said Lynn Guinness. “He had a very dry sense of humor, a sense of the ludicrous. He was a marvelous man in so many ways.” Metcalfe added, “On a good day, when Mark wished to be, he was charming. But charming and having charm are completely different. He was very selfish and self-involved.” Lady Annabel said, “It’s quite difficult to live with a perfectionist, but the thing is, life with Mark was fun. Our breakup was because of Mark’s infidelities, not because I fell in love with Jimmy.”
India Jane calls her father “the funniest man in the world.” Although she was clearly his favorite and visited him daily, Mark himself seemed to take his greatest pleasure outside his family. “He was not the sort of person to have a woman make him happy,” Mohamed Ghannam explained. “He was very happy with his dogs and working with staff.” Ghannam, 58, spent most of his life with Birley. He was 18, one of 11 children, when he was sent from Morocco, through the recommendation of a member of the English Parliament, to train to be a waiter at Annabel’s. When his visa was up, after one freezing month, he wanted to go home, but Birley’s secretary tore up his return ticket and enrolled him in school. He would come in to work at night. Mark paid his rent for seven years. Early on, Ghannam recalled, “their Christmas was coming, and Mr. Birley wanted me to spend it with them, with Lady Annabel. And from then until now I spend Christmas with the whole family.”
Ghannam, married, with three daughters who have all attended college, is perhaps the ultimate family retainer. “Mr. Birley taught me how to dress, how to behave, how to talk to princes, dukes, and princesses,” he said. “Once, I made a gin martini for the Queen.” He did not take one holiday during the last 15 years of Birley’s life, but he would accompany him to Spain, Morocco, or wherever he spent his vacation. Every Sunday he would go to his employer’s fashionable house, Thurloe Lodge, across from the Victoria and Albert Museum, just to make a special cocktail for Mr. Birley. Mark was also pampered on a daily basis by his caregiver, Elvira Maria, and her niece. His staff saw him more than his family did. According to Ghannam, “He said his dogs came first and his family second.”
Toward the end of his life, when he lived on one floor and was unable to walk, Birley let George, his black Labrador, have the bed with the comfortable mattress, and he slept in a reclining chair next to the bed. His other dog, Tara, was an Alsatian. “I used to talk to George the dog in order to bring Mark back to life again,” Sir Evelyn de Rothschild said of visiting Birley in his last months.
Lady Annabel said she was the one who introduced her first husband to dogs. “I come from a doggy family,” she told me. “I’m writing a book about Mark and his relationship with dogs. Everybody knows about the clubs and his love life, so that is the angle I’ve taken. He adored dogs. He told me, ‘I go to these dinners, and I sit down and think, God, I wish I was in my lovey, comfy bed with my dogs. There is nothing I like better.’?” Lady Annabel keeps her own dogs in Colefax and Fowler duvets, and she has written an entire book about one former pet, Copper, a mixed breed, who she swears used to ride the bus by himself and visit pubs and hold his paw up to cross the road. India Jane provided the illustrations.
According to The Daily Telegraph, Mark left more than $200,000 in his will to the People’s Dispensary for Sick Animals, and during his lifetime he had a beloved mutt named Help that he had rescued from the Battersea Dogs and Cats Home. Help did not care for two Saint Bernard puppies Mark bought, so they were sent to Austria to be there for him when he skied in the winter. “Mark thought Saint Bernards looked good in the mountains,” Wynne-Morgan said.
Once, the actress Joan Collins was invited to Mark’s house for a small, fancy lunch. After she was seated, she screamed and pushed her chair back. Under the table, Blitz, the huge Rhodesian Ridgeback, had been licking her ankle. “Take that dog out of here!” she cried. Mark gingerly coaxed Blitz out from under the carefully laid table, and the dog lay down in the hallway, his head between his legs, looking miserable. After Mark finished the first course, he excused himself and went out to apologize to his pet. “I’m so sorry, Blitz,” he was overheard to say. “That bitch will never set foot in this house again.”
End of an Era
No one wanted Mark to sell the clubs. His friends and family all implored him not to. Some, including David Tang, the Hong Kong mogul, also asked him to forgive Robin. Tang reported that Mark said, “Nobody talks to me about Robin—I don’t like it.” Mohamed Ghannam got away with more than most: “He’s your son, Mr. Birley—doesn’t it matter? It’s only money. My God, you lost Rupert—you’re not going to lose Robin just because of a stupid mistake?” Robin was Ghannam’s boss at Annabel’s, and Ghannam and others were ordered to report daily to Mark on how things were going. Ghannam thought Robin worked very hard and did an excellent job. “Robin has a heart of gold,” he told me. “He does whatever you ask.” Robin said, “I loved the clubs, and I believe I had a real feeling for what my father created.” But it was too late.
The buzzer at Mark’s Club.
Ghannam was pushing Mark in his wheelchair in Marrakech last June when the moment came. Mark had gone to Morocco to buy a house on a property developed by his friend Lynn Guinness and his former son-in-law Francis Pike. India Jane and Miranda Brooks were also visiting. The house was nearly ready, but Mark suddenly started demanding last-minute changes. According to Ghannam, they all told him it was not possible to do those things. Ghannam said, “I tried to tell them, ‘Stop! Don’t tell him what to do.’ Because I knew immediately, That’s it. That’s the end of this house. He only said, ‘Mohamed, it’s time for lunch.’?”
Then, instead of calling the lawyers from Casablanca, who were ready to close on the property, Mark summoned Richard Caring’s lawyers from London, who arrived the next day by private jet. Caring told me he had been trying to buy the clubs for more than a year. “It was a bit of a shock when it really happened.” Mark had already grilled Caring thoroughly and had gotten him up to a great price. “If you believe in quality, top-of-the-pile sparkle,” Caring said, “you don’t do better than this.” India Jane was beside herself. She had thrown herself into running the clubs since Robin’s departure, and her father had said nothing to her about any sale. “I really did cry and cry, and I am not a crier,” she said. When Sir Evelyn de Rothschild suggested countering the offer, Caring reminded Mark that they had a deal. After the sale, Lady Annabel asked Mark to give each of the children $10.3 million, but Mark reportedly just rolled his eyes. When asked what he planned to do with all his money, he replied, “I’m going on a cruise.”
Mark had never discussed his will with his children. India Jane and Robin, once easygoing siblings and partners who would play jokes and have food fights, actually saw each other when Robin came around to collect some suits and ties of their father’s the day before India Jane heard that her brother was contesting the will. “It came out of the blue,” she told me. “I have absolutely no animosity towards Robin,” whom she described as a “wild, wild creature.” She added, “Sometimes I wish he’d go live in the Congo forever. It’s all so unnecessary. At times it makes me want to weep.”
The big question now is: How can Robin possibly break the will? It will be very difficult. Mark made sure that a doctor came from London to examine him for his mental competency at the time of the sale, and the doctor said he was compos mentis. (Robin’s side argues that it wasn’t his regular doctor.) The same procedure had occurred earlier, when Mark made his will, which leaves India Jane his house, last evaluated at $35 million, and allows her to live off the income of the trust until her son is 25. Thus, the trustees, not India Jane, have final say. “People think it is something I am in control of. I’m not,” India Jane said.
According to Miranda Brooks, India Jane told Robin that, if he would wait for the period of probate to be over, she would try to help him if she could. Peter Munster says, “The will cannot be changed unless there is evidence. The reason is that a minor is involved, and he is the main beneficiary. If the will were to be changed, the trustees would have to go to court. If it would be changed to the detriment of a child, the court would be loath to change anything.”
When Mark was operated on for his knee, Lady Annabel said, “he drank quite a lot and mixed it with painkillers, and he kept having falls.” She said he fell two weeks after the operation and fractured his hip. And he would not do physical therapy. “That’s when it all began,” she said.
During the time Birley was drinking and taking painkillers, he apparently was disoriented, his memory was impaired, and he was not himself. “He was taking a whole cocktail of medications,” Lynn Guinness explained. “When they changed that, the confusion stopped.” Guinness said that every morning when he was with her, he would get the figures of Annabel’s take from the night before. “He got this incredible deal from Caring. How does someone off his head manage to do that?” India Jane asserted, “My father was right on the button” regarding his business. His caregiver, Elvira Maria, a beneficiary in the will, agreed: “Mr. Birley was never confused about business or money.” I asked her if what I had been told was true, that shortly before he died he had spoken of a rapprochement with Robin. “He never mentioned that,” she replied.
Robin’s partisans disagree about Mark’s mental state, and they feel that Robin needs to be more fairly compensated for giving up his San Francisco businesses. “[Mark's confusion] was bad for a few months, particularly at the time that Robin’s part in the investigation of India Jane’s lover came to light,” says David Wynne-Morgan. “He had short-term-memory loss until he died.” Shaun Plunket, a cousin of Lady Annabel’s who is now married to Andrea Reynolds, Claus von Bülow’s former companion, phoned Mark frequently from upstate New York. “He was losing it for the last year, and I detected it on the telephone,” he told me. “He was not living a happy life at all.” Peter Munster disputes that: “If lawyers were to call witnesses, there are several people, such as myself, who would stand up in court and say that Mark knew precisely what he was doing.”
Mark was making plans to visit Lynn Guinness again in Morocco the night before he died of a massive stroke, on August 24. India Jane was with him at the end. His death came as “a terrible shock” to Lady Annabel, who said, “I thought he’d go on for years, he was so primped.” Of the sale, she said, “I think maybe in his heart he felt that nobody could run it like him.”
India Jane arranged the funeral, at St. Paul’s church in Knightsbridge, which was attended by Margaret Thatcher, Prince and Princess Michael of Kent, the Duchess of York, and staff from as far away as Australia. The most dramatic moment came at the end. “When the coffin was carried from its place before the altar towards the door of the church,” said Peter Munster, “it was followed by Mark’s driver, Don, leading his two beloved dogs, George and Tara, whilst a piper played a lament.”
For now, probate is frozen, so the real value of the estate is not yet determined. “Mark would be horrified at the publicity,” Lynn Guinness says, and India Jane, who has a new romantic interest, a rare-clocks dealer, swears that all she wants to do is “play with the baby and feed the kittens. I am very, very boring.” Lady Annabel speaks frequently with both Robin and India Jane. “We talk all the time,” India Jane told me. “She prattles on about dogs and we don’t talk about it.” And what if the case ever gets to court? Miranda Brooks says, “Jane’s got no illusions about that. If her mother has to appear in court, we know who she’ll favor.” Does India Jane really think her mother would testify for Robin against her? “I don’t know,” India Jane says, “and I really do mean it. I can’t even imagine. It’s a bit of the unthinkable.”
Maureen Orth is a Vanity Fair special correspondent and National Magazine Award winner.
Germany Confronts Holocaust Legacy Anew
Miguel Villagran/Associated PressRabbi William Wolff attends a commemoration of Holocaust victims in the German parliament in Berlin on Friday, Jan. 25, 2008.
January 29, 2008Memo From Berlin Germany Confronts Holocaust Legacy Anew BERLIN — Most countries celebrate the best in their pasts. Germany unrelentingly promotes its worst.
The enormous Holocaust memorial that dominates a chunk of central Berlin was completed only after years of debate. But the building of monuments to the Nazi disgrace continues unabated.
On Monday, Germany’s minister of culture, Bernd Neumann, announced that construction could begin in Berlin on two monuments: one near the Reichstag, to the murdered Gypsies, known here as the Sinti and the Roma; and another not far from the Brandenburg Gate, to gays and lesbians killed in the Holocaust.
In November Germany broke ground on the long-delayed Topography of Terror center at the site of the former Gestapo and SS headquarters. And in October, a huge new exhibition opened at the Bergen-Belsen concentration camp. At the Dachau camp, outside Munich, a new visitor center is set to open this summer. The city of Erfurt is planning a museum dedicated to the crematoriums. There are currently two exhibitions about the role of the German railways in delivering millions to their deaths.
Wednesday is the 75th anniversary of the day Hitler and the Nazi Party took power in Germany, and the occasion has prompted a new round of soul-searching.
“Where in the world has one ever seen a nation that erects memorials to immortalize its own shame?” asked Avi Primor, the former Israeli ambassador to Germany, at an event in Erfurt on Friday commemorating the Holocaust and the liberation of Auschwitz. “Only the Germans had the bravery and the humility.”
It is not just in edifices and exhibits that the effort to come to terms with this history marches on. The Federal Crime Office last year began investigating itself, trying to shine a light on the Nazi past of its founders after the end of the war. And this month Germany’s federal prosecutor overturned the guilty verdict of Marinus van der Lubbe, the Communist Dutchman executed on charges of setting the Reichstag fire; that event’s 75th anniversary is Feb. 27.
The experience of Nazism is alive in contemporary public debates over subjects as varied as German troops in Afghanistan, the nation’s low birthrate and the country’s dealings with foreigners. Why Germany seems unendingly obsessed with Nazism is itself a subject of perpetual debate here, ranging from the nation’s philosophical temperament, to simple awe at the unprecedented combination of organization and brutality, to the sense that the crime was so great that it spread like a blot over the entire culture.
Whatever the reasons, as the events become more remote, less personal, this society is forced to confront the question of how it should enshrine its crimes and transgressions over the longer term.
In the decades after the war, the central question was how Hitler ever came to power, Horst Möller, director of the Institute of Contemporary History, said in an interview. Even an American television mini-series called “Holocaust” in the 1970s affected the debate in what was then West Germany, shifting the focus more onto the suffering of the victims themselves, Mr. Möller recalled.
Rüdiger Nemitz first began welcoming back Berlin’s exiled victims of Nazi tyranny, an overwhelming majority of them Jews, in 1969. Berlin flies its former citizens back for a week of visits, all expenses paid and complete with a reception by the mayor.
The Invitation Program for Former Persecuted Citizens of Berlin, which has brought roughly 33,000 people for visits to the city, once had 12 full-time staff members. Now it is just Mr. Nemitz and a half-time employee.
The program is not, however, winding down because of waning support. At a time when the Berlin city government has had to make deep cutbacks in other areas, Mr. Nemitz said, the program’s $800,000 budget has not been pared since at least 2000.
“When it started, they were grown-ups,” said Mr. Nemitz from his office on the ground floor of City Hall. “Now, it’s people with hardly any memory of Berlin. Those who come today were children then.” The visits will end in 2010 or 2011, Mr. Nemitz estimated, because there are so few victims left.
Overlooked next to the fact of the survivors’ dying out is that Mr. Nemitz’s generation, those who fought to break the silence of their parents and teachers, is starting to retire. When the last tour group leaves Berlin, Mr. Nemitz, 61, who says he is afraid to take vacations and treats his position more like a mission than a job, will shut the door to his office and retire.
Some say that young Germans, who are required to study the Nazi era and the Holocaust intensively, have shown little indication of letting the theme drop, despite their distance from the events. They say that the younger generation has tackled it as a source not of guilt, but of responsibility on the world stage for social justice and pacifism, including opposition to the war in Iraq.
Others say that the crimes are dealt with only superficially, and that the young will eventually, and perhaps in carefully guarded ways, express their exhaustion with the topic. “I can’t help but feeling that some of the continued, ‘Let’s build monuments; let’s build Jewish museums,’ is a fairly ritualized behavior,” Susan Neiman, director of the Einstein Forum in Potsdam, an international public research group, said by telephone. “I worry terribly that it’s going to backfire.”
Germany’s relationship with its Nazi history still regularly generates controversy, as in the case of the dueling train exhibits. The first, Train of Commemoration, is a locomotive carrying displays detailing the way Jewish children were murdered in the Holocaust.
The train is making its way through German cities, open for visitors along the way, ultimately bound for the site of the Auschwitz camp, in Poland. Organizers complain that rather than embrace the project, the national railway, Deutsche Bahn, has hindered it, requiring payment for use of the tracks.
The second exhibition, sponsored by Deutsche Bahn itself, opened in Berlin at the Potsdamer Platz train station last week. Critics have derided “Special Trains to Death” as a response to the first exhibition. But Deutsche Bahn’s exhibition does lay out how the company’s predecessor, the Reichsbahn, carried some three million passengers to their deaths; it is filled with painful statistics, photographs and powerful stories of some of the people who perished.
Any failure to handle the history with care grabs national attention. In Munich this past weekend, a traditional carnival season parade overlapped with the International Holocaust Remembrance Day, observed every year on Jan. 27. The result was a flood of negative publicity for the city.
Stefan Hauf, a spokesman for the city, said, “There was no conscious affront,” adding that the city would have changed the date of the parade, but that too many participants were flying in from other countries to make the change on short notice.
Munich played a special role in Nazi history. It is where the National Socialist party rose to prominence and was the location of the Beer Hall Putsch of 1923, the failed coup attempt enshrined in Nazi lore. Hitler eventually declared it the Capital of the Movement. Unlike Berlin, which has developed a reputation as a city with a memorial on practically every street corner, Munich has often been criticized for playing down its history.
“Munich was the Capital of the Movement; since 1945 it’s been the capital of forgetting,” said Wolfram P. Kastner, an artist who said he had fought the city over the years for permission to use performance art to keep the memory of the Holocaust alive there.
Munich’s government believes it has been very active in preserving the history of that time. A short walk from the city’s historic Marienplatz, an entire complex of new buildings is devoted to both the city’s Jewish history and the present. The synagogue there opened in November 2006 on the anniversary of the Nazi-led Kristallnacht attacks on Jewish people, businesses and places of worship. The Jewish Museum and a new community center opened in Munich last year.
The city is working on a new museum to be built where the Nazi party headquarters once stood. Called the Documentation Center for the History of National Socialism, it is expected to open in 2011. The stated goal, according to the museum Web site, “is to create a place of learning for the future.”
To that end, Angelika Baumann of the city’s Department of Arts and Culture has run workshops for schoolchildren 14 to 18 years old. “We’re planning for people who aren’t even born yet,” she said.
Nicholas Kulish reported from Berlin and Munich. Victor Homola contributed reporting from Berlin.
Ted Kennedy’s roof-raising endorsement of Barack Obama.
McCain Beats Romney in Florida
McCain Beats Romney in Florida
Giuliani a Distant Third in State He Counted On Winning; Clinton Defeats Obama but Gets No DelegatesBy Michael D. Shear and Juliet Eilperin
Washington Post Staff Writers
Wednesday, January 30, 2008; A01ORLANDO, Jan. 29 — Sen. John McCain of Arizona pulled out a hard-fought victory over former Massachusetts governor Mitt Romney in Florida‘s contentious Republican primary Tuesday, making him the clear front-runner in a two-man presidential race that could be decided as soon as next week.
Former New York mayor Rudolph W. Giuliani, whose status as “America’s Mayor” catapulted him to the head of the GOP field for most of last year, finished third. His speech to supporters had the feel of a goodbye, and top aides said he plans to drop out Wednesday and endorse McCain in California ahead of a debate there.
Speaking in Orlando as tears ran down his staffers’ faces, Giuliani said: “I’m proud that we chose to stay positive and run a campaign of ideas. We ran a campaign that was uplifting. You don’t always win but you can always try to do it right.”
Sen. Hillary Rodham Clinton (N.Y.) won the state’s largely symbolic Democratic primary. None of the candidates campaigned here and no delegates will be awarded because the state party scheduled the contest earlier than the national party allowed. Sen. Barack Obama (Ill.) was a distant second, with former senator John Edwards (N.C.) in third.
The Republican Party also punished Florida for voting before Feb. 5 without permission, but it cut the number of delegates in half rather than eliminating them entirely. McCain was awarded 57 delegates in the winner-take-all primary.
With 95 percent of the vote counted, McCain led with 36 percent of the vote compared to 31 percent for Romney. Giuliani had 14.7 percent of the vote and former Arkansas governor Mike Huckabee trailed with 13.5 percent.
For McCain, the victory finally proved that he can win a primary limited to registered Republicans. The win came in part because of heavy support from Hispanics, and it helped erase lingering doubts that he is not conservative enough for his own party.
Nonetheless, the Florida contest was the nastiest so far, featuring a series of testy exchanges between McCain and Romney that laid bare their dislike for one another. In the past three days, Romney has called McCain “dishonest” and a “liberal Democrat,” while McCain has accused Romney of “wholesale deception” of voters.
The Republican race immediately shifts westward Wednesday, with a debate in Southern California that kicks off a six-day frenzy of cross-country campaigning leading to Super Tuesday, when 21 states vote.
Making it clear he was now girding for a fierce battle with Romney, McCain declared in his victory speech Tuesday night that, “My friends, in one week we will have as close to a national primary as we have ever had in this country. I intend to win it, and be the nominee of our party.”
McCain had tried to keep the focus of the Florida campaign on foreign policy, where he believes he has the advantage. A former prisoner of war in Vietnam, McCain rebuilt his campaign last year on the strength of his support of the buildup of U.S. troops in Iraq.
McCain saved his kindest words last night for Giuliani, who he said, “invested his heart and soul in this primary, and [he] conducted himself with all the qualities of the exceptional American leader he truly is.
“Tonight, my friends, we celebrate,” McCain continued. “Tomorrow it’s back to work. We have a ways to go, but we are getting close.”
Romney had tried to cast McCain as unprepared to confront the economic challenges in Florida and the nation as the stock market tumbled and the housing crisis escalated. But the former corporate chief executive’s focus on the economy did not move enough voters to his side even though voters rated it as their top issue.
“Almost, but not quite,” Romney declared to a crowded ballroom of supporters after his loss to McCain.
Network exit polls out of Florida showed the economy as the breakaway issue, with 45 percent of GOP voters and 55 percent of Democrats calling it the top concern.
Romney aides, while disappointed in the loss, said they would now enter a two-man race with McCain, where they can run as the conservative candidate against the at-times maverick senator. They said the divided field and the endorsement by Florida Gov. Charlie Crist had tipped this vote to McCain, but that they could upset him in some states and pick up delegates in states they don’t win.
“The conservatives are starting to rally around Mitt,” his wife, Ann, declared in brief remarks after her husband spoke.
The exit poll showed McCain with the edge among voters most concerned about the economy and a wide margin among those who said Iraq was the top issue. Romney won among those most concerned about immigration, while those who cited terrorism as the country’s most important problem spread their votes nearly evenly among Romney, McCain and Giuliani.
McCain did well among Hispanics, winning 54 percent of their votes, and among self-described independents, who made up 17 percent of all GOP voters. Among self-identified Republicans, McCain and Romney ran evenly.
Huckabee trailed well behind after choosing not to campaign much in Florida.
The Florida primary became a critical test for the Republican candidates after an early voting schedule that did little to settle uncertainty about who should claim the mantle of leadership following eight years of President Bush. The candidates split the first set of contests before heading to Florida, where Giuliani sat waiting for his chance in the political spotlight.
But that chance never really came.
Giuliani largely skipped the first five contests, then saw once-sky-high poll numbers in Florida plunge when the others arrived. By primary day, surveys showed him fighting with Huckabee for third place.
Giuliani campaigned hard throughout Florida, touting his leadership, his experience managing New York City and his support for a national insurance fund that would make it easier for Floridians to purchase affordable homeowners and flood insurance.
He also spent more than $4 million on television ads, campaign mailers and a sophisticated ground organization. Thousands of volunteers made hundreds of thousands of get-out-the-vote calls in the final days of the campaign here. On the day before the primary, he flew reporters across the state for a series of rallies.
“We’re going to win Florida tomorrow,” Giuliani said repeatedly, promising that a victory in the Sunshine State would propel him to the nomination and ultimately to the White House.
But Giuliani was repeatedly upstaged by McCain and Romney, who greeted each other gingerly in a national debate in Boca Raton, then let the aggression fly in days of exchanges that barely disguised contempt.
McCain attempted to shift the conversation to national security by accusing Romney of having supported a date for withdrawal of U.S. troops from Iraq.
Romney called that “dishonest” and demanded an apology from McCain, who not only refused, but also said that Romney owed an apology to the men and women serving in the military in Iraq.
That spat was followed by two days of arguing about which of the two is the more liberal. Romney said McCain’s achievements in Congress on immigration, campaign finance and energy would take the country on a “liberal Democratic course.” McCain charged that “Mitt Romney’s campaign is based on the wholesale deception of voters.”
Despite the lack of delegates, the Clinton campaign claimed a big win. “I am thrilled by the vote of confidence you have given me today,” Clinton said at a rally in Davie.
The Obama campaign countered the effort to spin the results, mockingly saying it would call the race early and announcing that the candidates were tied for delegates — with each getting zero — when the results were in.
“It is not a legitimate race,” Sen. John F. Kerry, who has endorsed Obama, told reporters on a call organized by the Obama campaign. “It should not become a spin race, it should not become a fabricated race.”
But the Clinton campaign was counting on voters in states with Feb. 5 contests paying little attention to the confusion over delegates. The headlines, they hoped, would simply reflect that she won by a huge margin over Obama in a large state.
In every statement about the race, Clinton and her surrogates repeatedly insisted that Florida’s “votes count” — despite her earlier agreement to honor party rules.
Staff writers Perry Bacon Jr. and Anne E. Kornblut in Florida and polling director Jon Cohen and polling analyst Jennifer Agiesta in Washington contributed to this report.
Today’s Papers
Back to the Front
By Daniel Politi
Posted Wednesday, Jan. 30, 2008, at 6:06 A.M. E.T.The New York Times, Washington Post, Los Angeles Times, and Wall Street Journal‘s world-wide newsbox all lead with Sen. John McCain’s decisive victory over Mitt Romney in the Florida primary. Everyone says the win clearly makes the Arizona senator his party’s front-runner for the presidential nomination. After a hard-fought battle that became increasingly acrimonious in its final days, McCain received 36 percent of the vote to Romney’s 31 percent. Yesterday’s election also marked the downfall of Rudy Giuliani. Once seen as the party’s front-runner, Giuliani’s campaign quickly collapsed this month and “America’s Mayor” managed only a distant third in the state that he was counting on to propel him to the nomination. Giuliani spoke of his campaign in the past tense last night and is widely expected to drop out today and throw his support to McCain.
USA Today goes big with McCain’s victory but devotes the traditional lead spot to word that a report scheduled for release today will reveal that allied countries have paid only 16 percent of what they pledged in Iraqi reconstruction funds. While the United States has spent $29 billion in the effort, other countries have spent only about $2.5 billion of the more than $15.8 billion they promised in 2003. Iraq’s “oil-rich neighbors” are particularly guilty of failing to follow through with their pledges.
McCain’s win is seen as particularly significant because he couldn’t count on the independent voters in yesterday’s contest, who were an integral part of his earlier victories. In the days before the election, Romney had worked hard to portray McCain as a product of Washington who is ill-equipped to deal with the country’s economic issues. But, in the end, the almost 50 percent of voters who ranked the economy as their top concern still largely favored McCain. For his part, Romney had an advantage among those who described themselves as very conservative as well as with voters who are most concerned about illegal immigration and favor deportation.
Still, there are several challenges ahead for the senator, as the LAT points out that it remains to be seen whether McCain can build a strong Republican coalition. Regardless of his continuing fights with the GOP establishment, it’s clear that at least voters see him as someone who says what he believes and as the Republican contender with the best chance of beating a Democrat. The Post‘s Dan Balz notes inside that McCain’s victory will “make him difficult to stop” and he could have the nomination wrapped up after next week’s 21-state Super Tuesday.
Mike Huckabee came in fourth place yesterday but no one expects him to drop out before Super Tuesday. The Post says that his continued presence in the race could help McCain because Huckabee will probably manage to receive some conservative support that would otherwise go to Romney.
On the Democratic side, Sen. Hillary Clinton easily beat Sen. Barack Obama, but the victory is seen as meaningless beyond the symbolic value since Florida was stripped of all its delegates by the party as a punishment for moving its primary earlier in the year. None of the candidates campaigned in the state, but Clinton went to Florida yesterday and claimed it as a big win, which the Obama camp eagerly refuted. But it’s clear that Clinton’s goal was to have a victory under its belt before Super Tuesday, predicting that voters would pay “little attention to the confusion over delegates,” says the Post. The WP is the only paper that fronts a picture of Clinton’s victory rally, although it is right above a particularly snarky column by Dana Milbank, who calls it “a political stunt worthy of the late Evel Knievel.”
In examining Rudy Giuliani’s loss, the NYT says in a separate front-page piece that although his downfall is largely attributable to mistakes in his campaign, there’s maybe a simpler explanation: “The more that Republican voters saw of him, the less they wanted to vote for him.” As many predicted, it seems his early numbers were largely based on name recognition, and, as Slate‘s John Dickerson points out, “The more he campaigned, the more he went down in the polls.”
The NYT fronts a look at how more outside groups are getting involved in helping Obama win the nomination, even as he consistently denounces the role that special-interest groups play in the political process. Obama has no control over these groups, and his campaign has asked them to stop their efforts. But now the senator from Illinois is in an interesting position where he’s benefitting from their money while also taking the high ground and criticizing his opponents for receiving just this type of help.
The WP fronts, and the rest of the papers mention, the continuing chaos in Kenya, where an opposition lawmaker was killed by gunmen outside his home yesterday morning. The killing had all the signs of a political assassination, and immediately sparked more ethnic clashes in a country where more than 800 people have been killed and 250,000 displaced since the election last month. The LAT notes that many are losing faith in the country’s politicians, who are seen as more concerned with their own power instead of working together to end the violence.
The NYT takes a look at how Monday’s State of the Union served as another example of how President Bush seems to be preparing the public for the possibility that no more troops will be withdrawn from Iraq beyond those that are already scheduled to leave. There’s even a possibility that the number of troops in Iraq will actually be greater than before the “surge” if the approximately 7,000 to 8,000 support troops don’t leave with the five combat brigades scheduled to withdraw by the summer. Meanwhile, the WP notes that the U.S. military is planning to increase the number of neighborhood outposts in Baghdad by more than 30 percent.
The WSJ goes inside with a look at how this presidential race has repeatedly embarrassed pollsters this year. Several factors are making the contests particularly difficult to handicap, including the huge number of people who are turning out and the fast pace of the campaign that is causing many to change their minds at the last minute. Things will likely get better once the nominees are decided. But, for now, Peter Hart has a piece of advice for fellow pollsters trying to predict the outcome of the Super Tuesday contests: “Take two aspirins and wake up Wednesday morning.”
Daniel Politi writes “Today’s Papers” for Slate. He can be reached at todayspapers@slate.com.Tuesday, January 29, 2008
The Kennedy Mystique
David Brooks
January 29, 2008Op-Ed Columnist The Kennedy Mystique By DAVID BROOKSSomething fundamental has shifted in the Democratic Party.
Last week there was the widespread revulsion at the Clintons’ toxic attempts to ghettoize Barack Obama. In private and occasionally in public, leading Democrats lost patience with the hyperpartisan style of politics — the distortion of facts, the demonizing of foes, the secret admiration for brass-knuckle brawling and the ever-present assumption that it’s necessary to pollute the public sphere to win. All the suppressed suspicions of Clintonian narcissism came back to the fore. Are these people really serving the larger cause of the Democratic Party, or are they using the party as a vehicle for themselves?
And then Monday, something equally astonishing happened. A throng of Kennedys came to the Bender Arena at American University in Washington to endorse Obama. Caroline Kennedy evoked her father. Senator Edward Kennedy’s slightly hunched form carried with it the recent history of the Democratic Party.
The Kennedy endorsements will help among working-class Democrats, Catholics and the millions of Americans who have followed Caroline’s path to maturity. Furthermore, here was Senator Kennedy, the consummate legislative craftsman, vouching for the fact that Obama is ready to be president on Day One.
But the event was striking for another reason, having to do with the confluence of themes and generations. The Kennedys and Obama hit the same contrasts again and again in their speeches: the high road versus the low road; inspiration versus calculation; future versus the past; and most of all, service versus selfishness.
“With Barack Obama, we will turn the page on the old politics of misrepresentation and distortion,” Senator Kennedy declared. “With Barack Obama, there is a new national leader who has given America a different kind of campaign — a campaign not just about himself, but about all of us,” he said.
The Clintons started this fight, and in his grand and graceful way, Kennedy returned the volley with added speed.
Kennedy went on to talk about the 1960s. But he didn’t talk much about the late-60s, when Bill and Hillary came to political activism. He talked about the early-60s, and the idealism of the generation that had seen World War II, the idealism of the generation that marched in jacket and ties, the idealism of a generation whose activism was relatively unmarked by drug use and self-indulgence.
Then, in the speech’s most striking passage, he set Bill Clinton afloat on the receding tide of memory. “There was another time,” Kennedy said, “when another young candidate was running for president and challenging America to cross a New Frontier.” But, he continued, another former Democratic president, Harry Truman, said he should have patience. He said he lacked experience. John Kennedy replied: “The world is changing. The old ways will not do!”
The audience at American University roared. It was mostly young people, and to them, the Clintons are as old as the Trumans were in 1960. And in the students’ rapture for Kennedy’s message, you began to see the folding over of generations, the service generation of John and Robert Kennedy united with the service generation of the One Campaign. The grandparents and children united against the parents.
How could the septuagenarian Kennedy cast the younger Clintons into the past? He could do it because he evoked the New Frontier, which again seems fresh. He could do it because he himself has come to live a life of service.
After his callow youth, Kennedy came to realize that life would not give him the chance to be president. But life did ask him to be a senator, and he has embraced that role and served that institution with more distinction than anyone else now living — as any of his colleagues, Republican or Democrat, will tell you. And he could do it because culture really does have rhythms. The respect for institutions that was prevalent during the early ’60s is prevalent with the young again today. The earnest industriousness that was common then is back today. The awareness that we are not self-made individualists, free to be you and me, but emerge as parts of networks, webs and communities; that awareness is back again today.
Sept. 11th really did leave a residue — an unconsummated desire for sacrifice and service. The old Clintonian style of politics clashes with that desire. When Sidney Blumenthal expresses the Clinton creed by telling George Packer of The New Yorker, “It’s not a question of transcending partisanship. It’s a question of fulfilling it,” that clashes with the desire as well.
It’s not clear how far this altered public mood will carry Obama in this election. But there was something important and memorable about the way the 75-year-old Kennedy communed and bonded with a rapturous crowd half a century his junior.
The old guy stole the show.
An Uncommon Wealth of Success Hits Boston
Stephan Savoia/Associated PressBoston fans in October celebrating the Red Sox’ victory against the Colorado Rockies in the World Series, their second championship since 2004.
January 29, 2008An Uncommon Wealth of Success Hits Boston By ALAN SCHWARZBOSTON — For a city with an inveterate inferiority complex, Boston has been feeling awfully superior lately.
The Red Sox just won a second World Series in four years after an 86-season drought that traumatized generations of New Englanders. The Patriots, already winners of three Super Bowls this decade, are storming into Sunday’s game an unprecedented 18-0. And the Celtics, only months after being accused of trying to finish with the N.B.A.’s worst record, have the league’s top mark at 34-8.
All this winning raises the question: what has Boston lost? If not games — since Oct. 16, those three New England teams have won 87 percent of the time — then perhaps a certain identity the region must now reconsider. Wearing a Red Sox cap or a Patriots jersey no longer identifies citizens as connoisseurs of pain, lovable Charlie Browns to New York’s success-swiping Lucy. Boston’s little garage bands have made it big, and the victory parades are crowded with bandwagons.
“There’s an embarrassment of riches, all these championships; we’re terribly spoiled,” said Chris Greeley, a government-affairs consultant in Boston and who was once a former chief of staff for Senator John Kerry. “Being the underdog was something Boston always liked. It was easier, and it was good for banding together. But now we don’t have a great enemy to point to — New York, we’ve become them.”
Marty Meehan, the chancellor of the University of Massachusetts Lowell who was a former United States Congressman, added: “I have an 8-year-old and a 5-year-old. I wonder if they’re ever going to know what it was really like here for all those decades.”
No city, let alone Boston, has ever fielded a threesome in the most popular national team sports as dominant as the current Patriots, Red Sox and Celtics. The closest — fittingly — was New York from 1969 through 1970, when the Jets won Super Bowl III, the Mets won the 1969 World Series and the Knicks won the 1970 basketball title. But New York had multiple baseball and football teams, which Boston does not. That inspired Carl Morris, a statistics professor across the Charles River at Harvard, to calculate the chances of a monofranchised city having the three best teams in one year: about 1 in 29,000.
“I’m not sure if people here realize how unlikely this thing really is,” Morris said. “No city is ever going to see anything like this again.”
New York celebrated its 1969-70 sports success with a decade of bankruptcy and rampant crime; Boston’s future appears rosier. Paul Guzzi, president of the Greater Boston Chamber of Commerce, described the economic impact of the region’s sports success as modest, citing added tourism and spending during World Series games, and impact of the Patriots’ new stadium/mall complex in Foxborough.
Terry Francona, the Red Sox manager for both recent World Series titles, said the benefits of winning were probably more spiritual. Francona grew up outside Pittsburgh in the 1970s, and watched the Steelers and the Pirates win championships in 1979.
“The steel mills were shutting down, and Pittsburgh was going to have to change its identity,” Francona recalled. “People were walking around town wearing the black and gold with pride. Winning made people feel better about themselves.”
If Bostonians are feeling sunnier, they do not always show it at the Harp, a watering hole down the street from the TD Banknorth Garden. Katie McAuliffe has tended bar there for six years and she laughed as she considered the difference in fan outlook. “They’re a lot more bold than they used to be,” she said. “They like to break things more now. I think it’s pent-up frustration — like they don’t know how to handle this.”
Indeed, success can demand some emotional recalibration. Sports columnists for The Boston Globe, who for decades could charitably be described as dyspeptic, now must scrounge for material. And even Champagne loses its allure in six-packs.
“When the Red Sox finally won in 2004, the city just went bananas; it was the greatest bachelor party ever,” said Mark Sternman, a researcher for a state government agency, adding that, “2007 was the best party you could have as a married man.”
The Celtics, of course, spent the 1960s as one of sport’s great dynasties, and became dreadful only recently. (Last spring, the team was accused of losing games on purpose so it could finish with the N.B.A.’s worst record and increase its chances of landing the No. 1 or 2 pick in the draft. The Celtics botched that, too.) The Red Sox have been traditionally competitive, just not good enough to outlast the hated Yankees.
The Patriots’ history has been the most pathetic. Beyond frequent 3-13 seasons, their first true home, Schaefer Stadium, opened in 1971 with massive toilet overflows and barely improved thereafter.
Meehan has been a fan through it all. He has held season tickets since 1984, and he said that winning had changed the Patriots fans’ experience. “There are times when you want fans to get up and remind the team that this is a home game,” he said.
Greeley said that Boston fans today expect more of their teams but less of their players. His father once caught a foul ball off the bat of Ted Williams, but threw it back because he, and most of New England, disapproved of Williams’s sulking and apparent selfishness. Fast-forward to today, when the slugger Manny Ramírez is generally shaky on the field and quite flighty off it, but is beloved for this (and his .300 average).
“Manny would never have gotten away with being Manny 40 years ago,” Greeley said. “Nowadays there’s such emphasis on performance. There’s a whole generation that’s growing up now with so much focus on the winning that they may never appreciate the play and the artistry itself. They’re not being trained to appreciate it.”
At Sully’s Tap, not far from the Harp, Jon Megas-Russell did not agree as he nursed a beer at the weathered counter. A devout Boston sports fan and Celtics season-ticket holder, he said that old, rumpled Fenway Park was better than ever thanks to recent renovations (although some complain that rampant advertising has left the Green Monster looking like a Nascar entry). Also worth it, he said, was having to coexist with frivolous front-runners who jump in the marathon only at the end.
“You don’t lose anything by winning, you only add on,” said Megas-Russell, 25, a sales manager from suburban Somerville. “When they win, it validates what you’ve been doing. It puts the city in the limelight in America. People look at the Pilgrims, but we’ve been in the back seat to New York, Los Angeles, Chicago. This brings us back.”
He added: “A true fan takes it when it’s good and takes it when it’s bad. When Tom Brady retires, the Patriots won’t be as good. You have to live in the moment.”
Boston’s moments, for most of the last century, ended in heartbreak — none more poignant than Bill Buckner’s grounder between the legs against the Mets in 1986. The New Yorker writer Roger Angell encapsulated New England’s perpetual and divine grief in a palindrome: “Not so, Boston.”
Yet as the Patriots enter Sunday’s Super Bowl as heavy favorites — over the New York Giants, naturally — to win the city’s sixth championship in seven years, “Not so, Boston” seems as outdated as those Pilgrims. Backward is forward, and Boston is first.
Eli Manning Took Cues From Mother
Olivia and Archie Manning, top right, with their three sons in 1996 at their home in New Orleans. From left, Cooper, Peyton and Eli.
January 29, 2008Eli Manning Took Cues From Mother By KAREN CROUSEBy the time Eli Manning was able to throw a tight spiral, his father Archie’s long drives were confined to America’s highways, the elder Manning’s station as the singular quarterback of the subpar New Orleans Saints winning him a long and lucrative second career as a public speaker.
One day last week in Orlando, Fla., where he was delivering an address that had been arranged months earlier, Archie spoke on his cellphone of the strong parental bond that shaped Manning, the Giants quarterback who is following up his older brother Peyton’s appearance in last year’s Super Bowl.
“Eli and Olivia are certainly very close,” Archie said, referring to his wife and Manning’s mother. “They have that special bond that you see between mamas and their baby boys.”
Manning, who turned 27 this month, is nearly five years younger than Peyton, who guided the Colts to a victory over the Chicago Bears in Super Bowl XLI in Miami. He was born almost seven years after Archie and Olivia’s firstborn, Cooper, whose football career was cut short by a chronic spinal condition that required surgery.
In 1982, Archie was traded to the Houston Oilers from the Saints. He played in Houston and in Minnesota before retiring from football in 1984 after 14 seasons.
Because he was only 3 years old when his father retired, Manning has fewer memories of Archie’s playing days than his brothers. They remember accompanying their dad to practices, getting their own healthy ankles taped by the team trainers and being shoulder to shoulder with N.F.L. behemoths in the whirlpool.
Archie did a fair amount of traveling while Manning was growing up, although he arranged his schedule so he could spend as much time with his sons as possible. Even when Archie was away, as long as Eli’s voluble and kinetic older brothers were around, the family’s house in the Garden District of New Orleans was full of life.
Cooper, 33, was a loud and animated child, the family’s natural-born entertainer. Growing up, he and Peyton, 31, were fiercely competitive, the dining room table becoming another battlefield for their sibling rivalry. Eli was more reserved, like his mother. They would sit largely silent at mealtime, digesting the conversation along with their meals.
“I was always kind of the quiet one, the shy one,” Manning said in a phone interview Saturday after practice, the Giants’ last one in New Jersey before leaving Monday for Phoenix and a date in Super Bowl XLII with the undefeated New England Patriots. “Sitting around the dinner table, Cooper kind of ran the conversation. He and Peyton and my dad were the ones who carried the conversation. Mom and I never got to do a whole lot of talking.”
Olivia, who turned down an interview request out of a desire to remain in the background, ran the household the way Manning runs the Giants’ offense: with quiet authority.
“Growing up,” he said, “we would have been lost and clueless without her. She ran the household and was our biggest supporter.”
Manning grew up in the very long shadow cast by his celebrated father and high-achieving brothers. At the same time, he had the luxury of living a life more akin to an only child starting in the eighth grade, when Peyton left for college.
“We had Eli kind of alone for five years,” Archie said.
It was during high school, Manning said, that he grew especially close to his mother. With Archie away part of most weeks, Manning and Olivia began a ritual of eating dinner out once a week, just the two of them. They had a regular rotation of restaurants: Casamentos for oyster poor boys; Figaro’s for pizza; Joey K’s for creole cooking and catfish.
Between mouthfuls, Manning and his mother shared tidbits of their lives. She grew up in Mississippi and met Archie at Ole Miss, where he was the star quarterback and she was a cheerleader and homecoming queen.
“I got to know more about her,” he said. “She told stories about growing up or about college.” Freed from having to compete with his brothers to be heard, Manning also found his voice. “It kind of helped me get my stories out,” he said.
It was not the first time Manning and his mother had bonded over stories. Long before he learned to read defenses, Manning struggled to decipher Dr. Seuss. “I had trouble reading,” he said.
The inadequacy he felt drove him deeper into his shell. “As a child, it’s embarrassing and frustrating,” Manning said. “They call on students to read out loud in class and it’s one of those deals where you’re praying the whole time that they don’t call on you.”
His mother, he said, was influential in helping him improve his reading so he would not have to repeat first grade. “She worked with me and stayed patient,” Manning said. “Her laid-back attitude and her soft Southern drawl helped me keep calm about it. She’s the one who kept telling me it would all work out and it did.”
Years later, with his reading struggles well behind him, Manning posted a score of 39 out of 50 on the Wonderlic, the intelligence test administered by N.F.L. teams to evaluate draft prospects. It was 11 points higher than Peyton’s score and well above the average.
Manning was dragged to so many of his brothers’ athletic events as a child that Archie thought it might turn him off from sports. Some weekends, Archie would take the older boys to their games and Manning said he would ask if he could stay home with a baby sitter. When that was not possible, he would go shopping with his mom for antiques — anything to avoid sitting through four or five basketball games in a day.
“The first couple of times it wasn’t because I wanted to,” Manning said. “It was just because she wanted to go shopping and there was nobody to watch me, so I had to tag along. But after I went a couple of times, I started to enjoy it.”
Over the years, the antique shops on Magazine Street in New Orleans became as familiar to Manning as his childhood home. He returned to them for pieces to decorate his college apartment at Ole Miss, as well as the apartment in Hoboken, N.J., where he lives during the football season. It is a hobby he has passed on to his fiancée, Abby McGrew, who now joins him when he browses for antiques during the off-season. “Some of Eli’s interests favor Olivia’s more than others,” Archie said, adding, “I’ve always felt my wife had class and a lot more culture than I do, and I’ve seen that rub off on Eli.”
In the playoffs earlier this month, Peyton’s Colts played host to the San Diego Chargers on the same day that Manning’s Giants traveled to Dallas to take on the Cowboys. Archie flew to Indiana and watched Peyton’s team lose to the Chargers. Olivia was in Texas to see Manning outduel Tony Romo in the Giants’ upset victory.
The following week, both parents were in a suite in Green Bay for the National Football Conference title game between the Giants and the Packers. In the waning minutes of the fourth quarter, with the score tied, the television cameras caught Archie with his head buried in his hands.
“For 90 percent of the game I was actually very calm,” he said. “Then, in those last few minutes, something hit me.” He was transported back to his days as a player, to those games when his team played better than its opponent but a bad break here or there cost it a victory. “It seemed like that was what was happening to the Giants,” he said, “and it was hard for me to watch.”
Olivia remained calm, of course. As did her youngest son, who marched the Giants into scoring position twice in the fourth quarter, only to have the team’s kicker, Lawrence Tynes, miss both field-goal attempts. After Tynes made a 47-yarder in overtime to send the Giants to the Super Bowl, Manning came out of the locker room, still dressed in his uniform, and locked eyes with his mom.
“It’s good to see you smiling, honey,” she told him.
Manning was happy, for himself and everybody who stuck by him, starting with his mother. “She had just as much relief,” he said, “as I did.”
Snowstorms in China Kill at Least 24
Nir Elias/ReutersMigrant workers waited at the Shanghai train station on Monday after heavy snow hit the region.
Associated PressTrain passengers in Guangzhou, China. Officials say 78 million have been affected by the snow
January 29, 2008Snowstorms in China Kill at Least 24 SHANGHAI — Severe snowstorms over broad swaths of eastern and central China have wreaked havoc on traffic throughout the country, creating gigantic passenger backups, spawning accidents and leaving at least 24 people dead, according to state news reports.
In many areas, where snow has continued falling for several days, the accumulation has been described as the heaviest in as many as five decades. The impact of the severe weather was complicated by the timing of the storms, which arrived just before the Lunar New Year, or Spring Festival, when Chinese return to their family homes by the hundreds of millions.
On Monday, the government announced a severe weather warning for the days ahead, as forecasts suggested that the snowfall would continue in many areas, including Shanghai, which is unaccustomed to severe winter weather.
“Due to the rain, snow and frost, plus increased winter use of coal and electricity and the peak travel season, the job of ensuring coal, electricity and oil supplies and adequate transportation has become quite severe,” Prime Minister Wen Jiabao said in a statement issued late Sunday.
“More heavy snow is expected,” Mr. Wen warned. “All government departments must prepare for this increasingly grim situation and urgently take action.”
The Ministry of Civil Affairs estimates the direct economic cost of the weather so far to be $3.2 billion and the number of people affected to be 78 million, including 827,000 emergency evacuees.
The country’s transportation problems have been deepened by power brownouts in about half of the 31 provinces. Officials said Monday that the supply of coal for electricity had dropped to 21 million tons, less than half the normal levels at this time of year. As a result, 17 provinces were rationing power by Monday.
The coal supply problems were themselves brought on by the heavy snow, sleet and freezing rain, which caused delays in distribution of the fuel by rail and truck in many regions. China is heavily dependent on domestically produced coal for power.
In Guangzhou, the booming southern industrial city, authorities said they expected as many as 600,000 train passengers to be stranded there by Monday. The police were being deployed around the city’s central railroad station as a precaution to keep order.
Guangzhou is the capital of Guangdong Province, home to millions of migrant laborers from faraway parts of the country lured by the prospect of jobs in assembly plants and other factories. State television showed scenes of would-be travelers milling about the train station, many of them migrants, and warned that food and sanitation facilities were inadequate.
A power failure on Saturday night in Hunan Province was blamed for many of the rail delays, stranding 136 electric trains, scores serving the north-south Beijing-Guangzhou route.
According to Xinhua, the government news agency, about 100 diesel locomotives were sent to help restore the stranded trains to service. Railroad authorities also said that large quantities of rice and meat, as well as 20,000 boxes of instant noodles, had been rushed to the paralyzed trains to feed passengers.
To cope with the crisis, authorities in Guangzhou have ordered a temporary halt to the sale of train tickets and urged migrants from other provinces to spend the Spring Festival in Guangdong Province. At the earliest, normal train service is not expected to resume for three to five days.
Air travel in the country has also been affected, with at least 19 major airports closed Monday and flight schedules severely disrupted at dozens of other airports because of the snowfall. About 10,000 passengers were stranded at Baiyun Airport in Guangzhou after 55 flights were canceled.
For the stranded passengers, there are few alternatives. Long-distance bus travel has also been severely hampered by icy roads and overwhelmed by the huge numbers of passengers.
For safety reasons, Jiangxi Province has halted all provincial bus service. In Jiangsu Province road networks are reportedly all but paralyzed by the heavy snowfall, while in Anhui Province, authorities have closed all public highways as a safety precaution.
In search of the distraction-free desktop.
The Tao of Screen
In search of the distraction-free desktop.
By Jeffrey MacIntyre
Posted Thursday, Jan. 24, 2008, at 4:27 P.M. E.T.
It’s blindingly obvious to note that disarray is one of the defining aspects of the frequent Web user. (I could cite some pertinent statistics, but I don’t trust myself to get back to this word processor window.) Ask any designer: Without white space, humans have difficulty focusing. Chances are, you’re reading this alongside a flurry of other twinkling points of attention splayed across your monitor. But it doesn’t have to be that way. There’s an emerging market for programs that introduce much-needed traffic calming to our massively expanding desktops. The name for this genre of clutter-management software: zenware.The philosophy behind zenware is to force the desktop back to its Platonic essence. There are several strategies for achieving this, but most rely on suppressing the visual elements you’re used to: windows, icons, and toolbars. The applications themselves eschew pull-down menus or hide off-screen while you work. Even if you consider yourself inured to their presence, the theory goes, you’ll benefit most from their absence.
Zenware promises to help the ADHD user who lurks in each of us. But does any of this stuff actually work? As every freelance writer is a trusted authority on the powers of distraction, I decided to put a range of programs through the paces to see if they helped complete my daily computing tasks more punctually and efficiently.
Deep within the steamer trunk of features in this fall’s Mac OS X Leopard update is an innocuous-seeming application called Spaces that is designed to extend desktop real estate. The goal is to parcel your applications into task-specific groups. I use Spaces to divide my desktop into three areas: word processing, spreadsheets, and dashboard-type applications (e-mail, newsreader, and calendar), with each screen a quick keystroke away. (In a winningly antique way of transitioning between tasks, the screens shuttle across like a ball bouncing along a roulette wheel.)I’ve found this approach to screen expansion—making more with less—works nicely, acting as a natural encouragement to concentration and organization. Deep-surfing RSS feeds is my most frequent vice. With this system, when I start reading something I know will blow away my five-minute break, I click to minimize it to my dock for retrieval later. Rather than indulge my worst surfing habits, Spaces encourages fastidiousness. Every time I use Spaces, though, I’m forced to remember VirtueDesktops, an antecedent application for the Mac that allowed a greater range of configurability. (As old-school Unix and newer Windows users can crow, virtual desktops have been around the PC market for years.)
The most common zenware programs are the mini-apps that act to quiet the desktop in tiny ways. Widely available for PC or Macintosh, they variously dim the menu bar, highlight or isolate an active window, darken an inactive one, or minimize inactive applications completely. Most of these are niche-marketed to microscopic groups with particular screen annoyances; in combination, they are all a bit much.In trying out these various widgets, I learned that some zenware holds unexpected benefits. One program I tried, called Spirited Away—the PC equivalent is Swept Away—works by automatically hiding any program that’s been sitting on your screen unused. Unfortunately, this feature assumes that you’re always staying on task. If you get distracted and, say, start surfing RSS feeds, the pressing tasks that you’re supposed to be working on drift away to help you focus on your procrastination. Even so, I’ve stuck with Spirited Away because it enforces a happy habit: alertness to the task at hand. If one of my important windows disappears, I know it’s time to start working again.
If the word processors WriteRoom (Mac) and DarkRoom (PC) are any indication, the virtues of the zenware approach shine brightest when it comes to full applications. Almost immediately upon starting up WriteRoom, I felt a kind of aesthetic arousal normal people reserve for, say, tattoos or kung fu movies.
Part of this is nostalgia, as WriteRoom tosses its user into a monochrome void that’s lit only by the blinking green cursor. But the true charm here is the configurability of the user interface, which allows you to craft an ideal composition space. The key is that, unlike in Word, the choices are kept shrewdly off-screen: WriteRoom’s blank slate reduces the urge to twiddle with margins and other formatting gewgaws. Instead, I find myself forgoing cosmetic changes for more functional ones, like bumping up the type size when my office window light starts to falter.
Unlike practically everything else in our digital lives, WriteRoom’s minimalist interface implies a truly flattering proposition: It’s you, not the software, that matters. After repeated use, I found a pure joy in writing that my computer mainstays—from basic notepad apps to Word—had siphoned away years before. Part of this could be novelty, so I’m remaining cautious. I can’t quite say it’s made me a better writer, but then neither can any technology. But WriteRoom has me composing more quickly, and it’s brought back the elemental thrill of assembling thoughts by tossing words onto the screen. As outrageous and premature as it sounds, programs like WriteRoom could have the kind of impact for this generation that The Elements of Style had for another, by distilling down the writing process and laying bare its constituent parts.A little screen simplification can go a long way. For those keeping score, the computer is supposed to be the thing with the electrical plug, not the wired drone operating it. So try dialing down the Twittering itch for a moment and see where it leads you. The pundits have told us about the dangers of info glut and data smog, how our screens are accumulating noisy riots of data. But with zenware, the cure is right at hand—for those who really want it.
Jeffrey MacIntyre is a Canadian freelance journalist in New York.
-
Giants,Patriots,Brain Theory,McLaren, Prostate Cancer,Magna Carta
The Way We Live Now What is Magna Carta worth
Michael Nagle
January 6, 2008The Way We Live Now Keeping It Real By JAMES GLEICKWhat is Magna Carta worth? Exactly $21,321,000. We know because that’s what it fetched in a fair public auction at Sotheby’s in New York just before Christmas. Twenty-one million is, by far, the most ever paid for a page of text, and therein lies a paradox: Information is now cheaper than ever and also more expensive.
Mostly, of course, information is practically free, easier to store and faster to spread than our parents imagined possible. In one way, Magna Carta is already yours for the asking: you can read it any time, at the touch of a button. It has been preserved, photographically and digitally, in countless copies with no evident physical reality, which will nonetheless last as long as our civilization. In another way, Magna Carta is a 15-by-17-inch piece of parchment, fragile and scarce and practically unreadable. Why should that version be so valuable?
Magna Carta itself is a nice reminder of how costly it once was to store and spread information. Its very purpose was to get the king’s word down in tangible form, safeguard it, enshrine it and then get it out to the countryside. In 13th-century England this required the soaking, stretching, scraping and drying of sheepskin to make vellum, the preparation of ink from oak galls and painstaking penmanship by professional quill-wielding scribes. Then copies had to be made the same way — there was no other — for dispatch to county seats and churches, where they were read aloud.
At that point the value of Magna Carta resided in its words: their meaning and their very real political force, beginning with King John’s greetings in 1215 to “his archbishops, bishops, abbots, earls, barons, justices, foresters, sheriffs, stewards, servants and to all his officials and loyal subjects” and continuing with a message never before heard — a setting of limits on the power of the state. It made a grant of rights and liberties to all free men, irrevocably and forever, at least in theory. The document didn’t just express that grant or represent it or certify it. The document was the grant — “given by our hand in the meadow that is called Runnymede.”
The value of the particular item sold at Sotheby’s eight centuries later is entirely different. It’s a kind of illusion. We can call it magical value as opposed to meaningful value. It’s like the value acquired by one baseball when Bobby Thomson batted it out of the Polo Grounds. A physical object becomes desirable, precious, almost holy, by common consensus, on account of a history — a story — that is attached to it. (If it turns out you’ve got the wrong baseball, the value vanishes just as magically.)
The $21 million Magna Carta is actually a copy, made in 1297. In fact, it is surely a copy of a copy, with errors and emendations introduced along the way. And yet it is also an original: issued officially and afresh in the name of King Edward I. Sotheby’s reckons that 17 “original exemplars” from the 13th century survive today, most preserved in England’s libraries and cathedrals. Hundreds more have been lost — to rats, fire and reuse as scrap paper.
Even as a copy, it’s one of a kind. “It was like someone said ‘Mona Lisa,’ ” explained the previous purchaser (Ross Perot, 1984, $1.5 million). In advance of the sale, Sotheby’s called Magna Carta “a lamp in the darkness, a glowing talisman of our human condition, a sacred icon of our human history.” Just so. It’s magic. Religious relics, like the Shroud of Turin, gleam invisibly with the same magic. On a smaller scale so do autographs, coins, rare photographs, Stradivari violins (unless you think you can recognize the tonal quality of 300-year-old wood) and clothing off the backs of celebrities, like the spare wedding dress (ivory silk taffeta) that Diana might have worn but didn’t (2005, $175,000).
All these artifacts share the quality that Philip K. Dick, in his 1962 novel “The Man in the High Castle,” calls historicity, which is “when a thing has history in it.” In the book, a dealer in antiquities holds up two identical Zippo lighters, one of which supposedly belonged to Franklin D. Roosevelt, and says: “One has historicity, a hell of a lot of it. As much as any object has ever had. And one has nothing. Can you feel it? … You can’t. You can’t tell which is which. There’s no ‘mystical plasmic presence,’ no ‘aura’ around it.”
Back in the real world, in 1996, Sotheby’s sold a humidor that had belonged to John F. Kennedy for $574,500. It had historicity.
Of course, more people can afford rarities — rarities are a bigger business than ever — now that being a billionaire doesn’t even guarantee a spot in the Forbes 400. Magna Carta’s buyer, David M. Rubenstein, a founder of the Carlyle Group, was No. 165 last year with a reported fortune of $2.5 billion. He plans to return the document to public view at the National Archives, which has had it on display, along with other iconic texts like the Emancipation Proclamation, the Marshall Plan and the Apollo 11 flight plan.
But the growth in the ranks of the superrich does not explain the hypertrophy in magical value. Just when digital reproduction makes it possible to create a “Rembrandt” good enough to fool the eye, the “real” Rembrandt becomes more expensive than ever. Why? Because the same free flow that makes information cheap and reproducible helps us treasure the sight of information that is not. A story gains power from its attachment, however tenuous, to a physical object. The object gains power from the story. The abstract version may flash by on a screen, but the worn parchment and the fading ink make us pause. The extreme of scarcity is intensified by the extreme of ubiquity.
James Gleick, the author, most recently, of “Isaac Newton,” is working on a book about the history of information.
Dow Plunges More Than 300 Points on Grim Outlook
January 17, 2008Dow Plunges More Than 300 Points on Grim Outlook Stock markets plunged on Thursday as investors confronted a troubling manufacturing report and new indications of the depth of subprime losses and housing woes. The Dow Jones industrial average lost more than 300 points.
The Standard and Poor’s 500-stock index, a broad measure of the financial markets, tumbled below its low for last year, set in March. At the close, it was down 2.9 percent after giving up early morning gains, bringing its decline since Jan. 1 to 9.2 percent.
The Dow Jones industrial average ended down 306.95 points, or 2.5 percent, at 12,159.21, and the technology-heavy Nasdaq composite index was off 2 percent.
A dismal report on manufacturing activity caught investors by surprise on Thursday morning, sending the main indexes into the red after an early stint in positive territory.
The Federal Reserve reported that a survey of Philadelphia-area manufacturers contracted much more than expected. A similar drop in the index occurred in early 2001, just before the onset of the last recession.
“Basically every day now, you have more and more investors leaning toward the camp that yes, this is going to be a recession, and it could be a severe one,” said David Kovacs, a quantitative investment strategist at Turner Investment Partners in Berwyn, Pa.
Recession fears have been roiling the market of late, sending the S.& P. down 8 percent since the beginning of the year.
In testimony in Washington on Thursday, Ben S. Bernanke, the Fed chairman, reiterated recent warnings about an imminent drop-off in consumer spending. Mr. Bernanke also hinted that the Fed would lower interest rates, perhaps by half a point, at its meeting later this month, saying that the central bank would “stand ready to take substantive additional action as needed to support growth.”
Investors usually react favorably to evidence of a rate cut, but they appeared unimpressed by Mr. Bernanke’s promise to support a fiscal stimulus package to prop up the ailing economy.
“By the time they actually pass anything, it will be past the time we need it,” said James Paulsen, a strategist at Wells Capital Management, who echoed some of the skepticism on Wall Street about the plan.
Other analysts said the chairman was leaning on the government in lieu of aggressively cutting rates. “The market is frustrated with Bernanke,” Mr. Kovacs said. “Bernanke said it would be nice to have an economic stimulus package to help him with his fight. You didn’t see Greenspan asking for help.”
Regardless of where that help comes from, investors agree that the economy could use a shot of adrenaline. Anxieties were stoked again on Thursday by the release of yet another round of bad data on the housing industry. Groundbreakings for new homes fell last month to their slowest pace in 16 years, the government said, and economists expect the market to soften well into the middle of this year.
Meanwhile, traders were reminded that the fallout from last year’s subprime collapse is still spreading. Merrill Lynch, which ousted its chief executive in the wake of substantial losses from the troubled mortgage market, reported a $9.8 billion loss for the fourth quarter, the worst performance in company history.
The news came on the back of similar write-downs at Citigroup, which was also badly hurt by bad bets on soured mortgage-backed securities. Investors are worried that Wall Street write-downs will make banks less willing to lend, a trend that would cut off a primary source of lifeblood for the economy.
“It’s compounding investors’ fears about how widespread the losses really are,” said Hayes Miller, an analyst at Baring Asset Management in Boston.
Still, some analysts said that jaded investors may have been unfazed by Merrill’s loss, which reiterated much of what market watchers already know about problems at the big Wall Street banks. The poor housing report may have been met by a similarly sleepy reaction, analysts said, who noted that too much bad news can sometimes leave investors numb.
Crude oil slipped 71 cents, settling at $90.13 a barrel, in trading on the New York Mercantile Exchange. The yield on the 10-year Treasury note, which moves opposite to its price, ticked down slightly.
The euro was up slightly against the dollar, and the price of gold fell after several days of gains.
Imagine a World Without Apple, Bloggers, Google or Dell
January 17, 2008From the Desk of David Pogue Imagine a World Without Apple, Bloggers, Google or Dell By DAVID POGUEAs long-time “From the Desk…” readers are no doubt aware, I spent the first ten years out of college working on Broadway as an arranger and conductor, killing time while trying to make my way as a composer/lyricist. Those days are long gone now, but from time to time, I still scratch my songwriting itch by writing new words to old melodies.
This week, I’m at the Macworld Expo in San Francisco. At a gathering of user-group members on Monday, I tried out a new song parody. It was inspired by a comment somebody made about how electronics and the Internet are now completely meshed into the fabric of our society. What would it be like if it all went away?
Grab your piano and sing along!
Imagine (sung to the tune of John Lennon’s “Imagine”)
Imagine there’s no Apple,
No products that begin with “i,”
No monthly iPod models,
No Apple stores to get you high.
Imagine all the people
Finding other things to do!Imagine there’s no bloggers…
It isn’t hard to do!
No viruses or spyware,
No weekly Windows patches, too
Imagine all the people
Learning to get a life…(You-hoo-hoo!)
You may say it’d be a nightmare
Without Google, Mac or Dell
We might have real conversations–
But the world would be dull as hell!Imagine no new cellphones;
Kiss console games goodbye.
No David Pogue or Mossberg
To tell us what to buy.
Imagine all the people
Getting some exercise!(You-hoo-hoo!)
You may say that I’m a loony
But rest assured I’m almost done.
I’m pretty sure it’ll never happen
So we nerds can live as one!Crisis? Maybe He’s a Narcissistic Jerk
Ruth Gwily
January 15, 2008Mind Crisis? Maybe He’s a Narcissistic Jerk By RICHARD A. FRIEDMAN, M.D.With the possible exception of “the dog ate my homework,” there is no handier excuse for human misbehavior than the midlife crisis.
Popularly viewed as a unique developmental birthright of the human species, it supposedly strikes when most of us have finally figured ourselves out — only to discover that we have lost our youth and mortality is on the horizon.
No doubt about it, life in the middle ages can be challenging. (Full disclosure: I’m 51.) What with the first signs of physical decline and the questions and doubts about one’s personal and professional accomplishments, it is a wonder that most of us survive.
Not everyone is so lucky; some find themselves seized by a seemingly irresistible impulse to do something dramatic, even foolish. Everything, it appears, is fair game for a midlife crisis: one’s job, spouse, lover — you name it.
I recently heard about a severe case from a patient whose husband of nearly 30 years abruptly told her that he “felt stalled and not self-actualized” and began his search for self-knowledge in the arms of another woman.
It was not that her husband no longer loved her, she said he told her; he just did not find the relationship exciting anymore.
“Maybe it’s a midlife crisis,” she said, then added derisively, “Whatever that is.”
Outraged and curious, she followed him one afternoon and was shocked to discover that her husband’s girlfriend was essentially a younger clone of herself, right down to her haircut and her taste in clothes.
It doesn’t take a psychoanalyst to see that her husband wanted to turn back the clock and start over. But this hardly deserves the dignity of a label like “midlife crisis.” It sounds more like a search for novelty and thrill than for self-knowledge.
In fact, the more I learned about her husband, it became clear that he had always been a self-centered guy who fretted about his lost vigor and was acutely sensitive to disappointment. This was a garden-variety case of a middle-aged narcissist grappling with the biggest insult he had ever faced: getting older.
But you have to admit that “I’m having a midlife crisis” sounds a lot better than “I’m a narcissistic jerk having a meltdown.”
Another patient, a 49-year-old man at the pinnacle of his legal career, started an affair with an office colleague. “I love my wife,” he said, “and I don’t know what possessed me.”
It didn’t take long to find out. The first five years of his marriage were exciting. “It was like we were dating all the time,” he recalled wistfully. But once they had a child, he felt an unwelcome sense of drudgery and responsibility creep into his life.
Being middle-aged had nothing to do with his predicament; it was just that it took him 49 years to reach a situation where he had to seriously take account of someone else’s needs, namely those of his baby son. In all likelihood, the same thing would have happened if he had become a father at 25.
Why do we have to label a common reaction of the male species to one of life’s challenges — the boredom of the routine — as a crisis? True, men are generally more novelty-seeking than women, but they certainly can decide what they do with their impulses.
But surely someone has had a genuine midlife crisis. After all, don’t people routinely struggle with questions like “What can I expect from the rest of my life?” or “Is this all there is?”
Of course. But it turns out that only a distinct minority think it constitutes a crisis. In 1999, the MacArthur Foundation study on midlife development surveyed 8,000 Americans ages 25 to 74. While everyone recognized the term “midlife crisis,” only 23 percent of subjects reported having one. And only 8 percent viewed their crisis as something tied to the realization that they were aging; the remaining 15 percent felt the crisis resulted from specific life events. Strikingly, most people also reported an increased sense of well-being and contentment in middle age.
So what keeps the myth of the midlife crisis alive?
The main culprit, I think, is our youth-obsessed culture, which makes a virtue of the relentless pursuit of self-renewal. The news media abound with stories of people who seek to recapture their youth simply by shedding their spouses, quitting their jobs or leaving their families. Who can resist?
Most middle-aged people, it turns out, if we are to believe the definitive survey.
Except, of course, for the few — mainly men, it seems — who find the midlife crisis a socially acceptable shorthand for what you do when you suddenly wake up and discover that you’re not 20 anymore.
Richard A. Friedman is a professor of psychiatry at Weill Cornell Medical College.
2007 World Formula 1 Driving Championship Results
..> ..>
Driver Nationality Team Points 1 Kimi Räikkönen Finnish Ferrari 110 2 Lewis Hamilton British McLaren-Mercedes 109 3 Fernando Alonso Spanish McLaren-Mercedes 109 4 Felipe Massa Brazilian Ferrari 94 5 Nick Heidfeld German BMW 61 6 Robert Kubica Polish BMW 39 7 Heikki Kovalainen Finnish Renault 30 8 Giancarlo Fisichella Italian Renault 21 9 Nico Rosberg German Williams-Toyota 20 10 David Coulthard British Red Bull-Renault 14 11 Alexander Wurz Austrian Williams-Toyota 13 12 Mark Webber Australian Red Bull-Renault 10 13 Jarno Trulli Italian Toyota 8 14 Sebastian Vettel German STR-Ferrari 6 15 Jenson Button British Honda 6 16 Ralf Schumacher German Toyota 5 17 Takuma Sato Japanese Super Aguri-Honda 4 18 Vitantonio Liuzzi Italian STR-Ferrari 3 19 Adrian Sutil German Spyker-Ferrari 1 20 Rubens Barrichello Brazilian Honda 0 21 Scott Speed USA STR-Ferrari 0 22 Kazuki Nakajima Japanese Williams-Toyota 0 23 Anthony Davidson British Super Aguri-Honda 0 24 Sakon Yamamoto Japanese Spyker-Ferrari 0 25 Christijan Albers Dutch Spyker-Ferrari 0 ..>..>26 Markus Winkelhock Generation Me vs. You Revisited
The Bridgeman Art Library/Getty ImagesAN EARLY FACEBOOK Some question whether a rise in self-awareness is a myth, like Narcissus, right
January 17, 2008Generation Me vs. You Revisited IN each of the following pairs, respondents are asked to choose the statement with which they agree more:
a) “I have a natural talent for influencing people”
b) “I am not good at influencing people”
a) “I can read people like a book”
b) “People are sometimes hard to understand”
a) “I am going to be a great person”
b) “I hope I am going to be successful”
These are some of the 40 questions on a popular version of the Narcissistic Personality Inventory. It may seem like a just-for-kicks quiz on par with “Which Superhero Are You?” but the test is commonly used by social scientists to measure narcissistic personality traits. (Choosing the first statement in any of the above pairings would be scored as narcissistic.)
Conventional wisdom, supported by academic studies using the Narcissistic Personality Inventory, maintains that today’s young people — schooled in the church of self-esteem, vying for spots on reality television, promoting themselves on YouTube — are more narcissistic than their predecessors. Heck, they join Facebook groups like the Association for Justified Narcissism. A study released last year by the Pew Research Center for the People and the Press dubbed Americans age 18 to 25 as the “Look at Me” generation and reported that this group said that their top goals were fortune and fame.
“Anything we do that’s political always falls flat,” said Ricky Van Veen, 27, a founder and the editor in chief of CollegeHumor.com, a popular and successful Web site. “It doesn’t seem like young people now are into politics as much, especially compared to their parents’ generation. I think that could lend itself to the argument that there is more narcissism and they’re more concerned about themselves, not things going on around them.”
Yet despite exhibiting some signs of self-obsession, young Americans are not more self-absorbed than earlier generations, according to new research challenging the prevailing wisdom.
Some scholars point out that bemoaning the self-involvement of young people is a perennial adult activity. (“The children now love luxury,” Plato wrote 2,400 years ago. “They have bad manners, contempt for authority; they show disrespect for elders and love chatter in place of exercise.”) Others warn that if young people continue to be labeled selfish and narcissistic, they just might live up to that reputation.
“There’s a self-fulfilling prophecy,” said Kali H. Trzesniewski, an assistant professor of psychology at the University of Western Ontario. Ms. Trzesniewski, along with colleagues at the University of California, Davis, and Michigan State University, will publish research in the journal Psychological Science next month showing there have been very few changes in the thoughts, feelings and behaviors of youth over the last 30 years. In other words, the minute-by-minute Twitter broadcasts of today are the navel-gazing est seminars of 1978.
Ms. Trzesniewski said her study is a response to widely publicized research by Jean Twenge, an associate professor of psychology at San Diego State University, who along with colleagues has found that narcissism is much more prevalent among people born in the 1980s than in earlier generations. Ms. Twenge’s book title summarizes the research: “Generation Me: Why Today’s Young Americans Are More Confident, Assertive, Entitled — and More Miserable Than Ever Before” (2006, Free Press).
Ms. Twenge attributed her findings in part to a change in core cultural beliefs that arose when baby-boom parents and educators fixated on instilling self-esteem in children beginning in the ’70s. “We think feeling good about yourself is very, very important,” she said in an interview. “Well, that never used to be the case back in the ’50s and ’60s, when people thought about ‘What do we need to teach young people?’ ” She points to cultural sayings as well — “believe in yourself and anything is possible” and “do what’s right for you.” “All of them are narcissistic,” she said.
“Generation Me” inspired a slew of articles in the popular press with headlines like “It’s all about me,” “Superflagilistic, Extra Egotistic” and “Big Babies: Think the Boomers are self-absorbed? Wait until you meet their kids.”
Ms. Twenge is working on another book with W. Keith Campbell of the University of Georgia, this one tentatively called “The Narcissism Epidemic.”
However, some scholars argue that a spike in selfishness among young people is, like the story of Narcissus, a myth.
“It’s like a cottage industry of putting them down and complaining about them and whining about why they don’t grow up,” said Jeffrey Jensen Arnett, a developmental psychologist, referring to young Americans. Mr. Arnett, the author of “Emerging Adulthood: The Winding Road From the Late Teens through the Twenties” (2004, Oxford University Press), has written a critique of Ms. Twenge’s book, which is to be published in the American Journal of Psychology.
Scholars including Mr. Arnett suggest several reasons why the young may be perceived as having increased narcissistic traits. These include the personal biases of older adults, the lack of nuance in the Narcissistic Personality Inventory, changing social norms, the news media’s emphasis on celebrity, and the rise of social networking sites that encourage egocentricity.
Richard P. Eibach, an assistant professor of psychology at Yale, has found that exaggerated beliefs in social decline are widespread — largely because people tend to mistake changes in themselves for changes in the external world. “Our automatic assumption is something real has changed,” Mr. Eibach said. “It takes extra thought to realize that something about your own perspective or the information you’re receiving may have changed.”
Ms. Trzesniewski gave as an example of this bias a scene from the film “Knocked Up,” in which new parents drive their baby home from the hospital at a snail’s pace. The road, of course, is no more or less dangerous than before the couple became mother and father. But once they make that life transition, they perceive the journey as perilous.
Indeed, the transition to parenthood, increased responsibility and physical aging are examples of changes in individuals that tend to be the real sources of people’s perceptions of the moral decline of others, write Mr. Eibach and Lisa K. Libby of Ohio State University in a psychology book chapter exploring the “ideology of the Good Old Days,” to be published by Oxford University Press later this year. (They also report that perceptions of social decline tend to be associated with conservative attitudes.)
Ms. Twenge and Ms. Trzesniewski used the inventory in their studies, though they chose different data sets and had opposite conclusions. Each said their data sets were better than the other’s for a host of reasons — all good, but far too long to list here. Ms. Twenge, who has read Ms. Trzesniewski’s critique, said she stands by her own nationwide analysis and has a comprehensive response, along with another paper, forthcoming in the Journal of Personality. It reads in part, “their critique ultimately strengthens our case that narcissism has risen over the generations among college students.”
Mr. Arnett dismisses tests like the inventory. “They have very limited validity,” he said. “They don’t really get at the complexity of peoples’ personality.” Some of the test choices (“I see myself as a good leader”) “sound like pretty normal personality features,” he said.
Ms. Twenge said she understands that sentiment but that the inventory has consistently proved to be an accurate measure. (She calls it “the boyfriend test.”) “There’s a fair number of personality tests that when you look at them they may seem odd, but what’s important is what they predict,” she said.
Test or no test, Mr. Arnett worries that “youth bashing” has become so common that accomplishments tend to be forgotten, like the fact that young people today have a closer relationship with their parents than existed between children and their parents in the 1960s (“They really understand things from their parents’ perspective,” Mr. Arnett said), or that they popularized the alternative spring break in which a student opts to spend a vacation helping people in a third world country instead of chugging 40s in Cancún.
“It’s the development of a new life stage between adolescence and adulthood,” Mr. Arnett said. “It’s a temporary condition of being self-focused, not a permanent generational characteristic.”
Copyright 2008 The New York Times CompanyFaith, Freedom and Bling in the Middle East By MAUREEN DOWD
Fred R. Conrad/The New York TimesMaureen Dowd
January 16, 2008Op-Ed Columnist Faith, Freedom and Bling in the Middle East By MAUREEN DOWDRIYADH, Saudi Arabia
As a Saudi soldier with a gold sword high-stepped in front of him, President Bush walked slowly beside King Abdullah through the shivery gray mist enveloping the kingdom, following the red carpet leading from Air Force One to the airport terminal.
When the two stepped onto the escalator, the president tenderly reached for the king’s hand, in case the older man needed help. He certainly does need help, but not the kind he is prepared to accept.
It took Mr. Bush almost his entire presidency to embrace diplomacy, but now that he’s in the thick of it, or perhaps the thin of it — given his speed-dating approach to statesmanship — he is kissing and holding hands with kings, princes, emirs, sheiks and presidents all over the Arab world and is trying to persuade them that he is not in a monogamous relationship with the Jews.
His message boiled down to: Iran bad, Israel good, Iraq doing better.
Blessed is the peacemaker who comes bearing a $30 billion package of military aid for Israel and a $20 billion package of Humvees and guided bombs for the Arabs.
Like the slick Hollywood guy in “Annie Hall” who has a notion that he wants to turn into a concept and then develop into an idea, W. has resumed his mantra of having a vision that turns into freedom that could develop into global democracy.
W.’s peace train quickly gave way to the warpath, however, with Mr. Bush devoting a good chunk of time to the unfinished war in Iraq and the possibility of a war with Iran.
In meetings with leaders, he privately pooh-poohed the National Intelligence Estimate asserting that Iran had halted its nuclear weapons program in 2003. On Fox News, he openly broke with intelligence analysts, telling Greta Van Susteren about Iran: “I believe they want a weapon, and I believe that they’re trying to gain the know-how as to how to make a weapon under the guise of a civilian nuclear program.”
Less than a week after the president arrived in the Middle East, three violent eruptions — an Israeli raid killing at least 18 Palestinians, 13 of whom were militants; an American Embassy car bombing in Beirut; and a luxury hotel suicide-bombing in Kabul — underscored how Sisyphean a task he has set for himself.
“This is one of the results of the Bush visit,” said Mahmoud Zahar, a Hamas leader, as he went to a Gaza hospital to see the body of his son, a militant killed in the battle. “He encouraged the Israelis to kill our people.”
Arab TV offered an uncomfortable juxtaposition: Al Arabiya running the wretched saga of Gaza children suffering from a lack of food and medicine during the Israeli blockade, blending into the wretched excess scenes of W. being festooned with rapper-level bling from royal hosts flush with gazillions from gouging us on oil.
W.’s 11th-hour bid to save his legacy from being a shattered Iraq — even as the Iraqi defense minister admitted that American troops would be needed to help with internal security until at least 2012 and border defense until at least 2018 — recalled MTV’s “Cribs.”
At a dinner last night in the king’s tentlike retreat, where the 8-foot flat-screen TV in the middle of the room flashed Arab news, the president and his advisers Elliott Abrams and Josh Bolten went native, lounging in floor-length, fur-lined robes, as if they were Peter O’Toole and Omar Sharif.
In Abu Dhabi, Sheik Khalifa bin Zayed al-Nahyan gave the president — dubbed “the Wolf of the Desert” by a Kuwaiti poet — a gigantic necklace made of gold, diamonds, rubies and emeralds, so gaudy and cumbersome that even the Secret Service agent carrying it seemed nonplussed. Here in Saudi Arabia, the king draped W. with an emerald-and-ruby necklace that could have come from Ali Baba’s cave.
Time’s Massimo Calabresi described the Kuwaiti emir’s residence where W. dined Friday as “crass class”: “Loud paintings of harems and the ruling Sabah clan hang near Louis XVI enameled clocks and candlesticks in the long hallways.”
In Abu Dhabi, the president made a less-than-rousing speech about democracy while staying in the less-than-democratic Emirates Palace hotel’s basketball-court-size Ruler’s Suite — an honor reserved for royalty and W. and denied to Elton John, who is coming later this month to play the Palace.
The president’s grandiose room included a ballroom, in case Mr. Bush wanted to practice the tribal sword dancing he has been rather sheepishly doing with some of his hosts, something between Zorba and Zorro. The $3 billion, seven-star, 84,114-square-foot pink marble hotel — said to be the most expensive ever built — would make Trump blush. It glistens with 64,000 square feet of 22-carat gold leaf, 1,000 chandeliers, 20,000 roses changed every day, 200 fountains, a dome higher than St. Peter’s, an archway larger than the Arc de Triomphe, a beach with white sand shipped in from Algeria and a private heliport. The rooms, scattered with rose petals, range from $1,598 to $12,251.
Puddle jumping through Arabia, the president saw his share of falcons in little leather hoods — presumably not a Gitmo reference — and Arabian stallions, including one retired stud from Texas — presumably not a W. reference. But there was a distinct dearth of wives and dissidents.
It does not bode well for the president’s ability to push the Israelis and Palestinians that he has done so little to push Musharraf on catching Osama, despite our $10 billion endowment, or the Saudis on women’s rights and human rights, even with the $20 billion arms package.
At a press conference last night, the Saudi foreign minister, Prince Saud al-Faisal, was asked what the president and king had discussed about human rights.
“About what?” the prince repeated flatly.
“Human rights,” Condi prompted.
“Human rights?” the stately prince pondered, before shimmying out of the question.
Though W. has made the issue of the progress of women in the Middle East a central part of “the freedom agenda” — he had a roundtable over the weekend with Kuwaiti women on democracy and development — he doesn’t seem bothered that 17 years after his father protected the Saudis when Saddam invaded Kuwait, Saudi women still can’t drive or publicly display hair or skin and still get beheaded and lashed because of archaic laws. Neither does the female secretary of state of the United States.
“It’s not allowed for ladies to use the gym,” the Marriott desk clerk told me, an American woman in an American franchise traveling with an American president.
W. was strangely upbeat throughout the trip — “Dates put you in a good mood, right?” he joked to reporters yesterday, specifying that he meant the fruit — even though back home the Republican candidates were running from him and clinging to Reagan.
The Saudi big shots I talked to were intrigued that W. is now more in the sway of Condi than Bombs Away Cheney. They admire his intention about making peace, even though they’re skeptical that he has the time or competence to do it; and they’re sure that the Israelis need more of a shove than a nudge.
They are also dubious about his attempts to demonize and isolate Iran.
“We don’t need America to dictate our enemies to us, especially when it’s our neighbor,” said an insider at the Saudi royal court. The Saudis invited the Iranian president, I’m-a-Dinner-Jacket, to their hajj pilgrimage last month.
Saudis and Palestinians grumbled that they find it hard to listen to the president’s high-flown paeans to democracy when he only acknowledges his brand of democracy. When Hamas, Hezbollah and the Muslim Brotherhood won elections, W. sought to undermine them. The results of the elections were certainly troubling, but is democratization supposed to be about outcomes?
They also think W.’s plan cancels itself out. The Israelis don’t have to stop settlements if rockets are coming in from Gaza, and Abbas, the Palestinian president, can’t stop rockets from going out of an area he does not control.
The president who described himself at Galilee as “a pilgrim” makes peace sound as easy as three faiths sharing, when history has shown that the hardest thing on earth is three faiths sharing.
Asked by ABC’s Terry Moran what he was thinking when he stood on the site where Jesus performed miracles at the Sea of Galilee, W. replied: “I reflected on the story in the New Testament about the calm and the rough seas, because it was on those very seas that the Lord was in the boat with the disciples, and they were worried about the waves and the wind, and the sea calmed. That’s what I reflected on: the calm you can find in putting your faith in a higher power.”
Clearly, the man believes in miracles.
$300 to Learn Risk of Prostate Cancer
Today’s Papers
Stimulating Problems
By Daniel Politi
Posted Thursday, Jan. 17, 2008, at 6:03 A.M. E.T.The New York Times leads, and the rest of the papers mention, word that Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke is expected to throw his support behind the idea of an economic stimulus package when he goes before Congress today. He’s not going to say which plan he likes best, but has told lawmakers that even if it boosts the federal deficit, a stimulus package could be useful if it quickly increases spending and is temporary. But the Washington Post‘s lead notes that actually reaching a bipartisan agreement on a stimulus package will be anything but easy, particularly since presidential politics is now added to the usual mix of lobbyist pressure and ideological disagreements. The Los Angeles Times sees things a little differently and is somewhat more optimistic that party leaders will be able to put differences aside to reach an agreement.
USA Today leads with a look at how a federal law that prohibits states from regulating employee benefits is providing an obstacle to measures that seek to provide universal health care. Many of the plans being pushed by states and communities have been met by lawsuits because they force employers to either provide health coverage or pay a fee. Courts are reaching different conclusions and some think the issue will eventually have to be resolved by the Supreme Court. The Wall Street Journal leads its world-wide newsbox with a look at how Sen. John McCain is counting on the military vote to win South Carolina’s primary.
Even though lawmakers don’t need Bernanke’s permission to pass any kind of stimulus package, the NYT makes clear that many would be reluctant to act “without the chairman’s blessing.” Bernanke’s approval also means that lawmakers can work with the Fed to figure out the right balance of stimulus and lower interest rates. Yesterday, the Fed released its “beige book,” a compilation of anecdotal reports from the 12 regional banks, which said holiday sales were “generally disappointing.”
Meanwhile, there is no shortage of ideas on what should be included in the stimulus package, and lobbyists from a vast array of industries are flooding Capitol Hill to make sure they get a little piece of the action. The Post reports that the staffer in charge of keeping track of lobbyist requests currently has a growing list that “exceeds two dozen significant ideas.” Meanwhile, as the presidential candidates keep discussing their plans on the campaign trail, Democratic lawmakers are increasingly concerned that whichever plan gets approved could end up helping one candidate over another. With the wide-ranging mix of opinions, it’s no surprise that some Democratic leaders fear the whole exercise could quickly become a “runaway train,” says the Post.
But while the Post sees the presidential candidates weighing in on the economy as a potential obstacle, the LAT says that since the issue is being constantly mentioned by White House hopefuls in both parties, a compromise seems likely. Many lawmakers seem to agree that failing to do anything would be bad for both parties. “Not having an agreement is a lose-lose,” House Minority Leader John Boehner said. Both the LAT and WSJ say that in order to reach an agreement, Republicans are likely to give up hopes of making President Bush’s tax cuts permanent and Democrats will be open to the idea of cutting social spending as well as drop the rule that requires new spending to be offset with revenue increases or cuts in the budget.
So all this talk about a stimulus package means everyone agrees that something has to be done to avoid a recession, right? Not so fast, says the LAT in the second part of its double-story lead on the economy. Some analysts are convinced that the problems in Wall Street won’t translate to the wider economy and worry that the federal government will pass measures that are too expensive and ultimately unnecessary. At least part of the disagreement seems to be due to the fact that while the economic downturn is definitely real for some industries and areas of the country, it’s hardly all-encompassing, says the Post. The Fed’s “beige book” reported that some industries are doing rather well and while a group of analysts see signs that the economic woes will soon spread, others aren’t so sure. There’s particular concern that continued cuts in interest rates coupled with a stimulus package could lead to increased inflation by, as the LAT so eloquently puts it, “providing too much juice for the economy.”
The NYT fronts, and everyone mentions, that McCain is facing personal attacks in South Carolina, including one from a group that claims the senator cooperated with the enemy during his POW days. But as opposed to eight years ago, when the failure of his campaign to answer these kinds of attacks is widely believed to have cost him a victory in the state, he has now launched a “truth squad” to aggressively fire back. In a separate story inside, the NYT points out that while the attacks against McCain may be particularly harsh and well-organized, he’s hardly the only candidate who has to deal with dirty politics in South Carolina.
Everyone notes that Rep. Pete Hoekstra, the top Republican on the House intelligence committee, said that it seems the CIA official who authorized the destruction of the interrogation tapes “got direction to make sure the tapes were not destroyed.” Hoekstra’s comments came after a closed session where the committee heard testimony from the CIA’s top lawyer.
The NYT reefers, and the WSJ goes high with, a new report that says the makers of the most popular antidepressants misled doctors and patients about the effectiveness of their drugs because they failed to publish about a third of their trials and selectively published the favorable results.
The Post reports that Tribune employees received a new handbook outlining policies for the workplace now that real estate mogul Sam Zell has taken over the company. “Rule 1: Use your best judgment,” which the handbook calls “the one hard and fast rule” that applies to all others. For example, rule 5.1: “Under Rule 1, you may want to think twice before you enter into an intimate relationship with a co-worker. When you start, it might seem like a good idea. It’s when you stop, or the wrong people find out (and they will) that you could discover that perhaps it wasn’t.”
Daniel Politi writes “Today’s Papers” for Slate. He can be reached at todayspapers@slate.com.Spears’ Spree Sends Paparazzi to Pokey by Gina Serpe
A swarm of Britney Spears’ omnipresent shutterbugs has just been swatted by the cops.
Four paparazzi were arrested Wednesday and booked for reckless driving after Los Angeles police witnessed firsthand the dangerous lengths lensmen go to to chronicle the singer’s every move.
At roughly 11:20 p.m. in Mission Hills, California, police pulled over a fleet of paparazzi-powered vehicles, all of which were hot on Spears’ trail, after spotting the pack driving evasively at high speeds, following the singer’s car too closely and making a series of unsafe lane changes. A quartet of her pursuers was arrested on the spot and booked into Van Nuys jail.
Which, apparently, was not quite the desired result.
LAPD officers also pulled over Spears, who was behind the wheel of her white Mercedes-Benz at the time. She was briefly interviewed and released after the police verified her hard-earned California driver’s license.
However, Spears’ constant sidekick Sam Lutfi told E! News‘ Ryan Seacrest Thursday morning that the singer, who has a well-documented affinity for certain members of the paparazzi, did not want to see the four photographers carted away.
Lutfi said that while speaking with cops, Spears tried to prevent the paparazzi from getting arrested, though the officers didn’t take to the celebrity intervention.
But while the night was over for four of Spears’ shutterbugs, it was still young for the “Gimme More” warbler herself.
Spears and Lutfi continued on with their late-night excursion, making a pit stop at a Studio City grocery store, which she left at roughly 1 a.m. with a cartful of bagged goods.
After switching rides from the Benz to a black Escalade, sources tell E! News that at roughly 2 a.m. (a timeline since disputed by Lutfi), the duo headed over to the trendy Beverly Hills boutique Kitson.
The store, which closed hours earlier, opened solely for Spears and her burgeoning entourage: Lutfi, security man Mark Chinapen, who orchestrated the late-night logistics, new hanger-on Chad Hardcastle and Danish fashion executive Claus Hjemblak, who owns the Scandinavian Style Mansion where Spears celebrated her birthday last month. Curiously absent from the mix was paparazzo pal Adnan Ghalib.
What happened between the arrival of the Spears crew at the boutique for some retail therapy and the time she left an hour later is still up for debate.
Sources told E! News that the singer, who was shielded throughout her excursion by Chinapen, walked around the store naked save for a pair of fishnet stockings, before making off with $30,000 worth of comped designer goods. But Lutfi said in his on-air chat with Seacrest Thursday that the singer never went native during her spree.
“No, that never happened,” he told Seacrest via phone call from Spears’ home.
“We all went shopping, I think we went a little crazy. We all got something,” he said, adding that the trip came about out of “mostly boredom.”
Hardcastle, the newest addition to Spears’ fleet of rotating pals, was also present at Spears’ home Thursday morning. As for his role in the high-profile entourage, Hardcastle told Seacrest he was “still trying to figure it out myself…we’re all in love here…No, just a friend of Sam’s.”
Spears also made a cameo during the phone call—briefly speaking to Seacrest from her bedroom shower.
“Get out, I’m naked, get out!” the suddenly modest celeb yelled. “I stink, ’cause I’m a human being. Shut the door, I’m nasty.”
Lutfi then addressed the most recent round of rumors to plague Spears, starting with the paparazzi snaps of her and Ghalib perusing pregnancy tests at a Los Angeles Rite Aid this week.
“I don’t know what the hell that was,” he said. “I don’t know if they even bought one. I think they were just f—king around.”
Asked if Spears actually thought she was pregnant: “No, no, no, no, no, no.”
Lutfi also denied ramped-up tabloid reports that the pop star was looking to settle down with Ghalib, saying she does “not at all” want more kids right now and that it’s “not true” she had plans to tie the knot with her paparazzo suitor.
As for the kids she has with Kevin Federline, Lutfi said she will see them “hopefully very soon” despite court orders to the contrary.
“She’s just got some appointments and doctor meetings, you know, that she’s got to handle…Everything’s fine. She’s back on track. She’s handling it.”
—Additional reporting by Ken Baker
- Copyright 2008 E! Entertainment Television, Inc. All rights reserved.
Inside the Giants: There’s Cold and Then There Is Green Bay
January 17, 2008, 1:59 pmInside the Giants: There’s Cold and Then There Is Green Bay
By John Branch
Tags: giants, Jeremy Shockey, Packers, playoffs, Tom Coughlin
The Giants better hurry and get to Green Bay, because the temperature forecast for Sunday night’s game keeps falling. They are practicing outside at Giants Stadium, where the temperature is 38 degrees. It feels kind of cold. Now, just take that and subtract, oh, about 35 degrees and add a few snow flurries. That is what conditions are expected to be at Lambeau Field.
Plaxico Burress at practice Thursday. (Julie Jacobson/Associated Press)
Predict: N.Y. Giants vs. Green Bay
Analysis: Inside the PlaybookSome of the Giants were talking on Wednesday about playing the Packers in short sleeves. That led to some obvious questions, mainly: “Why?” And, “Are you out of your mind?” Funny, most of the Giants at practice today – remember, 38 degrees – are wearing long sleeves. Some are wearing those ski-mask hoods under their helmets.
The Giants have named honorary captains for Sunday’s game. The first is Tiki Barber.
Just kidding! We’ve heard a lot of people ask about Barber, the retired running back who has been battered by his former legions of fans for being some sort of traitor or something. There might be some truth to the fact that this team has better chemistry this year, but that has more to do with an underdog, “all-Joes” sensibility (one made even stronger with the loss of Jeremy Shockey) that has propelled this team.
It is a bit of revisionist history to suggest that Barber’s teammates were against him last year; many, actually, loved the fact that he was willing to stand up to Tom Coughlin, who was not nearly as popular in 2006 as he is today.
The actual honorary captains are Harry Carson and U.S. Army Lt. Col. Greg Gadson. Most know Carson as the former linebacker, now in the Hall of Fame. Hard-core fans might remember hearing about Gadsen early in the season, when he gave a pre-game speech to
New York Times. 2008
2:00 PM - 0 Comments – 0 Kudos – Add Comment – Edit - Remove
Ferrari industrial espionage saga
T
he FIA has officially called an end to the long-running McLaren-Ferrari industrial espionage saga, but only after McLaren Racing
issued a humbling apology, and undertook not to pursue specific
development programmes which, the FIA suspects, were influenced
by Ferrari information.
As a result of a 21-page report by the FIA Technical Department.
into the possible use of Ferrari intellectual property in the 2008
McLaren MP4-23. FIA president Max Mosley had scheduled an
extraordinary WMSC hearing for 14 February. A negative outcome
there could have cost Vodafone McLaren Mercedes its 2008
season, but the team’s capitulation led Mosley to cancel it.
The FIA had first signalled its intention to investigate the 2008
McLaren when the US$100 million fine was handed down
in Paris on 13 September. However, the investigation did not
VOLTE FACE
McLaren Racing acknowledged that Ferrari’s information had penetrated further into its
systems than it had previously realised, but secured its 2008 Formula One
programme by issuing a public apology
By ADAM COOPER
This investigation did not commence until after the Brazilian Grand Prix on 21 October, 2007.
It was led by Charlie Whiting, with support from forensic IT
experts from Deloitte & Touche whose role, the FIA said,
was “to assist in gathering, indexing and collating documents,
including those held on McLaren computer systems”. The FIA
also called on legal personnel from Sidley Austin to assist with
interviews with McLaren engineering staff. Both companies
signed confidentiality agreements.
Initially, the investigation focused on 14 areas where McLaren
was suspected of having benefited from Ferrari information. After
Formula One Technical Delegate Jo Bauer visited Maranello on 21
November, however, and Woking the following day, that list was
further trimmed so that the investigation concentrated on the new
McLaren’s wheelbase dimension and brake balance systems, and
on the use of CO2 to inflate its tyres.
Analysis: McLaren Racing & The FIA
The variable brake balance system was perhaps the key issue. It had
already been discussed at length in September in relation to McLaren
test driver Pedro de la Rosa’s communications with Mike Coughlan
about what Ferrari was running [see The Paddock No3 and No5].
Quoted in a part of the September World Motor Sport Council
transcript that was not correctly redacted at the time, Coughlan
believed the Ferrari system to be based on a “double rear master
cylinder with a spring” which initially delayed rear braking, then
increased it gradually. Rosa also revealed that McLaren had tried to
achieve the same effect via the use of a valve.
The Ferrari system is operated by a ‘quickshift’ lever in the cockpit
and, as was suggested in September, works via a two-stage or ‘fast
fill’ master cylinder. Both those aspects were pinpointed by the FIA
as having been ‘borrowed’ by McLaren from Ferrari. The British
team still disputes the Italian as the source of its inspiration, but
the report brought new evidence that, at the very least, cast some
doubt over McLaren’s development of a variable brake balance.
Most notably, on 3 May – just five days after his trip to Spain, where
he picked up the infamous 780 pages – Coughlan called a meeting
of senior engineers specifically to discuss brake balance systems.
The report made the key observation that this was also “inconsistent
with how McLaren previously described Coughlan’s role as being
an implementer, not a strategist”.
The report revealed that, after the Coughlan saga kicked off on 3
July, a “senior management figure” gave the instruction that the
system should not be incorporated onto the 2007 car at that stage.
Later an email from a “senior McLaren engineer” contained the
statement: “I’m not hopeful that we will run this until after the FIA
agro [sic] is over.”
The use of carbon dioxide for tyre inflation was also discussed at
length in September, again in relation to emails involving Rosa. At
the time, the team dismissed the subject as being largely irrelevant,
but the FIA found new evidence to suggest that the use of the gas
by Ferrari was widely discussed in the McLaren camp, and even
tested, although without positive results.
It was well known that Ferrari had extended its wheelbase in an
attempt to deal with the harder ‘spec’ tyres of 2007, but McLaren
had precise knowledge of the exact figure, although the team’s
engineers dispute how they obtained it. Crucially, another email
from a “senior engineer” asked a colleague whether the information
came from the “mole” – that is, Ferrari’s Nigel Stepney, who
was known to have tipped off McLaren about the suspect floor
mounting arrangement on the Ferrari F2007 prior to the Australian
Grand Prix. The 2008 McLaren will have a longer wheelbase, but
the FIA report accepted that this was not necessarily a direct result
of its possession of Ferrari information.
On their own, the individual soundbites did not seem to be worth
that much when reviewing the report – the CO2 and wheelbase
discussions resulted from single pieces of information communicated
from Stepney to Coughlan by word of mouth, and were nothing to
do with the infamous 780 pages of Ferrari data. But it all added up,
certainly as far as the FIA was concerned. And the variable brake
balance system was the smoking gun for which the FIA had been
searching, since it directly linked Coughlan (after the matter of the
780 pages) with the development of the 2008 car.
The report was officially issued on 5 December, two days
before before the regular Monaco WMSC meeting at which
the subject was to be discussed. That same day, McLaren COO
Martin Whitmarsh wrote to Mosley and the WMSC members.
In essence, his letter admitted that Ferrari information had
penetrated deeper into the McLaren Technical Centre than had
previously been acknowledged.
Whitmarsh’s letter stated: “While with great respect to the authors
of the report, we do not agree with all of the conclusions that
have been drawn following this most impressively thorough and
daunting investigation into the engineering processes of McLaren
Racing. We accept the central conclusion that some pieces of
Ferrari information may have been disclosed via Nigel Stepney and
Mike Coughlan, directly or indirectly to individuals within McLaren
other than Pedro de la Rosa and Fernando Alonso.
“It is a matter of deep regret for us that our understanding of the
facts has improved as a result of the FIA inspection rather than
our own prior investigations. We apologise unreservedly if our
prior ignorance of some of these facts has misled the World Motor
Sport Council and we can only assure you all that this was never
our intention.
“We must nonetheless accept that our own investigations into
this matter were insufficient, although we would ask you to have
regard to the fact that such investigations were conducted during
a highly intense racing season and under significant time pressure.
As a result, our investigations focused most strongly on satisfying
ourselves that no Ferrari confidential information had been used
directly or indirectly on the 2007 and 2008 cars.”
The letter went on to detail the scope of the FIA inquiry: “The
investigating team interviewed 20 key engineers, accessed
22 personal computers belonging to key members of the
organisation, and retrieved by computer search 1.4 terabytes of
data stored on the central computer systems of McLaren Racing
(this latter data is equivalent to approximately 75 million sheets
of A4 typed information).”
Whitmarsh insisted that the report still did not prove that McLaren
had used Ferrari information: “We would respectfully suggest,
however, that despite our embarrassment that pieces of Ferrari
information may have penetrated our organisation beyond our
previous belief, the inspection has not reached any conclusion that
McLaren used Ferrari confidential information on the 2007 or 2008
car (subject to issues as to the deployment of ‘quickshift’, ‘fast fill’ or
CO2 as a tyre gas for 2008, in respect of which see below).
“We do, however, accept that the inspection provides some support
for the conclusion that is set out in paragraph 8.11 of the WMSC’s
decision of 13 September 2007. In particular that “a number of
McLaren employees… were in unauthorised possession of… Ferrari
technical information” for which we have been most severely
punished. However, it does not establish that the information in
question was used on the 2007 or 2008 car.”
With regard to the upcoming 7 December WMSC meeting,
Whitmarsh made an extraordinary plea for leniency, conceding
that the team had suffered commercial difficulties as a result of its
damaged reputation: “We respectfully request that the members
of the Council consider the significant disruption that has occurred
within the team as a consequence of this matter. While McLaren has
a strong partnership with Mercedes-Benz, which supplies its engines,
it is still an independent team which is responsible for the generation
of the majority of its own budget for the design and development of
the chassis and the subsequent operation of the cars.
“Therefore, apart from the morale sapping consequence within the
team, its ability to continue its task of generating investment, as I
am sure anyone can imagine, has been made virtually impossible.
Consequently the long term damage to the team’s previously
outstanding record and commercial capability is significantly
greater than that potentially envisaged by the fiscal penalty that
was previously imposed upon the team.”
Crucially, Whitmarsh confirmed that the team would stop
development in the three critical areas highlighted by the report.
In concluding, he referred to Mosley’s recent interview in The
Paddock No7: “We would respectfully ask that, in the light of
this and the fact that it is reasonable to assume now that all of the
damaging facts have been presented, it may be appropriate and
also incidentally in the interests of Formula One generally, to bring
an urgent conclusion to this affair.
“Towards that end, we would like to express our willingness, despite
not agreeing with the findings, to enter into discussion with the FIA
Technical Department as to a moratorium of an appropriate length
in respect of the use of ‘quickshift’, ‘fast fill’ or CO2 as a tyre gas.
“We trust that the seriousness with which we regard this matter is
apparent from this letter and that it gives you confidence that we
will do everything in our power to avoid any repetition of these
events. We have reflected on these matters carefully and critically
and in particular on the comments made by the FIA president to
the effect that, had we contacted Jean Todt as soon as we were
aware of the ‘whistleblowing’ information coming from Stepney,
these matters could all have been avoided.
“Moving forward, we would like to reassure the Council that we
have put in place procedures to prevent further recurrences of such
conduct and would like to offer to the FIA, if this of interest, to open
a dialogue whereby McLaren would make every effort to try and
improve its relationship with the FIA.
“We apologise wholeheartedly once more that it has taken the
intervention of the FIA and a time-consuming process to expose
all of the facts emanating from this matter, but we hope that when
the Council members have had time to consider the circumstances
surrounding this case and the pressures that have been placed upon
McLaren during our investigations, that our lapses in this respect
are at least partially excusable.”
The letter was seen by the WMSC members only at the very last
minute, and initially it seemed to have had little effect. When
Mosley emerged from the meeting, he revealed that, having
considered the report, the WMSC had called McLaren to attend a
further hearing into the 2008 car in February. He clearly regarded
it as a very serious matter.
“We very much hoped that the investigation of McLaren would
be an end of the matter,” Mosley told The Paddock. “But, as you
will have gathered, it isn’t – or wasn’t. We’ve received a report
that makes it necessary to have another hearing. We wouldn’t have
another hearing and go through all this again, and bring people
from all over the world, unless there was good reason.”
In September, Mosley had made it clear that he personally did
not want to make a distinction between McLaren’s Drivers and
Constructors points, but that the WMSC members had decided
that they did not want to ruin a gripping World Championship
Consequently only the team lost its points. This time, it was
apparent that the McLaren drivers would also suffer if any penalty
was applied, as Molsey explained: “If there was any negative finding
about 2008, and it’s a very big ‘if’, it would apply to everybody. It
would only be based on an unfair advantage, and that applies to
both, which what my view was in the last case. I was wrong, as it
turned out, for the championship.”
Mosley insisted that 14 February was the earliest available date: “It
was [selected] to avoid clashes with various different events, but to
do it as quickly as possible and as long as possible before the start
of the season.”
It seemed at first that McLaren would have to sweat it out for
nine weeks but, in fact, things began to move quickly behind
the scenes. McLaren’s letter (the contents of which had not
yet been revealed to the outside world) and its promise that it
would address the contentious areas had made an impact. For
several days, lawyers on both sides discussed a solution and
how it would be presented to the media. Then, on 13 December,
McLaren not only published Whitmarsh’s letter in full, but also
attached it to a press statement that read as follows: “As a result
of the investigations carried out by the FIA, it has become clear
that Ferrari information was more widely disseminated within
McLaren than was previously communicated. McLaren greatly
regrets that its own investigations did not identify this material
and has written to the World Motor Sport Council to apologise
for this.
“McLaren has written a letter to the FIA which, in the interests of
transparency, it is publishing with this press statement. That letter
speaks for itself and the sentiments expressed in it are sincerely
held by McLaren. McLaren has also written to the World Motor
Sport Council to apologise that it has taken an FIA investigation
to find this information and have expressed our deep regret that
our understanding of the facts was improved as a result of the
FIA inspection rather than our own investigations. McLaren has
recognised that this entire situation could have been avoided if
we had informed Ferrari and the FIA about Nigel Stepney’s first
communication when it came to our attention. We are, of course,
embarrassed by the successive disclosures and have apologised
unreservedly to the FIA World Motor Sport Council.
“To avoid even the possibility of Ferrari information influencing our
performance during 2008, McLaren has offered a set of detailed
undertakings to the FIA which will impose a moratorium on
development in relation to three separate systems. During the course
of these incidents, McLaren has conducted a thorough review of its
policies and procedures regarding the recruitment and management
of staff. The proposals arising from this thorough review have been
disclosed to the FIA and McLaren has agreed to demonstrate that all
of these policies and procedures have been fully implemented.
“McLaren wish to make a public apology to the FIA, Ferrari, the
Formula One community and to Formula One fans throughout the
world, and offer their assurance that changes are now being made
which will ensure that nothing comparable to what has taken place
will ever happen again. McLaren has also agreed to pay the costs
incurred by the FIA for their investigation.
“McLaren now wishes to put these matters behind it and to move
forward, focusing on the 2008 season.”
As had been already agreed, the FIA responded within hours. A
statement said that, in the light of McLaren’s response to the report,
Mosley would ask the WMSC members to cancel the February
hearing. After a vote, confirmation of the cancellation came
five days later, on 18 December. In between, McLaren officially
confirmed the signing of Heikki Kovalainen, a deal that presumably
had been in limbo until the team’s future had become clearer.
It seems that the affair really has come to a conclusion, at least as
far as the FIA is concerned. However, Ferrari was quick to point out
that legal and civil cases are still pending. On 13 December, the
team issued the following statement in Maranello: “The written and
verbal statements issued by senior McLaren personnel, both at the
World Council meetings of 26 July and 13 September, and through
the media, have thus been publicly proved wrong. Therefore it is
admitted that confidential information which was the property of
Ferrari was disseminated within the structure of the English team
and this also confirms the seriousness of the behaviour of those
involved over the past few months.
“In the light of McLaren’s apology and the guarantees it has
presented, Ferrari respects the proposal of the FIA president to
cancel the extraordinary general meeting of the WSMC scheduled
for 14 February, thus bringing this incident to a close from a sporting
point of view. However, it is confirmed that criminal actions under
way in Italy and civil ones in England are still continuing.”
It will be fascinating to see to if the admissions made in the
Whitmarsh’s letter and the McLaren press statement have any effect
on those proceedings. In the meantime, McLaren has planned a
conspicuously low-key launch of its 2008 racecar.
Copyright 2008. All Rights reserved
Tuesday, January 15, 2008
Patriots Get a Big Break. Or Do They?
Doug Pensinger/Getty ImagesLaDainian Tomlinson, who had criticized the Patriots, was hurt Sunday and may not be at full strength for the A.F.C. title game.
January 14, 2008Patriots Get a Big Break. Or Do They? New England Patriots Coach Bill Belichick was watching just like everyone else Sunday when the game of the year went up in smoke, when the team regarded as the Patriots’ biggest roadblock to another Super Bowl title was eliminated.
As a bonus for him, on the San Diego sideline in Indianapolis was a most welcome sight for any coach about to face the San Diego Chargers: LaDainian Tomlinson standing there, his knee injured enough to keep him out of the second half of the Chargers’ 28-24 victory over the Colts in an American Football Conference divisional playoff game.
With the defending Super Bowl champion Colts, whose rivalry with the Patriots has colored more than a few postseason games this decade, out of the playoffs, the Patriots will play host to the Chargers next Sunday in the A.F.C. championship game. It figures to be a much less heated game than if the Colts had advanced.
The Patriots found their run defense Saturday night in their divisional game against the Jacksonville Jaguars, holding Fred Taylor and Maurice Jones-Drew to 66 yards combined.
Now the team that least needs a break could receive a gift, a conference championship game against Tomlinson, the N.F.L.’s premier running back, who may be at less than full strength, and against quarterback Philip Rivers, whose knee was banged up enough that he did not play in the Chargers’ final two drives Sunday. There is a chance neither will play.
“Going out on the road and winning in Indianapolis shows what kind of mental toughness they have,” Belichick said Sunday in a conference call. “We know we’re going to have to play our best game of the year. We’ll prepare for everybody. As we saw today, any number of players could be in the game.”
The Chargers and the Patriots have their own checkered history. They played in the divisional round in San Diego last season, and it was the Patriots’ victory that ushered Marty Schottenheimer into unemployment. But that game was also notable for the sour reaction of several Chargers, including Tomlinson, to the Patriots’ celebration on the field. Tomlinson said the Patriots showed no class and indicated he thought they took their cues from their coach.
After the Patriots’ spying scandal early this season, Tomlinson said that they lived by the credo, “If you’re not cheating, you’re not trying.”
Poking Superman in the chest is never a good idea, and the Patriots quieted Tomlinson in the second week of the season, only days after Belichick and the Patriots were sanctioned for the videotaping incident. The question then was whether the Patriots would be distracted. They have been answering ever since, constructing a 17-0 record as they try to become the second N.F.L. team to complete a perfect season with a Super Bowl title.
The Patriots, playing emotionally in support of Belichick, crushed the Chargers that night, 38-14, but plenty has changed since then. The Chargers’ defense has found itself — just ask the Colts — and San Diego has run off eight consecutive victories to get to the conference championship round.
“We’ll start all over on our preparations with them, almost like it’s a new team,” Belichick said. “That was such a long time ago. I think the most important thing for us to focus on is what the Chargers have done in the last couple of months.”
What they did against the Colts may draw particular attention. The Chargers were able to pass for 312 yards, with Rivers and Billy Volek under center. Toward the end of the season, the Patriots’ secondary had some trouble stopping the best passing games — the Giants‘ Eli Manning had the game of his life in the regular-season finale — and the Patriots struggled to stop David Garrard on Saturday night, allowing him to complete 22 of 33 passes for 278 yards and 2 touchdowns. Garrard’s lone mistake, which was turned into an interception by safety Rodney Harrison, secured the victory for the Patriots.
The Patriots were in the A.F.C. championship game last year, too, which for most franchises would mean a very good season. For the Patriots, though, the loss to the Colts was the impetus for a furious remake of the receiving corps that has lifted the Patriots’ offense into the stratosphere. Now it is the Chargers, mocked in the first half of the season and stunning in the second, who will have to grapple with what the Colts wrought with a shot at the Super Bowl on the line.
“The thing about it now is none of it matters,” Patriots quarterback Tom Brady said Saturday night. “For 17 games, it all comes down to this. We were here last year. I hope we perform better.”
Big Brain Theory: Have Cosmologists Lost Theirs?
Holly Stevenson
Holly StevensonJanuary 15, 2008Big Brain Theory: Have Cosmologists Lost Theirs? It could be the weirdest and most embarrassing prediction in the history of cosmology, if not science.
If true, it would mean that you yourself reading this article are more likely to be some momentary fluctuation in a field of matter and energy out in space than a person with a real past born through billions of years of evolution in an orderly star-spangled cosmos. Your memories and the world you think you see around you are illusions.
This bizarre picture is the outcome of a recent series of calculations that take some of the bedrock theories and discoveries of modern cosmology to the limit. Nobody in the field believes that this is the way things really work, however. And so in the last couple of years there has been a growing stream of debate and dueling papers, replete with references to such esoteric subjects as reincarnation, multiple universes and even the death of spacetime, as cosmologists try to square the predictions of their cherished theories with their convictions that we and the universe are real. The basic problem is that across the eons of time, the standard theories suggest, the universe can recur over and over again in an endless cycle of big bangs, but it’s hard for nature to make a whole universe. It’s much easier to make fragments of one, like planets, yourself maybe in a spacesuit or even — in the most absurd and troubling example — a naked brain floating in space. Nature tends to do what is easiest, from the standpoint of energy and probability. And so these fragments — in particular the brains — would appear far more frequently than real full-fledged universes, or than us. Or they might be us.
Alan Guth, a cosmologist at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology who agrees this overabundance is absurd, pointed out that some calculations result in an infinite number of free-floating brains for every normal brain, making it “infinitely unlikely for us to be normal brains.” Welcome to what physicists call the Boltzmann brain problem, named after the 19th-century Austrian physicist Ludwig Boltzmann, who suggested the mechanism by which such fluctuations could happen in a gas or in the universe. Cosmologists also refer to them as “freaky observers,” in contrast to regular or “ordered” observers of the cosmos like ourselves. Cosmologists are desperate to eliminate these freaks from their theories, but so far they can’t even agree on how or even on whether they are making any progress.
If you are inclined to skepticism this debate might seem like further evidence that cosmologists, who gave us dark matter, dark energy and speak with apparent aplomb about gazillions of parallel universes, have finally lost their minds. But the cosmologists say the brain problem serves as a valuable reality check as they contemplate the far, far future and zillions of bubble universes popping off from one another in an ever-increasing rush through eternity. What, for example is a “typical” observer in such a setup? If some atoms in another universe stick together briefly to look, talk and think exactly like you, is it really you?
“It is part of a much bigger set of questions about how to think about probabilities in an infinite universe in which everything that can occur, does occur, infinitely many times,” said Leonard Susskind of Stanford, a co-author of a paper in 2002 that helped set off the debate. Or as Andrei Linde, another Stanford theorist given to colorful language, loosely characterized the possibility of a replica of your own brain forming out in space sometime, “How do you compute the probability to be reincarnated to the probability of being born?”
The Boltzmann brain problem arises from a string of logical conclusions that all spring from another deep and old question, namely why time seems to go in only one direction. Why can’t you unscramble an egg? The fundamental laws governing the atoms bouncing off one another in the egg look the same whether time goes forward or backward. In this universe, at least, the future and the past are different and you can’t remember who is going to win the Super Bowl next week.
“When you break an egg and scramble it you are doing cosmology,” said Sean Carroll, a cosmologist at the California Institute of Technology.
Boltzmann ascribed this so-called arrow of time to the tendency of any collection of particles to spread out into the most random and useless configuration, in accordance with the second law of thermodynamics (sometimes paraphrased as “things get worse”), which says that entropy, which is a measure of disorder or wasted energy, can never decrease in a closed system like the universe.
If the universe was running down and entropy was increasing now, that was because the universe must have been highly ordered in the past.
In Boltzmann’s time the universe was presumed to have been around forever, in which case it would long ago have stabilized at a lukewarm temperature and died a “heat death.” It would already have maximum entropy, and so with no way to become more disorderly there would be no arrow of time. No life would be possible but that would be all right because life would be excruciatingly boring. Boltzmann said that entropy was all about odds, however, and if we waited long enough the random bumping of atoms would occasionally produce the cosmic equivalent of an egg unscrambling. A rare fluctuation would decrease the entropy in some place and start the arrow of time pointing and history flowing again. That is not what happened. Astronomers now know the universe has not lasted forever. It was born in the Big Bang, which somehow set the arrow of time, 14 billion years ago. The linchpin of the Big Bang is thought to be an explosive moment known as inflation, during which space became suffused with energy that had an antigravitational effect and ballooned violently outward, ironing the kinks and irregularities out of what is now the observable universe and endowing primordial chaos with order.
Inflation is a veritable cosmological fertility principle. Fluctuations in the field driving inflation also would have seeded the universe with the lumps that eventually grew to be galaxies, stars and people. According to the more extended version, called eternal inflation, an endless array of bubble or “pocket” universes are branching off from one another at a dizzying and exponentially increasing rate. They could have different properties and perhaps even different laws of physics, so the story goes.
A different, but perhaps related, form of antigravity, glibly dubbed dark energy, seems to be running the universe now, and that is the culprit responsible for the Boltzmann brains.
The expansion of the universe seems to be accelerating, making galaxies fly away from one another faster and faster. If the leading dark-energy suspect, a universal repulsion Einstein called the cosmological constant, is true, this runaway process will last forever, and distant galaxies will eventually be moving apart so quickly that they cannot communicate with one another. Being in such a space would be like being surrounded by a black hole.
Rather than simply going to black like “The Sopranos” conclusion, however, the cosmic horizon would glow, emitting a feeble spray of elementary particles and radiation, with a temperature of a fraction of a billionth of a degree, courtesy of quantum uncertainty. That radiation bath will be subject to random fluctuations just like Boltzmann’s eternal universe, however, and every once in a very long, long time, one of those fluctuations would be big enough to recreate the Big Bang. In the fullness of time this process could lead to the endless series of recurring universes. Our present universe could be part of that chain.
In such a recurrent setup, however, Dr. Susskind of Stanford, Lisa Dyson, now of the University of California, Berkeley, and Matthew Kleban, now at New York University, pointed out in 2002 that Boltzmann’s idea might work too well, filling the megaverse with more Boltzmann brains than universes or real people.
In the same way the odds of a real word showing up when you shake a box of Scrabble letters are greater than a whole sentence or paragraph forming, these “regular” universes would be vastly outnumbered by weird ones, including flawed variations on our own all the way down to naked brains, a result foreshadowed by Martin Rees, a cosmologist at the University of Cambridge, in his 1997 book, “Before the Beginning.”
The conclusions of Dr. Dyson and her colleagues were quickly challenged by Andreas Albrecht and Lorenzo Sorbo of the University of California, Davis, who used an alternate approach. They found that the Big Bang was actually more likely than Boltzmann’s brain.
“In the end, inflation saves us from Boltzmann’s brain,” Dr. Albrecht said, while admitting that the calculations were contentious. Indeed, the “invasion of Boltzmann brains,” as Dr. Linde once referred to it, was just beginning.
In an interview Dr. Linde described these brains as a form of reincarnation. Over the course of eternity, he said, anything is possible. After some Big Bang in the far future, he said, “it’s possible that you yourself will re-emerge. Eventually you will appear with your table and your computer.”
But it’s more likely, he went on, that you will be reincarnated as an isolated brain, without the baggage of stars and galaxies. In terms of probability, he said, “It’s cheaper.”
You might wonder what’s wrong with a few brains — or even a preponderance of them — floating around in space. For one thing, as observers these brains would see a freaky chaotic universe, unlike our own, which seems to persist in its promise and disappointment.
Another is that one of the central orthodoxies of cosmology is that humans don’t occupy a special place in the cosmos, that we and our experiences are typical of cosmic beings. If the odds of us being real instead of Boltzmann brains are one in a million, say, waking up every day would be like walking out on the street and finding everyone in the city standing on their heads. You would expect there to be some reason why you were the only one left right side up.
Some cosmologists, James Hartle and Mark Srednicki, of the University of California, Santa Barbara, have questioned that assumption. “For example,” Dr. Hartle wrote in an e-mail message, “on Earth humans are not typical animals; insects are far more numerous. No one is surprised by this.”
In an e-mail response to Dr. Hartle’s view, Don Page of the University of Alberta, who has been a prominent voice in the Boltzmann debate, argued that what counted cosmologically was not sheer numbers, but consciousness, which we have in abundance over the insects. “I would say that we have no strong evidence against the working hypothesis that we are typical and that our observations are typical,” he explained, “which is very fruitful in science for helping us believe that our observations are not just flukes but do tell us something about the universe.”
Dr. Dyson and her colleagues suggested that the solution to the Boltzmann paradox was in denying the presumption that the universe would accelerate eternally. In other words, they said, that the cosmological constant was perhaps not really constant. If the cosmological constant eventually faded away, the universe would revert to normal expansion and what was left would eventually fade to black. With no more acceleration there would be no horizon with its snap, crackle and pop, and thus no material for fluctuations and Boltzmann brains.
String theory calculations have suggested that dark energy is indeed metastable and will decay, Dr. Susskind pointed out. “The success of ordinary cosmology,” Dr. Susskind said, “speaks against the idea that the universe was created in a random fluctuation.”
But nobody knows whether dark energy — if it dies — will die soon enough to save the universe from a surplus of Boltzmann brains. In 2006, Dr. Page calculated that the dark energy would have to decay in about 20 billion years in order to prevent it from being overrun by Boltzmann brains.
The decay, if and when it comes, would rejigger the laws of physics and so would be fatal and total, spreading at almost the speed of light and destroying all matter without warning. There would be no time for pain, Dr. Page wrote: “And no grieving survivors will be left behind. So in this way it would be the most humanely possible execution.” But the object of his work, he said, was not to predict the end of the universe but to draw attention to the fact that the Boltzmann brain problem remains.
People have their own favorite measures of probability in the multiverse, said Raphael Bousso of the University of California, Berkeley. “So Boltzmann brains are just one example of how measures can predict nonsense; anytime your measure predicts that something we see has extremely small probability, you can throw it out,” he wrote in an e-mail message.
Another contentious issue is whether the cosmologists in their calculations could consider only the observable universe, which is all we can ever see or be influenced by, or whether they should take into account the vast and ever-growing assemblage of other bubbles forever out of our view predicted by eternal inflation. In the latter case, as Alex Vilenkin of Tufts University pointed out, “The numbers of regular and freak observers are both infinite.” Which kind predominate depends on how you do the counting, he said..
In eternal inflation, the number of new bubbles being hatched at any given moment is always growing, Dr. Linde said, explaining one such counting scheme he likes. So the evolution of people in new bubbles far outstrips the creation of Boltzmann brains in old ones. The main way life emerges, he said, is not by reincarnation but by the creation of new parts of the universe. “So maybe we don’t need to care too much” about the Boltzmann brains,” he said.
“If you are reincarnated, why do you care about where you are reincarnated?” he asked. “It sounds crazy because here we are touching issues we are not supposed to be touching in ordinary science. Can we be reincarnated?”
“People are not prepared for this discussion,” Dr. Linde said.
Giants Make the Leap to Lambeau
Jessica Rinaldi/ReutersGiants receiver Amani Toomer (81) scored on a 52-yard touchdown reception in the first quarter.
January 14, 2008Giants 21, Cowboys 17 Giants Make the Leap to Lambeau By JOHN BRANCHIRVING, Tex. — In the days before their divisional playoff game with the Cowboys, the Giants were leery of raising the ire of their highly favored opponent and undermining their own quiet, underdog status. But they could not help but point out the perceived discrepancy in talent between the teams. The Cowboys had 12 players named to next month’s Pro Bowl. The Giants had one.
“It’s like an all-Pro team versus an all-Joe team,” Giants linebacker Antonio Pierce said Thursday. And he seemed to relish the perception.
Facing a big-name, big-play offense standing 23 yards from the game-deciding touchdown, Pierce and his relatively unsung Giants teammates controlled their playoff fate. Before Pierce stood the likes of quarterback Tony Romo, receiver Terrell Owens, tight end Jason Witten and three Pro Bowl linemen. Behind him stood a secondary without its two starting cornerbacks.
And when the reserve cornerback R. W. McQuarters intercepted Romo’s fourth-down pass in the end zone with nine seconds left, the Giants showed that Dallas might have better players, but the Giants have a better team.
The Giants’ 21-17 victory against the Cowboys on Sunday was the team’s ninth consecutive road victory, and it sends them to Green Bay to play the Packers next Sunday in the National Football Conference championship game. The winner will head to Super Bowl XLII in Glendale, Ariz., on Feb. 3, to play the New England Patriots or the San Diego Chargers.
“Nobody — nobody — picked us to be in the playoffs this year,” John Mara, the Giants co-owner and president, said in the din of the winning locker room. “And certainly nobody picked us to be in the N.F.C. championship game.”
The road winning streak for the Giants, who last lost away from Giants Stadium in the season opener against Dallas, is a single-season N.F.L. record. The Packers beat the Giants at the Meadowlands, 35-13, in the second week of the season.
“They’re not going to face the same team they faced in Week 2,” receiver Amani Toomer said.
Sunday’s victory prolonged an increasingly improbable late-season run for the Giants. With a hardening shell of resiliency, they pieced together three defensive stands in the fourth quarter to quiet the 63,660 in attendance and turn away the Cowboys’ hopes of winning a playoff game for the first time in 11 years.
“What I think you’re seeing is the team concept to the nth degree,” Giants Coach Tom Coughlin said.
Quarterback Eli Manning completed 12 of 18 passes for 163 yards, with two touchdowns, both to Toomer. He did not throw an interception or lose a fumble for the second consecutive game.
“He’s done a great job of taking care of the football and really leading this team,” center Shaun O’Hara said.
The Giants arrived in Texas carrying the ease of a team with higher hopes than expectations. As a 10-6 wild-card entrant, they beat Tampa Bay for their first playoff win in seven years. Manning played with poise and pizazz, and Coughlin’s perpetually uncertain future as the coach was settled.
The vibe was far more conflicted for the Cowboys. They finished 13-3 to claim the conference’s top seed, but they had also not won a playoff game since the 1996 season. They had beaten the Giants twice in the regular season, and also defeated the Packers, their potential conference-title-game opponent. Anything short of the Super Bowl for these Cowboys was considered a disappointment.
Those emotions emptied at game’s end. Owens cried when speaking about Romo, afraid that Romo’s jaunt to Mexico with the singer and actress Jessica Simpson during a bye the week before would be blamed for the loss. In their locker room, tackle Flozell Adams yelled obscenities at a reporter, and many Cowboys declined to talk at all.
“They came out here and just whupped us,” cornerback Terence Newman said. “Thirteen-and-three doesn’t matter. I was 100 percent sure we were going to win this game.”
Last week, most of the focus in the news media and in the meeting rooms of the Giants was on Romo’s vacation and Owens’s injured ankle. In two regular-season meetings, Romo had thrown eight touchdown passes. Owens caught four of them.
But much of the playoff match was hitched to Dallas’s clock-milking running attack featuring Marion Barber III. He gained 129 yards, but only 28 of them in the second half as the Giants’ defense slowly tightened its grip on the game’s outcome.
The Cowboys held the ball for 36 minutes 30 seconds of the 60-minute game clock. From late in the first quarter until more than halfway through the third quarter, the Giants had the ball for 4:21. The Cowboys had it for 23:30.
Still, the Giants fought back to a 14-14 halftime tie, and stopped the Cowboys enough in the third quarter to trail by only 17-14 entering the fourth quarter. McQuarters had a 25-yard punt return that gave the Giants possession at the Dallas 37.
Six plays later, with 13:29 remaining, running back Brandon Jacobs scored from 1 yard out, and the Giants held a 21-17 lead that they scrambled to keep.
“It was the longest 13 minutes of my life,” Toomer said.
It seemed an appropriately tight game between two bitter rivals. The Giants and the Cowboys have met 91 times in the regular season, but Sunday’s game was the first postseason contest between the two.
The Giants scored on the game’s first drive when Manning completed a short pass to Toomer on a curl route. Toomer spun away from two would-be tacklers and ran down the sideline for a 52-yard touchdown play.
The Giants had another promising drive going until stalling at the Cowboys’ 44. Rather than attempt the first down on fourth-and-1, the Giants called for punter Jeff Feagles, who pinned Dallas at its 4.
It began a tortuous span of the first half for the Giants’ defense. On consecutive Dallas drives, sandwiching a five-plays-and-punt effort from the Giants, the Cowboys combined to gain 186 yards on 29 plays, scoring the tying and go-ahead touchdowns.
“I’ve never been that tired before,” Pierce said.
The first was a 96-yard touchdown drive, with Barber gaining 72 yards and carrying the game’s momentum with him. Romo threw a 5-yard touchdown pass to Owens on the first play of the second quarter.
After the Giants punted, the Cowboys embarked on a 20-play, 90-yard drive that exhausted the Giants’ defense and 10:28 of the second quarter. The Cowboys converted all six third downs, and Giants cornerback Corey Webster dropped a Romo pass that hit him in the hands and might have been returned for a touchdown. Instead, the drive ended with Barber’s 1-yard plunge and a 14-7 Dallas lead with 53 seconds left in the half.
The Cowboys seemed ready to steamroll the Giants. Manning, in his latest hero turn, rescued them. Back-to-back passes to Steve Smith pushed the Giants 33 yards, and a personal foul on the Cowboys added another 15. On third-and-10 at the Cowboys’ 23 with 17 seconds left, Manning found tight end Kevin Boss near the right sideline for a 19-yard gain. With seven seconds left, Manning fired a 4-yard touchdown pass to Toomer, who lunged across the goal line.
The 14-14 halftime score was reminiscent of the two regular-season games. The Cowboys led the opener, 17-16, before winning, 45-35. In November, the score was tied, 17-17, before the Cowboys won, 31-20.
Both regular-season games were decided by deep second-half touchdown passes by Romo. In the two games, Romo completed 35 of 52 for 592 yards, with eight touchdowns and two interceptions.
On Sunday, Romo completed 18 of 36 passes for 201 yards and a touchdown. The only interception he threw sent the Giants into the N.F.C. championship game.
-
Barack Obama,Paul Krugman,The Moral Instinct,Cellphones,Pope Benedict, Ferrari,Today’s Papers,Boston
All in the Family Barack Obama’s Sister
Jordan MurphJanuary 20, 2008Questions for Maya Soetoro-Ng All in the Family Interview by DEBORAH SOLOMONQ: Let’s talk about the Democratic presidential caucuses taking place on Feb. 19, in
Hawaii , whereBarack Obama was born. Will you be campaigning for your brother? Yes, of course. I have taken time off from my various teaching jobs in Honolulu and just got back from two months of campaigning. I have a bumper sticker on my car that says: “1-20-09. End of an Error.”What kind of bumper sticker is that? It doesn’t even mention a candidate by name. That’s just one bumper sticker. I have three others on my car, including one that says, “Women for Obama.”
What is the age difference between you and Barack? I’m nine years younger. Our mother, after divorcing Barack’s father, met my father at the same place, the East-West Center on the University of Hawaii campus.
Barack’s father was Kenyan, and yours was Indonesian. Your mom was what used to be called a freethinker, a white
anthropologist from Wichita, Kan., who moved to Jakarta after her second marriage. My mother was a courageous woman. And she had such tremendous love for life. She loved the natural world. She would wake us up in the middle of the night to go look at the moon. When I was a teenager, this was a source of great frustration because I wanted to sleep.She died at only 52, from
ovarian cancer ? Today, more than anything, I wish all the women in Barack’s life — our mother, his wife and daughters, my daughter, our grandmother, his Kenyan half-sister — I wish we could all sit together and gaze at the moon.Your mom has been described as an atheist. I wouldn’t have called her an atheist. She was an agnostic. She basically gave us all the good books — the Bible, the Hindu Upanishads and the Buddhist scripture, the Tao Te Ching — and wanted us to recognize that everyone has something beautiful to contribute.
You didn’t mention the Koran in that list, although
Indonesia is the most populous Muslim country in the world. I should have mentioned the Koran. Mom didn’t really emphasize the Koran, but we read little parts of it. We did listen to morning prayers in Indonesia.Are you worried about mentioning Islam because it has already been evoked by negative campaigners trying to tarnish your brother? I’m not worried. I don’t want to deny Islam. I think it’s obviously very important that we have an understanding of Islam, a better understanding. At the same time, it has been erroneously attached to my brother. The man has been a Christian for 20 years.
What religion are you? Philosophically, I would say that I am Buddhist.
What effect do you think your mother’s wanderlust had on Barack? Maybe part of the reason he was so attracted to Chicago and his wife, Michelle, was that sense of rootedness. He elected to make a choice, whereas Mom sort of wandered through the world collecting treasures.
Do you think of your brother as black? Yes, because that is how he has named himself. Each of us has a right to name ourselves as we will.
Do you think of yourself as white? No. I’m half white, half Asian. I think of myself as hybrid. People usually think I’m Latina when they meet me. That’s what made me learn Spanish.
That sort of culturally mixed identity was seen as an anomaly when you were growing up. Of course, there was a time when that felt like unsteady terrain, and it made me feel vulnerable.
You were ahead of the multicultural curve. That’s one of the things our mother taught us. It can all belong to you. If you have sufficient love and respect for a part of the world, it can be a meaningful part of who you are, even if it wasn’t delivered at birth.
INTERVIEW CONDUCTED, CONDENSED AND EDITED BY DEBORAH SOLOMON
Fischer vs. the World: A Chess Giant’s Endgame
La Nación, Buenos AiresBobby Fischer in Buenos Aires to play Tigran Petrosian in 1971
January 19, 2008An Appraisal Fischer vs. the World: A Chess Giant’s Endgame There may be only three human activities in which miraculous accomplishment is possible before adulthood: mathematics, music and chess. These are abstract, almost invented realms, closed systems bounded by rules of custom or principle. Here, the child learns, is how elements combine and transform; here are the laws that govern their interactions; and here are the possibilities that emerge as you play with signs, symbols, sounds or pieces. Nothing else need be known or understood — at least at first. A child’s gifts in such realms can seem otherworldly, the achievements effortlessly magical. But as Bobby Fischer‘s death on Thursday might remind us, even abstract gifts can exact a terrible price.
In 1956 Mr. Fischer, at 13, displayed powers that were not only prodigious but also uncanny. A game he played against Donald Byrne, one of the top 10 players in the United States, became known as “the Game of the Century,” so packed was it with brilliance and daring (and Mr. Fischer’s sacrifice of a queen). “I just got good,” he explained — as indeed he did, winning 8 of the 10 United States Championship tournaments held after 1958 and then, of course, in 1972, breaking the long hold that Soviet chess had on the international championship.
“All I want to do, ever,” he said, “is play chess.” And many thought him the best player — ever. Garry Kasparov once said that he imagined Mr. Fischer as a kind of centaur, a human player mythologically combined with the very essence of chess itself.
But of course accompanying Mr. Fischer’s triumphs were signs of something else. His aggressive declarations and grandiose pronouncements were once restricted to his chosen playing field. (“Chess is war over the board. The object is to crush the opponent’s mind.”) Eventually, they grew in scope, evolving into ever more sweeping convictions about the wider world.
After his triumph against Boris Spassky in Reykjavik, Iceland, he all but abandoned chess, and seemed to replace the idea of a seated challenger pushing pieces on a 64-square board, with that of a demonic Jewish world conspiracy that was (as he said in radio broadcasts from the Philippines) perpetrated by a “filthy, lying bastard people” who kill Christian children (“their blood is used for black-magic ceremonies”) while exploiting that “money-making invention,” the Holocaust.
In this vision the circumscribed rules of chess were overturned, and in their place were imagined esoteric plottings of evil grandmasters. In a 2002 essay in The Atlantic Monthly Rene Chun chronicled Mr. Fischer’s “pathetic endgame.” He was reported to keep a locked suitcase with him, containing pills and home remedies:
“If the Commies come to poison me, I don’t want to make it easy for them,” he said. He had his dental fillings removed, worrying about the secret signals and controlling forces that might be channeled through his jaw. The 9/11 attacks, he said, were “wonderful news.”
What was all this? “I don’t believe in psychology,” Mr. Fischer once said about chess competition. “I believe in good moves.” And yes, without the good moves, he would never have struck the fear in his opponents that he once did. But how did faith in good moves mutate into such perverse psychology? Was there any connection between his gifts in chess and his later delusions?
You might of course speculate that his perceptions were affected by never having seen his father, a physicist named Mr. Fischer, after he was 2. A revealing profile in Harper’s magazine in 1962 indicated that Mr. Fischer’s mother, Regina Wender, also had other preoccupations. Bobby’s sister described her as a “professional crusader.” Bobby had dropped out of high school and was a chess wunderkind with a world reputation, while, at the time of the profile, his mother was spending eight months walking to Moscow in a “pacifist” protest.
A few years ago the Philadelphia Inquirer, obtaining F.B.I. records under the Freedom of Information Act, also found compelling evidence that Bobby Fischer’s father was not the man named on his birth certificate, but a brilliant Hungarian scientist, Paul F. Nemenyi, with whom his mother had an affair. Mr. Nemenyi apparently paid to help support Bobby, and there is even the record of a complaint he made to a social worker about Bobby’s upbringing. If that identification is accurate, the paradoxes of Mr. Fischer’s virulent anti-Semitism become still more profound, since Mr. Nemenyi, like Ms. Wender, was Jewish.
Chess too can seem to encourage a streak of craziness. ( “I like to see ‘em squirm,” Mr. Fischer proclaimed.) But for paranoia and posturing, nothing could come close to the 1972 championship match in Reykjavik. In recent years the argument has been made that the attention given to the confrontation between Mr. Fischer and Mr. Spassky had little to do with the cold war. Mr. Spassky himself was no party-line comrade, and Mr. Fischer, with all his idiosyncrasies, was far from a comfort to the United States State Department; moreover, by 1972, such confrontations no longer had the symbolic power they had during the era of Sputnik. But there is still no question that the contest drew its worldwide audience partly because it presented two conflicting national idols.
Mr. Fischer, with his demands about money, his finickiness about cameras and chairs and schedule, could seem an extreme example of the American individualist, while Mr. Spassky, with his back to the audience, his stone-faced demeanor and the state support for this national game behind him, seemed an incarnation of Soviet ideology. The Soviets also answered Mr. Fischer’s egomaniacal posturing with their own versions of conspiracy mongering, suggesting that Mr. Spassky’s performance was being deliberately sabotaged by American tampering with the players’ environments; the air had to be tested and the chairs X-rayed.
But there is still something about Mr. Fischer’s craziness that is closely connected with the essential nature of chess. The gift of early insight into chess or math or music is often also accompanied by a growing obsession with those activities, simply because of the wonders of connection and invention that unfold in the young mind. The world itself, with its more messy human interactions, its complicated histories, its emotional conflicts, can be put aside, and attention focused on an intricate bounded cosmos.
Perhaps we should be grateful that such gifts are so rare, for if they were not, how many of us would prefer to remain cocooned in these glass-bead games? At least in mathematics and music, we may be grateful too that ultimately, with the coming of maturity, the world starts to put constraints on abstract play. Great music attains its power not simply through manipulation and abstraction, but by creating analogies with experience; music is affected by life, not cut off from it. Mathematics also comes up against the demands of the world, as the field opens up to understanding; early insights are tested against the full scale of what has been already been done and what yet remains undone.
But chess, alone among this abstract triumvirate, is never tested or transformed. The only way expertise is ever tried is in victory or defeat. And if a player is as profoundly powerful as Mr. Fischer, defeat never creates a sense of limits. Seeing into a game and defeating an opponent — that defines the entire world.
So when it comes time to look at the wider world, it might seem a vast extension of the game, only ever so much more frightening because its conspiratorial strategies cannot be discovered in rule books, and its confrontations cannot be controlled by formal tournaments. That was the world that Bobby Fischer saw around him as he morphed from world champion chess player into world-class crank, never realizing that he had unwittingly blundered into checkmate.
Don’t Cry for Me, America
Paul Krugman.
January 18, 2008Op-Ed Columnist Don’t Cry for Me, America By PAUL KRUGMANMexico. Brazil. Argentina. Mexico, again. Thailand. Indonesia. Argentina, again.
And now, the United States.
The story has played itself out time and time again over the past 30 years. Global investors, disappointed with the returns they’re getting, search for alternatives. They think they’ve found what they’re looking for in some country or other, and money rushes in.
But eventually it becomes clear that the investment opportunity wasn’t all it seemed to be, and the money rushes out again, with nasty consequences for the former financial favorite. That’s the story of multiple financial crises in Latin America and Asia. And it’s also the story of the U.S. combined housing and credit bubble. These days, we’re playing the role usually assigned to third-world economies.
For reasons I’ll explain later, it’s unlikely that America will experience a recession as severe as that in, say, Argentina. But the origins of our problem are pretty much the same. And understanding those origins also helps us understand where U.S. economic policy went wrong.
The global origins of our current mess were actually laid out by none other than Ben Bernanke, in an influential speech he gave early in 2005, before he was named chairman of the Federal Reserve. Mr. Bernanke asked a good question: “Why is the United States, with the world’s largest economy, borrowing heavily on international capital markets — rather than lending, as would seem more natural?”
His answer was that the main explanation lay not here in America, but abroad. In particular, third world economies, which had been investor favorites for much of the 1990s, were shaken by a series of financial crises beginning in 1997. As a result, they abruptly switched from being destinations for capital to sources of capital, as their governments began accumulating huge precautionary hoards of overseas assets.
The result, said Mr. Bernanke, was a “global saving glut”: lots of money, all dressed up with nowhere to go.
In the end, most of that money went to the United States. Why? Because, said Mr. Bernanke, of the “depth and sophistication of the country’s financial markets.”
All of this was right, except for one thing: U.S. financial markets, it turns out, were characterized less by sophistication than by sophistry, which my dictionary defines as “a deliberately invalid argument displaying ingenuity in reasoning in the hope of deceiving someone.” E.g., “Repackaging dubious loans into collateralized debt obligations creates a lot of perfectly safe, AAA assets that will never go bad.”
In other words, the United States was not, in fact, uniquely well-suited to make use of the world’s surplus funds. It was, instead, a place where large sums could be and were invested very badly. Directly or indirectly, capital flowing into America from global investors ended up financing a housing-and-credit bubble that has now burst, with painful consequences.
As I said, these consequences probably won’t be as bad as the devastating recessions that racked third-world victims of the same syndrome. The saving grace of America’s situation is that our foreign debts are in our own currency. This means that we won’t have the kind of financial death spiral Argentina experienced, in which a falling peso caused the country’s debts, which were in dollars, to balloon in value relative to domestic assets.
But even without those currency effects, the next year or two could be quite unpleasant.
What should have been done differently? Some critics say that the Fed helped inflate the housing bubble with low interest rates. But those rates were low for a good reason: although the last recession officially ended in November 2001, it was another two years before the U.S. economy began delivering convincing job growth, and the Fed was rightly concerned about the possibility of Japanese-style prolonged economic stagnation.
The real sin, both of the Fed and of the Bush administration, was the failure to exercise adult supervision over markets running wild.
It wasn’t just Alan Greenspan’s unwillingness to admit that there was anything more than a bit of “froth” in housing markets, or his refusal to do anything about subprime abuses. The fact is that as America’s financial system has grown ever more complex, it has also outgrown the framework of banking regulations that used to protect us — yet instead of an attempt to update that framework, all we got were paeans to the wonders of free markets.
Right now, Mr. Bernanke is in crisis-management mode, trying to deal with the mess his predecessor left behind. I don’t have any problems with his testimony yesterday, although I suspect that it’s already too late to prevent a recession.
But let’s hope that when the dust settles a bit, Mr. Bernanke takes the lead in talking about what needs to be done to fix a financial system gone very, very wrong.
The Bus to Houston
Illustration by Bob Hambly
January 20, 2008Lives The Bus to Houston By MARTHA WOODROOFMy leaving home actually began by going back there, to Greensboro, N.C., from Mount Holyoke College for the summer of 1966. That was when my mother pretty much went off her rocker.
It wasn’t really a surprise. Mother had been intermittently mentally ill for years, but since being crazy was considered unacceptable in our house, her problems hadn’t been dealt with at all. Mother had “issues” with control, with sex, with emotional intimacy, with a brain that produced too much of some chemicals and not enough of others. Her problems ran rampant and unacknowledged through my childhood, as my father was too worn down — or didn’t know how — to intervene.
I was 19 that summer, working as a teacher’s aid in Head Start, trying to finish growing up. For this, it seemed, my lovely, erudite mother raged at me almost nonstop. When she physically attacked my boyfriend, I’d had enough. I took my earnings — 30 bucks in cash, 200 more in my checkbook — and got on the bus to Houston. I wanted a different life, and Houston seemed as different as I could afford.
A Greyhound bus is a honky-tonk on wheels; a rolling principality where the driver may be king, but if you’re quiet the king doesn’t care what you’re up to. Riding one for 36 hours in the mid-’60s was like living the lyrics of a Woody Guthrie song. There I was, Miss Prissy Prep School, with her 30 bucks and her paperback Trollope novel, awash in the smell of fried chicken and dirty diapers and increasingly unwashed people. I stared out the window and watched the South’s underbelly roll by with its shacks and cotton fields, live oaks and bayous. This, finally, was my life.
The 15-year-old boy beside me was on his way to Mississippi for reasons he didn’t want to talk about. Because he hadn’t had the ritualized social dance drilled into him that I’d had drilled in to me, he assumed people sitting next to each other on a bus were friends. And so we were, talking about our short lives as the dingy bus stations came and went.
That boy was the first person I told about my mother. He seemed to think no less of me for either having such a parent or for leaving her behind, but he did insist I phone home from Spartanburg so that my folks — imperfect as they were — wouldn’t worry more than was unavoidable. When I ran short of cash just before he got off the bus, he lent me $10. I wrote down his address and promised to send him the money.
With no seatmate to distract me, I crossed the Mississippi with my nose stuck to the window. It stayed there through Louisiana and beyond, while Trollope lay neglected in my lap. Why read when I could watch East Texas roll by?
Freedom’s just another word for no pretensions left to lose. I got off the bus in Houston at midnight and checked into the cheap hotel across the street. My first job was as a lunch-counter waitress. No one there cared that I spoke French or could discuss “Paradise Lost”; they just wanted their eggs. But before long I was working as a researcher and had my own studio apartment.
It was the ’60s; I considered myself a person of principle and art. I occupied buildings, marched for miles, lost friends to Canada and acquaintances to war, got involved in theater. I fell in love with Texas weather’s lack of civility, with Houston’s swagger, with tall men who wore big hats.
My daughter, Lizzie, was born in Houston. We moved with her father to Charlottesville, Va., when she was 5, and she and I stayed there. While she was growing up I liked to remind her that before she ever saw Mr. Jefferson’s manicured city, she’d been in a hurricane, stared down giant water roaches, slept backstage and protested injustice. I’m happy and proud to say she has grown up unafraid.
Leaving home the way I did didn’t fix either me or my life, but it did teach me I didn’t have to stay somewhere just because the future somewhere else looked murky — something that was good to know when my first two marriages didn’t work. God knows I’ve had plenty of rough patches since then — bouts with addiction and alcoholism, my own rounds with the family disease of depression — but nothing ever made me regret getting on the Houston bus.
I did my best to keep in touch with my parents, and I visited them occasionally. At the end of my mother’s life I was able to take care of her without rancor. By then I suppose I understood we’d both done the best we could. But I put off sending the 10 bucks back to that boy on the Houston bus until I finally lost his address. And that I do regret.
Martha Woodroof reports for public radio and is the author of “How to Stop Screwing Up: Twelve Steps to a Real Life and a Pretty Good Time.”
New Wave on the Black Sea
RCINY/Tartan USACorneliu Porumboiu
January 20, 2008New Wave on the Black Sea By A. O. SCOTT“HAVE YOU SEEN THE ROMANIAN MOVIE?” This somewhat improbable question began to circulate around the midpoint of the 2005 Cannes Film Festival. For some reason, the critics, journalists and film-industry hangers-on who gather in Cannes each May to gossip and graze rarely refer to the films they see there by their titles, preferring a shorthand of auteur, genre or country of origin (“the Gus Van Sant“; “the Chinese documentary”; “that Russian thing”). It’s a code that everyone is assumed to know, and in this case there was not much room for confusion. How many Romanian movies could there be?
More than most of us would have predicted as it turned out. But for the moment we were happy to have “The Death of Mr. Lazarescu,” the second feature by Cristi Puiu, though given the movie’s methods and subject matter there was perhaps something a little perverse in our joy. Its exotic provenance was not the only thing that made Puiu’s movie sound like something only a stereotypical film snob could love. More than two and a half hours long, “The Death of Mr. Lazarescu” chronicles the last night in the life of its title character, a flabby 63-year-old Bucharest pensioner with a stomachache and a drinking problem. Filmed in a quasi-documentary style in drab urban locations — a shabby apartment, the inside of an ambulance, a series of fluorescent-bulbed hospital waiting and examination rooms — it follows a narrative arc from morbidity to mortality punctuated by casual, appalling instances of medical malpractice.
And yet viewers who witnessed poor Dante Lazarescu’s unheroic passing on the grand screen of the Salle Debussy emerged from the experience feeling more exhilarated than depressed. “The Death of Mr. Lazarescu” is raw, melancholy and unflinching, but it is also lyrical, funny and, perhaps paradoxically, full of life. And though the wobbling camera and the use of unflattering available light create an atmosphere of tough, unadorned naturalism, the film is also, on closer inspection, a remarkably artful piece of work, with a strong, unpredictable story, rigorous camera work and powerfully understated performances. The excitement that greeted it came from the feeling that one of the oldest and strongest capacities of cinema — to capture and illuminate reality, one face, one room, one life at a time — had been renewed.
When the festival was over, Cristi Puiu returned to Bucharest with an award, called Un Certain Regard, given to the best film in a side program that frequently upstages the main competition. The rest of us went home with the glow of discovery that is one reason we go to film festivals in the first place. This is not an especially unusual occurrence on the festival circuit. Every so often, a modest picture from an obscure place makes a big splash in the relatively small international art-film pond. But the triumph of “Mr. Lazarescu” in Cannes turned out to be a sign of things to come. In 2006, the year after “Mr. Lazarescu,” attentive Cannes adventurers would find room in their screening schedules for two new Romanian movies, Catalin Mitulescu’s “Way I Spent the End of the World” and Corneliu Porumboiu‘s “12:08 East of Bucharest,” both of which dealt, albeit in very different ways, with the revolution of 1989. When the time came to hand out awards, Porumboiu won the Caméra d’Or, given to the best debut feature.
A year later, the first film in the Cannes competition to be shown to the press was Cristian Mungiu‘s second feature, “4 Months, 3 Weeks and 2 Days,” a harrowing, suspenseful story of illegal abortion and an unsparing portrait of daily life in the last years of Communist rule. By the end of the festival, “the Romanian abortion movie” (its inevitable and somewhat unfortunate shorthand designation) had overpowered a competitive field. There was much delight but no great surprise when Mungiu, a soft-spoken, round-faced 39-year-old, walked onto the stage of the Salle Lumière on the last night of the festival to accept the Palme d’Or, the festival’s top prize and a token of membership in the world fraternity of cinematic masters (or at least in a diverse club whose other recent inductees include Roman Polanski, Lars von Trier and Michael Moore). Earlier in the day, the Certain Regard jury (one of whose members was Cristi Puiu) gave its award to “California Dreamin’,” yet another Romanian movie whose director, the prodigiously talented Cristian Nemescu, died in a car accident the year before at the age of 27.
In three years, then, four major prizes at the world’s pre-eminent film festival went to movies from a country whose place in the history of 20th-century cinema might charitably be called marginal. The post-Cannes triumphal march of “4 Months, 3 Weeks and 2 Days” (it opens in New York on Friday) to the tops of English-language critics’ polls and year-end lists, as well as to a Golden Globe nomination, offers belated confirmation of last spring’s news flash from the Côte d’Azur. But perhaps you are hearing it here first: the Romanian new wave has arrived.
IS THERE OR IS THERE NOT?
Such is the consensus, or at least the hype, within the worldwide critical community. In Romania itself, where Mungiu’s Palme d’Or was front-page news and occasioned a burst of national pride (including a medal bestowed on the director by the country’s president), there is a bit more skepticism. The Romanian title of “12:08 East of Bucharest,” the 2006 Caméra d’Or winner, is “Fost sau n-a fost,” which translates as “was there or was there not?” The question is posed by the pompous host of a provincial television talk show to an undistinguished panel (consisting of an alcoholic schoolteacher, a semiretired Santa Claus and a desultory handful of callers) on the 16th anniversary of the revolution that overthrew Nicolae Ceausescu. The moderator wants his guests to address whether or not, in their sad little city in Moldavia (Porumboiu’s hometown of Vaslui), the revolution really happened. A long and inconclusive debate follows, punctuated by verbal digressions and technical difficulties: a production assistant’s hand reaches into the frame; the camera abruptly zooms in on the host’s nose. (“At last, a close-up,” he says). A discussion of contemporary Romanian cinema with Romanian filmmakers and critics can sometimes resemble that scene: “Is there or is there not a Romanian new wave?” Or, as it was put recently, with some irreverence, before a very distinguished panel at a contentious public debate held at the Romanian Cultural Institute in New York, “Romanian Cinema: The Golden Age?”
Compared with what? Romanian cinema, it will be pointed out, was not born with “The Death of Mr. Lazarescu.” As it happened, Cristian Mungiu’s Palme d’Or arrived punctually on the 50th anniversary of the first Romanian Palme, awarded in 1957 to Ion Popescu-Gopo’s “Short History,” a charming, wordless animated short in which human evolution and industrial development culminate in the planting of large daisylike flowers on distant planets. More to the point, there was a Romanian movie industry in the 1970s and ’80s, and many of the filmmakers whose movies traveled the festival rounds in those days — directors like Stere Gulea, Dan Pita and Mircea Daneliuc — are still active. The younger generation, furthermore, does not necessarily represent a unified or coherent movement.
In an article published last summer in the English-language journal European Alternatives, Alex Leo Serban, one of Romania’s leading film critics, instructed readers to keep in mind that “there are no ‘waves,’ . . . just individuals.” When I met him in Bucharest in November, Puiu, the director of “Mr. Lazarescu,” was more emphatic. “There is not, not, not, not, not a Romanian new wave,” he insisted, hammering the point home against the arm of his living-room couch. Puiu, who studied painting in Switzerland before turning to film, is given to grand, counterintuitive statements. (“I am not a filmmaker!” he practically shouted at me when I asked him, in all innocence, what inspired him to become one.) To spend time with him — as I discovered in the course of a long evening at his apartment, during which several bottles of Romanian wine and countless American cigarettes joined Mr. Lazarescu in the great beyond — is to be drawn into frequent and fascinating argument. Over hors d’oeuvres, we stumbled into a friendly quarrel over the idea that anyone’s life has ever really been changed by a book or a film, and as we ate roast lamb at Puiu’s high, narrow kitchen table we debated whether or not a camera’s zoom could be said to correspond to any activity of the human eye.
When it comes to new waves, the critics who announce (or invent) them have more of an investment than artists, who understandably resist the notion that their individuality might be assimilated into some larger tendency. Ever since the French Nouvelle Vague of the late 1950s and early ’60s, cinephiles have scanned the horizon looking for movement. In Czechoslovakia before 1968, in West Germany and Hollywood in the 1970s and more recently in Taiwan, Iran and Uzbekistan, the metaphor signaled newness, iconoclasm, a casting off of tradition and a rediscovery of latent possibilities. It also contains an implicit threat of obsolescence, since what crests and crashes ashore is also sure to ebb. Which may be one reason for partisans of Romanian cinema to resist the idea of a wave. If no one wins a prize next year in Cannes, will this golden age be over?
But it’s hard, all the same, for an outsider to give full credence to the notion that the current flowering of Romanian film is entirely a matter of happenstance, the serendipitous convergence of a bunch of idiosyncratic talents. For one thing, to watch recent Romanian movies — the features and the shorts, the festival prizewinners and those that might or should have been — is to discover a good deal of continuity and overlap in addition to obvious differences.
Though they might be reluctant to admit it, the new Romanian filmmakers have a lot in common beyond their reliance on a small pool of acting and technical talent. Because of the stylistic elements they share — a penchant for long takes and fixed camera positions; a taste for plain lighting and everyday décor; a preference for stories set amid ordinary life — Puiu, Porumboiu and Mungiu are sometimes described as minimalists or neo-neorealists. But while their work does show some affinity with that of other contemporary European auteurs, like the Belgian brothers Jean-Pierre and Luc Dardenne, who make art out of the grim facts of quotidian existence, the realism of the Romanians has some distinct characteristics of its own.
It seems like something more than coincidence, for example, that the five features that might constitute a mini-canon of 21st-century Romanian cinema — “Stuff and Dough,” Puiu’s first feature; “The Death of Mr. Lazarescu”; “12:08 East of Bucharest”; “The Paper Will Be Blue,” by Radu Muntean; and “4 Months, 3 Weeks and 2 Days” — all confine their action to a single day and focus on a single action. This is less a matter of Aristotelian discipline than of respect for the contingency and loose-endedness of real experience. In each case, the action is completed — Lazarescu dies; the abortion in “4 Months” is performed; the broadcast in “12:08″ comes to an end — but a lingering, haunting sense of inconclusiveness remains. The narratives have a shape, but they seem less like plots abstracted from life than like segments carved out of its rough rhythms. The characters are often in a state of restless, agitated motion, confused about where they are going and what they will find when they arrive. The camera follows them into ambulances, streetcars, armored vehicles and minivans, communicating with unsettling immediacy their anxiety and disorientation. The viewer is denied the luxury of distance. After a while, you feel you are living inside these movies as much as watching them.
When Otilia, the heroine of “4 Months,” joins a dinner party at her boyfriend’s house, the camera stays across the table from her, putting the audience in the position of a silent, watchful guest. We know she has just been through an unspeakably strange and awful experience, but the others, friends of the boyfriend’s parents, are oblivious, and their banal, posturing wisdom becomes excruciating. The emptiness of authority — whether generational, political or conferred by elevated social status — is an unmistakable theme in the work of nearly all the younger Romanian filmmakers. The doctors who neglect Mr. Lazarescu; the grandiose, small-time television host in “12:08″; the swaggering army commanders and rebel leaders in “The Paper Will Be Blue” and their successors, the officious bureaucrats in “California Dreamin’ ” — all of these men (and they are all men) display a self-importance that is both absurd and malignant. Their hold on power is mitigated sometimes by their own clumsiness but more often by unheralded, stubborn acts of ordinary decency. An ambulance technician decides to help out a suffering old man who is neither kin nor especially kind; a student stands stoically by her irresponsible friend; a militia officer, in the middle of a revolution, goes out of his way to find and protect an errant, idealistic young man under his command.
There is almost no didacticism or point-making in these films, none of whose characters are easily sorted into good guys and bad guys. Instead, there is an almost palpable impulse to tell the truth, to present choices, conflicts and accidents without exaggeration or omission. This is a form of realism, of course, but its motivation seems to be as much ethical as aesthetic, less a matter of verisimilitude than of honesty. There is an unmistakable political dimension to this kind of storytelling, even when the stories themselves seem to have no overt political content. During the Ceausescu era, which ended abruptly, violently and somewhat ambiguously in December 1989 — in the last and least velvety of the revolutions of that year — Romanian public life was dominated by fantasies, delusions and lies. And the filmmakers who were able to work in such conditions resorted, like artists in other communist countries, to various forms of allegory and indirection. Both Puiu and Mungiu describe this earlier mode of Romanian cinema as “metaphorical,” and both utter the word with a heavy inflection of disgust.
“I wanted to become a filmmaker as a reaction to that kind of cinema,” Mungiu told me. “Nothing like this ever happened in real life. And you got this desire to say: ‘People, you don’t know what you’re talking about. This is all fake. This is not what you should be telling in films. I could do way better than you.’ I felt this way, but I think this whole generation had that feeling. Those movies were badly acted, completely unbelievable, with stupid situations, lots of metaphors. It was a time when, you know, saying something about the system was more important than telling a story.”
The new generation finds itself with no shortage of stories to tell, whether about the traumas of the Stalinist past or the confusions of the Euro-consumerist present — and also, for the moment, with an audience eager to hear them.
TALES FROM THE GOLDEN AGE
Or perhaps with several different audiences. “Make sure you pay attention to the words on the screen at the beginning,” Mungiu advised a packed house of moviegoers who had come, six months after Cannes, to see “4 Months, 3 Weeks and 2 Days.” This was in Silver Spring, Md., at a program of new European movies presented by the American Film Institute. I saw Mungiu in Cannes in May and met him briefly at the New York Film Festival, but as it happened I would be unable to catch him in Bucharest. After his triumphant homecoming and a kind of roadshow Romanian release of “4 Months” over the summer, he had been in a state of frequent-flier exile familiar to successful filmmakers, crisscrossing the globe — with stops in Korea, Berlin, Los Angeles and now the suburbs of Washington — to show his movie.
His opening remarks were meant to direct the audience’s attention to the only part of “4 Months” that provides its story with explicit context, a note in the lower right-hand corner that says, “Romania, 1987.” But for this crowd, it turned out, the explanation was redundant. They knew exactly where they were. Two-thirds of the way through the screening — at a point when the viewer is fully immersed in the helplessness and dread that are the film’s governing emotions — I bumped into Mungiu just outside the theater doors. He appeared to be listening intently to what was going on inside. “I think there are a lot of Romanians here tonight,” he said, looking up. I asked what gave him that impression. “They’re laughing,” he said. “They always do.”
Now, it should be noted that “4 Months” is about as far from a comedy as a movie can be. If you were looking for a generic label, you could do worse than to call it a kind of horror movie, in which the two main characters, young women in jeopardy, are subjected to the sadism of an unscrupulous abortionist and, almost worse, the indifference, hostility and incomprehension of just about everyone else. It is not an easy film to watch, but it feels, to a non-Romanian, like an absolutely convincing anatomy of what ordinary people endured under communism. And it clearly felt that way to the members of the Romanian diaspora as well, except that they found humor in addition to horror in revisiting a familiar bygone world. What followed the screening was less the anticipated Q-and-A session than a trip down memory lane, which spilled out into the theater lobby and continued well into the night. “That was exactly like my dorm room at university,” one woman announced. Another wanted to know how Mungiu found the brands of soap, gum and other items that had been staples of the Ceausescu era. (“You can find anything on the Internet,” he replied.)
Mungiu originally conceived “4 Months,” which is based on something that happened to a woman he knows, as part of a series of “Tales From the Golden Age,” an ironic reference to the way Ceausescu characterized his reign, which began in 1965. Born in 1968, Mungiu calls himself a “child of the decree,” meaning Ceausescu’s 1966 edict restricting abortion and birth control for the purpose of spurring economic development by increasing the Romanian population. Though the law fell short of its demographic goals, it did in its way spawn a handful of new Romanian filmmakers, who reached adolescence and early adulthood just as Ceausescu’s monstrous utopian experiment was collapsing. Puiu was born in 1967. Muntean, whose experience in the military during the 1989 revolution is the basis of “The Paper Will Be Blue,” is four years younger. Corneliu Porumboiu was 14 (and playing table tennis with a friend) when the old regime fell.
Its demise was an anomaly, much as the regime itself was. One especially painful aspect of Romanian communism was that it was, well, Romanian — an indigenous outgrowth at least as much as a foreign imposition. For much of his reign, Ceausescu was admired in the West for his relative independence from Moscow, but internally he fostered a nationalist cult of personality that in some ways had more in common with Kim Il Sung’s North Korea (which Ceausescu came to admire after visiting in the early 1970s) than with desultory bureaucratic police states like Czechoslovakia and East Germany. And perhaps for this reason — because Romanians were not simply throwing off an imperial yoke, but at the same time exorcising a leader who claimed to be the highest incarnation of their identity as a people — the Romanian revolution was by far the most violent in Eastern Europe in 1989. Elsewhere, the imagery of that year consists of hammers chipping at the Berlin Wall and a playwright installed in Prague Castle, but in Romania there are soldiers firing into crowds, torn flags and the summary execution, on Christmas Day, of the dictator and his wife. And the nature of the event is shadowed, to this day, by doubt and irresolution. Was it a popular uprising or a coup d’etat sponsored by an opportunistic faction within the military and the ruling party? Its aftermath — in particular the violent suppression of pro-democracy demonstrations in June 1990 — was nearly as bloody as the revolution itself, and the transition out of communism in the 1990s was marked by economic crisis, political stalemate and social malaise.
It would be an unwarranted generalization for me to claim that Romanians are still preoccupied with this history. I can say, though, that every conversation I had in Bucharest, even the most casual, circled back to the old days, so that I sometimes felt that they ended much more recently than 18 years ago. And the physical aspect of Bucharest confirms this impression. The busy shopping streets have the usual storefronts — Sephora, Hugo Boss, various cellphone carriers and European grocery chains — and the main north-south road out of town is jammed with Land Rovers and lined with big-box discount stores. Turn a corner, though, or glance behind one of the billboards mounted on the walls of old buildings, and you are thrown backward, from the shiny new age of the European Union (which Romania joined only last year) into the rustiest days of the Iron Curtain. The architecture is a jumble of late-19th-century Hapsburg-style villas and gray socialist apartment blocks, some showing signs of renovation, others looking as if they had fallen under the protection of some mad Warsaw Pact preservation society.
This layering of the old and the new was perhaps most apparent when I visited Bucharest’s National University of Drama and Film (U.N.A.T.C.), a venerable institution housed in a building rumored to have been previously used as a training facility for the Securitate, Ceausescu’s notorious secret police. Mungiu, Porumboiu and Nemescu are all U.N.A.T.C. graduates, and Puiu currently teaches courses there in screen acting. Like much else in the city, the complex was under renovation, with freshly painted walls and tools banging and buzzing in the corridors and courtyards. In a drafty classroom downstairs, I was introduced to members of the faculty, who sat silently and warily, arms folded, as, with the help of an interpreter, I fumbled through an explanation of my interest in new Romanian film. It was not an interest any of them gave much indication of sharing, apart from one voluble professor. “We are all dinosaurs, but at least I will admit that I am one,” he announced, before going on to praise the achievements of his former students.
Afterward, feeling as if I had just failed an oral exam, I went upstairs to meet with some current students — about 40 of them, crowded into a small screening room. The difference between them and their professors seemed to be more than just a matter of age and status. They belonged to a different world, one in which I felt perfectly at home. I wanted to talk about Romanian cinema, and while they had a lot to say about the subject, they also wanted to talk about Borat and David Lynch, about Sundance and the Oscars, about Japanese anime and “Hedwig and the Angry Inch.”
Fost sau n-a fost? You tell me.
CALIFORNIA DREAMIN’
“There is no Romanian film industry.” This is not another one of Cristi Puiu’s counterintuitive provocations but rather a statement I was to hear again and again in Bucharest as I visited the offices of film schools and production companies, a studio back lot and the headquarters of the National Center for Cinematography (C.N.C.). There was no shortage of industriousness, but Romania lacks the basic infrastructure that makes the cycle of production, distribution and exhibition viable in other countries. What is missing, above all, is movie theaters: there are around 80 cinemas serving a country of 22 million people, and 7 of the 42 largest municipalities have no movie screens at all. (In the United States there are almost 40,000 screens and millions of movie fans who still complain that there is nothing to see).
What Romania does have, in addition to a backlog of stories crying out to be told on screen, are traditions and institutions that give filmmakers at least some of the tools required to tell them. The “dinosaurs” at U.N.A.T.C. take their pupils through a rigorous program of instruction that includes courses in aesthetics and art history and requires them to make two 35-millimeter short films before graduating, one of them in black and white. This kind of old-school technical training, which extends to acting as well, surely accounts for some of the sophistication and self-assurance that Mungiu, Porumboiu and their colleagues display.
Not that anything comes easily. The shortage of screens means that the potential for domestic commercial returns is small, and therefore it is hard to attract substantial private investment, either from within Romania or from outside the country. And the scarcity of theaters makes exhibition quotas — which other countries use to protect their film industries from being overwhelmed by Hollywood — untenable. But if there is no film industry, there is at least a Law of Cinematography (modeled on a French statute) that establishes a mechanism by which the state helps finance movie production. Taxes collected on television advertising revenue, DVD sales and other media-related transactions go into a fund, money from which is distributed in a twice-yearly competition. Winning projects are ranked, with the top selections receiving as much as 50 percent of their production costs from the fund. Film costs tend to be modest — the budget of “4 Months” was around 700,000 euros — and the filmmakers have 10 years to pay back the state’s investment, at which point they own the film outright.
Many of the filmmakers I spoke to complained about the system. Porumboiu, impatient with its slow pace and bureaucratic obstacles, financed “12:08″ himself. Shortly before Cannes last year, Mungiu was involved in a public spat with the C.N.C. that made headlines in the local press. After a dispute with the center, Puiu circulated a letter pledging never to participate in the system again.
But a collection of the movies that arose from harmonious relations between filmmakers and their financiers would consist largely of home videos and vanity projects. Even frustrated artists, in other words, can flourish. And their success abroad, moreover, feeds the system with prestige and helps bring in money from the European Union and adventurous foreign investors.
Though Romania’s homegrown film industry will most likely remain small, it exists in close proximity to Hollywood itself. American audiences may not be familiar with “The Paper Will Be Blue” or “Stuff and Dough,” but those who have seen “Cold Mountain,” “Borat” or “Seed of Chucky” can claim some acquaintance with Romanian cinema, or at least with movies made in Romania. About 20 miles outside of Bucharest, where newly built suburban developments give way to farmland, is the Castel Film Studio, a vast complex that houses the largest soundstage in Europe, a 200,000-gallon tank for underwater filming and standing sets like city streets, a full-size wingless jet and the mountain hamlet from “Cold Mountain.”
Castel promises skilled labor at a lower cost than producers are likely to find in the United States or Western Europe (though the weakness of the dollar has made its prices a bit less attractive to Americans). Its crews are trained at the rigorous Romanian film schools, and in turn receive hands-on experience with equipment that is hard to come by in modest Romanian productions. Oleg Mutu, the director of photography who brought Bucharest to gloomy life in “Mr. Lazarescu” and “4 Months,” spent a few weeks operating a camera on “Cold Mountain.” Cristi Puiu recently shot an insurance commercial at Castel. The U.N.A.T.C. students, even as they dream of Golden Palms and envision making tough, realistic movies about immigrants, Gypsies and alienated youth, acknowledge that they are more likely to find paying work in advertising or television.
Meanwhile, the stars of the current wave — who are part of what is to my mind the most exciting development in a European national cinema since Spain in the 1980s — contemplate their next projects and prepare their proposals for the next round of C.N.C. competitions. One afternoon in Bucharest, Corneliu Porumboiu and I sat in the cafe at the Bucharest Cinematheque, drinking coffee and talking about movies: Woody Allen; “The Lives of Others”; the Italian neorealists. The Cinematheque is a kind of mothership for Bucharest cineastes. It’s where they went to discover exotic films when they were younger, and where their films are now shown and celebrated in a country without many other public places for movie going.
After a while, we got up, and Porumboiu offered to show me around the screening rooms. At the box-office entrance, decorated with a “4 Months, 3 Weeks and Two Days” flier, a guard confronted us and shooed us away. The facilities were closed. Porumboiu tried to explain that he wanted to show them to a guest from New York, but he was rebuffed. We could buy a ticket or rent out a theater, but we couldn’t just walk in and look around. And so we wandered away, to find another place to hang out in this bustling, bedraggled city. It occurred to me that maybe there was no Romanian translation of the sentence “Do you know who I am?” — which would have been the first thing out of an American director’s mouth in a similar situation. Or perhaps this was a double-edged metaphor: maybe in Bucharest, nowadays, a filmmaker with a prize from Cannes is nothing special.
A.O. Scott, a film critic at The Times, last wrote for the magazine about the history of the Hollywood Western.
Clinton Defeats Obama in Nevada Vote
Todd Heisler/The New York TimesSenator Hillary Rodham Clinton celebrated in Las Vegas after winning Saturday’s Democratic caucuses in Nevada
January 19, 2008Clinton Defeats Obama in Nevada Vote By JEFF ZELENY and JENNIFER STEINHAUERLAS VEGAS – Senator Hillary Rodham Clinton won the Nevada caucuses on Saturday, capturing strong support from women voters and adding a fresh boost of momentum to her campaign as the Democratic presidential race heads to South Carolina, where she is engaged in a fierce battle with her rival, Senator Barack Obama.
Mrs. Clinton’s victory in Nevada – her second straight win over Mr. Obama – underscored her strength among Hispanic voters, who comprise a large share of the electorate in several upcoming states, as the campaign expands into a coast-to-coast series of 22 contests on Feb. 5.
The New York senator had 51 percent of the vote to Mr. Obama’s 45 percent, with just over 90 percent of the state’s caucuses reporting. John Edwards, the former senator from North Carolina, faded to a distant third place with 4 percent of the vote.
“I guess this is how the West was won,” Mrs. Clinton told her supporters during a victory rally at the Planet Hollywood hotel on the Las Vegas Strip. Speaking over loud cheers, she added: “We will all be united in November. I don’t think politics is a game. I don’t think elections are just another day in the calendar.”
Mr. Obama, in a terse statement, barely acknowledged his defeat. “We ran an honest, uplifting campaign in Nevada that focused on the real problems Americans are facing, a campaign that appealed to people’s hopes instead of their fears,” he said. “That’s the campaign we’ll take to South Carolina and across America in the weeks to come, and that’s how we will truly bring about the change this country is hungry for.”
Mr. Obama said that he received more national delegates in Nevada than Mrs. Clinton because of his strong performance across the state, “including rural areas where Democrats have traditionally struggled.”
But some election officials said they were confused about Mr. Obama’s claim that he more delegates than Mrs. Clinton.
“I don’t know why they’re saying that,” said Jill Derby, president of the Nevada State Democratic Party, referring to the Obama campaign. “We don’t select our national delegates the way they’re saying. We won’t select national delegates for a few more months.”
In terms of the popular vote, Mrs. Clinton won most of her support in Nevada’s southern counties, while Mr. Obama was more popular in the north. Clark County, home to Las Vegas and its influential union blocs, was supporting Mrs. Clinton by an 11-point margin with 93 percent of its caucuses reporting.
Mr. Edwards’s campaign issued a statement that described the senator as an underdog “facing two $100 million candidates” and emphasized his platform against lobbyists and special interests.
“The nomination won’t be decided by win-loss records, but by delegates, and we’re ready to fight for every delegate,” the statement said.
State party officials said more than 107,000 Nevada voters attended the caucuses. It is the third state in the row to achieve record-setting turnout in the Democratic presidential nominating fight, which party strategists believe is a referendum on the Bush administration and a strong call for a new direction in Washington.
Before leaving town, the candidates made separate stops to visit hotel and casino workers, making a final appeal for support.
Voters across Nevada poured into hundreds of neighborhood precincts across the state, as well as a handful of casinos on the Las Vegas Strip, to voice their preference in the Democratic presidential campaign.
In a brief morning stop by the Mirage casino and hotel, Mr. Obama was asked whether the outcome would influence voters in South Carolina, where Democrats will vote next Saturday.
“All these things add up,” Mr. Obama said.
Nevada, the third stop in the Democratic presidential nominating fight, was perhaps the most mysterious among the early-voting states. There was no clear front runner, no reliable polling data, and no institutional history. All candidates worked feverishly to manage – usually lowering – their expectations.
The Democratic caucus, never even a minor factor in past primary seasons, has historically attracted only the party faithful; only about 9,000 people participated in the 2004 caucuses at a handful of sites. Party officials were uncertain about turnout on Saturday, but preliminary reports suggested that participation was significantly higher.
At the Flamingo hotel, one of the at-large caucus sites on the Las Vegas Strip, it was a chaotic scene. Inside the Sunset Ballroom, 245 voters registered their attendance before breaking off into their preference groups.
Maids and cooks, bellmen and bartenders – nearly all of whom wore their uniforms and matching nametags – were standing more than 20 deep. To attend the caucus, they took an hour lunch break, but as the proceedings stretched beyond the allotted time, some of the voters asked if they could leave.
A boxed lunch was served and the proceedings were translated into Spanish.
“No matter what happens at the end of this, we will leave as friends and Democrats will be working together,” the temporary chairwoman of the caucus said, standing at the front of the ballroom. “We want everyone to feel they can choose their own candidate without intimidation.”
Brenda Santiago, a housekeeper at nearby Harrah’s hotel and casino, arrived shortly before Noon. Although she is a member of the Culinary Workers Union, which supported Mr. Obama, she said she had been determined to choose her favorite candidate on her own.
And that, she said, was Senator Clinton.
“I have my own opinions,” said Ms. Santiago, 46. “Hillary has more experience – and she has Bill!”
The strength of Mr. Obama’s endorsement by the Culinary Workers Union remained an open question. The Clinton campaign had denounced the at-large precincts in casinos as unfair, but inside the Sunset Ballroom of the Flamingo Hotel, Mrs. Clinton received support from 121 people and 25 delegates, compared to 120 for Mr. Obama and 24 delegates.
The Clinton corner, dominated largely by women, cheered when the results were announced.
Nevada was chosen by the Democratic Party to hold an early contest, along with South Carolina, to increase both geographic and racial diversity. Still, as other states decided to move their primaries to Feb. 5, and the nation has focused on the traditional early states, Iowa and New Hampshire, Nevada had remained in the shadows, with fewer candidate visits and national attention.
That shifted after Mr. Obama and Mrs. Clinton split their earlier contests, and the culinary union here, which has about 60,000 members and is extremely influential in the Democratic stronghold of Clark County, which includes Las Vegas, and hopes to play a major role in the race, threw its endorsement to Mr. Obama in a suddenly-relevant rubber match.
Mr. Obama and Mrs. Clinton both had offices around the state, including the Republican strong hold of Elko county, and campaign staff workers have fought for Hispanic, working class and suburban voters.
Michael M. Grynbaum contributed reporting from New York.
Winter Day Out in Boston
Robert Spencer for The New York TimesHarvard Book Store, just off Harvard Square.
January 18, 2008Winter Day Out in Boston BOSTON is a city of ghosts, but on the coldest of days, don’t expect them to come to you. Instead, visit Forest Hills Cemetery, a rambling Victorian-era burial ground about four miles from downtown and a splendidly quiet place to roam. Winding paths crisscross its 275 acres, and if you pick up a map by the entrance, you can find the graves of Anne Sexton, E. E. Cummings and Eugene O’Neill. Drive slowly along the narrow roads until you find a good place to park and wander. On a recent morning, snow crunched underfoot and fell in soft chunks from the treetops. Bliss.
After an hour or two of tromping, you will be thoroughly chilled and getting hungry. Drive a few miles north to Brookline, where you can thaw out by a stone hearth at the Fireplace, known for coziness and New England comfort food. The sweet-spiced squash bisque with Great Hill blue cheese and pumpkin seeds was a standout on my visit, but the tuna melt with Vermont Cheddar and the turkey club rolled in a Rhode Island johnnycake also caught my eye.
This being Boston, you must also feed your brain. In tweedy Cambridge, there is no better place to get lost than the aisles of Harvard Book Store, just off Harvard Square. It’s 75 years old and packed with titles familiar and unknown. There are separate sections for philosophy, cultural and critical theory and politics, as well as a vast fiction collection. Most customers are quietly engrossed, but you may encounter a conversation or two worth eavesdropping on.
Bundle up again and stroll a few blocks, window-shopping all the way, for your next bit of sustenance: an astoundingly rich hot cocoa at L. A. Burdick, a cafe and chocolate shop on the other side of Harvard Square. Choose from dark, milk or white chocolate, and if you dare risk overdosing, try one of Burdick’s famous chocolate mice on the side.
On the other side of the Charles River, nocturnal adventures await. Boston’s South End, brimming with homegrown shops and restaurants, historic brownstones and creative energy, is a fine place to end a wintry day. In the middle of it all is Sibling Rivalry, an upscale restaurant run by two brothers who create “dueling” menus with one set of main ingredients each season. The fall menu featured scallops, mushrooms, artichokes, bacon and beets — one brother concocted a salad of roasted beets with goat cheese fondue, walnuts and bibb lettuce, for example, while the other offered boneless short ribs of beef with roasted beets, ragout of salsify, pearl onions and carrots.
Just down the street, one of the city’s newest nightspots pulses with live music, mostly jazz, seven nights a week. Most performers are local, with the nearby Berklee College of Music providing a steady supply. You might catch a jazz organ trio, a bluesy jam band or a bossa nova chanteuse in the cavernous space, a former boiler room with exposed brick walls, red velvet curtains and funky chandeliers. Drinks like the Beehive Julep and the Moscow Mule (vodka, ginger beer and lime) will help you stay toasty.
If snow is falling, walk less than two blocks south to Union Park Street to glimpse a scene from 19th-century Boston before calling it a night. The narrow park, surrounded by cast-iron fences and gas lamps, will be lovely and still, a perfect precursor to sleep.
Forest Hills Cemetery, 95 Forest Hills Avenue, Jamaica Plain. The Fireplace, 1634 Beacon Street, Brookline; (617) 975-1900. Harvard Book Store, 1256 Massachusetts Avenue, Cambridge; (617) 661-1515. L. A. Burdick, 52-D Brattle Street, Cambridge; (617) 491-4340. Sibling Rivalry, 525 Tremont Street; (617) 338-5338. The Beehive, 541 Tremont Street; (617) 423-0069.
On Africa’s Roof, Still Crowned With Snow
Tom NorringTrekkers at Uhuru on Mount Kilimanjaro’s Kibo peak. At 19,340 feet, it’s the highest point in Africa
January 20, 2008Explorer | Mount KilimanjaroOn Africa’s Roof, Still Crowned With Snow By NEIL MODIEA THICK veil of snow had settled on Kilimanjaro the morning after my group arrived in Tanzania. Over breakfast, we gazed at the peak filling the sky above the palm trees of our hotel courtyard in Moshi, the town closest to the mountain. It was as Hemingway described it: “as wide as all the world, great, high, and unbelievably white in the sun.”
I had wanted to climb to the roof of Africa before climate change erased its ice fields and the romance of its iconic “Snows of Kilimanjaro” image. But as we trudged across the 12,000-foot Shira plateau on Day 2 of our weeklong climb and gazed at the whiteness of the vast, humpbacked summit, I thought maybe I needn’t have worried.
An up-and-down-and-up traverse of the south face of Kibo, the tallest of the mountain’s three volcanic peaks, showed us a panorama of the summit ice cap and fractured tentacles of glacial ice that dangled down gullies dividing the vertical rock faces. And four days later, when we reached 19,340-foot Uhuru, the highest point on Kibo, we beheld snow and ice fields so enormous as to resemble the Arctic.
It looked nothing like the photographs of Kibo nearly denuded of ice and snow in the Al Gore documentary “An Inconvenient Truth.” Nor did it seem to jibe with the film’s narrative: “Within the decade, there will be no more snows of Kilimanjaro.”
As it turned out, we had simply been lucky.
This was the last week of January — nearly a year ago — and the middle of the dry season. But several weeks of heavy rain and snow preceded the arrival of our group, 10 mountaineering clients and a professional guide from International Mountain Guides, based near Seattle. That made for a freakishly well-fed snow pack and the classic snowy image portrayed on travel posters, the label of the local Kilimanjaro Premium Lager and the T-shirts hawked in Moshi’s tourist bazaars. But to many climate scientists and glaciologists who have probed and measured, the disappearance of the summit’s ice fields is inevitable and imminent.
Lonnie Thompson, a glaciologist at Ohio State University who has studied Kilimanjaro’s ice fields for years, photographed the summit a year to the week, coincidentally, before we were there. He found only a few, isolated snow patches in shaded areas, a drastic difference from what we encountered. Even on the world’s highest free-standing volcano, seasonal snow doesn’t remain on a peak so close to the Equator.
One of our Tanzanian guides, John Mtui, a tall, bespectacled and soft-spoken Chagga — the people who inhabit Kilimanjaro’s southern foothills — began climbing the mountain as a porter 25 years earlier, when he was 18. “When I first started climbing, we had big snow, big glaciers,” Mr. Mtui said. “The glaciers were bigger and taller than now. And also, the weather changed. We had heavier rain than we have now.”
Like other exotic destinations widely believed to be threatened by degradation from climate change, the mountain’s precariousness has become a marketing opportunity. The adventure travel industry sends about 30,000 climbers a year toward Kilimanjaro’s summit. Scientific and outdoor magazines mention the imminent loss of the ice fields. So do guide services and outfitters on their Web sites. Our climb leader, Justin Merle, a mellow 6-foot-4 man in his late 20s who has a world-class mountaineering résumé, said of the typical adventure-travel article: “It’s like, ‘See Kili Before the Snow Is Gone.’ That’s almost a catchphrase.”
Given Kilimanjaro’s snow, glaciers and volcanic upbringing, it didn’t look all that different from peaks I’ve climbed in my native Northwest. From my living room in Seattle, I can gaze at Mount Rainier, which I’ve climbed a dozen times. Even in the dead of summer, it retains a mantle of ice that makes it seem like a hulking life form. Kilimanjaro is almost unimaginably bigger: nearly a mile higher, it covers 1,250 square miles abutting Kenya.
And yet, unlike Rainier, climbing Kilimanjaro required no real mountaineering skills, no ice axes, ropes or crampons, merely strong legs, hearts and lungs for trudging more than three and a half vertical miles above sea level. That, and a supply of Diamox, to fend off altitude sickness.
Our approach was on the Machame, the most scenic and second-most heavily traveled — a distant second — of the six designated routes to the summit. Even so, our six camps along the way, five on the ascent and one on the descent, were 200-tent metropolises.
The most heavily congested approach is the Marangu, called the “tourist” or “Coca-Cola” route, a reflection of its overcrowded, touristy ambience and the ubiquitous soft drink, which is sold at camps along the way. Our longer, more macho Machame is known as the “whiskey route.”
The trip to the summit and back down again covered 39 miles. Most of my companions were seasoned hikers and backpackers but had scant mountaineering experience. Two exceptions were Todd Ziegler, an orthopedic surgeon from an Atlanta suburb, and his friend, Julie Nellis, a physical therapist from Atlanta, a diminutive but tireless, multisport athlete and the only woman on the trip. Both had climbed Rainier and major summits in the Sierra Nevada, the Rockies, Mexico and elsewhere.
Mr. Merle had already guided expeditions to four of the Seven Summits — Aconcagua, Everest, McKinley and Vinson Massif in Antarctica. Kilimanjaro was his easiest. We 11 Americans were the pampered tip of a human iceberg that included three Tanzanian guides and 38 porters and cooks, all Chaggas. They cooked and served our meals, boiled our water and carried much of our individual gear along with cook pots, food, our sleeping tents and a walk-in dining tent. As we’d trudge with our day packs up the mountain, the porters — some in their midteens — would overtake us while hauling on their backs our duffels containing our sleeping bags and extra clothing, tents and plastic armchairs. “Jambo,” they’d murmur, Swahili for “hello”; it was a polite way of saying, “Coming through. Step aside.”
We passed through ecological zones of spectacular diversity: equatorial rain forest, followed by misty heath and moors dotted with outsize, otherworldly flora, then alpine high desert and finally the frigid, dry summit zone. It was all on trail, but several steep stretches required grabbing handholds on near-vertical rock.
At 5,718 feet at the trailhead Machame Gate, we set out on a muddy track in the rain forest, thick with vines, old-man’s-beard and trees perched atop giant above-ground roots. The cloudy sky abruptly gave way to heavy rain, which ceased once we made our way up a misty hogback ridge onto the Shira plateau, covered with giant heathers and sprinkled with glossy volcanic obsidian.
As we traversed the plateau, gaining, losing and regaining elevation between 12,300 feet and 15,200 feet, four of us took Mr. Merle’s offer to make a side trip to the Lava Tower, a black volcanic plug rising some 300 vertical feet above the plateau, while the others hiked on to the next camp.
I get spooked scrambling up even nontechnical vertical rock. But when Mr. Merle asked if any of us wanted to ascend the tower, and Ms. Nellis instantly chirped, “I want to go,” the rest of us followed, assisted by Mr. Merle and Mr. Mtui in finding each handhold and foothold.
In the moors were the region’s most distinctively weird plants: colonnade-like, eight-foot lobelias and clusters of tree-size senecio kilimanjari, or giant groundsels, with clumps of cabbage-shaped leaf clusters atop withered-looking trunks.
Kilimanjaro’s abundant wildlife was rarely visible. Small snakes and monkeys scurried away from us in the rain forest. Jet-black, white-necked ravens — sturdy, hatchet-beaked, mean-looking — uttered guttural croaks as they fought over food scraps at the higher camps.
At our highest camp, austere Barafu (ice in Swahili) on a cliff top at 15,200 feet, the only permanent residents were primitive lichens and mosses. From there, starting at midnight with headlamps, we clambered, gulping thin air, up frozen scree the final 4,100 vertical feet to the summit. “Pole-pole,” the porters counseled, Swahili for slowly. As if we could do otherwise.
On several steep, single-file stretches, we waged elbow and expletive duels with Italian, American and Russian parties trying to crowd past us and other teams who were slowed by traffic jams of climbers above us.
Patchy snow covered the upper slopes above approximately 18,500 feet. At dawn, as we reached Stella Point at the lower lip of Kibo’s summit crater, the fluted walls of the flat-topped Rebmann Glacier stretched out to our left.
Snow blanketed the summit area, a mile and a half wide and hemmed by glaciers. Uhuru, the highest point in all Africa, was a 45-minute slog ahead.
From there, we gazed toward Kenya, obscured by clouds, on the mountain’s northern flank. In the distance to the southwest rose the volcanic cone of Mount Meru, 15,000 feet. Seven miles to the east, yet still part of the Kilimanjaro massif, was its fanged, eroded, second-highest peak and Africa’s third highest, 16,893-foot Mawenzi. (Mount Kenya, about 90 miles north of Nairobi, is No. 2 at 17,058 feet.)
All 10 of us reached the summit, even two stragglers fighting altitude sickness. That let International Mountain Guides continue to boast of a 100 percent success rate in getting its Kilimanjaro clients to the top. That flies in the face of the mountain’s overall record, thought to be roughly 50 percent failures, mainly on the less acclimatization-friendly Marangu route.
After the ascent, we dropped 4,100 feet back down loose scree to Barafu for a brief rest. Then we descended another 5,000 vertical feet, the last hours in a downpour, to muddy Mweka Camp, our final overnight, in the rain forest.
There, we beheld a most welcome namesake of the mountain: Kilimanjaro Premium Lager, sold by the Mweka park ranger out of his tiny hut.
Descending the final 4,800 feet of elevation to Mweka Gate, we found a clamorous gaggle of local entrepreneurs hustling T-shirts, souvenirs and services. Two dollars bought me an incomparable bargain: a thorough scrubbing, rinsing and wiping of my mud-caked boots, gaiters and trekking poles.
Back at the Keys Hotel in Moshi that night, the local lager was the official beverage of our victory celebration. On its label, at least, Kilimanjaro’s snows would never disappear.
IF YOU GO
Kilimanjaro has two main climbing seasons: January through February and mid-June through mid-October, typically the most stable weather periods. The mountain has six established routes to the summit, some of them demanding mountaineering routes. The most heavily used trekking route is the Marangu, but other routes take longer to reach the summit and allow for more gradual acclimatization.
Numerous adventure travel companies in the United States and abroad offer guided climbs of Kilimanjaro. International Mountain Guides (360-569-2609; www.mountainguides.com), which has led treks to the summit since 1989, takes the Machame route. There are a 7-day climb for $3,600 and a 15-day trip for $4,975 that includes a wildlife safari to the Ngorongoro Crater and the Serengeti Plain. Prices include park fees and in-country travel.
Alpine Ascents International (206-378-1927; www.alpineascents.com) has scheduled 2008 winter climbs at about $5,600, via Machame and including a safari in a 15-day trip. There are climb-only ($4,700) and safari-only ($2,500) options.
Rainier Mountaineering (888-892-5462 or 360-569-2227; www.rmiguides.com) offers a 13-day climb via the Machame route and a safari for $4,895 or a 9-day climb-only trip for $3,495.
Mountain Travel Sobek (888-687-6235 or 510-594-6000; www.mtsobek.com) takes trekkers on a less traveled route, the Rongai, to Kilimanjaro’s summit in a 14-day trip that includes a wildlife safari and a stay on Kenya‘s coast. Prices start at $5,995 plus $1,050 for park fees and $300 for in-country airfare, or a 10-day climb-only option for $3,995 plus $975 for park fees and $200 for in-country airfare.
Japan’s Best Sellers Go Cellular
Ko Sasaki for The New York TimesJapan’s younger generation came of age with the cellphone, and created its own popular culture by tapping thumbs on keypads.
January 20, 2008Japan’s Best Sellers Go Cellular TOKYO — Until recently, cellphone novels — composed on phone keypads by young women wielding dexterous thumbs and read by fans on their tiny screens — had been dismissed in Japan as a subgenre unworthy of the country that gave the world its first novel, “The Tale of Genji,” a millennium ago. Then last month, the year-end best-seller tally showed that cellphone novels, republished in book form, have not only infiltrated the mainstream but have come to dominate it.
Of last year’s 10 best-selling novels, five were originally cellphone novels, mostly love stories written in the short sentences characteristic of text messaging but containing little of the plotting or character development found in traditional novels. What is more, the top three spots were occupied by first-time cellphone novelists, touching off debates in the news media and blogosphere.
“Will cellphone novels kill ‘the author’?” a famous literary journal, Bungaku-kai, asked on the cover of its January issue. Fans praised the novels as a new literary genre created and consumed by a generation whose reading habits had consisted mostly of manga, or comic books. Critics said the dominance of cellphone novels, with their poor literary quality, would hasten the decline of Japanese literature.
Whatever their literary talents, cellphone novelists are racking up the kind of sales that most more experienced, traditional novelists can only dream of.
One such star, a 21-year-old woman named Rin, wrote “If You” over a six-month stretch during her senior year in high school. While commuting to her part-time job or whenever she found a free moment, she tapped out passages on her cellphone and uploaded them on a popular Web site for would-be authors.
After cellphone readers voted her novel No. 1 in one ranking, her story of the tragic love between two childhood friends was turned into a 142-page hardcover book last year. It sold 400,000 copies and became the No. 5 best-selling novel of 2007, according to a closely watched list by Tohan, a major book distributor.
“My mother didn’t even know that I was writing a novel,” said Ms. Rin, who, like many cellphone novelists, goes by only one name. “So at first when I told her, well, I’m coming out with a novel, she was like, what?
“She didn’t believe it until it came out and appeared in book stores.”
The cellphone novel was born in 2000 after a home-page-making Web site, Maho no i-rando, realized that many users were writing novels on their blogs; it tinkered with its software to allow users to upload works in progress and readers to comment, creating the serialized cellphone novel. But the number of users uploading novels began booming only two to three years ago, and the number of novels listed on the site reached one million last month, according to Maho no i-rando.
The boom appeared to have been fueled by a development having nothing to do with culture or novels but by mobile-phone companies’ decision to offer unlimited transmission of packet data, like text-messaging, as part of flat monthly rates. The largest provider, Docomo, began offering this service in mid-2004.
“Their cellphone bills were easily reaching $1,000, so many people experienced what they called ‘packet death,’ and you wouldn’t hear from them for a while,” said Shigeru Matsushima, an editor who oversees the book uploading site at Starts Publishing, a leader in republishing cellphone novels.
The affordability of cellphones coincided with the coming of age of a generation of Japanese for whom cellphones, more than personal computers, had been an integral part of their lives since junior high school. So they read the novels on their cellphones, even though the same Web sites were also accessible by computer. They punched out text messages with their thumbs with blinding speed, and used expressions and emoticons, like smilies and musical notes, whose nuances were lost on anyone over the age of 25.
“It’s not that they had a desire to write and that the cellphone happened to be there,” said Chiaki Ishihara, an expert in Japanese literature at Waseda University who has studied cellphone novels. “Instead, in the course of exchanging e-mail, this tool called the cellphone instilled in them a desire to write.”
Indeed, many cellphone novelists had never written fiction before, and many of their readers had never read novels before, according to publishers.
Cellphone writers are not paid for their work, no matter how many millions of times their novels might be read online. The payoff, if any, comes when the novels are reproduced and sold as traditional books. Readers have free access to the Web sites that carry the novels, or pay at most $1 to $2 a month, but the sites make most of their money from advertising.
Critics say the novels owe a lot to a genre devoured by the young: comic books. In cellphone novels, characters tend to remain undeveloped and descriptions thin, while paragraphs are often fragments and consist mostly of dialogue.
“Traditionally, Japanese would depict a scene emotionally, like ‘The train came out of the long tunnel into the snow country,’ ” Mika Naito, a novelist, said, referring to the famous opening sentence of Yasunari Kawabata’s “Snow Country.”
“In cellphone novels, you don’t need that,” said Ms. Naito, 36, who recently began writing cellphone novels at the urging of her publisher. “If you limit it to a certain place, readers won’t be able to feel a sense of familiarity.”
Written in the first person, many cellphone novels read like diaries. Almost all the authors are young women delving into affairs of the heart, spiritual descendants, perhaps, of Shikibu Murasaki, the 11th century royal lady-in-waiting who wrote “The Tale of Genji.”
“Love Sky,” a debut novel by a young woman named Mika, was read by 20 million people on cellphones or on computers, according to Maho no i-rando, where it was first uploaded. A tear-jerker featuring adolescent sex, rape, pregnancy and a fatal disease — the genre’s sine qua non — the novel nevertheless captured the young generation’s attitude, its verbal tics and the cellphone’s omnipresence. Republished in book form, it became the No. 1 selling novel last year and was made into a movie.
Given the cellphone novels’ domination of the mainstream, critics no longer dismiss them, though some say they should be classified with comic books or popular music.
Ms. Rin said ordinary novels left members of her generation cold.
“They don’t read works by professional writers because their sentences are too difficult to understand, their expressions are intentionally wordy, and the stories are not familiar to them,” she said. “On other hand, I understand how older Japanese don’t want to recognize these as novels. The paragraphs and the sentences are too simple, the stories are too predictable. But I’d like cellphone novels to be recognized as a genre.”
As the genre’s popularity leads more people to write cellphone novels, though, an existential question has arisen: can a work be called a cellphone novel if it is not composed on a cellphone, but on a computer or, inconceivably, in longhand?
“When a work is written on a computer, the nuance of the number of lines is different, and the rhythm is different from writing on a cellphone,” said Keiko Kanematsu, an editor at Goma Books, a publisher of cellphone novels. “Some hard-core fans wouldn’t consider that a cellphone novel.”
Still, others say the genre is not defined by the writing tool.
Ms. Naito, the novelist, said she writes on a computer and sends the text to her cellphone, with which she rearranges the content. Unlike the first-time cellphone novelists in their teens or early 20s, Ms. Naito said she felt more comfortable writing on a computer.
But at least one member of the cellphone generation has made the switch to computers. A year ago, one of Starts Publishing’s young stars, Chaco, gave up her phone even though she could compose much faster with it by tapping with her thumb.
“Because of writing on the cellphone, her nail had cut into the flesh and became bloodied,” said Mr. Matsushita of Starts.
“Since she’s switched to a computer,” he added, “her vocabulary’s gotten richer and her sentences have also grown longer.”
Today’s Papers
Kick in the Pants
By Lydia DePillis
Posted Saturday, Jan. 19, 2008, at 6:36 A.M. E.T.The New York Times, Washington Post, and Los Angeles Times all lead with the roughly $145 billion economic stimulus package outlined Friday by President Bush. The White House arrived at the number by taking 1 percent of GDP, exceeding the expected $100 billion for onetime individual tax rebates for consumers, with half as much again for businesses in the form of an expansion of the deductions for investment in equipment. The administration sidestepped a few of the plan’s worst potential hurdles by leaving details up for negotiation with Congressional Democrats (a strategy Treasury Secretary Henry Paulson called “constructive ambiguity”) and refraining from linking the proposal to making Bush’s earlier tax cuts permanent. The proposal met with largely affable reactions on Capitol Hill, but the WP emphasizes that it failed to calm jittery markets, which continued their fall as the week closed.
Today’s Nevada Democratic caucus and South Carolina Republican primary dominate election news. The WP fronts a look at the frenzied final day of campaigning in the GOP race, where Mike Huckabee is battling John McCain’s veteran supporters with his own Christian evangelicals, both of whom are large constituencies in the pivotal state. South Carolina’s political establishment is as divided as its electorate, with its Republican senators split between McCain, who’s vowing to follow Osama bin Laden “to the gates of hell if necessary,” and Mitt Romney, who’s in a race for third with Fred Thompson. The NYT fronts below the fold an almost admiring study of Huckabee’s ability to turn hard Christian right positions (such as an endorsement of a Southern Baptist statement declaring that a wife must “submit herself graciously to the servant leadership of her husband”) into moderate-seeming soundbites, but the paper buries a folksy profile of Fred Thompson on the trail.
On the Democratic side, the LAT reefers an overview of the scene in Nevada, finding that while Hillary Clinton and Barack Obama are making a few concessions to the Nevadan audience with talk of issues like Yucca Mountain, the Western setting is still mostly a backdrop for their recurring themes of change and experience. But in the heightened atmosphere of a tie-breaking state, the WP says that Obama has learned to rigorously counter all the attacks levied against him by Senator Clinton, while weaving offensive barbs into his speeches.
The Democratic presidential contenders, breaking from their Congressional colleagues, blasted the White House’s stimulus package for passing over those most in need: Although the Bush plan would grant an estimated $800 rebate to each individual taxpayer, 50 million people who make too little to pay income taxes in the first place would get nothing. Administration officials, however, tell the WP that these points are open for debate, and the compromise package—to be hammered out in a meeting Tuesday—could include an increase in the earned income tax credit as well as unemployment benefits. The LAT plays it as a sign that President Bush is taking the lead on the economy, while the NYT notes that both the White House and Congress have an interest in taking swift action, considering recent ominous economic indicators and both of their abysmal approval ratings.
Yesterday marked the beginning of Ashura, Shiite Islam’s most important holiday, in which hundreds of thousands gather to worship in Basra and Nasiriya. This year, as the LAT fronts and the WP stuffs, adherents of a messianic cult called Supporters of the Mahdi are spreading chaos, hoping to hasten the return of the 12th imam. Eighty have died in clashes with Iraqi security forces, in the government’s first major test in the region since the Americans and the British turned it over last month. The NYT has a surprisingly upbeat take, pointing out that government troops have protected the vast majority of worshipers.
Meanwhile, the LAT fronts a big picture of people still dying in Kenya, where supporters of opposition leader Raila Odinga have begun to tear up railway lines to protest the contested presidential election, meeting with canisters of tear gas from police. According to the NYT, Friday marked the beginning of a period of relative calm after a tactical switch from mass rallies to boycotts of businesses allied with President Mwai Kibaki.
The NYT catches up to the WP‘s scoop yesterday on the CIA’s conclusion that former Pakistani Prime Minister Benazir Bhutto had been taken out by a Pakistani militant leader with ties to al Qaida. The WP, in turn, fronts the case of Mohammed Mansour Jabarah, a terrorist who took advantage of relatively cushy conditions at Fort Dix, N.J., to start a weapons stash and begin laying plans to attack his captors, while divulging some of the most valuable information gleaned yet on top al Qaida operatives.
The NYT features a look at how some high oil prices—those of “edible oils” like palm and canola—are affecting how much people eat, not just how much they drive. Factors like the rise of biofuels in vehicles and even bans on trans fats in United States cities leave poor people in South Asia especially without affordable cooking oil.
Covering the race that matters most in Los Angeles, the LAT puts no fewer than six reporters on the story developing around the film industry’s biggest party: the Oscars, nominations for which are due out on Tuesday. Everybody’s hoping and praying for a resolution to the Writers Guild of America strike—dressmakers! Studios! Millions of people around the world! The NYT gets into the act with an illuminating above-the-fold profile of the two leaders behind the picket lines.
The WP reefers and NYT and LAT front long obituaries of the international chess champion, anti-Communist hero, and madman Bobby Fischer, who died late Thursday. Check out the NYT piece for the best stories of his life, including a refusal of psychiatric help on the grounds that a psychiatrist should pay him for the privilege of working on his brain.
Lydia DePillis is a writer living in New York.Ferrari’s 2008 car is better than its title-winning predecessor
Zoom
Shorter wheelbase on the F2008 helping Raikkonen
Ferrari’s 2008 car is better than its title-winning predecessor, Kimi Raikkonen said earlier this week at Jerez.
The Spanish sports newspaper Marca quotes Raikkonen as discussing the early performance of his new mount, the F2008.
“The car has improved in quite a few areas, especially its behaviour in the slow curves,” the Finn revealed.
Raikkonen added that at the car’s next outing, in Valencia for the group test beginning next Tuesday, the car will be tried with modified bodywork pieces.
“So far the car is behaving well and I think we are in a very good starting position,” he said.
Source GMMThursday, January 17, 2008
Shelby Lynne’s Dusty Trail
Mel Karch
January 13, 2008Shelby Lynne’s Dusty Trail By ROB HOERBURGERI. The Grammarian
Everything started as expected. Shelby Lynne, the torchy pop singer, and her band, about a half-dozen slightly shaggy regular Joes, ambled into the Viceroy, a retro lounge in downtown Seattle, in early November, looking to get a head start on Saturday night. They were in town to perform songs from her new CD, “Just a Little Lovin’,” a tribute to Dusty Springfield, due out Jan. 29, but because their concert wasn’t for a couple of days, Lynne announced, with a knee slap in her voice: “I am off work! I want to get drunk and hear some music.” Here was the fabled good ol’ girl, who, even though she junked Nashville and country music more than a decade earlier, still had plenty of country spirit. A few rounds were served; jocularity ensued. That is, until the end of her second Chopin martini (three olives), when the air started to get a little thin.
“Do you know the difference between the words ‘bringing’ and ‘taking’?” she practically whispered into my sleeve, as if not to embarrass me. “Because you just used one of them incorrectly.” I do know the difference, and though I couldn’t remember what I said, I agreed with her anyway, dizzied by the sudden altitude of the conversation. Lynne then proceeded to conduct a sobering mini-symposium on grammar: subjective and objective cases; “begging” versus “raising” the question; parts of speech. “It’s all about using the proper pronouns,” she asserted with the calm authority of a linguistics maven promoting her latest book on NPR.
I’d heard some choice nouns applied to Lynne. “Aren’t ‘hellcat’ and ‘spitfire’ the words most used to describe you?” her road manager, Tim Aller, said a little later that night. I’d also heard some prime adjectives: “misunderstood” and, sliding down the politeness scale, “gnarly” and “volatile.” (“Please go easy on Shelby if she gets a little tipsy,” one of her staff members had entreated.) But there she sat on the leather banquette, bolt upright, a model of prim-and-trim rectitude, in her smart blazer, jeans and boots, her peroxided hair parted, layered and quietly falling onto her shoulders. Well, why not? Her songs, often about recalcitrant, neglectful or hesitant lovers, are highly literate, and her background is not quite as off-road as it has often been portrayed. And while it’s true that she has been hardened by a single, horrific event — the murder-suicide of her parents when she was a teenager — she has refused to let that frame the conversation about her. Maybe this pedagogic interlude was just an extension of the contemplative artist, whose work has won critical acclaim and seemed to position her, early in this decade, as the next important grown-up pop singer for greater America.
Suddenly one corner of her mouth slid up. “Hay-ull, what do I know?” she said, her Alabama drawl, usually a slow drip when she sings, now in full stream. “I didn’t go to college.” Lesson over. Lynne was back to the good ol’ girl: she inquired after the score of the L.S.U.-Alabama game and reeled off some college-football rankings. Another list was lingering in the air, too — that week’s music charts. “Did you see that Alison Krauss debuted at No. 2 this week with her album with Robert Plant?” one of her band members said. The unlikely pairing of Krauss, the bluegrass singer and fiddler, and Plant, the lead singer of Led Zeppelin, was looking as if it might become the biggest hit in her career, which was already studded with millions in sales and a wall of Grammys (20 at last count).
“That li’l bitch, doesn’t she have enough already?” Lynne said. Lynne clearly didn’t begrudge Krauss the success, but she had to be wondering why she hasn’t had at least a sliver of the platinum pie. That particular week in early November was a good one for country pop; landing ahead of Krauss on the charts, at No. 1, was Carrie Underwood, the “American Idol” ingénue whose second album, “Carnival Ride,” sold more than 500,000 copies in its first week. And Reba McEntire, the country doyenne, also reached No. 1 a few weeks before that with an album of duets. Meanwhile, Lynne, though she’s not a country singer anymore, looked with some melancholy on the success of her estranged musical cousins. She has yet to go platinum — with all eight of her albums combined. “The only way to get ahead in the music business these days is to call up all your friends,” she said. “To pool your resources.”
In a sense that is what Lynne is doing with “Just a Little Lovin’,” calling back Springfield, the sultry British chanteuse and Rock and Roll Hall of Famer who died in 1999 and with whom Lynne is sometimes compared, to help her finally break her commercial curse. She came close with her first post-Nashville album, “I Am Shelby Lynne,” which garnered enthusiastic reviews and led to a surprise Best New Artist Grammy in 2001 — surprise considering how long she’d been in the business. But the usual post-Grammy anointing by a broader public never happened. She always seemed to release the right album at the wrong time, or the wrong album at the right time, or release the wrong single, or be on the wrong label, or even wear the wrong outfit (she collected that Grammy, in front of millions of viewers getting their first good look at her, in a skimpy two-piece that, as my mother used to say about Carly Simon’s risqué get-ups in the ’70s, almost missed).
Now the hope is, with an album of songs that people already know, Lynne’s commercial stars might finally align. If she were 10 or 15 years younger — Lynne is 39 — she might be Carrie Underwood or Kellie Pickler, blowing away the “American Idol” panel with her earthy, passionate voice and booking a ride to the top of the charts. While 39 doesn’t necessarily mean senescence in pop music the way it once might have — Bruce Springsteen picked up his most recent No. 1 album at age 58; that’s eight years older than Frank Sinatra was when he recorded “Strangers in the Night” — it is a little long in the tooth to be looking for your first big hit.
But the album’s release was still more than two months away, and the concert was still two nights away, and it was time for Saturday night to resume. Lynne put a temporary ban on shoptalk and instructed everyone to head for dinner. At the restaurant she admired the young maître’d's black onyx earrings, practically yanking them from his ears and fingering the piercings, which were the size of pennies. (“How’d you get ‘em so big?” she asked. “Practice,” he replied.) When we were seated, she painted, or rather drew, herself into a corner of the rectangular table; for a restaurant with such a pricey wine list, it seemed surprising that there were crayons available, but there they were, and Lynne bowed her head and started sketching furiously on the paper tablecloth, finishing with something resembling a fat brown spruce. She checked everyone else’s drawings, topped off everyone’s wineglass and went back to her tree. Here was the nurturing den mother.
Then came the Britney moment.
“I just wanna make my [adjective] music, man,” she said, bobbing up, crayon rattling in hand, seemingly unconcerned with who was in earshot. Her entourage raised half a collective eyebrow — they seemed used to this kind of outburst — but then resumed eating as Lynne, her blue-steel eyes narrowed and fixed on me, issued what seemed to be both an apology and a warning. “I’ve just been burned so many [adjective] times.”
So now, in addition to good ol’ girl, contemplative artist and nurturing den mother, there was bratty star. In three hours, Lynne had revealed the ingredients of the potent cocktail that has created some exquisite music but also a constant, almost entitled sense of embattlement, which might have helped keep her at arm’s length from a large audience. “Mañana,” she cooed a few minutes later, referring to a meeting we’d scheduled and adding another persona, sexy vamp, to the list. It was as if to say, now that she’d gotten all that out of her system, she was ready to begin.
II. The Look of Lunch
Seattle: crunchy and aerobic, city of steep hills, high literacy, designer caffeine bars. Shelby Lynne, though, declined my offer to meet at one of its main attractions — I’d suggested the Rem Koolhaas-designed library — and instead took the elevator down from her hotel room and walked a few steps across the street to Cyclops, a bar (her kind of bar, the old-fashioned kind). There was a portly bartender, football on the TV and a felt poster of mid-’70s Elvis (shades and spangles but not yet busting out of his jumpsuit) on the wall behind the table in the front window, where I found Lynne installed at 12:30 in the afternoon, halfway through a Guinness.
She flicked a “Hey” off her lips, and from behind her ice blue sunglasses — there was actually sun in Seattle that day, and it was pouring through the window — she motioned to the seat across from her. I was struck again by how petite she is, almost tomboyish, though it always seems to be the case with these divas when they show up in person: they never take up as much space as their big voices and outsize reputations might suggest. And Lynne, in a variation of yesterday’s blazer-and-jeans ensemble, looked ready for business, peace-sign necklace around her neck, her blond hair now pulled back and up and making her resemble a pert alumna of a Beach Boys song. We started to talk about the new album and Springfield. Then another legendary diva interrupted us.
“Badass!” Lynne exclaimed. “Midnight Train to Georgia” was piping through the sound system. “A bass, drums, piano and guitar. That’s all you need. And a badass singer like Gladys Knight.” She took a long sip of her Guinness. “Oh, yeah, and the Pips. They were O.K.”
Knight and Elvis, Johnny Cash and Glen Campbell, Nancy Wilson and Brook Benton, all singers from different backgrounds, all staking claims to different eras and different styles, but all with a certain similar elemental approach to singing that appeals to Lynne and places them among her favorites. It’s that same vocal immersion that drew her to Springfield, although she admits she was late to get hip: she was introduced to Springfield only about 15 years ago, during Lynne’s musical hash-slinging days in Nashville. “Somebody gave me a copy of ‘Dusty in Memphis,’ ” she said, referring to Springfield’s sea-parting 1969 LP. “And I thought, Damn, that’s the kind of record I want to make.” On her new CD — nine songs from Springfield’s catalog, plus one original — Lynne in fact bites off a big chaw of “Dusty in Memphis” (though she wisely avoids the untouchable “Son of a Preacher Man”) and also tackles a handful of Springfield’s steamy hit singles like “The Look of Love” and “You Don’t Have to Say You Love Me.” “I started listening to Dusty, Al Green and the Plastic Ono Band all at the same time,” she said, “and I knew I had to get the hell out of Nashville.”
Lynne, who came from a musical family (“I was singing before I could talk,” she said), moved to Nashville from Alabama in 1989 a few years after her parents’ death, when she was 20, shopped a few songs around and before long had a deal with CBS Records. But it also wasn’t long before she rankled under the tight musical and image control that the country-music capital is wont to impose on its young artists. Lynne, who’d lived her life till then basically bucking and throwing riders, was not one to conform. “When I was growing up,” she said, “we always had quality music in the house. It was the Mills Brothers, the Everly Brothers, Elvis, the Beatles, Waylon and Willie. We never listened to crap. And then I got to Nashville and was told what to record, what to wear. I thought: You’re gonna tell me what to sing? What to wear?”
She lasted for four albums and notched a few minor country hits. She even won the Academy of Country Music’s Top New Female Vocalist award in 1991. But after about a decade and increasingly diminishing record sales, she’d had enough, and the feeling was mutual. “I think she was recognized as one of the greatest singers in a city full of good singers,” says Luke Lewis, president of Lost Highway Records, Lynne’s current label, and a veteran of the Nashville scene. “But she’s tempestuous, and Nashville is known to be intolerant of tempestuousness. It got her into trouble with the gatekeepers, the ones who decide what gets on the radio, on TV, what gets printed.”
Lynne’s voice, eyes, carriage, soften when she talks about the music fans in Nashville, explaining that they weren’t the problem. When she recently performed a brief concert there to introduce her new album, she told me: “They were still with me, they didn’t let me down. They never have.” But she’s less generous about the state of country music today. “I don’t like modern country music,” she said. “It’s not what I’m into, is all. I’m old-school. I tend to like Tammy Wynette, Hank Williams, Jimmie Rodgers. . . . The new stuff all sounds the same. I’m not ragging on anybody, but it doesn’t require emotional involvement. What Carrie Underwood is singing about has already been heard. It’s in a beautiful package. But my duty is to take the hard route.”
That route led her West, with everything she owned in two suitcases, toward Los Angeles. It was one occasion when Lynne’s fearlessness paid off, as she sought out Bill Bottrell, producer of Sheryl Crow‘s “Tuesday Night Music Club,” another album she admired. She was armed with demo recordings of her new style: quieter, suffused with heartbreak to be sure, but more elliptical than her lyrically and musically too-on-the-nose country recordings. Bottrell signed on, and in 1999, “I Am Shelby Lynne” emerged. It was a smoldering statement of desire and betrayal, all simmering under jabbing horns, jittery strings, Lynne’s yearning acoustic guitar, even the occasional electronic blip and honk. It was a long way from Nashville and finally, it seemed, just where Lynne wanted to be. “That album came from the most vulnerable, desperate place,” she said. “I think about it every day.”
Critics thought about it a lot, too, at least then. It ended up on many best-of-year lists, and Lynne was talked about not just as a first-class songwriter like Crow but also as the next major interpretive singer in the line of Annie Lennox and k.d. lang, a line that extends back to Springfield herself. The yearlong steady drumbeat for the album seemed to reach its loudest point when Lynne won her Grammy. But by then the record was more than a year old and had not sold well, and her label had decided that it wanted a new album from her, that it would no longer promote “I Am Shelby Lynne.” On the night of the awards ceremony, according to a friend, Lynne stormed around, mowing down and cursing out even friends and people who worked on the album, because it hadn’t sold more. (At last count it was up to 246,000 copies, respectable but hardly the breakthrough that Lynne was expecting.) Bucking and throwing riders.
She did calm down long enough to land a song in the movie “Bridget Jones’s Diary.” It was catchy and sharp and seemed to have “hit single” and maybe even “Oscar nomination” written all over it. Except it was called “Killin’ Kind,” and, released around 9/11, was doomed. “There’s no way that radio was going to play anything with ‘kill’ in the title,” says her manager, Elizabeth Jordan. For the album that followed shortly thereafter, “Love, Shelby,” her label, Def Jam, teamed her with Glen Ballard, who produced Alanis Morissette‘s “Jagged Little Pill,” and Lynne’s frank, no-frills songwriting seemed at odds with the splashy soundscape. It was a slightly dumbed-down “I Am Shelby Lynne.” The Britney Spears-like cover, which pictured Lynne kneeling in cutoffs and lettering done in lipstick, didn’t help. Critics brayed. Even many of her longtime fans, sensing she was grasping a little too hard for the pop prize, rejected it. “I got nailed,” she said. “It was such a catastrophe.” Lynne’s decade of musical soul searching, just on the verge of paying off, seemed to bleed out in a matter of a few months.
She went back to basics. After taking a few years off, to help a friend through breast-cancer treatment and to recover herself from the career tremor, she recorded a couple of spare albums for Capitol, “Identity Crisis” and “Suit Yourself,” even though she was loath to enter the music-business fray again. “I thought, Oh, you major-label [noun, pl.], you break my heart every time.” Those albums, which melded the best of Lynne’s country and pop instincts, got her back on solid footing with her core audience and with critics, but she still couldn’t reach the larger public. “With every one of my albums,” she said, “I always say, ‘This is going to be the one, this is going to be the one,’ and then we go through the whole process, and in the end maybe 5,000 more people know my name.”
Lynne dipped into acting, landing the part of Carrie Cash, Johnny’s Cash’s mother, in “Walk the Line.” And then while she was casting about for her next musical direction, she remembered an e-mail message from Barry Manilow, who was a fan, suggesting she record an album of Dusty Springfield songs. “It’s usually career suicide to do an album of covers,” she said. “But I thought, Why the hell not? I didn’t have enough new songs of my own anyway.”
Lynne might have had an easier time coming up with 10 songs from scratch. Springfield’s body of work is known for its musical and emotional depth and seems only to grow in stature: a critics’ poll in Rolling Stone a few years ago ranked “Dusty in Memphis” as the third-most-important album by a woman in the rock era, behind only Aretha Franklin‘s “I Never Loved a Man the Way I Love You” and Joni Mitchell‘s “Blue.” When she heard about the concept of Lynne’s new album, Rita Houston, the music director of WFUV, the influential public radio station in New York, and long a supporter of Lynne’s, said, “My first thought was, These aren’t the easiest songs in the world to sing.” And while Springfield’s and Lynne’s styles overlap in the softer, breathier moments, there are significant differences. For all her husky, romantic realism, Springfield had essentially a glam, cosmopolitan sound: she was about chandeliers and candlelight, good Champagne (bubbly with a kick) and crushed velvet. Hers was an inside voice. Lynne’s rootsy voice comes from the outside: blinding summer suns, dark, deserted blacktops, a quick slug of Jack. Even when she ends up in the bedroom, she takes a rougher road.
So it was important to have the right producer, one who could be true to the integrity of the material while allowing Lynne the flexibility to put it in her own voice. And here her luck was good: she landed Phil Ramone, the veteran producer of classic albums by Paul Simon and Billy Joel and the engineer for Springfield’s original recording of “The Look of Love.” Ramone kept the tracks lean, no strings or horns, just Lynne and her band, recording on analog equipment, and they did the whole album in five days. “When Shelby sings, she owns the song,” Ramone says. “But she was so intent on being correct. She was a nervous wreck. We listened to hundreds of Dusty’s songs. But we knew in the end she had to be herself. Otherwise you start to sound like a mid-’70s record.”
Forty years or so on, these songs are served both by Lynne’s respect for them and by her wariness of them. You can feel her tunneling a little harder to the deep emotional warrens that Springfield had express access to, but she gets there just the same. It’s not just a matter of her winning over the songs; it’s also a matter of them winning over her. The album’s highlight may be her conversion of Springfield’s first big hit, “I Only Want to Be With You.” For Springfield it was a mid-’60s carnival joyride. For Lynne, it’s a country-lane saunter that celebrates the satisfaction of adult romance. “Look, I don’t want to be Dusty,” Lynne said. “I just want to remind people about her and about these great songs. I wanted to make the kind of album that she might have made today.”
There are some solid parallels, though, musical and non-, between the two women. “Dusty in Memphis,” for all its acclaim, wasn’t much of a hit when it was released, just as “I Am Shelby Lynne” wasn’t. Springfield, like Lynne, could be temperamental; she was a perfectionist who frequently delivered the goods in the 59th minute of the 11th hour, and watch out if you got in her way before then. And then there were the gay rumors that dogged Springfield most of her career, which in her case turned out to be true, though she never used the word “lesbian” officially. That same speculation has followed around Lynne, who was married briefly when she was 18, and neither will she confirm nor deny, saying only that she goes where the love is. “I’ve done everything on every corner of the universe,” Lynne said, “but I’m not going to make an announcement about it.”
And there’s one more, eerie similarity. Toward the end of an interview I did with Springfield for this magazine outside London in 1995, she asked if I would be exploring the city alone that night, and when I said yes, she cautioned me. “Be careful,” she said. “You think London is safe. But it’s not.” Lynne asked practically the same question about Seattle. “Ah, private music,” she said. “Well, don’t let it hurt you.”
III. Fences
It’s perhaps not a surprise that “hurt” is Lynne’s most familiar gear. In Seattle we spoke briefly about her childhood, and she said, “There’s nothing that happened to me in Alabama that wasn’t sad.” But when we met in New York the next week, she seemed eager to talk about her parents and to suggest that her upbringing, despite its sudden, violent end, wasn’t always so tragic.
“I feel very lucky to have had the parents I did,” she told me between sips of wine in a Chelsea trattoria on a blustery late afternoon in November, the day after she performed at the nearby Hiro Ballroom. Lynne seemed aware of the potential controversy of that statement, and the words sounded well aged, as if Lynne had let them breathe for a while before she said them to anyone but herself. But she was quick to defend them. Yes, it’s true she grew up in a town so small it was basically just a ZIP code, and yes, she and her sister, Allison, who is three and a half years younger, had a great appreciation of the country, of creeks and fishing poles and cows and horses and homemade bows and arrows. But they also had a lot of books and music. Her father, Franklin Moorer, was an Auburn University graduate who taught English sometimes and other times was a juvenile-corrections officer, while her mother, Lynn, was a legal secretary. “We were a unit, and we liked it like that,” she said. Music was the stitching. “Mama could sing her butt off,” Lynne said. “Daddy was an O.K. singer, but he was more of a guitar player. Sometimes we’d be on the road and Daddy would just stop the car, get out and play for a while, then we’d keep going.”
Despite his academic credentials, Lynne said, her father was a renegade “who always hated the Man,” and he would disappear on sudden, infrequent jaunts to Mobile. He returned from one of them with Willie Nelson‘s landmark outlaw-country LP, “Willie and Family Live.” “I still remember the day Daddy came home with that record,” she said. “I heard it and knew I wanted to be an outlaw, too.”
It didn’t take her long. She was frequently in trouble at school, she told me, always mouthing off. And as she grew older she started butting heads with her father, who always drank heavily but was now becoming abusive. “Mama was a wreck,” Lynne told me. “She was a gentle soul, sharing, the life of the party . . . but she wasn’t a fighter. I am. I could have been a boxer. I’m still not above it.”
In the summer of 1986, Lynne, then 17, was clashing with her father so much that he had her thrown in jail for reasons she won’t disclose. And when she got out, she tried to think of a way to take her mother and sister out of harm’s way. “Daddy drank a little,” she said, “and I couldn’t have him being mean.” But before she could act, at 5 a.m. on Aug. 12, her father shot her mother and then turned the gun on himself outside the house. Shelby and Allison, who was 14, were inside when it happened. By the time they got outside, she said, “it was done.”
Lynne stops short of analyzing her father’s demons, of trying to explain what made him suddenly turn homicidal. More than 20 years later, she told me, she has wasted too much of her life on the whys and what-ifs, “and it ain’t worth a damn, because in the end things are the way they’re supposed to be.” She has come to forgive her father, and she and her sister, who is now the country singer Allison Moorer, wish that people would let the matter rest. (Moorer declined to be interviewed, citing the ironclad rule that the sisters, who are kind of like the Venus and Serena of pop and country music, have about never doing “crossover” interviews.) “People think we’re in tremendous pain,” Lynne said, “but we want everyone to know that we’re O.K.”
Lynne and Moorer went back to Alabama together in 2002, during Lynne’s timeout, to take care of some property they owned. “It was time for me to build some fences,” she said. She wrote poetry and thought about quitting the music business altogether, but even when she started making records again, she took the best of Alabama with her back to California, where she lives just outside Palm Springs. She gardens, mows her own grass, fixes everything herself, a talent she says she got from her father. “I don’t exercise,” she said, “but I’ll do any kind of manual labor.” When she’s not on the road, a typical Friday night for Lynne means having some friends over for a bottle of wine and playing records, just as the family used to do in Alabama. “I don’t have an iPod,” she said. “I have a computer that I turn on occasionally. I still have all my vinyl. Sissy” — her nickname for Moorer, who lives in New York with her husband, the alt-country singer Steve Earle — “says she has no room in her apartment for records, but I’d keep mine even if I had to sleep on them. You can’t roll a joint on an iPod.”
IV. Wishin’ and Hopin’ and Bringin’ and Takin’
For the first 16 years or so of her life, Dusty Springfield, whose real name was Mary O’Brien, attended convent schools, and when I interviewed her, I asked when she’d last gone to church. “Sometime in the late 60′s,” she said. “I won’t go again until they bring back the Latin Mass. I want the candles, the incense, the whole bloody show.”
Springfield’s records certainly always provided just that, whether they were flooded with klieg-light arrangements or glowed in the more recessed lighting of her “Memphis” era; her voice had all the candles and incense she needed. And that’s what Lynne brought to her concerts in Seattle and New York. Sure, she had the same threadbare combo that plays on the new album, but that just made Lynne sing out more, to get in the face of the melodies and lyrics, to expose every raw nerve. This is probably what she meant by making the kind of album Springfield would have made today.
“I think this is my best record,” she said in Seattle. “Just in the quality of the songs and the singing.” Ramone, who has heard and produced a few good singers in his day, said, “I think this gives Shelby the platform that she’s needed” to finally put across all the facets of her voice. For all her enthusiasm, though, Lynne is measured about the album’s prospects. “I’ve been in this business 20 years and haven’t had a big hit record. And I’m still doing it. In another 20 years, I’ll still be doing it. I wouldn’t trade my life for what Carrie Underwood has. I’ll be 75, and someone will ask me to sing. And I’ll still be cute.”
The audiences in both cities reacted warmly to Lynne’s tribute to Springfield. (Seattle turned out the biggest sea of bald heads I’d seen in a concert hall, perhaps a sign that they knew the music’s provenance.) Even my waiter at the supper-club-like venue, a 33-year-old named Jared, seemed impressed. “I know all these songs,” he said. “My parents listened to them all the time.”
And in the end both evenings became as much about Lynne as about the material. For most of the shows she bowed her head in reverence and kept her patter to a minimum (” ‘Preciate it,” was about all she said after each number, as if any attempt to “entertain” would distract her from the more serious business at hand). Onstage she sang with both a dreamy, faraway lilt and a right-this-second-ness, as she does on the record. But something unexpected happened during the encore, “Wishin’ and Hopin’.” When Springfield recorded the song in 1964, she turned the prefeminist lyric of slavish devotion (“Wear your hair/Just for him”) into a sly, swinging decree of sexual empowerment. Lynne’s version had a similar yoke-loosening. When she got to the line about the hair, she broke from the song and announced, “I don’t wear my hair for anyone.” Then she picked up her head, threw back that hair and unbridled a smile. She was not Dusty Springfield. She was not Carrie Underwood. She was Shelby Lynne. Her new album may or may not break down the fences that have stood between her and the general public, but in that moment, it was clear that Lynne had broken down a few of her own.
Rob Hoerburger, an editor of the magazine, writes frequently about pop music. His profile of Dusty Springfield appeared in the magazine in 1995.
Papal Inquisition
Papal Inquisition
January 17, 2008; Page A16American universities aren’t the only places where politically incorrect speakers are silenced nowadays. This week in Rome, of all places, Pope Benedict XVI found himself censored by scholars, of all people, at one of Europe’s most prestigious universities.
On Tuesday the pontiff canceled a speech scheduled for today at Sapienza University of Rome in the wake of a threat by students and 67 faculty members to disrupt his appearance. The scholars argued that it was inappropriate for a religious figure to speak at their university.
This pope’s specific sin was a speech he gave nearly 20 years ago in which, they claimed, he indicated support for the 17th-century heresy trial against Galileo. The censoring scholars apparently failed to appreciate the irony that, in preventing the pope from speaking, they were doing to him what the Church once did to Galileo, stifling free speech and intellectual inquiry.
One of Benedict’s favorite themes is that European civilization derives from the rapprochement between Greek philosophy and religious belief, between Athens and Jerusalem. In the speech he wasn’t allowed to give, the pope planned to talk about the role of popes and universities.
It is a pope’s task, he wrote, to “maintain high the sensibility for the truth, to always invite reason to put itself anew at the service of the search for the true, the good, for God.” La Sapienza — which means “wisdom” — was founded by one of the pope’s predecessors in 1303. Another unappreciated irony.
The Afterlife of Cellphones
Richard BarnesBring us your old, your broken, your out-of-style: Cellphones at a recycling warehouse in Hilliard, Ohio.
Richard Barnes for The New York TimesFlipped Phones Top: Reclaimed keypads. Bottom: Parts of reclaimed phones; the metal will be recycled.
January 13, 2008The Afterlife of Cellphones By JON MOOALLEM1. Cellphones in Hell
Americans threw out just shy of three million tons of household electronics in 2006. This so-called e-waste is the fastest-growing part of the municipal waste stream and, depending on your outlook, either an enormous problem or a bonanza. E-waste generally contains substances that, though safely sequestered during each product’s use, can become hazardous if not handled properly when disposed. Those products also hold bits of precious metals like silver, copper, platinum and gold.
The Belgian company Umicore is in the business of reclaiming those materials. It extracts 17 metals from our unwanted televisions, computers and cellphones and from more ominous-sounding industrial byproducts like drosses and anode slimes. Umicore harvests silver from spent photo-developing solutions collected at American big-box stores and sells it to Italian jewelers. The company describes its work as “aboveground mining.”
Umicore has roots in actual mining. In the late 1800s, during the reign of King Leopold II, the firm mined copper in the African Congo and shipped it to a riverside smelter near Antwerp. Today the same property houses a sprawling, state-of-the-art $2 billion smelter and refinery. Here, metals are recovered and processed. Then they are sold, sometimes to Asia, where they are used to manufacture brand-new electronics. It’s a reshuffling of the colonial arrangement: an abundant resource is sent from richer countries to poorer ones, made into goods, then sent back. That resource is our garbage.
Umicore’s smelter was burning furiously at 2,116 degrees Fahrenheit one afternoon last fall. Two heavy-set men in blue overalls sat in the control room, staring expressionlessly through heat-shielded windows. They were eye-level with the mouth of the smelter — a pit 13 feet wide by 46 feet deep. A conveyor belt fed shredded circuit boards and scrap into the fire in a dim, fast blur. I imagined the black-and-white television in my mother’s basement, or my first blue Nokia cellphone — all the devices I’d gotten close to and outgrown — spilling out and squealing like lobsters in a pot.
The metals exit the smelter’s base as a glowing sludge. It streams into another caldron the height of a house. From there, it moves into tanks of acid. The acid is electrocuted. As electricity flows through the mixture, copper accumulates on the tank’s end plate. I watched a giant claw move across the ceiling, rip out the plate and, with a violent whack, cleave off a gleaming layer of 99.9 percent pure copper, with the unmistakable sheen of a new penny. It was thrilling to see something so clean and recognizable emerge from such an alien process.
After explaining the final stages, Thierry Van Kerckhoven, Umicore’s e-scrap manager, handed me another of the end products from this process: a one-kilogram bar of gold. It felt the way I thought it would, based on what you see in the movies: substantial, mesmerizing. It was worth about $24,000. “This gold is recycled gold,” Kerckhoven said. “This gold is green gold.”
Recycling feels good because we imagine it as just this kind of alchemy — which Umicore achieves with impressive environmental controls. The centerpiece is a monstrous gas-cleaning-and-filtration system that captures and neutralizes enough of the carcinogenic and endocrine-altering chemicals produced from melting e-waste, according to Umicore, that the faint yellow emission finally released from its smokestack easily surpasses the European Union‘s air-quality standards. (Martin Hojsik, who campaigns against toxics for Greenpeace International, notes that the process followed by Umicore and its few, similarly equipped competitors around the world is “not entirely clean” but still “the preferable solution” for recovering metals from e-waste.) Ultimately, by weight, only 1/2 of 1 percent of the e-waste Umicore takes in cannot be safely sent back into the world in a usable form. “There is often a discussion of separating what is valuable from what is toxic,” Christian Hagelüken, Umicore’s senior manager of business development, told me. “But sometimes they are the same thing.”
This may never be more true than for cellphones. They are the most valuable form of e-waste. Each one contains about a dollar’s worth of precious metals, mostly gold. And while single phones house far less hazardous material than a computer — an old, clunky monitor can incorporate seven pounds of lead — their cumulative presence is staggering. Last year, according to ABI Research, 1.2 billion phones were sold worldwide. Sixty percent of them probably replaced existing ones. In the United States, phones are cast aside after, on average, 12 months. And according to the industry trade group CTIA, four out of every five people in the country own cellphones.
Umicore estimates that, together with its competitors, it received only 1 percent of all phones that were discarded globally in 2006. “This of course is a lousy percentage,” Hagelüken said. “Computers are also bad, but phones are the worst.” Our obliviousness has mostly kept them from being recycled at all. When we do bother, we may not know, or be able to control, where the “recycled” phones go. Many enter a secondhand market in the developing world through a receding series of middlemen.
Reuse, we are told, is as green a virtue as recycling. But with e-waste all the old ecological dogmas start to become ambiguous. Cellphones represent only a part of the world’s e-waste problem. But they are a key to understanding how complicated it is. They also embody the kind of high-tech products that we will be throwing away more of: easier to upgrade than repair, increasingly disposable-seeming but also deeply personal. As governments around the world, from the European Union to New York City, propose or pass laws to require the recycling of e-waste, there’s little consensus about what recycling actually means. No matter how close our relationship with our phones has become — how faithfully we keep them with us, how we hold them to our faces and whisper into them — we rarely wonder where they go when they die.
2. Cellphones in Purgatory
If we think at all about what to do with old phones, we may realize we can return them to the wireless industry. With the idea of extended producer responsibility gaining traction — the notion that businesses should manage the disposal or recycling of their products — most major carriers and manufacturers in the United States now run voluntary take-back programs. But because we stop wanting phones long before they’re unusable, they also represent a kind of neglected value, there to be capitalized on. Seth Heine, who founded the company Collective Good in 2000, recognized this early.
Collective Good is a profitable business that, as the name suggests, Heine also sees as a vehicle for philanthropy. People send in their phones, and Collective Good sells the ones that still work into a global secondhand market. A portion of each phone’s resale or scrap value goes to one of more than 500 causes — ranging from the Red Cross to the Humane Society to the Obama campaign — selected by the phone’s donor. Used phones are sold to people overseas who can’t afford new ones, and hazardous waste is kept out of landfills. “It’s a self-cleaning oven,” Heine says.
When I visited his office outside Atlanta a few months ago, Heine was introducing a new venture, GreenPhone.com, which pays donors directly for their phones. Mail a BlackBerry Pearl, for example, to GreenPhone, and Heine will cut you a check for $65. And because Heine still isn’t entirely comfortable with all the paper consumption this entails, GreenPhone also plants a tree for every check it writes.
Heine is 40, a whip-smart and mildly self-righteous environmentalist with an M.B.A. and a boyish love of sports cars. There’s a lava lamp on his desk, but also, hanging behind it, a motivational poster that says VISION. Recently, he moved most of his operation to a larger facility in Colorado. But phones were still arriving at the small Georgia warehouse when I was there; they come in prepaid envelopes printed off the company’s Web site or from collection boxes at every Staples and FedEx Kinko’s in the United States. Each month, Heine receives 20,000 phones of at least 800 different makes and models.
They were scattered around the room: silver ones, a battered flip-phone with a sticker of a wolf on it. A store in Beverly Hills had been sending boxes of gold-plated, limited-edition Dolce & Gabbana Motorola Razr phones, turned in when customers traded up for something even newer. “That phone can’t be more than six months old,” Heine said at one point. Later, he handed an employee a Nokia with a note rubber-banded around it. It was something a friend gave him at dinner; that happens all the time, he said, “when you’re the Fred Sanford of phones.”
Heine’s business succeeds or fails based on how well it can assess and then realize the value of each phone. “I refer to that as the pachinko machine,” he told me. “You dump in a phone and it rattles around. It’s got to come out somewhere at the bottom.” The question is, where?
Phones beyond repair, or with little value, are dispatched to Umicore for their gold. But because acquiring the phones costs so much — all those individual, prepaid envelopes add up — recycling them must be subsidized by reselling the reusable ones. The most valuable handsets find their way to a room across the hall from the storeroom, where two employees sell them on eBay. Most, however, are sold via private auction to a stable of about 20 different resellers. Some, once refurbished, will be sent to American consumers to replace broken phones under warranty or covered by insurance. But it’s through the resellers, and the unfathomable network of resellers they sell to, that many also end up overseas, where the price of new phones can be prohibitively expensive.
American wireless carriers like AT&T and Sprint offer new phones below cost, or free, as incentives to get customers to sign lucrative two-year service contracts. Users in much of the world don’t purchase contracts, though. They buy chunks of prepaid minutes instead and can transfer their phone from one carrier to another more easily. Foreign carriers have no incentive to offer great deals. Phones we get free can cost upward of $200 in Latin America or Africa — where customers have less to spend. “A lot of people in the developing world will never own a new phone,” Heine says. They depend on our castoffs.
Ever-changing technology means that specific phones work only in specific networks, but relatively few are obsolete everywhere in the world. As one reseller says, “There’s always a place to put the phone.” Small-time entrepreneurs known as aggregators prowl the Internet cobbling together orders of thousands of a single make and model. “There are many, many thousands of us,” Joseph Khan told me. Khan, who lives outside Los Angeles, works as a limousine driver but has a side business in phones. Recently, he claims, he purchased several thousand Qualcomm QCT-1000′s for $11 each and resold them in Ukraine for $121 each. The QCT-1000 was introduced in 1996. “The battery is the size of a printer!” Khan says.
The need to refurbish or even significantly repair most phones is another reason vast quantities of them end up overseas — particularly in Asia, where cheap labor and replacement parts make the cost of fixing all sorts of phones with cameras and color screens and other features so low that many buyers do not even care if the phones turn on.
America’s largest phone-recycling company, ReCellular, based in Michigan, sells millions of phones annually to 375 refurbishers in 40 different countries. Some of these refurbishers, Mike Newman, a vice president of ReCellular, told me, “are going to be highly sophisticated companies with really sparkling, huge plants,” while others might consist of an entrepreneur with “10 small stores in the Dominican Republic who has, in the back of one of them, a place where 10 people are doing some refurbishing — just sitting on some benches and old tables, taking off the housings and fixing them.” ReCellular handles the phones from most of the major recycling programs in America sponsored by wireless carriers, including Verizon, Sprint and AT&T. It expects to receive seven million phones this year. Financially, according to Newman, the “backbone of these programs is the resale of usable phones.”
It’s hard to track ReCellular’s or Collective Good’s phones. But Jack Qiu, a professor at the Chinese University of Hong Kong who has studied the movement of used computers and phones in China, describes one route phones take. In Kowloon, in Hong Kong, Pakistanis and other immigrants (often asylum seekers) import phones from Europe by the shipping container. These are fixed or cannibalized for parts in stalls at a local market. In the past, Nigerians and other African exporters swept in to buy tens of thousands of phones at a time, particularly so-called “14-day phones” — those that have been returned under warranty and used little. But recently, Qiu says, the markets for these phones have become saturated in African cities. So the Nigerians, needing to take their business to poorer African villages, have been leaving Hong Kong for Chinese cities like Guangzhou, where they can purchase cheaper, more heavily used phones from the larger refurbishing companies there. Many Nigerians have learned Mandarin in order to do business in Guangzhou, Qiu says, and the city now has an African-style coffee shop.
Africa is one of the biggest markets for used phones. Seventy-five percent of all phones in the least-developed African nations are cellphones — and usage in many places is increasing by 30 or 40 percent per year. Their impact can not be overstated, particularly where roads are poor and settlements separated by great distances, places that land lines never reached and now have no reason to do so. Consequently, cellphones are not easily abandoned — and, when they are, someone somewhere is still likely to see some value in them. Jim Puckett, the coordinator of the Basel Action Network, a nongovernmental watchdog group that focuses on e-waste, visited Nigeria in 2005. He describes, at one Lagos electronics bazaar, repairmen sitting on dirt floors under shelves of scavenged parts, jury-rigging phones back together, over and over again, until the things are absolutely dead.
“I’ve never seen the real end,” Qiu says. “I’ve seen landfills in China full of used computer parts, but I’ve never seen a single landfill of used mobile phones or phone parts.” The Chinese themselves “retire” between 200 million and 300 million phones every year, he says. These phones are sold in places like India, Mongolia, Vietnam and Thailand. And from Thailand, they are sold to buyers in Laos, Cambodia, Bangladesh and Myanmar. In other words, the pachinko machine is global, and there are millions, or even billions, of phones still clattering down its channels.
In 2001, Basel Action Network filmed a documentary in Guiyu, China, a town overrun by shipments of old computers from recyclers in the United States and elsewhere. Guiyu’s residents, including children, make their living sorting, dismantling and burning computer parts or bathing them in nitric and hydrochloric acids to recover precious metals. This not only mobilizes a device’s hazardous constituents; it also creates new ones. The health consequences are immense; respiratory problems and elevated blood-lead levels in children are reportedly rampant in Guiyu and, around the time of BAN’s visit, the nearby river contained up to 2,400 times the World Health Organization‘s acceptable threshold for lead.
In 2005, BAN found 500 shipping containers of electronics arriving in Lagos each month. Useless computers were being tossed into burning piles behind a marketplace. And the phones — no matter how many ramshackle resurrections they experience — will at some point presumably meet the same fate, Puckett says. “It sounds like a cellphone’s just a little thing — if you burn it it’s not such a big deal,” he explains. “But we’re talking about mass volumes going to countries that have no infrastructure or ability to deal with it.”
Moreover, manufacturers now sell “ultra-low-cost handsets” — new, no-frills phones specifically for consumers in the developing world. Some cost less than $20. These phones, says Badii Kechiche, a market analyst with Pyramid Research, are what really fuels the spread of phone usage across Africa — not the comparatively skimpy supply of our used ones. As a consequence, used cellphones — just rare enough to stay out of the planet’s globalized digital trash heaps so far — may come to be more like regular junk. “If ultra-low-cost handsets are coming in,” Kechiche says, “and they’re much cheaper or cheaper than refurbished handsets, what’s the point of getting a refurbished handset?” The people we rely on to take our garbage are not only losing their need for it. They’re becoming firsthand generators of that same garbage.
In a study published last year, 34 recent-model cellphones were put through a standard E.P.A. test, simulating conditions inside a landfill. All of them leached hazardous amounts of lead — on average, more than 17 times the federal threshold for what constitutes hazardous waste. Under a stricter state of California test, they also leached four other metals above hazardous levels.
The E.P.A. says modern American landfills are designed to keep toxics stewing inside from leaking out, so they don’t contaminate surrounding soil or drinking water. But landfills do fail, says Oladele A. Ogunseitan, an environmental-health scientist at the University of California, Irvine, and an author of last year’s study. More important, he notes, such landfills don’t exist in the developing world. In many places, garbage is tossed into informal dumps or bodies of water or burned in the open air — all dangerous ways of liberating and spreading toxics.
The electronics industry is greening significantly, though. E-waste take-back programs are starting to spread around the developing world. A landmark law, the RoHS directive, enacted by the European Union, requires all electronics manufacturers to drastically lower concentrations of hazardous substances, including lead, in their products. Nokia and Sony Ericsson are among those voluntarily phasing out other dangerous substances not covered by RoHS.
Still, according to Ogunseitan, there will always be risks, or at least unknowns, accompanying the improper disposal of such products. The compositions of consumer electronics evolve through long sequences of trial and error. “In a phone that you can hold in the palm of your hand, you now have more than 200 chemical compounds,” he says, citing the results of an analysis of one new cellphone. “To try to separate them out and study what health effects may be associated with burning it or sinking it in water — that’s a lifetime of work for a toxicologist.”
The laws governing the export of e-waste present their own difficulties. An international treaty restricting the movement of hazardous waste to the developing world, a 170-nation agreement called the Basel Convention, is ambiguous when it comes to electronics. Namely, when is an item repairable — and thus freely exportable as a reusable product — and when is it just hazardous waste? Nothing requires exporters to even test the products they ship. Consequently, exporting products for “reuse” is often used as a loophole to dump them. In any case, the United States has not ratified the Basel Convention.
Electronics recycling “has always been the used-car lot of the recycling world,” Seth Heine laments. With no clear standards to follow, he enforces his own. He claims to thoroughly assess the condition of all his phones. He’s also quick to send working phones with limited potential for reuse straight to Umicore rather than sell them for far more money to less scrupulous buyers in the secondhand market. Heine figures this means he is leaving $150,000 on the table each year, easily. (Several environmental groups I contacted, including BAN, singled out Heine for his integrity and seriousness about the environment.)
Mike Newman told me that ReCellular supports establishing standards for exporting phones. But he also questions their effectiveness. A company could say it doesn’t sell irreparable or untested devices to the developing world, but, “How does any company really know where their phones end up?” he asks. “Once you sell them, they’re not your phones anymore.” Newman claims that ReCellular tests all of its recycled phones anyway. But on the day we spoke, there were lots made up of hundreds and thousands of phones (even up to 15,000) listed for sale on ReCellular’s Web site and labeled Bulk Beyond Economical Repair and Bulk Used/Untested. Newman would later clarify: these phones were not from recycling programs. They were returned under carrier warranty programs; ReCellular acquires and resells tens of thousands of these devices too every month and doesn’t bother testing them.
Given this state of affairs, you can’t help wondering if throwing your old phone in the trash, and into the high-tech sarcophagus of an American landfill, could end up doing less damage to the environment than recycling it. But that ignores yet another crucial part of the equation. As Heine explains, even though what he sells will probably be thrown out eventually, if a phone gets three or four more lives, “it’s absolutely better for the environment than having to make three or four more phones — phones that wouldn’t be recycled, either.”
Reusing phones conserves natural resources, which reduces the environmental damage that comes with mining them. That damage isn’t necessarily obvious. When I called Allen Hershkowitz, a senior scientist at the Natural Resources Defense Council who specializes in solid-waste issues, he was less interested in discussing the toxicity of old electronics than the costs of mining a particular metal, tantalum, to build the capacitors for new products. Tantalum comes from an ore called coltan. Control of coltan deposits was a factor in perpetuating Congo’s civil war in the late 1990s, and the people mining it there now, Hershkowitz says, rely on “critically endangered” gorillas for food. Tantalum is one of the metals Umicore can’t recover from e-waste.
Much of the world’s gold and copper, meanwhile, is mined in open pits, which means it is leached out with cyanide or sulfuric acid. Using data from the United States Geological Survey and mining companies’ own reports, Earthworks estimates that mining the gold needed for the circuit board of a single mobile phone generates 220 pounds of waste. The environmental nonprofit calls this “an extremely conservative” estimate.
What’s more, the world’s supply of these metals is finite. So even as the E.P.A. plays down the risks of throwing e-waste into landfills, it also urges us not to. Tim Townsend, an environmental engineer at the University of Florida who has studied the toxicity of mobile phones for the E.P.A., sums up the absurdity of just tossing this stuff away: “If we know these metals are, overall, bad for us, it doesn’t make sense to keep digging them up from the earth’s crust and bringing them into the biosphere while — at the same time — we’re taking the ones we’ve already got and burying them.”
As with most environmental issues, then, no option for getting rid of a phone is free of trade-offs, and nothing is as simple as we’d wish. But the truth is, few of America’s phones are turned in for “recycling” in the first place. (It’s unclear how few. The figure of less than 1 percent, put forward in a groundbreaking report on phone recycling by the nonprofit Inform five years ago, is still repeated. ReCellular estimates that it’s more like 10 percent now.) While a phone’s small size may give even normally conscientious consumers a dispensation to slip it into the trash, there seems to be a more typical solution, what ABI Research estimates nearly half of Americans do: stick the thing in a desk drawer and leave it there.
Every recycler I spoke with talked about “the drawer.” It turns out to be the real purgatory for phones. Using predictions from Inform, the United States Geological Survey estimates that in 2005 there were already more than half a billion old phones sitting in American drawers. That added up to more than $300 million worth of gold, palladium, silver, copper and platinum. Heine says he still receives phones in prepaid envelopes addressed to the Kentucky tobacco barn where he started Collective Good in 2000. It tells him that people get motivated, take the envelope, then stick that in a drawer for a long time.
“As soon as [a phone] makes its way into the drawer, it’s hard to get people to dig it back out,” ReCellular’s Newman told me. I asked him how hard. “I have employees,” he said, “who have them in their desk drawers.”
3. Cellphones in Heaven
Given the intimate place of cellphones in our lives, why do we get rid of them so quickly?
Sometimes we don’t have a choice. We switch to a new carrier and must buy a phone adapted to its particular network. (Late last year, Verizon announced it would eliminate this requirement.) Or we trade up for new features: first a camera, then an MP3 player, then a Web browser. Apple‘s iPhone promised to put an end to this chase by combining everything in a single, graceful device. But the industry knows the iPhone is just a momentary milestone in its race to replace laptop computers entirely — and that we will follow, one revolutionary but not-quite-perfect device at a time.
Regardless, recyclers say that from their vantage point it’s obvious that most phones are retired because of psychological, not technological, obsolescence. “There’s some fashion driving all of this and, by its nature, fashion is not eternal,” says Mark Donovan of M:Metrics, which tracks the wireless industry. Phones were initially an afterthought, given out free so that customers had something to talk into after buying the real product, the service contract. But carriers learned, as Donovan puts it, that “if you deliver something cool, and if it’s a bit of a status symbol, people will pony up and pay cash for it.” He adds: “People want them to become more than an awkward gadget. People want it to be an expression of their personalities.”
Right now, there are roughly 470 models of phone for sale in the United States. About 16 new ones come out every month. Many are only slightly altered versions of existing phones, suggesting how easily we get bored — how we’ll crave something that slides, say, instead of flips open. (There are currently 46 styles of Motorola Razr; Motorola has, in fact, projected which colors and finishes we’ll find most attractive through the year 2009.) And we have the perfect incentive to get whatever we want every two years when our contracts are up and the discounts for new phones roll around. When I asked Iain Gillott, an analyst with iGR, what makes a person get a new phone, he told me, “They’re cruising through the Sunday paper, and they see a fabulous phone for 50 bucks and they say, ‘Well, I haven’t had a new one in 18 months.’ “
Gillott estimates 50 to 60 percent of phones are replaced “because people get tired of the design.” Otherwise, consumers want a new feature — even, it seems, if there’s no real need for it; according to M:Metrics, 82 percent of those with Internet-enabled phones do not go online. Steven Herbst, a psychology researcher at Motorola, told me: “All that pressure to have the latest — something that people will be impressed by — is compounded by the fact that all of a sudden somebody is doing something with their mobile phone that you can’t do.” In other words, it’s because we’ve made phones such deep and indispensable extensions of ourselves that we dump them so quickly. Who can bear seeing himself as even slightly outdated or incapable?
“Somewhere during the last 100 years, we learned to find refuge outside the species, in the silent embrace of manufactured objects,” Jonathan Chapman, a young product designer and theorist at the University of Brighton, writes in his book “Emotionally Durable Design.” But designers and consumers have snared themselves in an unsustainable trap, Chapman told me, since our affection for many high-tech objects is tied exclusively to their newness.
“The mobile phone occupies a kind of glossy, scratch-free world,” he says. Whereas a pair of jeans gains character over time, a phone does no such thing. “As soon you purchase it, you can only watch it migrating further away from what it is you want — a glossy, scratch-free object.” You might leave the plastic film over the display for a few days, just so you can take it off later and “give yourself a second honeymoon with the phone,” he says. But ultimately everything that first attracted you to it only deteriorates. You start looking at it differently. “It’s made of some kind of sparkle-finished polymer and it’s got some decent curves on it, but so what? The intimacy comes more from the fact that, within that hand-held piece of plastic, exists your whole world” — your friends’ phone numbers, your digital pictures, your music — and that stuff can be easily transferred to a new one. So you “fall out of love” with the phone, Chapman says.
Even the most idealistic visions of how e-waste should be recycled and reused take for granted that consumers and businesses will never reconsider why we are buying and discarding so many of those products, so quickly, in the first place. If the rush of castoffs isn’t likely to stop, we need to clear a proper path for it, considering all the inevitable compromises and costs along the way and delivering those products to as consequenceless a place as possible.
There is no heaven for cellphones. Wherever they go, it seems that something, somewhere, to some extent always ends up being damaged or depleted. The only heaven I came across was what Chapman described. It is an image in our heads — not of a place where we can send a used phone but one where we imagine each device when it’s brand-new, right before we first get our hands on it. That illusion of perfection, no matter how many times we see it spoiled, will always lure us into buying the next new phone and sending the last one careering on its way.
Jon Mooallem, a contributing writer, last wrote for the magazine about the science and commerce of sleep.
The Moral Instinct
Illustration by Adrian Tomine
January 13, 2008The Moral Instinct BySTEVEN PINKER Which of the following people would you say is the most admirable:
Mother Teresa , Bill Gates or Norman Borlaug? And which do you think is the least admirable? For most people, it’s an easy question. Mother Teresa, famous for ministering to the poor in Calcutta, has been beatified by the Vatican, awarded the Nobel Peace Prize and ranked in an American poll as the most admired person of the 20th century. Bill Gates, infamous for giving us the Microsoft dancing paper clip and the blue screen of death, has been decapitated in effigy in “I Hate Gates” Web sites and hit with a pie in the face. As for Norman Borlaug . . . who the heck is Norman Borlaug?Yet a deeper look might lead you to rethink your answers. Borlaug, father of the “Green Revolution” that used agricultural science to reduce world hunger, has been credited with saving a billion lives, more than anyone else in history. Gates, in deciding what to do with his fortune, crunched the numbers and determined that he could alleviate the most misery by fighting everyday scourges in the developing world like malaria, diarrhea and parasites. Mother Teresa, for her part, extolled the virtue of suffering and ran her well-financed missions accordingly: their sick patrons were offered plenty of prayer but harsh conditions, few analgesics and dangerously primitive medical care.
It’s not hard to see why the moral reputations of this trio should be so out of line with the good they have done. Mother Teresa was the very embodiment of saintliness: white-clad, sad-eyed, ascetic and often photographed with the wretched of the earth. Gates is a nerd’s nerd and the world’s richest man, as likely to enter heaven as the proverbial camel squeezing through the needle’s eye. And Borlaug, now 93, is an agronomist who has spent his life in labs and nonprofits, seldom walking onto the media stage, and hence into our consciousness, at all.
I doubt these examples will persuade anyone to favor Bill Gates over Mother Teresa for sainthood. But they show that our heads can be turned by an aura of sanctity, distracting us from a more objective reckoning of the actions that make people suffer or flourish. It seems we may all be vulnerable to moral illusions the ethical equivalent of the bending lines that trick the eye on cereal boxes and in psychology textbooks. Illusions are a favorite tool of perception scientists for exposing the workings of the five senses, and of philosophers for shaking people out of the naïve belief that our minds give us a transparent window onto the world (since if our eyes can be fooled by an illusion, why should we trust them at other times?). Today, a new field is using illusions to unmask a sixth sense, the moral sense. Moral intuitions are being drawn out of people in the lab, on Web sites and in brain scanners, and are being explained with tools from game theory, neuroscience and evolutionary biology.
“Two things fill the mind with ever new and increasing admiration and awe, the oftener and more steadily we reflect on them,” wrote Immanuel Kant, “the starry heavens above and the moral law within.” These days, the moral law within is being viewed with increasing awe, if not always admiration. The human moral sense turns out to be an organ of considerable complexity, with quirks that reflect its evolutionary history and its neurobiological foundations.
These quirks are bound to have implications for the human predicament. Morality is not just any old topic in psychology but close to our conception of the meaning of life. Moral goodness is what gives each of us the sense that we are worthy human beings. We seek it in our friends and mates, nurture it in our children, advance it in our politics and justify it with our religions. A disrespect for morality is blamed for everyday sins and history’s worst atrocities. To carry this weight, the concept of morality would have to be bigger than any of us and outside all of us.
So dissecting moral intuitions is no small matter. If morality is a mere trick of the brain, some may fear, our very grounds for being moral could be eroded. Yet as we shall see, the science of the moral sense can instead be seen as a way to strengthen those grounds, by clarifying what morality is and how it should steer our actions.
The Moralization Switch
The starting point for appreciating that there is a distinctive part of our psychology for morality is seeing how moral judgments differ from other kinds of opinions we have on how people ought to behave. Moralization is a psychological state that can be turned on and off like a switch, and when it is on, a distinctive mind-set commandeers our thinking. This is the mind-set that makes us deem actions immoral (“killing is wrong”), rather than merely disagreeable (“I hate brussels sprouts”), unfashionable (“bell-bottoms are out”) or imprudent (“don’t scratch mosquito bites”).
The first hallmark of moralization is that the rules it invokes are felt to be universal. Prohibitions of rape and murder, for example, are felt not to be matters of local custom but to be universally and objectively warranted. One can easily say, “I don’t like brussels sprouts, but I don’t care if you eat them,” but no one would say, “I don’t like killing, but I don’t care if you murder someone.”
The other hallmark is that people feel that those who commit immoral acts deserve to be punished. Not only is it allowable to inflict pain on a person who has broken a moral rule; it is wrong not to, to “let them get away with it.” People are thus untroubled in inviting divine retribution or the power of the state to harm other people they deem immoral. Bertrand Russell wrote, “The infliction of cruelty with a good conscience is a delight to moralists — that is why they invented hell.”
We all know what it feels like when the moralization switch flips inside us — the righteous glow, the burning dudgeon, the drive to recruit others to the cause. The psychologist Paul Rozin has studied the toggle switch by comparing two kinds of people who engage in the same behavior but with different switch settings. Health vegetarians avoid meat for practical reasons, like lowering cholesterol and avoiding toxins. Moral vegetarians avoid meat for ethical reasons: to avoid complicity in the suffering of animals. By investigating their feelings about meat-eating, Rozin showed that the moral motive sets off a cascade of opinions. Moral vegetarians are more likely to treat meat as a contaminant — they refuse, for example, to eat a bowl of soup into which a drop of beef broth has fallen. They are more likely to think that other people ought to be vegetarians, and are more likely to imbue their dietary habits with other virtues, like believing that meat avoidance makes people less aggressive and bestial.
Much of our recent social history, including the culture wars between liberals and conservatives, consists of the moralization or amoralization of particular kinds of behavior. Even when people agree that an outcome is desirable, they may disagree on whether it should be treated as a matter of preference and prudence or as a matter of sin and virtue. Rozin notes, for example, that smoking has lately been moralized. Until recently, it was understood that some people didn’t enjoy smoking or avoided it because it was hazardous to their health. But with the discovery of the harmful effects of secondhand smoke, smoking is now treated as immoral. Smokers are ostracized; images of people smoking are censored; and entities touched by smoke are felt to be contaminated (so hotels have not only nonsmoking rooms but nonsmoking floors). The desire for retribution has been visited on tobacco companies, who have been slapped with staggering “punitive damages.”
At the same time, many behaviors have been amoralized, switched from moral failings to lifestyle choices. They include divorce, illegitimacy, being a working mother, marijuana use and homosexuality. Many afflictions have been reassigned from payback for bad choices to unlucky misfortunes. There used to be people called “bums” and “tramps”; today they are “homeless.” Drug addiction is a “disease”; syphilis was rebranded from the price of wanton behavior to a “sexually transmitted disease” and more recently a “sexually transmitted infection.”
This wave of amoralization has led the cultural right to lament that morality itself is under assault, as we see in the group that anointed itself the Moral Majority. In fact there seems to be a Law of Conservation of Moralization, so that as old behaviors are taken out of the moralized column, new ones are added to it. Dozens of things that past generations treated as practical matters are now ethical battlegrounds, including disposable diapers, I.Q. tests, poultry farms, Barbie dolls and research on breast cancer. Food alone has become a minefield, with critics sermonizing about the size of sodas, the chemistry of fat, the freedom of chickens, the price of coffee beans, the species of fish and now the distance the food has traveled from farm to plate.
Many of these moralizations, like the assault on smoking, may be understood as practical tactics to reduce some recently identified harm. But whether an activity flips our mental switches to the “moral” setting isn’t just a matter of how much harm it does. We don’t show contempt to the man who fails to change the batteries in his smoke alarms or takes his family on a driving vacation, both of which multiply the risk they will die in an accident. Driving a gas-guzzling Hummer is reprehensible, but driving a gas-guzzling old Volvo is not; eating a Big Mac is unconscionable, but not imported cheese or crème brûlée. The reason for these double standards is obvious: people tend to align their moralization with their own lifestyles.
Reasoning and Rationalizing
It’s not just the content of our moral judgments that is often questionable, but the way we arrive at them. We like to think that when we have a conviction, there are good reasons that drove us to adopt it. That is why an older approach to moral psychology, led by Jean Piaget and Lawrence Kohlberg, tried to document the lines of reasoning that guided people to moral conclusions. But consider these situations, originally devised by the psychologist Jonathan Haidt:
Julie is traveling in France on summer vacation from college with her brother Mark. One night they decide that it would be interesting and fun if they tried making love. Julie was already taking birth-control pills, but Mark uses a condom, too, just to be safe. They both enjoy the sex but decide not to do it again. They keep the night as a special secret, which makes them feel closer to each other. What do you think about that — was it O.K. for them to make love?
A woman is cleaning out her closet and she finds her old American flag. She doesn’t want the flag anymore, so she cuts it up into pieces and uses the rags to clean her bathroom.
A family’s dog is killed by a car in front of their house. They heard that dog meat was delicious, so they cut up the dog’s body and cook it and eat it for dinner.
Most people immediately declare that these acts are wrong and then grope to justify why they are wrong. It’s not so easy. In the case of Julie and Mark, people raise the possibility of children with birth defects, but they are reminded that the couple were diligent about contraception. They suggest that the siblings will be emotionally hurt, but the story makes it clear that they weren’t. They submit that the act would offend the community, but then recall that it was kept a secret. Eventually many people admit, “I don’t know, I can’t explain it, I just know it’s wrong.” People don’t generally engage in moral reasoning, Haidt argues, but moral rationalization: they begin with the conclusion, coughed up by an unconscious emotion, and then work backward to a plausible justification.
The gap between people’s convictions and their justifications is also on display in the favorite new sandbox for moral psychologists, a thought experiment devised by the philosophers Philippa Foot and Judith Jarvis Thomson called the Trolley Problem. On your morning walk, you see a trolley car hurtling down the track, the conductor slumped over the controls. In the path of the trolley are five men working on the track, oblivious to the danger. You are standing at a fork in the track and can pull a lever that will divert the trolley onto a spur, saving the five men. Unfortunately, the trolley would then run over a single worker who is laboring on the spur. Is it permissible to throw the switch, killing one man to save five? Almost everyone says “yes.”
Consider now a different scene. You are on a bridge overlooking the tracks and have spotted the runaway trolley bearing down on the five workers. Now the only way to stop the trolley is to throw a heavy object in its path. And the only heavy object within reach is a fat man standing next to you. Should you throw the man off the bridge? Both dilemmas present you with the option of sacrificing one life to save five, and so, by the utilitarian standard of what would result in the greatest good for the greatest number, the two dilemmas are morally equivalent. But most people don’t see it that way: though they would pull the switch in the first dilemma, they would not heave the fat man in the second. When pressed for a reason, they can’t come up with anything coherent, though moral philosophers haven’t had an easy time coming up with a relevant difference, either.
When psychologists say “most people” they usually mean “most of the two dozen sophomores who filled out a questionnaire for beer money.” But in this case it means most of the 200,000 people from a hundred countries who shared their intuitions on a Web-based experiment conducted by the psychologists Fiery Cushman and Liane Young and the biologist Marc Hauser. A difference between the acceptability of switch-pulling and man-heaving, and an inability to justify the choice, was found in respondents from Europe, Asia and North and South America; among men and women, blacks and whites, teenagers and octogenarians, Hindus, Muslims, Buddhists, Christians, Jews and atheists; people with elementary-school educations and people with Ph.D.’s.
Joshua Greene, a philosopher and cognitive neuroscientist, suggests that evolution equipped people with a revulsion to manhandling an innocent person. This instinct, he suggests, tends to overwhelm any utilitarian calculus that would tot up the lives saved and lost. The impulse against roughing up a fellow human would explain other examples in which people abjure killing one to save many, like euthanizing a hospital patient to harvest his organs and save five dying patients in need of transplants, or throwing someone out of a crowded lifeboat to keep it afloat.
By itself this would be no more than a plausible story, but Greene teamed up with the cognitive neuroscientist Jonathan Cohen and several Princeton colleagues to peer into people’s brains using functional M.R.I. They sought to find signs of a conflict between brain areas associated with emotion (the ones that recoil from harming someone) and areas dedicated to rational analysis (the ones that calculate lives lost and saved).
When people pondered the dilemmas that required killing someone with their bare hands, several networks in their brains lighted up. One, which included the medial (inward-facing) parts of the frontal lobes, has been implicated in emotions about other people. A second, the dorsolateral (upper and outer-facing) surface of the frontal lobes, has been implicated in ongoing mental computation (including nonmoral reasoning, like deciding whether to get somewhere by plane or train). And a third region, the anterior cingulate cortex (an evolutionarily ancient strip lying at the base of the inner surface of each cerebral hemisphere), registers a conflict between an urge coming from one part of the brain and an advisory coming from another.
But when the people were pondering a hands-off dilemma, like switching the trolley onto the spur with the single worker, the brain reacted differently: only the area involved in rational calculation stood out. Other studies have shown that neurological patients who have blunted emotions because of damage to the frontal lobes become utilitarians: they think it makes perfect sense to throw the fat man off the bridge. Together, the findings corroborate Greene’s theory that our nonutilitarian intuitions come from the victory of an emotional impulse over a cost-benefit analysis.
A Universal Morality?
The findings of trolleyology — complex, instinctive and worldwide moral intuitions — led Hauser and John Mikhail (a legal scholar) to revive an analogy from the philosopher John Rawls between the moral sense and language. According to Noam Chomsky, we are born with a “universal grammar” that forces us to analyze speech in terms of its grammatical structure, with no conscious awareness of the rules in play. By analogy, we are born with a universal moral grammar that forces us to analyze human action in terms of its moral structure, with just as little awareness.
The idea that the moral sense is an innate part of human nature is not far-fetched. A list of human universals collected by the anthropologist Donald E. Brown includes many moral concepts and emotions, including a distinction between right and wrong; empathy; fairness; admiration of generosity; rights and obligations; proscription of murder, rape and other forms of violence; redress of wrongs; sanctions for wrongs against the community; shame; and taboos.
The stirrings of morality emerge early in childhood. Toddlers spontaneously offer toys and help to others and try to comfort people they see in distress. And according to the psychologists Elliot Turiel and Judith Smetana, preschoolers have an inkling of the difference between societal conventions and moral principles. Four-year-olds say that it is not O.K. to wear pajamas to school (a convention) and also not O.K. to hit a little girl for no reason (a moral principle). But when asked whether these actions would be O.K. if the teacher allowed them, most of the children said that wearing pajamas would now be fine but that hitting a little girl would still not be.
Though no one has identified genes for morality, there is circumstantial evidence they exist. The character traits called “conscientiousness” and “agreeableness” are far more correlated in identical twins separated at birth (who share their genes but not their environment) than in adoptive siblings raised together (who share their environment but not their genes). People given diagnoses of “antisocial personality disorder” or “psychopathy” show signs of morality blindness from the time they are children. They bully younger children, torture animals, habitually lie and seem incapable of empathy or remorse, often despite normal family backgrounds. Some of these children grow up into the monsters who bilk elderly people out of their savings, rape a succession of women or shoot convenience-store clerks lying on the floor during a robbery.
Though psychopathy probably comes from a genetic predisposition, a milder version can be caused by damage to frontal regions of the brain (including the areas that inhibit intact people from throwing the hypothetical fat man off the bridge). The neuroscientists Hanna and Antonio Damasio and their colleagues found that some children who sustain severe injuries to their frontal lobes can grow up into callous and irresponsible adults, despite normal intelligence. They lie, steal, ignore punishment, endanger their own children and can’t think through even the simplest moral dilemmas, like what two people should do if they disagreed on which TV channel to watch or whether a man ought to steal a drug to save his dying wife.
The moral sense, then, may be rooted in the design of the normal human brain. Yet for all the awe that may fill our minds when we reflect on an innate moral law within, the idea is at best incomplete. Consider this moral dilemma: A runaway trolley is about to kill a schoolteacher. You can divert the trolley onto a sidetrack, but the trolley would trip a switch sending a signal to a class of 6-year-olds, giving them permission to name a teddy bear Muhammad. Is it permissible to pull the lever?
This is no joke. Last month a British woman teaching in a private school in Sudan allowed her class to name a teddy bear after the most popular boy in the class, who bore the name of the founder of Islam. She was jailed for blasphemy and threatened with a public flogging, while a mob outside the prison demanded her death. To the protesters, the woman’s life clearly had less value than maximizing the dignity of their religion, and their judgment on whether it is right to divert the hypothetical trolley would have differed from ours. Whatever grammar guides people’s moral judgments can’t be all that universal. Anyone who stayed awake through Anthropology 101 can offer many other examples.
Of course, languages vary, too. In Chomsky’s theory, languages conform to an abstract blueprint, like having phrases built out of verbs and objects, while the details vary, like whether the verb or the object comes first. Could we be wired with an abstract spec sheet that embraces all the strange ideas that people in different cultures moralize?
The Varieties of Moral Experience
When anthropologists like Richard Shweder and Alan Fiske survey moral concerns across the globe, they find that a few themes keep popping up from amid the diversity. People everywhere, at least in some circumstances and with certain other folks in mind, think it’s bad to harm others and good to help them. They have a sense of fairness: that one should reciprocate favors, reward benefactors and punish cheaters. They value loyalty to a group, sharing and solidarity among its members and conformity to its norms. They believe that it is right to defer to legitimate authorities and to respect people with high status. And they exalt purity, cleanliness and sanctity while loathing defilement, contamination and carnality.
The exact number of themes depends on whether you’re a lumper or a splitter, but Haidt counts five — harm, fairness, community (or group loyalty), authority and purity — and suggests that they are the primary colors of our moral sense. Not only do they keep reappearing in cross-cultural surveys, but each one tugs on the moral intuitions of people in our own culture. Haidt asks us to consider how much money someone would have to pay us to do hypothetical acts like the following:
Stick a pin into your palm.
Stick a pin into the palm of a child you don’t know. (Harm.)
Accept a wide-screen TV from a friend who received it at no charge because of a computer error.
Accept a wide-screen TV from a friend who received it from a thief who had stolen it from a wealthy family. (Fairness.)
Say something bad about your nation (which you don’t believe) on a talk-radio show in your nation.
Say something bad about your nation (which you don’t believe) on a talk-radio show in a foreign nation. (Community.)
Slap a friend in the face, with his permission, as part of a comedy skit.
Slap your minister in the face, with his permission, as part of a comedy skit. (Authority.)
Attend a performance-art piece in which the actors act like idiots for 30 minutes, including flubbing simple problems and falling down on stage.
Attend a performance-art piece in which the actors act like animals for 30 minutes, including crawling around naked and urinating on stage. (Purity.)
In each pair, the second action feels far more repugnant. Most of the moral illusions we have visited come from an unwarranted intrusion of one of the moral spheres into our judgments. A violation of community led people to frown on using an old flag to clean a bathroom. Violations of purity repelled the people who judged the morality of consensual incest and prevented the moral vegetarians and nonsmokers from tolerating the slightest trace of a vile contaminant. At the other end of the scale, displays of extreme purity lead people to venerate religious leaders who dress in white and affect an aura of chastity and asceticism.
The Genealogy of Morals
The five spheres are good candidates for a periodic table of the moral sense not only because they are ubiquitous but also because they appear to have deep evolutionary roots. The impulse to avoid harm, which gives trolley ponderers the willies when they consider throwing a man off a bridge, can also be found in rhesus monkeys, who go hungry rather than pull a chain that delivers food to them and a shock to another monkey. Respect for authority is clearly related to the pecking orders of dominance and appeasement that are widespread in the animal kingdom. The purity-defilement contrast taps the emotion of disgust that is triggered by potential disease vectors like bodily effluvia, decaying flesh and unconventional forms of meat, and by risky sexual practices like incest.
The other two moralized spheres match up with the classic examples of how altruism can evolve that were worked out by sociobiologists in the 1960s and 1970s and made famous by Richard Dawkins in his book “The Selfish Gene.” Fairness is very close to what scientists call reciprocal altruism, where a willingness to be nice to others can evolve as long as the favor helps the recipient more than it costs the giver and the recipient returns the favor when fortunes reverse. The analysis makes it sound as if reciprocal altruism comes out of a robotlike calculation, but in fact Robert Trivers, the biologist who devised the theory, argued that it is implemented in the brain as a suite of moral emotions. Sympathy prompts a person to offer the first favor, particularly to someone in need for whom it would go the furthest. Anger protects a person against cheaters who accept a favor without reciprocating, by impelling him to punish the ingrate or sever the relationship. Gratitude impels a beneficiary to reward those who helped him in the past. Guilt prompts a cheater in danger of being found out to repair the relationship by redressing the misdeed and advertising that he will behave better in the future (consistent with Mencken’s definition of conscience as “the inner voice which warns us that someone might be looking”). Many experiments on who helps whom, who likes whom, who punishes whom and who feels guilty about what have confirmed these predictions.
Community, the very different emotion that prompts people to share and sacrifice without an expectation of payback, may be rooted in nepotistic altruism, the empathy and solidarity we feel toward our relatives (and which evolved because any gene that pushed an organism to aid a relative would have helped copies of itself sitting inside that relative). In humans, of course, communal feelings can be lavished on nonrelatives as well. Sometimes it pays people (in an evolutionary sense) to love their companions because their interests are yoked, like spouses with common children, in-laws with common relatives, friends with common tastes or allies with common enemies. And sometimes it doesn’t pay them at all, but their kinship-detectors have been tricked into treating their groupmates as if they were relatives by tactics like kinship metaphors (blood brothers, fraternities, the fatherland), origin myths, communal meals and other bonding rituals.
Juggling the Spheres
All this brings us to a theory of how the moral sense can be universal and variable at the same time. The five moral spheres are universal, a legacy of evolution. But how they are ranked in importance, and which is brought in to moralize which area of social life — sex, government, commerce, religion, diet and so on — depends on the culture. Many of the flabbergasting practices in faraway places become more intelligible when you recognize that the same moralizing impulse that Western elites channel toward violations of harm and fairness (our moral obsessions) is channeled elsewhere to violations in the other spheres. Think of the Japanese fear of nonconformity (community), the holy ablutions and dietary restrictions of Hindus and Orthodox Jews (purity), the outrage at insulting the Prophet among Muslims (authority). In the West, we believe that in business and government, fairness should trump community and try to root out nepotism and cronyism. In other parts of the world this is incomprehensible — what heartless creep would favor a perfect stranger over his own brother?
The ranking and placement of moral spheres also divides the cultures of liberals and conservatives in the United States. Many bones of contention, like homosexuality, atheism and one-parent families from the right, or racial imbalances, sweatshops and executive pay from the left, reflect different weightings of the spheres. In a large Web survey, Haidt found that liberals put a lopsided moral weight on harm and fairness while playing down group loyalty, authority and purity. Conservatives instead place a moderately high weight on all five. It’s not surprising that each side thinks it is driven by lofty ethical values and that the other side is base and unprincipled.
Reassigning an activity to a different sphere, or taking it out of the moral spheres altogether, isn’t easy. People think that a behavior belongs in its sphere as a matter of sacred necessity and that the very act of questioning an assignment is a moral outrage. The psychologist Philip Tetlock has shown that the mentality of taboo — a conviction that some thoughts are sinful to think — is not just a superstition of Polynesians but a mind-set that can easily be triggered in college-educated Americans. Just ask them to think about applying the sphere of reciprocity to relationships customarily governed by community or authority. When Tetlock asked subjects for their opinions on whether adoption agencies should place children with the couples willing to pay the most, whether people should have the right to sell their organs and whether they should be able to buy their way out of jury duty, the subjects not only disagreed but felt personally insulted and were outraged that anyone would raise the question.
The institutions of modernity often question and experiment with the way activities are assigned to moral spheres. Market economies tend to put everything up for sale. Science amoralizes the world by seeking to understand phenomena rather than pass judgment on them. Secular philosophy is in the business of scrutinizing all beliefs, including those entrenched by authority and tradition. It’s not surprising that these institutions are often seen to be morally corrosive.
Is Nothing Sacred?
And “morally corrosive” is exactly the term that some critics would apply to the new science of the moral sense. The attempt to dissect our moral intuitions can look like an attempt to debunk them. Evolutionary psychologists seem to want to unmask our noblest motives as ultimately self-interested — to show that our love for children, compassion for the unfortunate and sense of justice are just tactics in a Darwinian struggle to perpetuate our genes. The explanation of how different cultures appeal to different spheres could lead to a spineless relativism, in which we would never have grounds to criticize the practice of another culture, no matter how barbaric, because “we have our kind of morality and they have theirs.” And the whole enterprise seems to be dragging us to an amoral nihilism, in which morality itself would be demoted from a transcendent principle to a figment of our neural circuitry.
In reality, none of these fears are warranted, and it’s important to see why not. The first misunderstanding involves the logic of evolutionary explanations. Evolutionary biologists sometimes anthropomorphize DNA for the same reason that science teachers find it useful to have their students imagine the world from the viewpoint of a molecule or a beam of light. One shortcut to understanding the theory of selection without working through the math is to imagine that the genes are little agents that try to make copies of themselves.
Unfortunately, the meme of the selfish gene escaped from popular biology books and mutated into the idea that organisms (including people) are ruthlessly self-serving. And this doesn’t follow. Genes are not a reservoir of our dark unconscious wishes. “Selfish” genes are perfectly compatible with selfless organisms, because a gene’s metaphorical goal of selfishly replicating itself can be implemented by wiring up the brain of the organism to do unselfish things, like being nice to relatives or doing good deeds for needy strangers. When a mother stays up all night comforting a sick child, the genes that endowed her with that tenderness were “selfish” in a metaphorical sense, but by no stretch of the imagination is she being selfish.
Nor does reciprocal altruism — the evolutionary rationale behind fairness — imply that people do good deeds in the cynical expectation of repayment down the line. We all know of unrequited good deeds, like tipping a waitress in a city you will never visit again and falling on a grenade to save platoonmates. These bursts of goodness are not as anomalous to a biologist as they might appear.
In his classic 1971 article, Trivers, the biologist, showed how natural selection could push in the direction of true selflessness. The emergence of tit-for-tat reciprocity, which lets organisms trade favors without being cheated, is just a first step. A favor-giver not only has to avoid blatant cheaters (those who would accept a favor but not return it) but also prefer generous reciprocators (those who return the biggest favor they can afford) over stingy ones (those who return the smallest favor they can get away with). Since it’s good to be chosen as a recipient of favors, a competition arises to be the most generous partner around. More accurately, a competition arises to appear to be the most generous partner around, since the favor-giver can’t literally read minds or see into the future. A reputation for fairness and generosity becomes an asset.
Now this just sets up a competition for potential beneficiaries to inflate their reputations without making the sacrifices to back them up. But it also pressures the favor-giver to develop ever-more-sensitive radar to distinguish the genuinely generous partners from the hypocrites. This arms race will eventually reach a logical conclusion. The most effective way to seem generous and fair, under harsh scrutiny, is to be generous and fair. In the long run, then, reputation can be secured only by commitment. At least some agents evolve to be genuinely high-minded and self-sacrificing — they are moral not because of what it brings them but because that’s the kind of people they are.
Of course, a theory that predicted that everyone always sacrificed themselves for another’s good would be as preposterous as a theory that predicted that no one ever did. Alongside the niches for saints there are niches for more grudging reciprocators, who attract fewer and poorer partners but don’t make the sacrifices necessary for a sterling reputation. And both may coexist with outright cheaters, who exploit the unwary in one-shot encounters. An ecosystem of niches, each with a distinct strategy, can evolve when the payoff of each strategy depends on how many players are playing the other strategies. The human social environment does have its share of generous, grudging and crooked characters, and the genetic variation in personality seems to bear the fingerprints of this evolutionary process.
Is Morality a Figment?
So a biological understanding of the moral sense does not entail that people are calculating maximizers of their genes or self-interest. But where does it leave the concept of morality itself?
Here is the worry. The scientific outlook has taught us that some parts of our subjective experience are products of our biological makeup and have no objective counterpart in the world. The qualitative difference between red and green, the tastiness of fruit and foulness of carrion, the scariness of heights and prettiness of flowers are design features of our common nervous system, and if our species had evolved in a different ecosystem or if we were missing a few genes, our reactions could go the other way. Now, if the distinction between right and wrong is also a product of brain wiring, why should we believe it is any more real than the distinction between red and green? And if it is just a collective hallucination, how could we argue that evils like genocide and slavery are wrong for everyone, rather than just distasteful to us?
Putting God in charge of morality is one way to solve the problem, of course, but Plato made short work of it 2,400 years ago. Does God have a good reason for designating certain acts as moral and others as immoral? If not — if his dictates are divine whims — why should we take them seriously? Suppose that God commanded us to torture a child. Would that make it all right, or would some other standard give us reasons to resist? And if, on the other hand, God was forced by moral reasons to issue some dictates and not others — if a command to torture a child was never an option — then why not appeal to those reasons directly?
This throws us back to wondering where those reasons could come from, if they are more than just figments of our brains. They certainly aren’t in the physical world like wavelength or mass. The only other option is that moral truths exist in some abstract Platonic realm, there for us to discover, perhaps in the same way that mathematical truths (according to most mathematicians) are there for us to discover. On this analogy, we are born with a rudimentary concept of number, but as soon as we build on it with formal mathematical reasoning, the nature of mathematical reality forces us to discover some truths and not others. (No one who understands the concept of two, the concept of four and the concept of addition can come to any conclusion but that 2 + 2 = 4.) Perhaps we are born with a rudimentary moral sense, and as soon as we build on it with moral reasoning, the nature of moral reality forces us to some conclusions but not others.
Moral realism, as this idea is called, is too rich for many philosophers’ blood. Yet a diluted version of the idea — if not a list of cosmically inscribed Thou-Shalts, then at least a few If-Thens — is not crazy. Two features of reality point any rational, self-preserving social agent in a moral direction. And they could provide a benchmark for determining when the judgments of our moral sense are aligned with morality itself.
One is the prevalence of nonzero-sum games. In many arenas of life, two parties are objectively better off if they both act in a nonselfish way than if each of them acts selfishly. You and I are both better off if we share our surpluses, rescue each other’s children in danger and refrain from shooting at each other, compared with hoarding our surpluses while they rot, letting the other’s child drown while we file our nails or feuding like the Hatfields and McCoys. Granted, I might be a bit better off if I acted selfishly at your expense and you played the sucker, but the same is true for you with me, so if each of us tried for these advantages, we’d both end up worse off. Any neutral observer, and you and I if we could talk it over rationally, would have to conclude that the state we should aim for is the one in which we both are unselfish. These spreadsheet projections are not quirks of brain wiring, nor are they dictated by a supernatural power; they are in the nature of things.
The other external support for morality is a feature of rationality itself: that it cannot depend on the egocentric vantage point of the reasoner. If I appeal to you to do anything that affects me — to get off my foot, or tell me the time or not run me over with your car — then I can’t do it in a way that privileges my interests over yours (say, retaining my right to run you over with my car) if I want you to take me seriously. Unless I am Galactic Overlord, I have to state my case in a way that would force me to treat you in kind. I can’t act as if my interests are special just because I’m me and you’re not, any more than I can persuade you that the spot I am standing on is a special place in the universe just because I happen to be standing on it.
Not coincidentally, the core of this idea — the interchangeability of perspectives — keeps reappearing in history’s best-thought-through moral philosophies, including the Golden Rule (itself discovered many times); Spinoza’s Viewpoint of Eternity; the Social Contract of Hobbes, Rousseau and Locke; Kant’s Categorical Imperative; and Rawls’s Veil of Ignorance. It also underlies Peter Singer‘s theory of the Expanding Circle — the optimistic proposal that our moral sense, though shaped by evolution to overvalue self, kin and clan, can propel us on a path of moral progress, as our reasoning forces us to generalize it to larger and larger circles of sentient beings.
Doing Better by Knowing Ourselves
Morality, then, is still something larger than our inherited moral sense, and the new science of the moral sense does not make moral reasoning and conviction obsolete. At the same time, its implications for our moral universe are profound.
At the very least, the science tells us that even when our adversaries’ agenda is most baffling, they may not be amoral psychopaths but in the throes of a moral mind-set that appears to them to be every bit as mandatory and universal as ours does to us. Of course, some adversaries really are psychopaths, and others are so poisoned by a punitive moralization that they are beyond the pale of reason. (The actor Will Smith had many historians on his side when he recently speculated to the press that Hitler thought he was acting morally.) But in any conflict in which a meeting of the minds is not completely hopeless, a recognition that the other guy is acting from moral rather than venal reasons can be a first patch of common ground. One side can acknowledge the other’s concern for community or stability or fairness or dignity, even while arguing that some other value should trump it in that instance. With affirmative action, for example, the opponents can be seen as arguing from a sense of fairness, not racism, and the defenders can be seen as acting from a concern with community, not bureaucratic power. Liberals can ratify conservatives’ concern with families while noting that gay marriage is perfectly consistent with that concern.
The science of the moral sense also alerts us to ways in which our psychological makeup can get in the way of our arriving at the most defensible moral conclusions. The moral sense, we are learning, is as vulnerable to illusions as the other senses. It is apt to confuse morality per se with purity, status and conformity. It tends to reframe practical problems as moral crusades and thus see their solution in punitive aggression. It imposes taboos that make certain ideas indiscussible. And it has the nasty habit of always putting the self on the side of the angels.
Though wise people have long reflected on how we can be blinded by our own sanctimony, our public discourse still fails to discount it appropriately. In the worst cases, the thoughtlessness of our brute intuitions can be celebrated as a virtue. In his influential essay “The Wisdom of Repugnance,” Leon Kass, former chair of the President’s Council on Bioethics, argued that we should disregard reason when it comes to cloning and other biomedical technologies and go with our gut: “We are repelled by the prospect of cloning human beings . . . because we intuit and feel, immediately and without argument, the violation of things that we rightfully hold dear. . . . In this age in which everything is held to be permissible so long as it is freely done . . . repugnance may be the only voice left that speaks up to defend the central core of our humanity. Shallow are the souls that have forgotten how to shudder.”
There are, of course, good reasons to regulate human cloning, but the shudder test is not one of them. People have shuddered at all kinds of morally irrelevant violations of purity in their culture: touching an untouchable, drinking from the same water fountain as a Negro, allowing Jewish blood to mix with Aryan blood, tolerating sodomy between consenting men. And if our ancestors’ repugnance had carried the day, we never would have had autopsies, vaccinations, blood transfusions, artificial insemination, organ transplants and in vitro fertilization, all of which were denounced as immoral when they were new.
There are many other issues for which we are too quick to hit the moralization button and look for villains rather than bug fixes. What should we do when a hospital patient is killed by a nurse who administers the wrong drug in a patient’s intravenous line? Should we make it easier to sue the hospital for damages? Or should we redesign the IV fittings so that it’s physically impossible to connect the wrong bottle to the line?
And nowhere is moralization more of a hazard than in our greatest global challenge. The threat of human-induced climate change has become the occasion for a moralistic revival meeting. In many discussions, the cause of climate change is overindulgence (too many S.U.V.’s) and defilement (sullying the atmosphere), and the solution is temperance (conservation) and expiation (buying carbon offset coupons). Yet the experts agree that these numbers don’t add up: even if every last American became conscientious about his or her carbon emissions, the effects on climate change would be trifling, if for no other reason than that two billion Indians and Chinese are unlikely to copy our born-again abstemiousness. Though voluntary conservation may be one wedge in an effective carbon-reduction pie, the other wedges will have to be morally boring, like a carbon tax and new energy technologies, or even taboo, like nuclear power and deliberate manipulation of the ocean and atmosphere. Our habit of moralizing problems, merging them with intuitions of purity and contamination, and resting content when we feel the right feelings, can get in the way of doing the right thing.
Far from debunking morality, then, the science of the moral sense can advance it, by allowing us to see through the illusions that evolution and culture have saddled us with and to focus on goals we can share and defend. As Anton Chekhov wrote, “Man will become better when you show him what he is like.”
Steven Pinker is the Johnstone Family Professor of Psychology at Harvard University and the author of “The Language Instinct” and “The Stuff of
Thought: Language as a Window Into Human Nature.” -
If This Happens in Vegas, It Can Sure Stay in Vegas
Jane Kalinowsky for The New York TimesIt may not look like much, but the opening of this casino, for one day only, let its owner keep a crucial zoning designation
Jane Kalinowsky for The New York TimesA floor manager watched over 16 slot machines Tuesday, but there was hardly a rush on them.
January 9, 2008If This Happens in Vegas, It Can Sure Stay in Vegas By STEVE FRIESSLAS VEGAS — Parking was plentiful right by the door, there was no one to wrestle with for use of the slot machines, and Paris Hilton would not have been caught dead anywhere near this joint.
As casino openings go, this one was underwhelming, and intentionally so.
For eight hours on Tuesday, Station Casinos opened a nondescript 40-by-10-foot trailer on a vacant 26-acre plot about six miles east of the Strip with just 16 slot machines. The sole purpose was to comply with a state law that requires public gambling to occur on a property for at least one shift every two years in order for the landowner to retain the valuable zoning designation needed to conduct wagering.
“It just has to be open to the public,” said Lori Nelson, a spokeswoman for Station Casinos, which owns 16 casinos in Nevada and one in California. “You don’t need to promote it. You don’t need to really have people gamble here. But you do need to have that option.”
As of midday, nobody but reporters had turned out for the event, which had been publicized by only a few bloggers on the Internet. The biggest payout on the bank of video poker and blackjack machines was $2.50.
Station bought the property in 2005 and the next year demolished the shuttered casino-hotel that had been the Showboat and, later, the Castaways. The company has yet to come up with plans for the land, in a deteriorating section of eastern Las Vegas where property values are falling and crime is rampant.
The opening of the nameless temporary casino, which the local newspaper dubbed Trailer Station, was rich in red tape, including seven permits, approvals from the City Council and the Nevada Gaming Control Board, and a certificate of occupancy.
As required by the city code, the trailer, brought onto the land just for the day, came complete with a portable toilet outside and, to comply with the Americans With Disabilities Act, a wheelchair-accessible entrance. A casino floor manager sat at one end of the narrow room ready to pay out winnings should there be any, a security guard patrolled outside, and two city zoning officers visited for 20 minutes to inspect and fill out paperwork.
The state archivist, Guy Rocha, said he had never heard of such an event.
“I have to admit, I’ve never witnessed it,” Mr. Rocha said. “Nor am I aware of it.”
But Rob Woodson of the United Coin Machine Company, the slot operator that provided the machines for the day, said: “There are probably four or five places that have to do this in order to preserve their grandfathered zoning rights to have nonrestricted gaming there. That makes the property millions and millions of dollars more valuable.”
Toward sunset, the casino closed quietly. Ms. Nelson, the Station Casinos spokeswoman, said the company might not have a permanent casino up on the property two years from now, either. If not, then to comply with the once-every-24-month rule, Trailer Station may return in early 2010.
“If we don’t break ground and start building a facility,” she said, “yeah, we’ll be here two years from today.”
-
Maureen Dowd,Web Video,Britney Spears,Blu-ray,gift cards,Philippe de Montebello
Today’s Papers
Shake It Up
By Daniel Politi
Posted Wednesday, Jan. 9, 2008, at 6:17 A.M. E.T.All the papers lead with the New Hampshire primaries, where voters surprised everyone by handing Sen. Hillary Clinton a victory over Sen. Barack Obama. Sen. John McCain’s victory over Mitt Romney had been widely expected in the last week, but it still marks an amazing turn of events for a candidate that many were ready to write off last summer. With almost all the votes counted, Clinton received 39 percent of the vote, while Obama got 36 percent, and John Edwards was a distant third with 17 percent. On the Republican side, McCain got 37 percent to Romney’s 32 percent, while Mike Huckabee and Rudy Giuliani got 11 percent and 9 percent, respectively. As had been expected, it was a day of record turnout and approximately 500,000 voters cast a ballot.
If the key word after Iowa was change, today it’s comeback as voters breathed new political life into two candidates that had come in third and fourth in last week’s contest. Now the only thing that’s clear is that “contests in both parties are far from settled despite predictions that a compressed primary calendar would force a quick decision,” notes USA Today. For Clinton, comparisons to her husband’s candidacy seem almost inevitable as it was his surprise second-place finish in New Hampshire in 1992 that led to his famous “Comeback Kid” speech. Even McCain alluded to it in his victory speech. “My friends, I am past the age when I can claim the noun, ‘kid,’ no matter what adjective precedes it,” he said. “But tonight we sure showed them what a comeback looks like.”
The Washington Post points out that, in the end, “New Hampshire proved to be the political firewall that the Clinton campaign long had hoped for.” With all the pre-election polls predicting a wide margin for Obama’s victory, the key question is, what happened? The New York Times goes highest with the theory that perhaps a lot of women turned to Clinton after her “unusual display of emotion” on Monday, which Slate‘s Chadwick Matlin describes as perhaps “the most famous tears that never fell from an eye.” Of course, no one really knows how many voters were persuaded by the moment that was endlessly repeated on television, but regardless, it is clear that women, and particularly older women, played a decisive role in Clinton’s victory. “Over the last week, I listened to you, and in the process I found my own voice,” Clinton said last night.
While it might be easy to forget with all the excitement about the surprising victory, the Los Angeles Times helpfully reminds readers high up in its story that Clinton became “the first female candidate ever to win a major-party primary.” Younger voters still went for Obama, but Clinton is trying hard to woo them to her side. The Wall Street Journal points out that in a “purposeful contrast with her concession speech in Iowa,” she was surrounded by young people yesterday during her victory speech. Slate‘s John Dickerson points out that after Iowa, “the Clinton campaign worked hard to bring Obama down to earth,” and the Post‘s Dan Balz says some analysts believe that the strategy worked. We can probably expect it to continue, particularly since many think yesterday’s loss will push voters and the media to take a more critical look at Obama.
Registered Democrats also favored Clinton, while independents gave a boost to Obama. The NYT and LAT point out in front-page analyses that this might be a good sign for the former first lady because many states that hold primaries in the coming weeks don’t allow independents to vote in the Democratic contests. Support from the party’s base will be particularly important in many of the states that will hold contests on the critical Tsunami Tuesday, notes the LAT. But that’s not to say she’ll have an easy time. The next two Democratic contests are in Nevada, where a powerful union will probably back Obama, and South Carolina, where African-American voters are expected to make up about half of the electorate. But, at the very least, Clinton’s victory “instantly deflated the almost giddy sense of anticipation inside Obama’s headquarters,” notes the Post.
While the Democratic results solidified the feelings that this has become a two-person contest, McCain’s victory means “the Republican field is more scrambled than ever,” as the NYT puts it. The results were clearly a blow for Romney, not only because he had made winning the early states a key part of his strategy, but also because he was supposed to have a leg up in New Hampshire, where he owns a vacation home and voters were already familiar with him from his time as governor of neighboring Massachusetts. But McCain was boosted by independents and, as the LAT notes on Page One, Romney widely beat McCain with voters who consider themselves conservatives, which could spell trouble for the senator in later contests. Even McCain’s “supporters are wondering whether he can take his adrenaline-fueled campaign national,” says the Post.
The next Republican primary is on Jan. 15 in Michigan, which the WSJ says will be the first real contest between Romney, McCain, and Giuliani. Romney should, theoretically, have an advantage in Michigan, where his father was a three-term governor. The NYT says Romney’s aides now view Michigan as his firewall. Although Huckabee didn’t get much of a bounce from the Iowa results in New Hampshire, he has a lead in South Carolina, which votes on Jan. 19, and advisers think he could have a respectable showing in Michigan with the help of rural voters and blue-collar workers that find his populist message appealing. Then comes Florida, where Giuliani has been spending lots of time lately, and which will likely be a decisive marker on whether the former mayor can gain momentum before Feb. 5. As the WSJ points out, even though he’s losing big in the early states, Giuliani could end up benefitting from the Republican rule that allocates all of a state’s delegates to the winner. (Democrats allocate proportionally.)
In other news, all the papers go inside with U.S. and Iraqi forces launching a major offensive against Sunni insurgents in Diyala province. But even before the offensive began, military officials got word that insurgent leaders had fled their hideouts, “confirming a long-standing pattern: When U.S. and Iraqi forces attack, insurgents drop their weapons and blend into the civilian population,” says the LAT. The NYT notes that American planners had kept most Iraqi troops in the dark about the offensive in order to avoid just this kind of scenario, which “suggests they cannot fully trust their allies who are supposed to pick up more of the fighting” this year.
The Post‘s David Ignatius says there’s currently a “new push” from Kurdish leaders to oust Iraqi Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki. It’s a move the United States would rather avoid but officials recognize that Maliki needs to be more effective and inclusive in the coming months to avoid being thrown out of office.
The WSJ reports that the White House is working on an economic stimulus plan that would involve giving out tax rebates “of perhaps $500″ for individuals and new tax breaks for businesses.
With the cancellation of Sunday’s Golden Globe Awards ceremony, and the possibility that more awards shows will also be nixed because of the continuing writers’ strike, the fashion industry is worried it could face big losses this year, says the WSJ. The red carpet extravaganzas are worth millions of dollars in “free” advertising for the fashion houses. And it’s not just about the clothes, one fashion insider tells the paper. “When a Versace dress marches down the red carpet, it helps to sell that label’s shoes, their bags, their perfumes.”
Daniel Politi writes “Today’s Papers” for Slate. He can be reached at todayspapers@slate.comTuesday, January 08, 2008
Patrician Director of Met Museum Will Retire
Fred R. Conrad/The New York TimesPhilippe de Montebello
January 9, 2008By CAROL VOGELPhilippe de Montebello, who has led the Metropolitan Museum of Art for 30 years and has virtually become synonymous with its monumental profile, announced Tuesday that he planned to retire at the end of the year.
A patrician figure whose mellifluous multilingual voice on the museum’s audio guides is known to millions of visitors around the world, he is the eighth and longest-serving director in the institution’s 138-year history.
Mr. de Montebello, 71, has more than doubled the museum’s physical size during his tenure, carving out majestic new galleries suited to the Met’s encyclopedic holdings. Today it is the city’s biggest tourist attraction, with millions of visitors a year.
Mr. de Montebello informed the Met’s board of trustees at a meeting on Tuesday afternoon that he intended to leave the museum at the end of 2008 or as soon as a successor had been found. A new director has not been named, and the board said it would immediately form a search committee.
In a telephone interview, Mr. Montebello said that after a packed fall season and the completion of several big long-term projects like new galleries for Greek and Roman art and European paintings, he felt the time was right.
“After three decades, to stay much further would be to skirt decency,” he said. “This has not been an easy decision — it’s wrenching for me, it’s been my entire life. But it’s time.”
James R. Houghton, chairman of the museum’s board, said he was not surprised by the announcement. “It has been in his mind for some time now,” he said in an interview. “It was a mutual decision and I think the right one.”
Yet he added: “To look for somebody to fill his shoes will be very hard. The pool of potential candidates is smaller than it once was.”
While Mr. de Montebello has won broad admiration for his stewardship of the museum, he has sometimes drawn criticism for a reluctance to embrace contemporary art and a dismissive attitude toward claims by archaeologically rich countries to objects they say were looted and sold to Western museums.
Two years ago, however, he negotiated a pact to turn over 21 classical artifacts in the Met’s collection to Italy. And a dead shark prepared by the artist Damien Hirst is now floating in a tank of formaldehyde at the southern end of the museum under a three-year loan.
Asked if the board, knowing Mr. de Montebello’s retirement was imminent, had drafted a list of possible successors, Mr. Houghton would only say, “We’ve got all sorts of lists.” He declined to describe the qualities that Met trustees would seek in a new director.
(Arthur Ochs Sulzberger, chairman emeritus of The New York Times Company and the father of its current chairman, led the Met’s board of trustees from 1987 to 1998 and is now a trustee emeritus of the museum.)
Mr. Houghton said that Annette de la Renta and S. Parker Gilbert, both vice chairmen of the Met board, would be the chairwoman and vice chairman of the search committee.
Mr. de Montebello said he would not serve on the panel. “I’m the last person to name my successor,” he said. “It’s not my role.”
Mr. de Montebello said he timed his resignation carefully. “It seemed like a good moment — to step down on a high,” he said, referring to 2007 as an “annus mirabilis.”
Last year he oversaw the opening of nine new or renovated galleries, beginning in April with the vast Greek and Roman galleries — a museum within a museum — and ending with the opening of the expanded and renovated galleries for 19th- and early-20th-century European paintings last month. The museum also presented some 21 exhibitions, including “The Age of Rembrandt,” which included the museum’s entire collection of Dutch paintings and attracted 505,082 visitors by the time it closed on Sunday, and “Tapestry in the Baroque,” drawing on collections from more than 15 countries.
Many of those projects were years in the making, with Mr. de Montebello collaborating closely with his curators, seeking financing and negotiating loans.
It has been a long trajectory. He arrived at the Met in 1963 as a curatorial assistant in the department of European paintings and except for four years — from 1969 to 1974, when he served as director of the Museum of Fine Arts, Houston — he spent his entire career there.
His ascension to director in 1977 ended a tumultuous decade at the museum. His predecessor, Thomas Hoving, was a showman who shook up the institution, staging a series of exhibitions that attracted blockbuster crowds. But he was considered an autocrat, and by the end of his tenure had alienated many staff members and trustees.
French born and Harvard educated, Mr. de Montebello exuded a polish and erudition that reassured trustees and donors even as his European style was often spoofed in the art world in his later years.
Over three decades, the institution’s endowment went from $1.36 million to $2.9 billion; attendance rose from 3.5 million to 5.1 million visitors by 2000 before retreating a bit after 9/11. Last year 4.6 million people visited the museum.
Yet Mr. de Montebello became known as much for his absorption in the Met’s permanent collection as for encouraging well-attended shows. Curators say he can often be found in one gallery or another peering at a Greek bust or a studying a piece of richly gilded Byzantine metalwork.
Over the years he has been responsible for championing high-profile acquisitions — some gifts, some purchases, some both — like Duccio di Buoninsegna’s “Madonna and Child,” dating from around 1300; Vermeer‘s “Portrait of a Young Woman,” from around 1666-1667; van Gogh‘s “Wheat Field With Cypresses” (1889); and Jasper Johns‘s “White Flag” (1955).
He also managed to outmaneuver other institutions in securing bequests of entire collections, like world-class Impressionist and Post-Impressionist works amassed by Walter H. Annenberg, the former United States ambassador to Britain and a longtime Met trustee, and his wife, Leonore.
He also motivated donors to finance grand galleries that would show the permanent holdings to better advantage, creating spaces like the 100,000-square-foot Lila Acheson Wallace Wing for modern art, which opened in 1987, and the Carroll and Milton Petrie European Sculpture Court in 1990.
In the 1990s Mr. de Montebello embarked on a series of projects that involved “building from within,” like the new Greek and Roman Galleries and refurbished spaces for Oceanic and Native North American Art. (Other building programs have included the expansion and renovation of the museum’s period rooms and decorative arts galleries; new galleries for prints, drawings and photographs; and vast new spaces for the fast-growing collections of Asian art.)
Two years ago, he initiated a project to redesign the Met’s entire American Wing, including the Charles Engelhard Court, an effort that is still in progress.
In 1989 he halted the Met practice of charging special admission prices for big temporary exhibitions, saying he felt that the fees siphoned attention from the permanent holdings and the full range of art objects at the Met.
Still, he oversaw more than his share of blockbusters, including “The Vatican Collections” in 1983; the Velázquez survey in 1989-1990; “The Glory of Byzantium,” in 1997; “Egyptian Art in the Age of the Pyramids,” in 1999-2000; “Vermeer and the Delft School,” in 2001; and “Leonardo da Vinci: Master Draftsman,” in 2003. His next act, post-Metropolitan Museum, has yet to be determined, Mr. de Montebello said. “I don’t know what’s out there,” he said. “Surely I’d like to be an advocacy for excellence in art.”
He allowed that his current job would be hard to top. “I’m the most grateful person on earth,” he said. “I’ve had the privilege to run the greatest institution in the world. How much luckier can you be than that?”
For the museum world, one challenge will surely be to start seeing the Met and its long-term director as separate entities.
“The Met is a huge organization, and too many people have been increasingly saying to me, ‘You are the Met,’” Mr. de Montebello said. “I am not the Met.”
Copyright 2008 The New York Times CompanyDefying Predictions and Some Dire Polls, Clinton Escapes to Fight Another Day
January 9, 2008News Analysis MANCHESTER, N.H. — New Hampshire kept Senator Hillary Rodham Clinton alive.
Her victory in the Democratic primary on Tuesday night was portrayed by her campaign as a stunning turnabout. Given how dire her situation had appeared just hours earlier, the spin was not unjustified.
In the end, she survived because registered Democrats preferred her to Senator Barack Obama, though independents went for him, according to exit polls. And she benefited from strong support among women, a constituency that she worked hard to appeal to in the campaign’s final days here.
Mrs. Clinton is now likely to be able to appeal to donors for more money for what is shaping up as a protracted battle against Mr. Obama. The internal squabbling about her campaign’s management and strategy is likely to be quieted. And she will no doubt go forth making the obvious comparison: that just like her husband 16 years ago, she is now well positioned to battle her way to the nomination.
But Mrs. Clinton faces an opponent who has lately seemed to embody a movement rather than to be a mere political candidate. He has at times been an elusive target, lifted on the wind of nationwide anti-Washington climate change. She has often seemed to be frustrated in seeking to challenge his level of experience, his consistency, his positions or his electability against a Republican Par-
In Chinese Factories, Lost Fingers and Low Pay
Oded Balilty/Associated PressChinese workers can face serious work hazards and abuse. In Hebei Province in northern China, a worker dragged a barrel in a chemical factory.
January 5, 2008In Chinese Factories, Lost Fingers and Low Pay GUANGZHOU, China — Nearly a decade after some of the most powerful companies in the world — often under considerable criticism and consumer pressure — began an effort to eliminate sweatshop labor conditions in Asia, worker abuse is still commonplace in many of the Chinese factories that supply Western companies, according to labor rights groups.
The groups say some Chinese companies routinely shortchange their employees on wages, withhold health benefits and expose their workers to dangerous machinery and harmful chemicals, like lead, cadmium and mercury.
“If these things are so dangerous for the consumer, then how about the workers?” said Anita Chan, a labor rights advocate who teaches at the Australian National University. “We may be dealing with these things for a short time, but they deal with them every day.”
And so while American and European consumers worry about exposing their children to Chinese-made toys coated in lead, Chinese workers, often as young as 16, face far more serious hazards. Here in the Pearl River Delta region near Hong Kong, for example, factory workers lose or break about 40,000 fingers on the job every year, according to a study published a few years ago by the Shanghai Academy of Social Sciences.
Pushing to keep big corporations honest, labor groups regularly smuggle photographs, videos, pay stubs, shipping records and other evidence out of factories that they say violate local law and international worker standards. In 2007, factories that supplied more than a dozen corporations, including Wal-Mart, Disney and Dell, were accused of unfair labor practices, including using child labor, forcing employees to work 16-hour days on fast-moving assembly lines, and paying workers less than minimum wage. (Minimum wage in this part of China is about 55 cents an hour.)
In recent weeks, a flood of reports detailing labor abuse have been released, at a time when China is still coping with last year’s wave of product safety recalls of goods made in China, and as it tries to change workplace rules with a new labor law that took effect on Jan. 1.
No company has come under as harsh a spotlight as Wal-Mart, the world’s biggest retailer, which sourced about $9 billion in goods from China in 2006, everything from hammers and toys to high-definition televisions.
In December, two nongovernmental organizations, or NGOs, documented what they said were abuse and labor violations at 15 factories that produce or supply goods for Wal-Mart — including the use of child labor at Huanya Gifts, a factory here in Guangzhou that makes Christmas tree ornaments.
Wal-Mart officials say they are investigating the allegations, which were in a report issued three weeks ago by the National Labor Committee, a New York-based NGO.
Guangzhou labor bureau officials said they recently fined Huanya for wage violations, but also said they found no evidence of child labor.
A spokesman for Huanya, which employs 8,000 workers, denied that the company broke any labor laws.
But two workers interviewed outside Huanya’s huge complex in late December said that they were forced to work long hours to meet production quotas in harsh conditions.
“I work on the plastic molding machine from 6 in the morning to 6 at night,” said Xu Wenquan, a tiny, baby-faced 16-year-old whose hands were covered with blisters. Asked what had happened to his hands, he replied, the machines are “quite hot, so I’ve burned my hands.”
His brother, Xu Wenjie, 18, said the two young men left their small village in impoverished Guizhou Province four months ago and traveled more than 500 miles to find work at Huanya.
The brothers said they worked 12 hours a day, six days a week, for $120 to $200 a month, far less than they are required to be paid by law.
When government inspectors visit the factory, the young brothers are given the day off, they said.
A former Huanya employee who was reached by telephone gave a similar account of working conditions, saying many workers suffered from skin rashes after working with gold powders and that others were forced to sign papers “volunteering” to work overtime.
“It’s quite noisy, and you stand up all day, 12 hours, and there’s no air-conditioning,” he said. “We get paid by the piece we make but they never told us how much. Sometimes I got $110, sometimes I got $150 a month.”
In its 58-page report, the National Labor Committee scolded Wal-Mart for not doing more to protect workers. The group charged that last July, Huanya recruited about 500 16-year-old high school students to work seven days a week, often 15 hours a day, during peak production months for holiday merchandise.
Several students interviewed at the Guangzhou Technical School, less than two miles from Huanya, confirmed that classmates ages 16 to 18 had spent the summer working at the factory.
Some high school students later went on strike to protest the harsh conditions, the report said. The students also told labor officials that at least seven children, as young as 12 years old, were working in the factory.
“At Wal-Mart, Christmas ornaments are cheap, and so are the lives of the young workers in China who make them,” the National Labor Committee report said.
Jonathan Dong, a Wal-Mart spokesman in Beijing, said the company would soon release details of its own investigation into working conditions at Huanya.
Labor rights groups have also criticized Disney and Dell. Officials of Disney and Dell declined to comment on specific allegations, but both companies say they carefully monitor factories in China and take action when they find problems or unfair labor practices.
“The Walt Disney Company and its affiliates take claims of unfair labor practices very seriously and investigates any such allegations thoroughly,” the company said in a statement. “We have a strong commitment to the safety and well-being of workers, and fair and just labor standards.”
Many multinationals were harshly criticized in the 1990s for using suppliers that maintained sweatshop conditions. Iconic brand names, like Nike, Mattel and Gap, responded by forming corporate social responsibility operations and working with contractors to create a system of factory audits and inspections. Those changes have won praise in some quarters for improving worker conditions.
But despite spending millions of dollars and hiring thousands of auditors, some companies acknowledge that many of the programs are flawed.
“The factories have improved immeasurably over the past few years,” says Alan Hassenfeld, chairman of the toy maker Hasbro and co-chairman of Care, the ethical-manufacturing program of the International Council of Toy Industries. “But let me be honest: there are some bad factories. We have bribery and corruption occurring but we are doing our best.”
Some factories are warned about audits beforehand and some factory owners or managers bribe auditors. Inexperienced inspectors may also be a problem.
Some major Western auditing firms working in China even hire college students from the United States to work during the summer as inspectors, an indication that they are not willing to invest in more expensive or sophisticated auditing programs, critics say.
Chinese suppliers regularly outsource to other suppliers, who may in turn outsource to yet another operation, creating a supply chain that is hard to follow — let alone inspect.
“The convoluted supply chain is probably one of the most underestimated and unrecognized risks in China,” says Dane Chamorro, general manager for Greater China at Control Risks, a risk-consulting firm. “You really have to have experienced people on the ground who know what they’re doing and know the language.”
Many labor experts say part of the problem is cost: Western companies are constantly pressing their Chinese suppliers for lower prices while also insisting that factory owners spend more to upgrade operations, treat workers properly and improve product quality.
At the same time, rising food, energy and raw material costs in China — as well as a shortage of labor in the biggest southern manufacturing zones — are hampering factory owners’ ability to make a profit.
The situation may get worse before it improves. The labor law that took effect on Jan. 1 makes it more difficult to dismiss workers and creates a whole new set of laws that experts say will almost certainly increase labor costs. Yet it may become more difficult for human rights groups to investigate abuses. Concerned about the growing array of threats to profitability, as well as embarrassing exposés, factories are heightening security, harassing labor rights groups and calling the police when journalists show up at their gates.
At the center of the problem is a labor system that relies on young migrant workers, who often leave small rural villages for two- or three-year stints at factories, where they hope to earn enough to return home to start families.
As long as life in the cities promises more money than in rural areas, they will brave the harsh conditions in factories in this and other Chinese cities. And as long as China outlaws independent unions and proves unable to enforce its own labor rules, there is little hope for change.
“This is a problem that has been difficult to solve,” Liu Kaiming, the director of the Institute on Contemporary Observation, which aids migrant workers in nearby Shenzhen, said of sweatshop labor. “China has too many factories. The workers’ bargaining position is weak and the government’s regulation is slack.”
There is little that any Western company can do about those issues, no matter how seriously they take corporate social responsibility — other than leaving China.
McCain gets the good news.
Too Tough to Die
By John Dickerson
Posted Tuesday, Jan. 8, 2008, at 10:24 P.M. E.T.John McCain was looking at a television that appeared to be in the same credenza that he’d stood in front of eight years ago in a suite at the Nashua Crowne Plaza. The AP had called the election for him, but he didn’t look like he believed it. He wanted to hear it from the television. When he did, McCain showed no visible emotion. His wife Cindy’s eyes filled with tears, but McCain did little more than play with the green rubber band around his left hand. A cheer erupted in the room filled with many of the same advisers who had been there eight years ago. “Great news,” said McCain, finally turning to kiss his wife Cindy who wore a jeweled McCain 2008 pin on the lapel of her ruby red jacket.
McCain’s speechwriter and co-author Mark Salter leaned over to me and smiled, “Too tough to die.”
He was supposed to die last summer after a brutal staff shakeup and spending almost all the money he’d raised. To revive himself, he rented a cheaper, smellier bus than he’d driven around when he was the high-flying front runner. He returned to New Hampshire for an endless round of town halls of the kind that had led to his surprise victory in 2000. “We sure showed them what a comeback looks like,” said McCain in his acceptance speech.
Conventional wisdom was wrong. McCain did not lose a big share of independents to Barack Obama. As many independents voted in the GOP primary as did in 2000. McCain led his rivals with more than a third of their backing. Proving he hasn’t lost his appeal to middle-of-the-road voters will help his argument that he’s the most electable Republican in November. He also won Republican voters. Winning in the GOP—particularly in the face of Romney’s attacks on immigration and tax cuts—will help him argue that he is also a party favorite.
For Mitt Romney, the night was another tough blow. New Hampshire was supposed to give him his second win in the discarded momentum strategy that had him sealing the nomination after two early wins. The Olympics may have been easier to rescue. “He can’t sell himself,” said McCain’s ally Lindsey Graham, summing up Romney’s problem.
As McCain’s advisers planned for the concession call to Mitt Romney he took a call from his oldest son, a cadet at the Naval Academy:
“Jack Boy. Boy we won,” he said into the cell phone.
“Ways to go. Ways to go.”
“Okay now back to your studies.”
Immediately afterwards, Governor Huckabee called. To get some privacy, McCain backed into the bathroom off of the living room and shut the door.
Back in the living room of the suite, McCain returned to the television screen and we watched the returns from the Democratic race. “Boy, this Clinton-Obama race is interesting isn’t it?” he said to me, as he squinted into the screen. Aides were scurrying to find his speechwriter’s laptop. The acceptance speech they’d written for him included this line: “I want to congratulate Senator Obama tonight on his impressive victory and I salute his supporters who worked so hard to achieve their success and believe so passionately in the promise of their candidate.” They had to edit that one out.
Was he happy? another reporter asked him. “I’m very happy,” he said showing no visible evidence of it. The room swarmed with his blogging daughter Meghan and her friends, but McCain kept returning to the pose he’d held since hearing the results, both hands grasping the lapels of his blue suit.
McCain retired to the bedroom to sit on the bed and practice. When he returned he was inching back to his normal cut-up mood. He pretended to read the speech: “Despite the best efforts of the liberal commie media, I was able to overcome…no, no, we’re going to try to talk about big themes.”
When Mitt Romney came on the television to give his concession speech, McCain asked for the volume to be turned down. No one did it. “Well I won the silver again,” said Romney. McCain screwed up his mouth a little, rolled his eyes and said, “See, that’s why I wanted the television off.”
McCain flies to Michigan tomorrow and then ends the day in South Carolina. The last time he flew there after winning the New Hampshire primary in 2000, it was as an insurgent out to destroy the GOP establishment. Now McCain heads to the state with no clear establishment opponent and plenty of establishment support. One of the state’s senators, Lindsay Graham, a McCain’s ally then and now, reflected on the change as he sat in the corner drinking bottled water. “We’re not going to put up with what happened last time,” he said. “We’re going to have a structure we didn’t have before. I’m going to call some people tonight and see if they’ll come over.” Earlier in the night he’d joked they’d need flack jackets and helmets to handle the onslaught from Romney.
By the time he had left to give his acceptance speech, McCain had rolled it to the diameter of a pencil. At this moment eight years ago, his daughter Meghan was drinking Shirley Temples and his youngest son, Jimmy, was a little kid playing dancing around the room. Now Meghan is old enough to have champagne. And Jimmy is a Marine fighting in Iraq.
John Dickerson is Slate‘s chief political correspondent and author of On Her Trail. He can be reached at slatepolitics@gmail.com.Unemployment Sounds Warning About Economy
January 5, 2008The unemployment rate surged to 5 percent in December as the economy added a meager 18,000 jobs, the smallest monthly increase in four years, the Labor Department reported on Friday.
Economists viewed the report as the most powerful indication to date that the United States could well be falling into a recessionary downturn. Evidence of widening unemployment heightened anticipation that the Federal Reserve would further cut interest rates this month, perhaps by an unusually large half a percentage point, in a bid to prevent the economy from sliding into the muck.
“This is unambiguously negative,” said Mark Zandi, chief economist at Moody’s Economy.com. “The economy is on the edge of recession, if we’re not already engulfed in one.”
A recession is typically defined as an extended period of at least several months during which economic activity shrinks and unemployment rises.
The swift deterioration in the job market resonated as a warning sign that troubles once confined to real estate and construction are spilling into the broader economy, threatening the ability of American consumers to keep spending with customary abandon.
On Wall Street, the report led to a big sell-off that sent the Dow Jones industrial average plunging nearly 2 percent.
As the presidential race heated up, Democrats seized upon the bleak job numbers to indict Republican-led economic policies. “This morning’s jobs report confirms what most Americans already knew,” Nancy Pelosi, the House speaker, said in a statement. “President Bush’s economic policies have failed our country’s middle class.”
President Bush cautioned that “we can’t take economic growth for granted” and said he would work with Congress to be “more diligent” on protecting the economy. Speaking to reporters at the White House after a meeting with his economic advisers, Mr. Bush warned that “the worst thing the Congress could do is raise taxes on the American people.”
The lone consolation for investors, workers and the public at large was that the bad news seemed severe enough to prod the Fed to push its benchmark rate below its current 4.25 percent when policy makers meet at the end of the month. Lower interest rates decrease borrowing costs and encourage banks to lend more freely, spurring spending, hiring and investment.
The Fed has already eased rates three times since September in a bid to inject confidence into jittery markets. But analysts cautioned that central bankers may now feel constrained against further easing: inflation is growing, particularly as oil hovers near $100 a barrel. Lower interest rates, over time, can generate the seeds of inflation, and could make an already weak dollar worth less against foreign currencies.
“The Fed is trying to juggle a two-sided sword,” said Ryan Larson, senior equity trader at Voyageur Asset Management. “They’re trying to fight inflation moving higher and they’re trying to fight a slowdown in growth.”
In an effort to encourage lending, the Fed has been pumping cash through the banking system by auctioning off loans at discounted rates. On Friday, it said it would expand a pair of auctions scheduled for this month, offering $30 billion.
Some economists said the markets and other analysts were making too much of a lone jobs report that could yet be revised.
“The stock and bond markets are going into panic mode,” said Michael Darda, chief economist at MKM Partners, a research and trading firm in Greenwich, Conn. “We’re going to have a slowdown, but I don’t think we’re going to have a recession.”
While filings for jobless benefits have been rising in recent weeks, the pace has not been swift enough to justify such a sharp jump in the unemployment rate, Mr. Darda added.
For months, the economy had managed to grow vigorously despite worrying developments, from the unraveling of the housing industry to turmoil in the credit markets. Through it all, economists marveled at the resilience of the labor market, suggesting that as long as the economy kept creating jobs by the tens of thousands each month, Americans would keep spending and growth would carry on.
But the jobs report for December suggested that the negatives dogging the economy finally appear to be dragging it down.
“There’s no mystery as to why the unemployment rate went up,” said Robert A. Barbera, chief economist at the research firm ITG. “The mystery is why it took so long.”
December’s addition of 18,000 jobs to nonfarm payrolls was an abrupt drop from the 115,000 created in November — a figure revised on Friday from an initial estimate of 94,000. It put the annual rate of job growth at its lowest since 2004.
Some areas of the economy continued to expand, according to the report. Government jobs grew, and health care added 28,000 jobs. Food services added 27,000.
But that growth was largely reversed by pain elsewhere. Retailing lost 24,000 jobs in December. Financial services lost 7,000. Construction shed another 49,000 jobs. Even commercial construction, which some have suggested could compensate for woes among home builders, lost 17,000 jobs. Over all, private sector jobs slid by 13,000.
Despite a weak dollar, which has helped compensate for disappointment at home by lifting American sales abroad, the nation shed 31,000 manufacturing jobs in December.
For the third consecutive month, wages grew slower than the pace of inflation, cutting into the real income of many workers. Among rank-and-file workers, who make up more than four-fifths of the labor force, average hourly earnings rose 3.7 percent last year, below the 4.3 percent rise in 2006.
Job growth has been slowing steadily for two years. In 2005, the economy generated 212,000 new jobs a month, according to the Labor Department. Last year, the pace dropped to 122,000.
The spike in the unemployment rate, which was 4.7 percent in November, suggested that the deterioration of the job market is now accelerating.
Last year, companies fretted about business prospects amid falling housing prices and tightening credit. Many stopped hiring, but large-scale layoffs were rare. But now, some appear to have concluded that they can no longer tough it out.
“December’s bleak jobs report represents the siren call that this business cycle is just about over,” declared Bernard Baumohl, managing director at the Economic Outlook Group, in a note to clients. “We’re about to tilt over to the other side of the economic curve and begin the downsizing.”
In Penacook, N.H., the tilt came during the Christmas season: Riverside Millwork, a supplier of windows, doors and stair parts, laid off 43 people. That added to a wave of layoffs that has winnowed the staff from 225 to 40 since October 2005, when home building began its decline.
“We’ve cut just about everything that we can possibly cut,” said Larry Byer, the company’s human resource manager. “When you don’t have assets to sell or to keep you going, the bodies have to go.”
In calculating the rate of job growth, the Labor Department relies upon a sampling of payroll data and an extrapolation of how many jobs have been created and destroyed. An accompanying survey of households, used to calculate the unemployment rate, presented an even bleaker picture, showing that the number of Americans saying they were working plunged by 436,000 in December — the worst number in five years.
The trend was pronounced for teenagers, blacks and Hispanics, with unemployment among those groups jumping 0.6 percentage point, triple the increase for whites.
The household survey is notoriously volatile and treated with skepticism. But unlike the payroll data, it is not subject to revision, other than for seasonal factors, making it a better indicator when the economy is on the cusp of change, Mr. Barbera said.
Between December 2005 and December 2006, the household survey showed jobs increasing by 2.2 percent. Over the last year, jobs grew less than 0.2 percent.
“Every time we’ve gotten down to this level since 1956, there’s been a recession,” Mr. Barbera said.
The risk is that the weakening job market will swell from a symptom of malaise to a cause. As fewer jobs are created, spending power could dry up. Faced with declining business, employers could further trim payrolls. As unemployment grows, more homeowners could fall behind on mortgages, leading to more losses at banks, and more layoffs.
“The risk of a vicious cycle setting in now is very high,” Mr. Zandi said. “The job market’s operating at stall speed. Either it picks up soon or it quickly unravels.”
Edmund L. Andrews contributed reporting.
It’s Time for Roger Clemens to Face the Legal Posse
January 5, 2008Sports of The Times The posse appears to be gaining ground on Roger Clemens.
On Friday, the House Committee on Oversight and Government Reform announced that it would hold hearings to clarify information contained in the report by George J. Mitchell on the use of performance-enhancing drugs in baseball. Some of that information has been challenged by Clemens.
On Jan. 15, Commissioner Bud Selig; Donald Fehr, the executive director of the players union; and Mitchell, a former senator, are scheduled to appear before the committee. Brian McNamee, Kirk Radomski, Andy Pettitte, Chuck Knoblauch and Clemens have been asked to appear a day later. Lawyers for Clemens and McNamee, the trainer who told Mitchell’s investigators that he injected Clemens multiple times with steroids and human growth hormone, said their clients intended to appear.
Who will ever forget the last Congressional circus? There was Mark McGwire not wanting to talk about the past; Rafael Palmeiro swearing up and down that he never, ever used steroids; and Sammy Sosa suddenly unable to speak or understand English.
Will Clemens tell the truth, or nibble at the edges? Perhaps he’ll show up and speak in tongues.
That’s what he has been doing for the last few days in response to McNamee’s eyewitness account that Clemens used performance-enhancing drugs.
In a video two weeks ago, Clemens said McNamee did not inject him with steroids and human growth hormone. On Thursday, Clemens fine-tuned his denial. According to a news release about Clemens’s interview with “60 Minutes” that will be broadcast Sunday, he told Mike Wallace that McNamee had injected him with a painkiller and with vitamin B12. Sounds like the Barry Bonds overshift.
Critics rolled their eyes when Bonds said he thought he had received flaxseed oil from his trainer. “Of course he knew,” critics said. “How could he not know?” Bonds was under oath before a grand jury when he made his statements. Clemens is using the same rationale. Are we rolling our eyes now?
These Congressional hearings are fine but, with all due respect to the House of Representatives, I’d like to know the complex legal reasons the superagent Jeff Novitzky is not on a plane to Katy, Tex., to pay a visit to Clemens.
Novitzky is the I.R.S. agent whose dogged pursuit brought down some of the world’s finest athletes. He has been particularly tenacious in pursuing Bonds. He has been described as a methodical investigator and compared to Eliot Ness. He reportedly sifts through garbage in pursuit of an indictment.
He helped bring down Marion Jones and has Bonds facing perjury charges. Jones, who pleaded guilty to lying to federal agents, gave back her five Olympic medals and faces sentencing next week.
Now that Clemens has emerged as the defiant whale of baseball’s steroid scandal, why isn’t Novitzky, or another federal agent, hot on the trail? Why isn’t Novitzky pounding on Clemens’s door, saying, “Let’s talk”?
Once Clemens is engaged by a federal agent, his words would assume a new meaning. He will be obliged to tell the truth or face the type of legal liability that ultimately brought down Jones: lying to a federal agent.
Why are federal agents reluctant to pursue Clemens, who is, after all, challenging a government-produced witness? McNamee signed an agreement with federal prosecutors, promising to tell the truth in exchange for not facing criminal charges.
In an e-mail message, the United States attorney’s office in San Francisco, which prosecuted the Balco case with help from Novitzky’s evidence, had no comment.
“The discretion in enforcing false statements given to government officials is very broad and therein lies the inconsistency,” said José F. Anderson, a professor of law at the University of Baltimore, who specializes in litigation and was a former public defender. “How long will it be before someone decides there is enough to bring Clemens into the criminal justice process?”
The larger question for everyone in baseball should be: How do we end this nightmare?
The integrity of a multibillion-dollar baseball industry has been compromised. The greatest hitter, the greatest pitcher and so many players in between have been implicated in a scandal.
“At the end of the day, you had a whole industry that perjured itself by looking the other way,” Anderson said.
Referring to Bonds, he added: “You’re trying one man as a symbol for all the offenses of the others. You’re picking and choosing among the guilty who will be punished.”
Mitchell himself has suggested that baseball should move on. But for that to happen, everyone involved has to give up something, and I’m not sure that can happen. Prosecutors have to give up some of the glory, baseball has to accept a permanent stain, Selig must climb off his high horse. Barry Bonds and Roger Clemens will be judged by the court of public opinion.
“Everybody’s got to kick in a piece, everybody’s got to ante up,” Anderson said.
I’d still like to see Novitzky board that plane to Katy, Tex.
E-mail: wcr@nytimes.com
Fruitcake Might Be a Better Gift
Joel CastilloJanuary 5, 2008What’s Online Fruitcake Might Be a Better Gift By DAN MITCHELLWITH the holiday season now behind us, the nation is awash in gift cards. The Tower Group, a research firm, estimates that gift card sales totaled $97 billion in 2007, well above sales of $83 billion in 2006.
The retail industry’s “hush-hush secret” is that issuers of gift cards make an enormous amount of money from “breakage” — the “free money that retailers get when gift cards go unused or underused,” said Peter Morris of The Business Shrink blog. The Tower Group estimates that breakage amounted to $7.8 billion last year.
It is not clear how much of this breakage is a result of people losing or forgetting they have the cards, and how much is from people receiving cards for stores where they do not shop. For the latter group, there are several options online for trading in unwanted cards. “But not all are created equal,” warns The Bachelor Guy blog, which looks at three of them.
The sites — CardAvenue.com, PlasticJungle.com and Swapagift.com — each allow buying, selling and trading of gift cards. Fees vary widely, and each offers various additional services, like allowing users to pay bills in exchange for their cards or to trade them for universal gift cards issued by credit card companies (similar to a stored-value card).
Gift cards have largely replaced gift certificates, which had long been a popular option for unimaginative or busy gift givers. But they (and, by extension, gift cards) “make lousy gifts,” according to Scott Young, writing at LifeHack.org. The people who buy them, he writes, are “willing to trade money, for a less useful and more restrictive form of money at a one-to-one ratio.”
He does allow that the cards are popular largely because “sending cash is still a faux pas by many people’s standards.”
Some state governments, meanwhile, have noticed the vast amount of money tied up in breakage, and they want their take. Maine, in particular, is claiming 60 percent of the value of unused gift cards under that state’s laws governing unclaimed property.
The theory is that retailers’ markups average 40 percent, so the remainder amounts to a windfall when the cards are not used. Retailers, predictably, object, and accuse Maine of unfairly using them to shore up its anemic state budget.
EYE ON HOLLYWOOD
Nikki Finke, the salty veteran Hollywood journalist, is “the most trusted news source on the Hollywood writers’ strike,” according to The New York Observer.
After decades working for media outlets like The Associated Press, The Los Angeles Times and The New York Post, Ms. Finke is now the proprietor of the Web site Deadline Hollywood Daily, which is hosted by LA Weekly.
There, according to Doree Shafrir of The Observer, she has “demonstrated that one determined reporter — with none of the support or backing of a media outfit, but also none of the entangling alliances — can, in fact, beat the big guys at their own game.”
ODDITIES MARKET
Probably the most famous item ever sold on eBay was a grilled cheese sandwich supposedly depicting an image of the Virgin Mary. It sold in 2004 for $28,000. It was chosen as No. 1 in a list of the “10 Most Extraordinarily Peculiar eBay Purchases of All Time,” according to Julius Vortemizzi, writing on Webupon.
Also included is a vampire-killing kit, a Doritos chip in the shape of a pope’s hat and a jar that, according to the seller, contained a ghost.
E-mail: whatsonline@nytimes.com.
Warner Backs Blu-ray, Tilting DVD Battle
Yuriko Nakao/ReutersWith Warner Brothers’ backing, Sony’s Blu-ray high-definition format now has about 70 percent of the DVD market locked up.
January 5, 2008Warner Backs Blu-ray, Tilting DVD Battle LOS ANGELES — The high-definition DVD war is all but over.
Hollywood’s squabble over which of two technologies will replace standard DVDs skewed in the direction of the Sony Corporation on Friday, with Warner Brothers casting the deciding vote in favor of the company’s Blu-ray discs over the rival format, HD DVD.
In some ways, the fight is a replay of the VHS versus Betamax battle of the 1980s. This time, however, the Sony product appears to have prevailed.
“The overwhelming industry opinion is that this decides the format battle in favor of Blu-ray,” said Richard Doherty, research director at the Envisioneering Group, a market research firm in Seaford, N.Y.
Behind the studio’s decision are industrywide fears about the sagging home entertainment market, which has bruised the movie industry in recent years as piracy, competition from video games and the Internet, and soaring costs have cut into profitability. Analysts predict that domestic DVD sales fell by nearly 3 percent in 2007, partly because of confusion in the marketplace over the various formats.
HD DVD, however, is not dead. Two major studios, Paramount Pictures and Universal Pictures, have deals in place to continue releasing their movies exclusively on HD DVD, as does DreamWorks Animation. Warner Brothers, part of Time Warner, will also continue to release its titles on both formats until the end of May.
But by supporting Blu-ray, Warner Brothers, the largest player in the $42 billion global home entertainment market, makes it next to impossible for HD DVD to recover the early momentum it achieved.
While the specifics of the Blu-ray and HD DVD skirmish might be of interest only to insiders, the consequences of deciding a winner are not. Consumers have been largely sitting on the sidelines, waiting to buy high-definition players until they see which will have the most titles available. Retailers have been complaining about having to devote space to three kinds of DVDs. And the movie business has delayed tapping a lucrative new market worth billions. High-definition discs sell for a 25 percent premium.
“Consolidating into one format is something that we felt was necessary for the health of the industry,” Barry M. Meyer, the chief executive of Warner Brothers, said in a telephone interview. “The window of opportunity for high-definition DVD could be missed if format confusion continues to linger.”
In addition to Sony, a consortium of other electronics makers back Blu-ray. For Sony, Warner’s decision is a chance to rewrite history: the company faltered in its introduction of Betamax in the consumer market in the 1980s. Many analysts say the HD DVD players now risk becoming the equivalent of Betamax machines, which died out in large part because it became harder for consumers to find Betamax movies as studios shifted allegiance to VHS.
With Warner on board, Blu-ray now has about 70 percent of the market locked up; Walt Disney, 20th Century Fox, MGM, Lionsgate and, of course, Sony are all on Blu-ray’s team. Warner Brothers has some of the bigger releases in 2008, including “Speed Racer,” the Batman sequel “The Dark Knight” and the sixth Harry Potter installment.
“This doesn’t necessarily kill the HD DVD format, but it definitely deals it a severe blow,” said Paul Erickson, an analyst at the NPD Group’s DisplaySearch. “When a consumer asks a store clerk which format to buy, that clerk is now going to have a hard time arguing for HD DVD.”
In a prepared statement, Toshiba said it was “quite surprised” and “particularly disappointed” by Warner’s decision. “We will assess the potential impact of this announcement with the other HD DVD partner companies,” the company said. Universal Pictures declined to comment.
Warner Brothers has been courted for months by both sides. Toshiba dispatched Yoshihide Fujii, the executive in charge of its HD DVD business, to the studio three times in recent months, according to Time Warner executives who were granted anonymity because the negotiations were confidential. Sony has aimed even higher: Howard Stringer, the conglomerate’s chief executive, has leaned on Jeffrey Bewkes, the new chief executive of Time Warner.
Money was an issue. Toshiba offered to pay Warner Brothers substantial incentives to come down on its side — just as it gave Paramount and DreamWorks Animation a combined $150 million in financial incentives for their business, according to two executives with knowledge of the talks who asked not to be identified.
Kevin Tsujihara, president of the Warner Brothers Home Entertainment Group, declined to comment on whether any payments were offered for support of Blu-ray. “This market is absolutely critical to our future growth,” he said in a telephone interview. “You couldn’t put a number on that.”
For his part, Mr. Meyer said, “We’re not in this for a short-term financial hit.”
Which high-definition technology is better has been the subject of intense debate in Hollywood and electronics circles for years. HD DVD players have been much cheaper than Blu-ray machines, but Blu-ray discs have more storage space and more advanced protections against piracy. Both versions deliver sharp resolution.
Consumers were inundated with marketing from both sides during the recent holiday season. Wal-Mart, as part of a temporary promotion, offered Toshiba players for under $100. Sony and its retailing partners, including Best Buy, responded by dropping prices on Blu-ray players, although not to the same level. Blu-ray players can now be purchased for under $300.
Still, Blu-ray was emerging as a front-runner as early as August. Blu-ray titles have sharply outsold HD DVD offerings — by as much 2 to 1, according to some analysts — and some retailers like Target started stocking only Blu-ray players. Blockbuster said last summer that it would carry Blu-ray exclusively.
“We’ve been monitoring the situation with consumers for a while now and they have clearly made their choice,” Mr. Meyer said. “We followed.”
Put Buyers First? What a Concept
This article leaves out one very interesting question. Does anyone think that perhaps the customer service representative dealing with Mr. Nocera had any clue that he might have been a very influential cloumnist with The New York Times?.
I do not wish to appear cynical in any way, however, I believe that Amazon most likely has some information collected on its members, and occupation just might be one of the profile entries in the Amazon registration form. It is a pretty standard question.
If anyone could suggest what exactly is the company policy at Amazon in circumstances such as these I would appreciate a comment to clarify this article.
Happy New Year,
Michael
Jens-Ulrich Koch/Agence France-Presse—Getty Images
Shelves of books at an Amazon warehouse in Bad Hersfeld, Germany. The company often ships items free.
January 5, 2008Talking Business Put Buyers First? What a Concept By JOE NOCERAMy Christmas story — the one I’ve been telling and retelling these last 10 days — began on Friday, Dec. 21.
It was early in the morning, and I had awoken with the sudden, sinking realization that a present I had bought for one of my sons hadn’t yet arrived. It wasn’t just any present either; it was a PlayStation 3, a $500 item, and a gift, I happened to know from my sources, that he was hoping for.
Like most things I buy online, the PlayStation had come from Amazon.com. So I went to the site and tracked the package — something, thankfully, that is a snap to do on Amazon. What I saw made my heart sink: the package had not only been shipped, it had been delivered to my apartment building days earlier and signed for by one of my neighbors. I knocked on my neighbor’s door, and asked if she still had the PlayStation. No, she said; after signing for it, she had put it downstairs in the hallway.
Now I was nearly distraught. In all likelihood, the reason I hadn’t seen the package earlier in the week is because it had been stolen, probably by someone delivering something else to the building. Even if that wasn’t the case, the one thing I knew for sure was that it was gone — for which I could hardly blame Amazon.
Nonetheless, I got on the phone with an Amazon customer service representative, and explained what had happened: the PlayStation had been shipped, delivered and signed for. It just didn’t wind up in my hands. Would Amazon send me a replacement? In my heart of hearts, I knew I didn’t have a leg to stand on. I was pleading for mercy.
I shudder to think how this entreaty would have gone over at, say, Apple, where customer service is an oxymoron. But the Amazon customer service guy didn’t blink. After assuring himself that I had never actually touched or seen the PlayStation, he had a replacement on the way before the day was out. It arrived on Christmas Eve. Amazon didn’t even charge me for the shipping. My son was very happy. So, of course, was I.
It has been years since I looked in on Amazon. Once upon a time, of course, it was a highflying Internet stock, one of the handful of Internet companies — along with Yahoo, eBay and AOL —whose stock only seemed to go in one direction: up. Henry Blodget made his bones, in no small part, by being a screaming Amazon bull.
Then came the bust, and Wall Street began to see Amazon in a decidedly different light. It was just another retailer, the bears said, that happened to sell goods online — and had immense, unanticipated infrastructure and technology costs. Its founder and chief executive, Jeffrey P. Bezos, spent huge sums of money on such “frills” as free shipping, which depressed its operating margins. Indeed, those margins — which got as low as 3 percent — were more akin to Wal-Mart‘s than that of a big-time tech company. At one point, in mid-2000, a bond analyst named Ravi Suria made his bones by predicting that the company could run out of cash. The stock dropped into single digits.
So when I looked up Amazon’s stock price after my little Christmas miracle, I was amazed to see that it had risen around 140 percent last year. (It closed yesterday at $88.79.) The company grew somewhere around 35 percent in 2007 (the final numbers aren’t in yet), with revenue likely to come in around $15 billion, and well over $1 billion in free cash flow. Its margins had risen to around 6 percent, and it consistently made money.
When I spoke to analysts and investors, they had all kinds of reasons for Amazon’s performance last year. “They finally reached a point where their R&D spending was not expanding as fast as their revenues,” said Citigroup‘s Mark S. Mahaney. He and others also talked about Amazon’s success in international markets, its fast-growing (and high margin) merchant market, which allows merchants to sell goods alongside Amazon, and its rapidly expanding Web services business. Mostly, though, the investing community pointed to those healthier margins as the main reason for the stock’s run-up. Legg Mason‘s legendary fund manager, Bill Miller, who has made a small fortune for his investors by betting big on Amazon, told me that “Wall Street is almost fanatically focused on margin expansion and contraction.”
But I couldn’t help wondering if maybe there wasn’t something else at play here, something Wall Street never seems to take very seriously. Maybe, just maybe, taking care of customers is something worth doing when you are trying to create a lasting company. Maybe, in fact, it’s the best way to build a real business — even if it comes at the expense of short-term results.
It is almost impossible to read or see an interview with Mr. Bezos in which he doesn’t, at some point, begin to wax on about what he likes to call “the customer experience.” Just a few months ago, for instance, he appeared on Charlie Rose‘s talk show to tout Amazon’s new e-book device, the Kindle. Toward the end of the program, Mr. Rose asked the chief executive an open-ended question about how he spent his time, and Mr. Bezos responded with a soliloquy about his “obsession” with customers.
“They care about having the lowest prices, having vast selection, so they have choice, and getting the products to customers fast,” he said. “And the reason I’m so obsessed with these drivers of the customer experience is that I believe that the success we have had over the past 12 years has been driven exclusively by that customer experience. We are not great advertisers. So we start with customers, figure out what they want, and figure out how to get it to them.”
Anybody who has spent any time around Mr. Bezos knows that this is not just some line he throws out for public consumption. It has been the guiding principle behind Amazon since it began. “Jeff has been focused on the customer since Day 1,” said Suresh Kotha, a management professor at the University of Washington business school who has written several case studies about Amazon. Mr. Miller noted that Amazon has really had only one stated goal since it began: to be the most customer-centric company in the world.
In this, it has largely succeeded. Millions of people instinctively go to Amazon when they want to buy something online because they have come to trust the company in a way they trust few other online entities. Amazon’s technology, its interface, its one-click buying service — they are all incredibly easy to use. Its algorithms offer “suggestions” for further buying that actually appeal to its customers. Its Amazon Prime program — for a $79 annual fee you get two-day free shipping — is enormously popular. Unlike what happens at certain other technology companies, when you have a problem, the customer service telephone number isn’t hard to find. It is even willing to correct mistakes that it didn’t make, as I discovered over Christmas.
All of this, however, comes at a price. Indeed, as I’ve written before, customer service isn’t cheap. Certainly, a fair amount of the hundreds of millions of dollars Amazon has spent on R&D has gone toward developing, say, the Kindle, but a good deal of it has also gone toward improving the customer experience. Amazon is willing to lose money on some of its most popular items, like the latest Harry Potter novel. And even with Amazon Prime, it must surely swallow millions of dollars in shipping costs. Indeed, in a presentation to analysts in late November, the company’s chief financial officer, Thomas J. Szkutak, showed one slide that read, “Over $600 Million in Forgone Shipping Revenue.” And that was just for one year.
Wall Street, however, has never placed much value in Mr. Bezos’ emphasis on customers. What he has viewed as money well spent — building customer loyalty — many investors saw as giving away money that should have gone to the bottom line. “What makes their core business so compelling is that they are focused on everything the customer wants,” said Scott W. Devitt, who follows Amazon for Stifel Nicolaus & Company. “When you act in that manner many times Wall Street doesn’t appreciate it.” What Wall Street wanted from Amazon is what it always wants: short-term results. That is precisely what Dell tried to give investors when it scrimped on customer service and what eBay did when it heaped new costs on its most dedicated sellers. Eventually, these short-sighted decisions caught up with both companies.
But Mr. Bezos refused to give in. “He was spending his time on long-term value creation,” Mr. Miller said. There aren’t many chief executives who can so easily ignore the entreaties of the investment community, but Mr. Bezos turned out to be one of them. Of course it helps that he owns over 100 million shares of the stock — and is the company’s single largest shareholder.
And it also helps that his dogged pursuit of a better customer experience has turned out to be exactly right. Yes, it’s true that its international business has been growing rapidly, but that’s not the only reason Amazon is back in high-growth mode. Amazon says it has somewhere on the order of 72 million active customers, who, in the last quarter, were spending an average of $184 a year on the site. That’s up from $150 or so the year before. Amazon’s return customer business is off the charts. According to Forrester Research, 52 percent of people who shop online say they do their product research on Amazon. That is an astounding number.
There is simply no question that Mr. Bezos’s obsession with his customers — and the long term — has paid off, even if he had to take some hits to the stock price along the way. Surely, it was worth it. As for me, the $500 favor the company did for me this Christmas will surely rebound in additional business down the line. Why would I ever shop anywhere else online? Then again, there may be another reason good customer service makes sense. “Jeff used to say that if you did something good for one customer, they would tell 100 customers,” Mr. Kotha said.
I guess that’s what I just did.
Britney Spears in Hospital After Standoff
KCBS-TV, via Associated PressBritney Spears being carried to an ambulance outside her house in Los Angeles late Thursday.
January 5, 2008Britney Spears in Hospital After Standoff By THE NEW YORK TIMESLOS ANGELES — Britney Spears was strapped to a gurney late Thursday night after a three-hour standoff involving her two toddler sons, Kevin Federline, a court-appointed child monitor, police officers, paramedics and a locked bathroom door. She was rolled out of her home in the hills near Mulholland Drive as photographers swarmed and helicopters hovered, and taken to Cedars-Sinai Medical Center “for her own welfare,” as one police spokeswoman put it.
In plain terms, Ms. Spears was in lockdown on a 72-hour involuntary psychiatric hold for treatment and evaluation, the authorities said later, speaking on condition of anonymity because of federal privacy laws. And by Friday afternoon she’d been stripped of the right even to visit with her sons.
Thursday’s ordeal came at the end of a day that began with Ms. Spears showing up for barely a quarter-hour of a scheduled two-hour deposition in her custody fight with Mr. Federline, her ex-husband. He had been given temporary full custody of their sons, Sean Preston, 2, and Jayden, 1, and was seeking to make it permanent.
Ms. Spears, 26, whose personal life has doubtless made more money for the celebrity tabloids, news shows and Web sites than she ever made as a singer, spent time with the boys later in the day and was scheduled to return them to Mr. Federline’s bodyguard at 7 p.m. at her home in the Summit, a gated enclave of multimillion-dollar homes just off Mulholland where it meets Coldwater Canyon Drive.
But after the court-appointed monitor had already put the older boy in the car, Ms. Spears barricaded herself in a bathroom with Jayden and refused to come out, according to a member of Mr. Federline’s camp.
The police arrived at 8, and, The Los Angeles Times reported, a police supervisor said Ms. Spears had been “incoherent and arguing with officers in a way that made no sense.”
Paramedics arrived about 10:30, and Ms. Spears was taken from her home before 11 as photographers mobbed the scene, peering through the ambulance windows to snap shots that circulated on the Internet showing Ms. Spears smiling as if posing one instant, appearing distraught and disheveled the next.
Her son Sean Preston was turned over to Mr. Federline at her home, but Jayden was returned to his father at the hospital after the boy had been taken there in a second ambulance. It was unclear if he was treated or for what. Outside the hospital, meanwhile, fame-seekers and flamboyant fans gathered like fireflies, expressing hope that her downward spiral be brought to a halt before she winds up like Anna Nicole Smith.
By Friday afternoon, Mr. Federline’s lawyer, Mark Vincent Kaplan, had persuaded Commissioner Scott Gordon of Los Angeles Superior Court, who is overseeing the custody fight, to award Mr. Federline sole legal and physical custody of their children and to suspend Ms. Spears’s visitation rights, a court spokeswoman said. A hearing is set for Jan. 14. Ms. Spears’s lawyer, Sorrell Trope, said he ultimately expected her to regain shared custody of the boys.
Noontime Web Video Revitalizes Lunch at Desk
Ruby Washington/The New York TimesWill Coghlan, left, and Rob Millis produce a three-minute daily Webcast, Political Lunch, and upload it just before noon.
January 5, 2008Noontime Web Video Revitalizes Lunch at Desk In cubicles across the country, lunchtime has become the new prime time, as workers click aside their spreadsheets to watch videos on YouTube, news highlights on CNN.com or other Web offerings.
The trend — part of a broader phenomenon known as video snacking — is turning into a growth business for news and media companies, which are feeding the lunch crowd more fresh content.
In some offices, workers coordinate their midday Web-watching schedules, the better to shout out punch lines to one another across rows of desks. Some people gravitate to sites where they can reliably find Webcasts of a certain length — say, a three-minute political wrap-up — to minimize both their mouse clicks and the sandwich crumbs that wind up in the keyboard.
“Go take a walk around your office” at lunchtime, said Alan Wurtzel, head of research for NBC. “Out of 20 people, I’m going to guarantee that 5 are going to be on some sort of site that is not work-related.”
The midday spike in Web traffic is not a new phenomenon, but media companies have started responding in a meaningful way over the last year. They are creating new shows, timing the posts to coincide with hunger pangs. And they are rejiggering the way they sell advertising online, recognizing that noontime programs can command a premium.
In 2007, a growing number of local television stations, including WNCN in Raleigh, N.C., and WCMH in Columbus, Ohio, began producing noon programming exclusively for the Web. Among newspapers, The Virginian-Pilot of Norfolk, Va., and The Ventura County Star in California started posting videos at lunchtime that have young journalists as hosts and are meant to appeal to 18- to 34-year-old audiences.
The trend has swept across large as well as small independent sites. Yahoo‘s daily best-of-the-Web segment, called The 9 and sponsored by Pepsi, is produced every morning in time for lunch. At MyDamnChannel.com, a showcase for offbeat videos, programmers have been instructed to promote new videos around noon, right when the two-hour traffic spike starts.
“Based on the traffic I’m seeing,” said Miguel Monteverde, executive director of AOL Video, “our nation’s productivity is in question.”
From an apartment in Greenwich Village, Rob Millis and Will Coghlan are hosts and producers of a three-minute daily Webcast, Political Lunch, done around 10 a.m., followed by an hour and a half of editing, in time for uploading just before noon. Political Lunch, which was introduced in September and appears on several Web sites, is viewed 10,000 to 20,000 times a week, with a peak in traffic from 1 to 3 p.m.
“It’s an Internet version of appointment viewing,” Mr. Millis said.
One man who takes his midday video schedule seriously is Jason Spitz, a merchandise manager for a major record label in Los Angeles. He trades links to videos with his friends all day — usually low-budget sketch comedy bits from FunnyOrDie.com or CollegeHumor.com — and stockpiles them to watch during lunch breaks. He and his colleagues like to look at the same videos at the same time from their separate desks, turning the routine into a communal activity.
“The clips are shorter than a full 30-minute TV show, so we can cram several small bites of entertainment into one lunch break,” Mr. Spitz said. “The funniest moments usually become inside jokes among my co-workers.”
Noah Lehmann-Haupt, the founder of an upscale car rental company in New York, said that video snacking on short clips is “a good excuse to stay at my desk during lunch, which I prefer since it keeps the momentum of the day going.” He often watches segments from “The Daily Show,” now that Comedy Central has put eight years’ worth of episodes online for free viewing.
Plus, the format leaves both hands free to consume the day’s takeout meal. “I can’t exactly surf while eating, and it’s healthy to step away from e-mails and work for a few minutes a day,” he said.
Some content plays better over lunch. CNN.com, which draws an average of 69 million video plays each month, tends to promote lighter videos in the middle of the day. (“Cloned cats glow in the dark” and “Bulldog straps on skateboard” were among the most popular on a recent weekday.)
At NBC.com and other network Web sites, shorter videos draw more lunchtime traffic than longer ones, which are more often downloaded at night. For that reason, sites like NBC.com emphasize short-form highlights during the day and entire half-hour or hourlong shows in the evening.
From an advertiser’s perspective, the Web is a more flexible medium than television, because technology makes it easy to monitor people’s behavior and adjust programming accordingly. Better still, marketers have found that consumers are up to 30 percent more likely to make a purchase after viewing an advertisement at lunchtime than at other times of the day.
“Not only is advertising volume and Internet use increasing during the 10 a.m. to 1 p.m. time period, but people are actually buying and purchasing and reacting to advertising,” said Young-Bean Song, vice president for analytics at Atlas Solutions, a unit of Microsoft that helps companies with digital marketing campaigns.
Sticking to a set schedule turns out to be almost as important on the Web as it is on television. At blip.TV, a video-sharing site, Mike Hudack, the chief executive, encourages his producers to post videos at the same time each day or week.
“Continuity and consistency is incredibly important,” Mr. Hudack said.
“If you want to attract a loyal audience, you have to give them what they expect when they expect it.”
A Tale of Trigger A Christmas Story
Fred R. Conrad/The New York TimesMaureen Dowd
December 26, 2007Op-Ed Columnist A Tale of Trigger By MAUREEN DOWDWhen consumerism curdles, it’s tempting to become an emotional Marxist about Christmas.
Not Karl. Groucho.
“Now the melancholy days have come,” Groucho Marx wrote to pal and fellow comic Fred Allen on Dec. 23, 1953. “The department stores call it Christmas. Other than for children and elderly shut-ins, the thing has developed to such ridiculous proportions — well, I won’t go into it. This is not an original nor novel observation, and I am sure everyone in my position has similar emotions. Some of the recipients are so ungrateful.
“For example, yesterday I gave the man who cleans my swimming pool $5. This morning I found two dead fish floating in the drink. Last year I gave the mailman $5. I heard later he took the five bucks, bought two quarts of rotgut and went on a three-week bender. I didn’t get any mail from Dec. 24th to Jan. 15th. … For Christmas, I bought the cook a cookbook. She promptly fried it, and we had it for dinner last night. It was the first decent meal we had in three weeks. From now on I am going to buy all my food at the bookstore.”
I found Groucho’s grouchy letter in Caroline Kennedy’s “A Family Christmas,” a selection of songs, poetry, prose, letters and a list of the questions most frequently asked of Macy’s Santa.
(“Q: Are you lactose intolerant?
A: No, Santa likes all kinds of milk, except buttermilk, although he will use buttermilk in cakes and pancakes.”)
The book includes the solemn and sardonic, including this verse from Calvin Trillin, yearning to escape the shopping zoo and endless loop of Der Bingle crooning and “Jingle Bells” jingling:
“I’d like to spend next Christmas in Qatar. Or someplace else that Santa won’t find handy. Qatar will do, although, Lord knows, it’s sandy.”
As a little girl, Caroline had the advantage of being able to ask the bloodhounds on the White House switchboard to get Santa on the line.
“The fact that he had the same soft Southern accent common to many White House workers of the day escaped me completely,” she writes dryly.
She includes a letter her father, as president, sent to Michelle Rochon, a little girl in Michigan.
“I was glad to get your letter about trying to stop the Russians from bombing the North Pole and risking the life of Santa Claus,” J.F.K. wrote, noting that he shared her concern with Soviet atmospheric testing. “You must not worry about Santa Claus. I talked with him yesterday, and he is fine.”
Ms. Kennedy writes that she continues the literary tradition of her mother. Jackie wrote Christmas poems for her mother, and Caroline and John wrote poems for Jackie.
As I read her book, it struck me that everyone must have a holiday tale they could write up and paste into the back of “A Family Christmas.”
Mine would be about Trigger.
When I was little, I got one of those wooden horses that bounced on springs for Christmas. I loved him and rode him every day.
One morning, I came down to the porch and the horse was gone. My mom explained that a poor woman and her son had walked by, and the little boy had stopped and stared longingly at the horse.
My mom’s world was turned upside down when she lost the father she adored at 12, so she had a soft spot for children who hurt. On a police widow’s pension, she was always mailing a few dollars off to St. Jude’s or to children she had read about who were hungry or needed an operation.
When she told me that she had given my horse to another child — a stranger — I was crushed. Whenever we fought for the next 16 years, I reminded her of her perfidy.
On my 21st birthday, I came home to find a bouncing horse with a handwritten sign in its mouth. “Hi. I’m back!” It was signed: “Trigger.”
I brought the horse of a different era to live with me, as a rebuke about how long it took me to appreciate one of my mom’s favorite sayings: “Don’t cry over things that can’t cry over you.”
Her lesson was lovely: that materialism and narcissism can only smother life — and Christmas — if you let them.
In a piece reprinted in the Kennedy anthology, Henry van Dyke writes: “Are you willing … to own, that probably the only good reason for your existence is not what you are going to get out of life, but what you are going to give to life; to close your book of complaints against the management of the universe and look around you for a place where you can sow a few seeds of happiness … to make a grave for your ugly thoughts and a garden for your kindly feelings …? Then you can keep Christmas.”
Voting for a Smile
Fred R. Conrad/The New York TimesMaureen Dowd
January 6, 2008Op-Ed Columnist Voting for a Smile By MAUREEN DOWDCONCORD, N.H.
The Hillary forces at the Plymouth Church caucus in Des Moines weren’t averse to bribes.
They were passing out See’s chocolates to Richardson supporters.
And they weren’t averse to threats. “My wife told me I’d have to join them or I’d be sleeping on the couch tonight,” said Ed Truslow, a compact 68-year-old manufacturing representative. He was still wearing his Chris Dodd sticker when he lumbered over to his wife’s side. A Clinton organizer slapped a Hillary sticker over the offending Dodd sticker, and with a frantic cheeriness told him: “Hillary now, right? God bless!”
They weren’t averse to bending the rules. When they realized that they might not have enough people to get even one Hillary delegate, they sneaked out of their assigned room to Red-Rover their neighbors over, before they’d been officially counted themselves.
It was understandable that Hillary’s “Golden Girls” acolytes would freak out when they saw the throngs of young Obama hopemongers swarming the caucuses. As one Dodd supporter said, looking for her little Dodd corner, “I’m lost in the Obamas.”
A caucusgoer drily noted that it did not seem the most propitious harbinger for Hillary that the fateful evening began with a threat to withhold connubial bliss.
But that’s the way the tough cookie crumbled Thursday night. The Obama revolution arrived not on little cat feet in the Iowa snow but like a balmy promise, an effortlessly leaping lion hungry for something different, propelled by a visceral desire among Americans to feel American again.
The Bushes always self-consciously and swaggeringly put themselves “on the American side,” as Poppy used to say, implying that their rivals were somehow less American. But many Americans can no longer see themselves in the warped values of the Bush White House or the pathetic paralysis of Congress or the disapproving gaze of the world.
They want a different looking glass. So they rolled the dice and, as The Chicago Tribune’s Mike Tackett put it, “voted for a smile.”
I interviewed three Republicans in the Obama section of the caucus who were ready for the red state, blue state merger. They said they didn’t want Hill and Bill back in the White House, and that John McCain was too much of a yes man for W., who had betrayed Republicans with his handling of the Iraq war and his fiscal irresponsibility.
Hillary’s aides were grumbling last week that Obama had no rationale to offer but himself.
Perhaps that was true when he started. People usually run for president because somebody tells them they should and then graft on the reasons afterward. But on Thursday, Obama’s vague optimism and smooth-jazz modernity came together in a spectacular fusion with the deep yearning of Democrats who have suffered through heartbreaking losses in the last two elections with uninspiring candidates.
Often unable to surf the electricity he sparked over the last year, Obama has now put on his laurel wreath and dropped his languid pose, tapping directly into what he calls the “fire burning” across the country — the dream of a cool, smart, elegant, reasonable, literary, witty, decent “West Wing” sort of president who won’t bankrupt us or endanger us or co-opt our rights or put a black hood on the Constitution.
“I want to go before the world and say, America’s back,” he told cheering Democrats in Milford, N.H., adding: “We are one nation. We are one people. And our time for change has come.”
Even though Obama was wooing the young demographic so coveted by Hollywood, he took a page from J.F.K. and avoided the casual look last week. There were no jeans or snow boots. Just dark suits, stylish ties and dress shoes.
By the time she got to New Hampshire, Hillary was reduced to urging voters not to buy into “false hopes.”
At a hangar in Nashua, with chatty Bill and chatless Chelsea, Hillary tried to purloin more of the Obama message. Besides saying the word “change” as often as possible, she said she was particularly reaching out to young people to help them “reclaim the future.” She claimed that she disliked the red state, blue state terminology — “We are one country,” she said, echoing Obama — even as she added that she should be the nominee because she’s the best one “to withstand the Republican attack machine.”
What she doesn’t mention is that she knows how to fight off the Republican attack machine because she and her husband were so adept at revving it up.
Listening to Hillary and Obama evokes the famous scene in the classic “The Night of the Hunter,” when Robert Mitchum, whose fingers are tattooed with “LOVE” on his right hand and “HATE” on his left, has a wrestling match with his hands to see which emotion triumphs.
In the movie, love does, but it’s a close call.
Women Are Never Front-Runners
January 8, 2008Op-Ed ContributorBy GLORIA STEINEM
Correction appended.
THE woman in question became a lawyer after some years as a community organizer, married a corporate lawyer and is the mother of two little girls, ages 9 and 6. Herself the daughter of a white American mother and a black African father — in this race-conscious country, she is considered black — she served as a state legislator for eight years, and became an inspirational voice for national unity.
Be honest: Do you think this is the biography of someone who could be elected to the United States Senate? After less than one term there, do you believe she could be a viable candidate to head the most powerful nation on earth?
If you answered no to either question, you’re not alone. Gender is probably the most restricting force in American life, whether the question is who must be in the kitchen or who could be in the White House. This country is way down the list of countries electing women and, according to one study, it polarizes gender roles more than the average democracy.
That’s why the Iowa primary was following our historical pattern of making change. Black men were given the vote a half-century before women of any race were allowed to mark a ballot, and generally have ascended to positions of power, from the military to the boardroom, before any women (with the possible exception of obedient family members in the latter).
If the lawyer described above had been just as charismatic but named, say, Achola Obama instead of Barack Obama, her goose would have been cooked long ago. Indeed, neither she nor Hillary Clinton could have used Mr. Obama’s public style — or Bill Clinton’s either — without being considered too emotional by Washington pundits.
So why is the sex barrier not taken as seriously as the racial one? The reasons are as pervasive as the air we breathe: because sexism is still confused with nature as racism once was; because anything that affects males is seen as more serious than anything that affects “only” the female half of the human race; because children are still raised mostly by women (to put it mildly) so men especially tend to feel they are regressing to childhood when dealing with a powerful woman; because racism stereotyped black men as more “masculine” for so long that some white men find their presence to be masculinity-affirming (as long as there aren’t too many of them); and because there is still no “right” way to be a woman in public power without being considered a you-know-what.
I’m not advocating a competition for who has it toughest. The caste systems of sex and race are interdependent and can only be uprooted together. That’s why Senators Clinton and Obama have to be careful not to let a healthy debate turn into the kind of hostility that the news media love. Both will need a coalition of outsiders to win a general election. The abolition and suffrage movements progressed when united and were damaged by division; we should remember that.
I’m supporting Senator Clinton because like Senator Obama she has community organizing experience, but she also has more years in the Senate, an unprecedented eight years of on-the-job training in the White House, no masculinity to prove, the potential to tap a huge reservoir of this country’s talent by her example, and now even the courage to break the no-tears rule. I’m not opposing Mr. Obama; if he’s the nominee, I’ll volunteer. Indeed, if you look at votes during their two-year overlap in the Senate, they were the same more than 90 percent of the time. Besides, to clean up the mess left by President Bush, we may need two terms of President Clinton and two of President Obama.
But what worries me is that he is seen as unifying by his race while she is seen as divisive by her sex.
What worries me is that she is accused of “playing the gender card” when citing the old boys’ club, while he is seen as unifying by citing civil rights confrontations.
What worries me is that male Iowa voters were seen as gender-free when supporting their own, while female voters were seen as biased if they did and disloyal if they didn’t.
What worries me is that reporters ignore Mr. Obama’s dependence on the old — for instance, the frequent campaign comparisons to John F. Kennedy — while not challenging the slander that her progressive policies are part of the Washington status quo.
What worries me is that some women, perhaps especially younger ones, hope to deny or escape the sexual caste system; thus Iowa women over 50 and 60, who disproportionately supported Senator Clinton, proved once again that women are the one group that grows more radical with age.
This country can no longer afford to choose our leaders from a talent pool limited by sex, race, money, powerful fathers and paper degrees. It’s time to take equal pride in breaking all the barriers. We have to be able to say: “I’m supporting her because she’ll be a great president and because she’s a woman.”
Correction: An earlier version of this Op-Ed stated that Senator Edward Kennedy had endorsed Senator Hillary Rodham Clinton. He has not made an endorsement in the 2008 presidential race.
Gloria Steinem is a co-founder of the Women’s Media Center.
-
Will N.H. Be Obama Territory, Too?
Obama finds a friendly audience in Dover, N.H. (AP).
By Dan Balz
NASHUA, N.H. — There was a sense of urgency in Hillary Clinton’s voice when she opened her first post-Iowa rally in an airplane hangar early Friday morning — and a look of concern on the face of the man who introduced her, former President Bill Clinton.New Hampshire and its presidential primary are familiar territory to the Clintons — not at all like the inhospitable landscape of the flatlands of Iowa and what the Clintons regard as that state’s quirky caucus process. They see it as the right place at the right time. They may be in for a surprise.
After finishing third in Iowa behind Barack Obama and — marginally — John Edwards, Clinton and her husband launched what they hope is a comeback with an open plea to voters in the Granite State.
The former president leveled a not-so-subtle dig at Iowa as he introduced his wife. “Ladies and gentlemen,” Bill Clinton said, “New Hampshire is going to be given the chance to prove that you are the first [pause for emphasis] primary. You’re going to be given a chance to show your well known and deeply deserved independent judgment.”
What the Clintons fear is a rush to judgment, an Iowa-driven rush to back Obama’s candidacy after his decisive victory in Iowa. They want to slow the momentum, force New Hampshire voters to think twice before jumping aboard the Obama bandwagon and prod Democrats and independents here to do what they have done many times in the past by defying conventional wisdom.New Hampshire saved Bill Clinton’s candidacy in 1992 by awarding him a second place after his support had plummeted over Gennifer Flowers and the draft. Hillary Clinton will need more than a second-place finish to put her hopes for the nomination back on track. Back-to-back losses will leave her crippled.
But compare the states of Iowa and New Hampshire and the landscape looks far less favorable for Clinton. The reality is, this is the state that always set up best for Obama, even when he was struggling here. The demographics and political culture lean more in the direction of Obama than toward Clinton. His goal now is to realize the potential that the electorate in New Hampshire offers.
Look first at Iowa and where Obama did best. According to the National Election Poll entranced poll, Obama enjoyed a margin of better than 2-1 over Clinton among independents. He won overwhelmingly among young voters between the ages of 17 and 29 and among voters between the ages of 30 and 44. He was the clear choice of liberals. He beat Clinton decisively among voters with incomes above $75,000.
The entrance poll questionnaire did not ask respondents to say how much education they had, so that critical measurement of the electorate is missing. But the Iowa Poll published two days before the caucuses in the Des Moines Register, which nearly nailed his victory margin exactly, showed Obama the clear choice of those with college degrees.
In virtually every demographic category where Obama found his greatest strength in Iowa, New Hampshire’s electorate has at least as many or more of those voters, based on a comparison of the entrance polls from Thursday’s caucuses in Iowa and from the 2004 Democratic primary in Hampshire.
Take independents. They constituted 20 percent of the caucus electorate in Iowa on Thursday, but four years ago in New Hampshire they constituted nearly half (48 percent) of the Democratic electorate.
Some seasonal adjustment may be necessary because there was no competitive Republican primary in 2004 to siphon off some of those independent voters. But even in 2000, when John McCain was swept to victory on the strength of big support from independents, the electorate in the Democratic primary between Al Gore and Bill Bradley was 40 percent independents.
Older voters were Clinton’s friends in Iowa, not Obama’s, and in the caucuses they accounted for 22 percent of the participants. In New Hampshire four years ago, voters over age 65 represented just 11 percent of thee Democratic electorate.
Younger voters accounted for a larger share of the Iowa electorate on Thursday night than they did in New Hampshire in 2004 — but that may be attributable to the Obama campaign’s efforts to encourage college students and even 17-year-olds to participate in the caucuses. That pushed their share of the electorate up over 2004 in Iowa and the same could happen here.
Even without data from the Iowa entrance poll, it is a well-documented fact that New Hampshire’s electorate is one of the best-educated of any of the states with early primaries or caucuses. That should help Obama, although in the most recent CNN/WMUR-TV poll by the University of New Hampshire, Obama and Clinton are running pretty evenly among those with college degrees or more.
Clinton’s team has long believed they could offset many of those demographic disadvantages with strong support among women in New Hampshire. Women accounted for 54 percent of the electorate here in 2004 and 62 percent in 2000 and in the most recent CNN/WMUR poll, Clinton held an 11-point lead among them.
Look too at past history. It’s true that New Hampshire has often favored insurgents or underdogs over front-runners, but that has been the case most often when front-runners were establishment Democrats. Walter Mondale was the establishment front-runner who swept Iowa but lost to insurgent Gary Hart. Al Gore, the establishment front-runner in 2000, trounced Bill Bradley in Iowa but struggled to win New Hampshire.
Clinton will smartly cast herself as the underdog in the final days in New Hampshire and no one knows better than her husband how to put on a stretch drive in this state. But not everything sets up for the senator for New York here, which is why she faces such an enormous struggle over the next four days.
washingtonpost.com: -
‘Miraculous’ Recovery for Man Who Fell 47 Floors
Ruth Fremson/The New York TimesRosario Moreno, center, the wife of Alcides Moreno, on Thursday with the medical team that has helped her husband.
Alcides Moreno
January 4, 2008‘Miraculous’ Recovery for Man Who Fell 47 Floors By JAMES BARRONAlcides Moreno plunged 47 stories that morning last month, clinging to his 3-foot-wide window washer’s platform as it shot down the dark glass face of an Upper East Side apartment building. His brother Edgar, who had been working with him on the platform, was killed.
Somehow, Alcides Moreno survived.
He was given roughly 24 pints of blood and 19 pints of plasma and underwent an operation to open his abdomen in the emergency room because, his doctor said, they did not want to risk moving him to an operating room. As December went on, he endured nine orthopedic operations.
Yet somehow, Alcides Moreno, the man who fell from the sky, survived.
In his hospital room, amid all the machines that helped keep him alive, his wife, Rosario, lifted his hand again and again to stroke her face and her hair, hoping against hope that a simple tactile sensation would remind him, would help bring him back.
Then on Christmas Day, Alcides Moreno reached out — and stroked the wrong face.
“Apparently he tried to do it to one of the nurses,” Rosario Moreno said on Thursday, describing how she chided him, gently, when she was told what had happened. “I looked at him and said, ‘You’re not supposed to do that. I’m your wife, you touch your wife.’”
For the first time since the accident on Dec. 7, he spoke.
“He turned around and, in English, said, ‘What did I do?’” she said. “It stunned me because I didn’t know he could speak.”
Surrounded by doctors who had helped save her husband, Mrs. Moreno told her story at a press conference at which medical professionals with long years of experience in treating traumatic injuries used words like “miraculous” and “unprecedented” to describe something that seems remarkable: a man who fell nearly 500 feet into a Manhattan alleyway is now talking and, with a little more luck, a few more operations and some rehabilitation therapy, may well walk again.
“If you are a believer in miracles, this would be one,” said Dr. Philip S. Barie, the chief of the division of critical care at New York-Presbyterian Hospital/Weill Cornell Medical Center in Manhattan, where Mr. Moreno, 37, is being treated.
“We are very pleased — dare I say astonished? — at the level of recovery that this patient has enjoyed so far,” he added, “and although there is more work to be done, we are very optimistic for his prospects for survival.”
Optimistic though they were, the doctors tempered their discussion of Mr. Moreno’s prospects with some pragmatism. He will undergo surgery today to stabilize his spine. Sometime after that, he faces another orthopedic operation. Then there will be long months in rehabilitation.
But they predicted that his recovery would be complete in about a year.
Asked at the press conference whether Mr. Moreno would walk again, Dr. Barie said, “We believe so, yes.” He noted that Mr. Moreno’s pelvis had not been injured in the fall. Dr. Barie also said that all the injuries to Mr. Moreno’s legs — some 10 fractures — had been “repaired” except one.
“Our goal is not just survival, but functional survival,” he said.
Still, Dr. Barie suggested that Mr. Moreno had taken the team treating him into largely uncharted medical territory. Dr. Barie said Mr. Moreno’s medical team had had no experience with someone who had fallen so far. He said that falls from even three stories can be fatal if the victim hits his or her head on landing.
“Above 10 stories, most of the time we never see the patients because they usually go to the morgue,” Dr. Barie said, though he added that the staff at New York-Presbyterian/Weill Cornell had treated — and had written a medical journal article about — a patient who survived a 19-story fall, less than half the distance Mr. Moreno fell.
“This is right up there with those anecdotes of people falling out of airplanes and surviving, people whose parachutes don’t open and somehow they manage to survive,” Dr. Barie said in an interview after the press conference. “We’re talking about tiny, tiny percentages, well under 1 percent, of people who fall that distance and survive.”
But Mr. Moreno, of Linden, N.J., confounded the odds from the beginning. He was sitting up when firefighters arrived at the building, the Solow Tower, at 265 East 66th Street. He was “on the borderline of consciousness” when he was wheeled into the emergency room, Dr. Barie said, despite serious injuries to his brain, his spine, his chest and his abdomen, along with several fractured ribs, a broken right arm and two broken legs.
Mrs. Moreno said her husband’s determination had not vanished that day. “If anything, he keeps me going,” she said.
A moment later she added: “He wants to go to rehab. He wants to start walking.” She also said she had told him he was not going back to his old job.
She said their three children — ages 14, 8 and 6 — had visited their father, the two younger children only once. She said she had wanted to show them that “Mommy wasn’t lying” and that “unlike Edgar, he’s alive.”
Mrs. Moreno said her husband apparently knew all along that his brother had died. She said that she did not tell him, but he mentioned it on Tuesday night. “He doesn’t remember much about that day other than his brother passed,” she said.
A full explanation for how the man survived, while his brother died, remained elusive. One theory is that Edgar Moreno, 30, was thrown from the platform as it sped toward the ground. One official who was at the scene said that part of Edgar Moreno’s body was under the platform when rescuers arrived. But Dr. Barie also noted that Alcides Moreno had landed without striking his head.
Mrs. Moreno was asked more than once at the press conference why she believed her husband had survived. “He was trained,” she said “He knew what to do with the platform” — meaning, according to other window washers, lie flat and ride it down.
But she also hinted that he was all too aware of the risks of the job. “Even knowing about his brother, not a tear came down, and they were very close,” she said. “They lived together. They did everything together.”
Mrs. Moreno said she did not know if her husband and brother-in-law had been worried about the safety of their scaffold that day. After the accident, another family member who is also a window washer, Jose Cumbicos, said they had mentioned their misgivings in a telephone call that morning. Mr. Cumbicos also said that the Morenos’ supervisor had reassured them, saying a mechanical problem with their rig had been taken care of.
At least three agencies are investigating the accident.
-
Al Jazeera No Longer Nips at Saudis
DUBAI, United Arab Emirates — When a Saudi court sentenced a young woman to 200 lashes in November after she pressed charges against seven men who had raped her, the case provoked outrage and headlines around the world, including in the Middle East.
But not at Al Jazeera, the Arab world’s leading satellite television channel, seen by 40 million people. The station’s silence was especially noteworthy because until recently, and unlike almost all other Arab news outlets, Al Jazeera had long been willing — eager, in fact — to broadcast fierce criticisms of Saudi Arabia‘s rulers.
For the past three months Al Jazeera, which once infuriated the Saudi royal family with its freewheeling newscasts, has treated the kingdom with kid gloves, media analysts say.
The newly cautious tone appears to have been dictated to Al Jazeera’s management by the rulers of Qatar, where Al Jazeera has its headquarters. Although those rulers established the channel a decade ago in large part as a forum for critics of the Saudi government, they now seem to feel they cannot continue to alienate Saudi Arabia — a fellow Sunni nation — in light of the threat from Iran across the Persian Gulf.
The specter of Iran’s nuclear ambitions may be particularly daunting to tiny Qatar, which also is the site of a major American military base.
The new policy is the latest chapter in a gradual domestication of Al Jazeera, once reviled by American officials as little more than a terrorist propaganda outlet. Al Jazeera’s broadcasts no longer routinely refer to Iraqi insurgents as the “resistance,” or victims of American firepower as “martyrs.”
The policy also illustrates the way the Arab media, despite the new freedoms introduced by Al Jazeera itself a decade ago, are still often treated as political tools by the region’s autocratic rulers.
“The gulf nations now feel they are all in the same boat, because of the threat of Iran, and the chaos of Iraq and America’s weakness,” said Mustafa Alani, a security analyst at the Gulf Research Center in Dubai. “So the Qataris agreed to give the Saudis assurances about Al Jazeera’s coverage.”
Those assurances, Mr. Alani added, were given at a September meeting in Riyadh, the Saudi capital, between King Abdullah of Saudi Arabia and top officials in the Qatari government. For the meeting, aimed at resolving a long-simmering feud between the nations, the Qataris brought along an unusual guest: the chairman of Al Jazeera’s board, Sheik Hamad bin Thamer al-Thani.
Al Jazeera’s general manager, Waddah Khanfar, did not reply to phone and e-mail requests for comment. But several employees confirmed that the chairman of the board had attended the meeting. They declined to give their names, citing the delicacy of the issue. The governments of Qatar and Saudi Arabia have remained silent on the matter.
Repercussions were soon felt at Al Jazeera.
“Orders were given not to tackle any Saudi issue without referring to the higher management,” one Jazeera newsroom employee wrote in an e-mail message. “All dissident voices disappeared from our screens.”
The employee noted that coverage of Saudi Arabia was always politically motivated at Al Jazeera — in the past, top management used to sometimes force-feed the reluctant news staff negative material about Saudi Arabia, apparently to placate the Qatari leadership. But he added that the recent changes were seen in the newsroom as an even more naked assertion of political will.
“To improve their relations with Qatar, the Saudis wanted to silence Al Jazeera,” he wrote. “They got what they wanted.”
The changes at Al Jazeera are part of a broader reconciliation between Saudi Arabia and Qatar. In December, the Saudi foreign minister, Prince Saud al-Faisal, announced that Saudi Arabia would send an ambassador back to Qatar for the first time since 2002. Also in December, the Saudis attended the Gulf Cooperation Council meeting in Doha, Qatar’s capital, which they had refused to do the last time it was held there. The Saudis have also indicated that they may allow Al Jazeera to open a bureau in Riyadh.
The feud between Qatar and its much larger neighbor, for all its pettiness, has had real consequences. It led to the creation of Al Jazeera in the first place, which in turn helped shape perceptions — and, perhaps, realities — across the Arab world and beyond over the past decade.
The feud began in the mid-1990s, when the Qatari leadership accused the Saudis of supporting a failed coup attempt. Soon afterward, Al Jazeera was founded with a $150 million grant from the emir of Qatar, Sheik Hamad bin Khalifa al-Thani, and began reshaping the Arab media. The station was helped when the BBC’s Arabic-language television station, co-owned by a Saudi company, collapsed, thanks in part to Saudi censorship demands. The BBC journalists flocked to Al Jazeera.
The mere establishment of the station was a challenge to the Saudis, who since the 1970s had used their oil wealth to establish control over most of the pan-Arab media in an effort to forestall the kind of populist media campaign led in earlier decades by Gamal Abdel Nasser when he was Egypt’s president, said Marc Lynch, a professor of political science at George Washington University and the author of a book about Al Jazeera’s role in reshaping the Arab media.
But the feud grew worse in 2002, after Al Jazeera broadcast a debate on Saudi Arabia’s policy on the Palestinian question, shortly after the unveiling of a peace initiative for the Israeli-Palestinian conflict by King Abdullah, who was then the crown prince. The debate included fierce criticisms of the Saudi ruling family, and the Saudis, deeply offended, responded by withdrawing their ambassador from Qatar.
Al Jazeera’s lengthy broadcasts of videotapes by Osama bin Laden — whose cherished goal for years has been to overthrow the Saudi monarchy — also provoked the Saudis. Al Jazeera has often been accused of helping make Mr. bin Laden into a celebrity, and indirectly helping him to recruit more people across the Arab and Islamic world to his cause.
An added frustration was the way Qatar benefited from Al Jazeera’s anti-Americanism, even as American military support and money poured into the tiny country.
“Qatar became immensely popular during the 2003 war, because of Jazeera — despite the fact that the planning for the war was all taking place at Centcom, in Qatar,” said S. Abdallah Schleifer, a veteran American journalist and a professor emeritus at the American University of Cairo, referring to the United States Central Command.
Al Jazeera’s coverage gradually evolved and grew more moderate, partly for internal reasons and partly in response to American pressure. In 2003, Al Arabiya was founded, largely as a Saudi answer to Al Jazeera. It has sometimes countered Al Jazeera’s criticisms of Saudi Arabia with attacks on Qatari policy, as have other Saudi-owned media outlets.
But the recent changes underscore how much Iran’s nuclear ambitions have affected the region.
“It was the fear of a possible Iranian reprisal action, should it be attacked by the U.S., that ultimately appears to have persuaded the Qatari leadership to underline G.C.C. solidarity by mending relations with Saudi Arabia and rein in Al Jazeera’s coverage,” said Neil Partrick, a gulf analyst with the International Crisis Group, referring to the Gulf Cooperation Council. On a smaller scale, the Qataris clearly wanted the Gulf Cooperation Council meeting to be a success, which it would not have been without Saudi involvement, Mr. Partrick said.
Some members of Al Jazeera’s newsroom staff say they believe that the station would not ignore or play down major news developments in Saudi Arabia, whatever promises the management may have made. But other Arab journalists said Al Jazeera’s seeming willingness to toe the Saudi line was proof that there still were no truly independent media outlets in the region.
“The Arab media today still play much the same role as the pre-Islamic tribal poets, whose role was to praise the tribe, not tell the truth,” said Sulaiman al-Hattlan, a Dubai-based media analyst and the former editor in chief of Forbes Arabia.
-
Off-Roading,Patriots,Dowd,Kenya, Human Rights,Gothic Monastery,Oil Hits $100, Obama, Huckabee,Giulia
Today’s Papers
Fired Up
By Daniel Politi
Posted Friday, Jan. 4, 2008, at 6:13 A.M. E.T.Everybody leads with the Iowa caucuses, where Sen. Barack Obama and former Arkansas Gov. Mike Huckabee won decisive victories. It’s a story of big winners and big losers as everyone agrees that the results represent serious setbacks for both Sen. Hillary Clinton and Mitt Romney. Sen. John Edwards had long made a big point of winning Iowa, and he managed to get second place by receiving 0.3 percent more than the former first lady. Here are the (pretty much final) numbers: Obama 38 percent, Edwards 30 percent, Clinton 29 percent; Huckabee 34 percent, Romney 25 percent, and Fred Thompson virtually tied with Sen. John McCain at 13 percent, though Thompson did get a few more votes. The Democratic field got a bit smaller last night as Sen. Joseph Biden and Sen. Christopher Dodd dropped out of the race after barely registering in the night’s results.
There was record turnout on both sides, but the numbers for the Democrats are particularly startling as they had 239,000 people participating in the caucuses, compared with 124,000 four years ago. The big theme of the night is how the results illustrate that voters want change and are not afraid to turn away from the establishment candidates. As USA Today handily summarizes, Obama and Huckabee “triumphed over contenders with stronger establishment backing and more extensive institutional support.” But there’s no rest for the weary, and the candidates had little time to analyze the results before boarding planes to New Hampshire to campaign before Tuesday’s primary, which has taken on a new level of importance, particularly for both Clinton and Romney.
The massive turnout by Democrats “served as another warning to Republicans about the problems they face this November in swing states” like Iowa, says the New York Times. According to polls, half of the Democrats were looking for change, and 57 percent said they were attending a caucus for the first time, which were two key factors in propelling Obama to victory. On the Republican side, Huckabee was definitely helped by the fact that 60 percent of caucus-goers described themselves as evangelicals.
In a Page One analysis, the Washington Post says that with his overwhelming victory, “Obama shook conventional wisdom to its political core” and the Los Angeles Times echoes the same sentiments by noting that he “overturned some of the fundamental assumptions of modern-day American politics.” Not only did he show that an African-American candidate can win in an overwhelmingly white state, but also that a man could get significant support from women even while running against a strong female politician. Perhaps most importantly though, he’s widely credited for getting supporters to participate in a caucus that was long seen as dominated by veteran political activists. The LAT points out the results “are especially damaging” for Edwards because it will now be difficult for him to portray the race as anything but a contest between Clinton and Obama.
Clinton’s advisers haven’t said whether there will be a change in strategy for New Hampshire, but the NYT says a “shift seems likely” because her “multilayered, sometimes contradictory message” that touted both her experience and capacity for change “fell flat in this first contest.” At the same time, it’s important to remember, as the WP points out, the Clinton campaign had always recognized “Iowa was a risk” and would be a tough fight. But it’s difficult to look past the feeling that her two main arguments of experience and electability don’t appear to be resonating with voters as much as Clinton had expected. And, at the very least, her strategy to seem like the inevitable Democratic nominee has been shattered.
On the Republican side, things look a bit different. Huckabee’s overwhelming victory is a “devastating blow” (WP) to Romney, mainly because he made no secret that winning the early states was a central part of his strategy. The Wall Street Journal points out Huckabee also broke with conventional wisdom by going with a populist message that “represents a challenge to his historically pro-business party.” But, more than anything, Huckabee’s victory makes it clear that, as the LAT points out, the Republican “nomination remains up for grabs among at least four candidates and may not be resolved” until Tsunami Tuesday next month. According to polls, Huckabee doesn’t really have a chance in New Hampshire (he’s currently battling for a distant third place), which is why everyone points out that the person who might have gained the most from his victory yesterday is McCain. At the same time though, Obama’s victory could end up hurting McCain since they’re both courting some of the same independent voters in New Hampshire.
The Post notes that New Hampshire residents “are already being inundated with negative messages” from campaigns and outside groups. These outside groups are likely to take on a more significant role in the campaigns as the primary season heats up and candidates won’t be able to make the kind of personal pleas that were the rule in Iowa. Besides the style of campaigning, also expect a change in the focus of the contest as no one tires of pointing out that New Hampshire is a very different place and the talk will “shift from social and religious issues to taxes and national security,” says the NYT.
The NYT‘s David Brooks writes that while he’s lived through nights “that brought a political earthquake,” he’s never been through an event that “brought two” and says both Obama and Huckabee are changing their parties. He describes Obama’s victory as a “huge moment” that brought “political substance” to a “movement that seemed ethereal and idealistic.” Although Huckabee has displayed “serious flaws,” he managed to shift the tone of his party by successfully tapping “into realities that other Republicans have been slow to recognize.”
In other news, the NYT fronts word that the Bush administration is preventing states from expanding eligibility for Medicaid. The administration had never said it would apply the limits of eligibility it imposed on the State Children’s Health Insurance Program to Medicaid, but several states are finding out that the administration is also against expanding Medicaid out of fear that families will rely on it instead of buying private insurance.
The LAT fronts, and the WP goes inside with, a look at how Nawaz Sharif is trying to change his image to become the main face of the opposition in Pakistan. Although he had recently found himself in the shadow of Benazir Bhutto, many now see him as the only experienced politician that could take on President Pervez Musharraf, even if they are wary because of his not-so-rosy past. Officials in Washington have never been too fond of him because of perceived ties to militants, but U.S. embassy officials are in contact with Sharif and his party, which he sees as a sign of his rising popularity.
The NYT fronts the amazing story of a window washer who fell 47 stories into a Manhattan alleyway and somehow survived. Doctors, who described his recovery as “miraculous” and “unprecedented,” said he would likely be able to walk again. “Above 10 stories, most of the time we never see the patients because they usually go to the morgue,” a doctor said.
Daniel Politi writes “Today’s Papers” for Slate. He can be reached at todayspapers@slate.com.Thursday, January 03, 2008
Let’s Just Say, It Was Crowded
Seth Wenig/Associated PressA crowd of, well, thousands filled Times Square to ring in the new year.
January 2, 2008Let’s Just Say, It Was Crowded How many people rang in the new year at Times Square on Monday night? The simple answer is: One heck of a lot. The complicated answer is: Perhaps only the Police Department knows for sure, and it won’t tell you.
“We have stopped providing official counts” of large public gatherings “because no one was ever satisfied with them,” said Paul J. Browne, the department’s deputy commissioner for public information. “Whatever the count was, it was usually never enough for whatever group was involved.”
That has not prevented other people, however, from estimating the number of bodies that squeeze into Times Square and its environs every New Year’s Eve.
Jeffrey A. Straus, the president of Countdown Entertainment, the company that organizes the ball drop in coordination with the Times Square Alliance, estimated that Monday night’s crowd totaled at least one million people.
“I’ve been doing this now for 13 years,” he said. “I’m in the TV truck with our cameras. We can see people from 43rd Street to Central Park on Broadway and Seventh Avenue.” Monday’s crowd was swelled by the mild weather, he said.
“People want to be together. That’s what the magic is. People want to be part of that official countdown.”
Mr. Straus said that for many years the police shared its estimates with the organizers. The last time the police provided a number was Dec. 31, 2000, he said, when the estimate was also one million people.
Other estimates in recent years have been much lower. In most years in the late 1990s, newspaper accounts tended to cite figures of around 500,000.
That is fairly consistent with the numbers issued by the Police Department when it still provided crowd estimates. A chart printed in The New York Times in 1993 showed that from 1986 to 1991, police estimates of Times Square attendance on New Year’s Eve ranged from about 300,000 to about 600,000.
The one major exception was Dec. 31, 1999, for the countdown to 2000. Rudolph W. Giuliani, who was mayor at the time, said that the crowd was “pushing two million.”
That prompted an analysis by The Times, which found reason for skepticism.
The crowd is penned behind metal barriers on Broadway and Seventh Avenue on the blocks north of 42nd Street, with a lane about 10 feet wide kept clear on the street. That means there is a fair amount of open space.
The Times calculated the total surface area on Seventh Avenue and Broadway, including the street and sidewalk, from Central Park South to 34th Street (where many people in 1999 watched the ball drop on large television screens).
Using a measurement of two square feet per person, which has long been standard in estimating crowd sizes, the analysis determined that the total capacity of the viewing area that year was approximately 430,000 people. Adding some additional capacity to account for spillover onto side streets, the analysis determined that there was room for about 700,000 people — during what was certainly the most ballyhooed celebration in the history of the Times Square event.
This year’s crowd covered less area, however, than that throng. It extended from Central Park South only to 42nd Street, along Broadway and Seventh Avenue, Mr. Browne said, with some additional crowds in Central Park and along the side streets.
Mr. Browne said that he did not know how long ago the department stopped releasing its crowd estimates for all sorts of events, from parades to protests, but that it was probably about a decade ago.
Paul Wertheimer, the president of Crowd Management Strategies, a Los Angeles-based consulting firm, said that many police agencies across the country became reluctant to reveal crowd-size estimates after the Million Man March in Washington in 1995, which was organized by the Nation of Islam. The National Park Service estimated that the march drew 400,000 people. A furor ensued when the organizers insisted the number was far larger. A year later, the park service said it would no longer make crowd estimates.
“What did in fact kind of ruin it, and frightened police agencies or those people that estimated it away, was when it became a political issue,” Mr. Wertheimer said. “The organizers can charge prejudice if they don’t get the numbers that they believe occurred.”
But he said police agencies continued to estimate the size of such crowds to help them plan for future events and to evaluate their effectiveness in handling large crowds.
The New York Police Department has at least two ways of estimating the size of a large crowd. One is to use aerial photographs taken by a helicopter flying overhead, Mr. Browne said. The police then place a grid over the photograph and count the number of people inside one section of the grid. They can then count the other sections and multiply to come up with an estimate.
The second method, used for parades or other events where people are lined up behind metal barriers on streets and sidewalks, relies on a rule of thumb of about 2,500 people per block, Mr. Browne said. That figure is meant to be a total that includes people on both sides of a street, he said.
That rule would not seem to apply to the Times Square celebration, however, partly because the barricaded areas were often larger than those for a typical parade.
Broadway and Seventh Avenue each run for 17 blocks from 42nd to 59th Streets, for a total of 34 blocks. But multiplying 34 by 2,500, using the parade formula, yields just 85,000 people, clearly a gross underestimate.
Mr. Straus, the event organizer, acknowledged that calculating the number of people packed into Times Square on New Year’s Eve can feel a little like guessing the number of jelly beans in a jar.
“It’s an art, not a science,” he said. “And at the end of the day, does it really matter? It’s a lot of people.”
Al Baker contributed reporting.
Under Attack, Drug Maker Turned to Giuliani for Help
If anyone can imagine this man as a leader of our country in this critical time where moral leadership is of the utmost importance, please explain how to reconcile this opinion with the facts contained within this story.It closes with the all telling comment,“It was all because of Giuliani,” said Mr. Bisch. “And he got to take the money.“Michael P. WhelanLibrado Romero/The New York TimesGiuliani Partners in 2004, with Rudolph Giuliani at top center and Bernard B. Kerik, the former New York City police commissioner, on his right.
Kyle Green/The Roanoke Times, via Associated Press
John L. Brownlee, a United States attorney in Virginia, obtained plea deals totaling $634.5 million from Purdue and its executives in May.December 28, 2007The Long Run Under Attack, Drug Maker Turned to Giuliani for Help By BARRY MEIER and ERIC LIPTONIn western Virginia, far from the limelight, United States Attorney John L. Brownlee found himself on the telephone last year with a political and legal superstar, Rudolph W. Giuliani.
For years, Mr. Brownlee and his small team had been building a case that the maker of the painkiller OxyContin had misled the public when it claimed the drug was less prone to abuse than competing narcotics. The drug was believed to be a factor in hundreds of deaths involving its abuse.
Mr. Giuliani, celebrated for his stewardship of New York City after 9/11, soon told the prosecutors they were wrong.
In 2002, the drug maker, Purdue Pharma of Stamford, Conn., hired Mr. Giuliani and his consulting firm, Giuliani Partners, to help stem the controversy about OxyContin. Among Mr. Giuliani’s missions was the job of convincing public officials that they could trust Purdue because they could trust him.
So it was no small success when, after the call, Mr. Brownlee did what many people might have done when confronted with such celebrity: He went out and bought a copy of Mr. Giuliani’s book, “Leadership.”
“I wanted to be prepared for my meetings with him,” Mr. Brownlee said in a recent interview.
Over the past few weeks, Mr. Giuliani’s consulting business has received increasing scrutiny, at times forcing him to defend his business as he campaigns for the Republican presidential nomination.
But his work for Purdue, the company’s first and longest-running client, provides a window into how he used his standing as an eminent lawyer, a Republican insider and a national celebrity to aid a controversial client and build a business fortune.
A former top federal prosecutor, Mr. Giuliani participated in two meetings between Purdue officials and the head of the Drug Enforcement Administration, the agency investigating the company. Giuliani Partners took on the job of monitoring security improvements at company facilities making OxyContin, an issue of concern to the D.E.A.
As a celebrity, Mr. Giuliani helped the company win several public relations battles, playing a role in an effort by Purdue to persuade an influential Pennsylvania congressman, Curt Weldon, not to blame it for OxyContin abuse.
Despite these efforts, Purdue suffered a crushing defeat in May at the hands of Mr. Brownlee when the company and three top executives pleaded guilty to criminal charges.
Mr. Giuliani, who declined to discuss his work for Purdue for this article, has refused to talk in detail about his firm’s clients. He has said that he is no longer involved in the day-to-day management of the firm, which still represents Purdue.
Giuliani Partners would not say how much Purdue had paid it, but one consultant to the drug maker estimated that Mr. Giuliani’s firm had, in some years, earned several million dollars from the account.
“Everything I did with Giuliani Partners has been totally legal, totally ethical,” Mr. Giuliani recently told The Associated Press. “There’s nothing for me to explain about it. We’ve acted honorably, decently.”
In the OxyContin case, Mr. Giuliani’s supporters suggest that as a cancer survivor himself, he was driven by a noble goal: to keep the company’s proven pain reliever available to the widest circle of sufferers.
“I understand the pain and distress that accompanies illness,” Mr. Giuliani said at the time. “I know that proper medications are necessary for people to treat their sickness and improve their quality of life.”
To drive OxyContin’s sales, Purdue, beginning in 1996, set in motion what D.E.A. officials described as perhaps the most aggressive promotional campaign for a high-powered narcotic ever undertaken. It promoted the drug not only to pain specialists, but to family doctors with little experience in treating serious pain or recognizing drug abuse.
As a result of the expanded access, critics charged, OxyContin wound up in the high schools and street corners of rural America where curious teenagers crushed the pill, defeating the time-release formula, and ended up addicts, or in some cases, dead.
Dennis Lee, the Virginia state prosecutor for Tazewell County, an area hard hit by OxyContin abuse, said he was stunned several years ago to learn that Mr. Giuliani was working for Purdue. He had a favorable impression of Mr. Giuliani, he said, and a poor opinion of the company, which he said had played down and dissembled about its drug’s problem.
“I was shocked,” Mr. Lee said, “that he would basically become a mouthpiece for Purdue.”
Denials and Lobbying
Giuliani Partners served clients with a range of needs. The firm helped large accounting firms fight computer hackers and promoted Nextel’s efforts to expand its access to public airwaves. But some of the 55-person firm’s clients, like Purdue Pharma, were facing more difficult legal and public relations problems.
There were, for instance, the backers of a planned natural gas terminal in Long Island Sound who were facing stiff environmental opposition. Another client was a former cocaine smuggler hoping to win federal contracts for a computer system to track down terrorists.
On the business of these clients and others, Giuliani Partners carved out a lucrative niche in corporate consulting, crisis management and security.
In the process, Mr. Giuliani, a Brooklyn native whose legal career had largely been spent in government, became a corporate trouble-shooter with homes in the Hamptons and on the Upper East Side. According to financial disclosure forms filed in May, his net worth was more than $30 million.
The crisis that brought Purdue to Mr. Giuliani in 2002 involved OxyContin, a time-released form of the narcotic oxycodone, which had turned into a blockbuster product with annual sales of more than $1 billion.
But along the way, the pain medication had also become a popular drug for abuse. Among the company’s critics were officials at the Drug Enforcement Administration who said OxyContin had been a factor in hundreds of overdose deaths. Some D.E.A. officials and others also charged that Purdue had hyped the drug’s resistance to abuse and then failed to act swiftly when its misuse became apparent.
Purdue Pharma, which is owned by the Sacklers, a New York-area family who are known as museum benefactors, denied it had done anything wrong. But facing a growing number of investigations and lawsuits, it spent millions on public relations experts, lobbyists and top-tier law firms.
One piece, however, was missing: a highly credible and well-connected political figure to serve as its point man. Purdue Pharma executives saw Mr. Giuliani as that person, said a former company spokesman.
“He was just on the cover of Time Magazine, Man of the Year,” that former official, Robin Hogen, said. “Everyone was talking about his extraordinary leadership in 9/11.”
Giuliani Partners became involved in every aspect of the company’s problems, from the ballooning investigation by Mr. Brownlee to repairing its battered image. Mr. Giuliani personally took on some tasks, but a half-dozen members of his firm, including Bernard B. Kerik, the former New York City police commissioner, were also involved.
Mr. Giuliani’s most important liaison to the company was Daniel S. Connolly, who had been a top lawyer in his administration. He spent so much time at Purdue that he was issued a security pass.
“His judgment was always sought on almost any topic,” said Mr. Hogen, who now works for a public relations agency in San Francisco.
Mr. Connolly regularly attended Monday morning crisis management sessions to develop programs that would shift the public spotlight away from OxyContin. The issue, the company said, was not its conduct but the larger question of prescription drug abuse.
To help draw attention to that issue, Mr. Giuliani became the public face of a program called Rx Action Alliance, a consortium of drug makers, physicians and law enforcement authorities working to curtail such abuse.
“He was America’s mayor,” Mr. Hogen said of Mr. Giuliani’s role as a catalyst for the company’s efforts. “People were drawn to him.”
One person attracted by Mr. Giuliani’s star power was Mr. Weldon, who was upset because young people in his Pennsylvania district were abusing OxyContin. Mr. Weldon, who lost his seat in 2006, said in a recent interview that he had told the company he planned to publicly speak out against it.
“This is really kind of outrageous,” Mr. Weldon recalled telling a Purdue representative. “You have got to do something more than say you are concerned about it.”
At Mr. Weldon’s urging, the company agreed to finance a program aimed at curbing prescription drug abuse. It also sent Mr. Giuliani to an inaugural press conference for the program, held at a high school in Mr. Weldon’s district. With Mr. Giuliani at his side, Mr. Weldon opted not to criticize the company.
“I am proud to be in Pennsylvania today standing with Curt Weldon — a true leader,” Mr. Giuliani said at the event. “I applaud the efforts of Congressman Weldon and of Purdue Pharma in taking this battle in the right direction.”
Credit for Damage Control
Asa Hutchinson, the director of the Drug Enforcement Administration in 2002, hardly needed an introduction to Mr. Giuliani. So it was perhaps not surprising that Purdue chose Mr. Giuliani as the person to meet with Mr. Hutchinson at a time when the drug maker was under intense scrutiny by the D.E.A.
“You need to have somebody who has clout to get in the door to legitimately make your presentation,” said Jay P. McCloskey, a former United States attorney in Maine who until recently worked for Purdue as a consultant.
By 2002, Mr. Giuliani was already helping to raise money for a D.E.A. museum, and his firm was part of a $1 million Justice Department consulting contract to advise it on reorganizing its major drug investigations.
The D.E.A. was not only critical of how OxyContin had been marketed, its inspectors had found widespread security and record-keeping problems at the company’s manufacturing plants.
Several top D.E.A. staffers were recommending that the agency impose severe sanctions against the drug maker, including possible restrictions on how much OxyContin it could make.
At two meetings, the first at Giuliani Partners in early 2002, Mr. Giuliani and Purdue’s executives argued that they were already taking steps to eliminate any problems.
Mr. Kerik had been sent to Purdue’s manufacturing plants to revamp internal security, they assured Mr. Hutchinson. The federal investigators, they argued, should back down and give them a chance to prove they could handle the problem on their own.
After the meetings, Mr. Hutchinson, who generally did not get involved in individual investigations, asked D.E.A. officials several times to brief him on the inquiry, Laura Nagel, the official in charge of it, has said in previous interviews. She declined to comment for this article.
D.E.A. officials say Mr. Giuliani ultimately did not affect the inquiry’s course. But Purdue Pharma did succeed in favorably resolving the matter. In 2004, it paid a $2 million fine to settle the D.E.A. record-keeping charges without admitting any wrongdoing. The sum was far smaller than the amount first recommended by Ms. Nagel, which one former D.E.A. official said was $20 million.
By the time of the 2004 settlement, it appeared that Purdue, with Mr. Giuliani’s help, had averted any significant damage. As the tide was turning, the drug maker’s top lawyer, Howard R. Udell, gave credit to Mr. Giuliani.
“We believe that government officials are more comfortable knowing that Giuliani is advising Purdue Pharma,” Mr. Udell said in a promotional brochure put out by Giuliani Partners. “It is clear to us, and we hope it is clear to the government, that Giuliani would not take an assignment with a company that he felt was acting in an improper way.”
Parents Not Persuaded
The limits of stature, though, were evident in Mr. Giuliani’s dealings with Mr. Brownlee, the federal prosecutor from Virginia, whose case against Purdue had been viewed by the company more as a nuisance than a threat.
It is easy to see how lawyers for Purdue might have underestimated the prosecutor. He ran a small office with 24 lawyers to cover 52 far-flung counties. But two of those lawyers, working out of a satellite office in the tiny town of Abingdon, Va., near the Tennessee border, had been investigating Purdue since 2002.
They had issued some 600 separate subpoenas and collected millions of company documents. The case stretched the office’s resources so thin that state prosecutors had to be deputized to handle other federal cases.
By comparison, Purdue’s defense team comprised all-stars, including Mr. Giuliani, Mr. Connolly and Mary Jo White, a former United States attorney in New York.
Mr. Giuliani had been advising Purdue about how to respond to Mr. Brownlee’s inquiry since its start in 2002, including reviewing documents the company had released in response to his subpoenas. And he shared the defense team’s view that Mr. Brownlee did not have any evidence to link the company to crimes, several of those lawyers said.
Early last year, however, Mr. Brownlee told Purdue that he was prepared to indict it and three top executives, including Mr. Udell, the lawyer. The company then handed Mr. Giuliani his most crucial assignment, to talk Mr. Brownlee down.
His selection was not by chance, company representatives said. They figured Mr. Brownlee, a younger federal prosecutor, would look up to Mr. Giuliani, who became a legend as a United States attorney in New York.
Between June and October 2006, Mr. Giuliani met or spoke with the prosecutor on six occasions. During those conversations, Mr. Giuliani was cordial but pointed in arguing against what he felt were flaws in the case.
Mr. Brownlee would not change course, though, even when the Purdue legal team appealed, unsuccessfully, at the 11th hour to his superiors at the Justice Department in Washington.
In October 2006, Mr. Brownlee told Mr. Giuliani and Purdue that he expected to ask for a grand jury indictment by the end of the month. Plea discussions ensued and Mr. Brownlee ultimately agreed that the three executives would not have to do jail time.
By this time, Mr. Giuliani was actively planning his presidential bid, as well as tending to other clients. On the day the legal team completed the plea deals with Mr. Brownlee, Mr. Giuliani was in Germany, giving a talk to business leaders.
He had a conference call with prosecutors for about a minute, but there really was not much left to discuss, except the weather.
“He said that it was raining,” Mr. Brownlee recalled.
In May, Purdue and its executives, after spending tens of millions of dollars to repair the company’s image, agreed to plea deals to avoid a trial. Together, they paid $634.5 million in fines and payments.
After years of denial and a high-profile public relations campaign, the company was forced to admit that it had misled doctors and patients. But to the parents of young people who had died getting high on OxyContin, the absence of jail time was evidence of Mr. Giuliani’s influence.
They voiced that view inside and outside the packed courtroom in Abingdon where the men were sentenced in July.
Mr. Giuliani was 360 miles away at the time, campaigning in Myrtle Beach, S.C., where he met with local firefighters and talked about 9/11. But his role in the case had been so substantial and sustained, the presiding judge felt compelled to address the parents’ concerns.
“It has been implied that because Mr. Giuliani is a prominent national politician, Purdue may have received a favorable deal from the government solely because of politics,” said the judge, James P. Jones of United States District Court. “I completely reject this claim.”
Even today, some of those parents are not persuaded. Ed Bisch, whose son died of an OxyContin overdose, said that he believed that Purdue got a free pass for years thanks to Mr. Giuliani.
“It was all because of Giuliani,” said Mr. Bisch. “And he got to take the money.”
Giuliani Hits a Rocky Stretch as Voting Approaches
Jacob Silberberg for The New York TimesRudolph W. Giuliani in Hampstead, N.H., Sunday. Early plans called for largely bypassing the state, as well as Iowa. But then came moves to compete in both, especially New Hampshire.
December 24, 2007Giuliani Hits a Rocky Stretch as Voting Approaches HAMPTON, N.H. — Rudolph W. Giuliani has entered a turbulent period in his campaign for the Republican presidential nomination, marked by what his aides acknowledge are missteps, sharp shifts in strategy and evidence that reports about his personal life have hurt his national standing.
A $3 million investment in radio and television advertising in New Hampshire, a belated effort to become competitive in this state, is now viewed by the campaign as a largely wasted expenditure.
A Boston Globe poll published Sunday found that support for Mr. Giuliani had dropped in New Hampshire over the past month, even before any fallout from the decision on Wednesday by an ailing Mr. Giuliani to have his campaign plane turn around and take him back to St. Louis, where he spent the night in the hospital.
Some of Mr. Giuliani’s advisers are frustrated at the extent to which his decision not to compete aggressively in Iowa has pushed him to the side of the stage at a moment when the political world’s attention is focused on the caucuses there that will kick off the election season in less than two weeks.
Mr. Giuliani’s initial campaign theme, built around his record as mayor of New York, has given way to a new one: “Tested. Ready. Now.” But its introduction, in a speech last Saturday in Tampa, drew little attention on a day when most of the other Republican and Democratic presidential candidates were grabbing the spotlight in Iowa and New Hampshire.
Compounding his problems, Mr. Giuliani drew the kind of attention last week that a candidate with declining national poll numbers and a history of treatment for prostate cancer would just as soon avoid after he abruptly entered the hospital in St. Louis and stayed there overnight.
His aides declined to provide details of what had happened to Mr. Giuliani, other than he was complaining of flulike symptoms, or what tests he might have undergone. The situation grew even more muddled when Mr. Giuliani disputed what his campaign had said about his condition, saying that in fact he had been suffering from a severe headache and that his doctor would be able to issue a definitive statement this week after seeing test results.
As a result of all this, what might have been a one-day campaign trail story was still reverberating on Sunday.
Mr. Giuliani’s decision to maintain a light schedule of public appearances compared with his rivals, particularly Mitt Romney of Massachusetts and Senator John McCain of Arizona, has stirred concern among some prospective supporters who fear that he does not appear hungry for the job, a criticism that shadowed him when he ran for senator in New York in 2000.
“I hate to say this, but I don’t think Rudy wants it badly enough,” Patrick Ruffini, a blogger, wrote on Townhall.com, a conservative Web site.
That sentiment by Mr. Ruffini, a former e-mail director for the Republican National Committee, was featured prominently on the editorial page of The Concord Monitor on Sunday, greeting Mr. Giuliani on a day when he had two campaign events in New Hampshire.
Mr. Giuliani is still viewed as a very strong candidate with continued high potential in a very unsettled field. He could be helped by the unusual calendar of nominating contests, with the chance it provides for him to pick up large numbers of delegates on Feb. 5 and recover from any early setbacks.
“We have always run a campaign that is based on a long-term strategy of getting the most delegates,” said Mike DuHaime, his campaign manager.
Still, the difficulties within Mr. Giuliani’s campaign come as he faces changes in the political landscape that do not appear to be to his benefit. For much of the year, he was helped by his positioning as tough on terrorism and by the perception among many Republicans that he was their best weapon to block Senator Hillary Rodham Clinton were she to win the Democratic nomination.
But issues like immigration are proving far more decisive among Republicans than terrorism, especially since the violence in Iraq has diminished. Mrs. Clinton is struggling to win her own party’s nomination, which has had the effect of undercutting what had been one of Mr. Giuliani’s biggest selling points.
Mr. Giuliani’s closest advisers in this campaign include a number of longtime loyalists who, though seasoned in New York City politics, have not run a national campaign before. One of the key questions from the start of his entry into the race has been the extent to which Mr. Giuliani would open up this circle — a small, rarely changing circle of hard-driving New Yorkers, known for tough language and tough tactics — to advisers with national experience.
To a certain extent, he has done this. Acting on the recommendation of Ken Mehlman, the former Republican National Committee chairman, Mr. Giuliani named Mr. DuHaime, a former political director of the Republican National Committee, as his campaign director, and Mr. DuHaime brought a number of veterans of the Republican committee with him.
But Republicans who have dealt with the campaign say that it is more Anthony Carbonetti, along with other New York insiders, who has Mr. Giuliani’s ear, and who is, with the former mayor, driving many of the major decisions in the campaign. Mr. Carbonetti, who has been a senior adviser to Mr. Giuliani since his early days in New York politics, has continued working at Mr. Giuliani’s consulting firm, Giuliani Partners, and spends much of his time not at Mr. Giuliani’s campaign headquarters in Lower Manhattan, but at the firm’s headquarters in Times Square.
The two camps were described by some campaign officials as culturally uneasy with one another. All the senior officials hold Thursday morning conference call strategy sessions, known as “the Chairman’s Call,” because it is led by the Giuliani campaign chairman, Patrick C. Oxford, a long-time fund-raiser.
When campaign aides talk about strategy, especially in public settings, they have taken to calling Mr. Giuliani “Ralph” rather than “Rudy,” according to associates of Mr. Giuliani.
One participant in the calls, who asked not to be identified because he was discussing internal campaign strategy, said the advisers often spent hours talking about subjects like the logistics of campaign events — where Mr. Giuliani would stand, what the backdrop would be — rather than a long-term message that goes beyond the Sept. 11 terrorist attacks or Mr. Giuliani’s record as mayor of New York.
Mr. Giuliani and his team are making a tremendous gamble: that he can make only token efforts in Iowa, New Hampshire and, probably, South Carolina, but still go on to win in Florida in late January and in many of the big states holding primaries or caucuses on Feb. 5.
His campaign has settled on that strategy after veering back and forth about the right approach. At first, his advisers signaled that he would largely bypass Iowa, as well as New Hampshire, where Mr. Romney, the former Massachusetts governor, enjoys a home-field advantage. Then he made moves to compete in both those states, especially New Hampshire, where he invested heavily in advertising and went toe-to-toe with Mr. Romney, who has spent close to $8 million on television spots.
But now Mr. Giuliani’s advisers say they have decided that their route to victory is to do well in Michigan on Jan. 15 and to win in Florida on Jan. 29. That would give him strength heading into Feb. 5, when 22 states — including New York, New Jersey and California, all of which have large numbers of delegates and relatively moderate Republican voters — hold their contests.
“At the end of the day, it’s a numbers game,” Mr. Carbonetti said.
What this has meant is that while the rest of the candidates have been in Iowa, where their every move is followed by hundreds of reporters, Mr. Giuliani has been investing much of his time in fund-raising or paying visits to states which have later contests. His campaign has reached a point where his success is increasingly contingent on other candidates’ failing.
If either Mr. Romney or Mike Huckabee, the former governor of Arkansas, wins two or three of the first contests, Mr. Giuliani’s task will be greatly complicated, particularly if party leaders and contributors begin coalescing around someone who appears to be a winner.
Indeed, one of the points of division in Mr. Giuliani’s campaign is how to deal with the sudden threat of Mr. Huckabee. Some of them are arguing that a strong showing by Mr. Huckabee in Iowa would help Mr. Giuliani by muddying the field. Others are warning that Mr. Huckabee could eclipse Mr. Giuliani if they do not knock him back now.
Mr. Giuliani’s position has changed notably from even a month ago. For much of this year, Republicans had expressed admiration, and some surprise, at the extent to which he appeared to have dealt with concerns about his views on abortion and gay rights, as well as his private life. Mr. Giuliani showed significant leads in most national polls; he routinely drew warm and enthusiastic receptions from audiences more conservative than he.
His advisers say that a recent run of negative news reports, focusing on an extramarital affair and his association with Bernard Kerik, the disgraced former police commissioner that Mr. Giuliani recommended as homeland security secretary, is beginning to take a toll.
“I am a little disappointed with his personal life,” said Elisabeth Ackerson, speaking about Mr. Giuliani after attending a Town Hall meeting for Mr. Romney on Saturday evening in Londonderry, N.H. She said was trying to decide among Mr. Romney, Mr. McCain and Mr. Giuliani.
The apparent failure of Mr. Giuliani’s advertising campaign in New Hampshire stirred particular concern among some Giuliani advisers.
Mr. Carbonetti said the campaign decided to pull back on the television advertising after determining that the sheer glut from other candidates in New Hampshire was making it impossible for Mr. Giuliani’s spots to break though. “The airwaves were saturated,” he said.
Ed Goeas, Mr. Giuliani’s pollster, said he thought any gain from the advertising had been offset by news reports about whether Mr. Giuliani’s city administration in New York had properly accounted for his security costs, including during time he was spending with Judith Nathan, then his girlfriend and now his wife.
But other Giuliani advisers said they feared that the failure of the advertising to strengthen him in New Hampshire was evidence that Mr. Giuliani’s attempt to run for president based largely on his record as mayor was flawed.
Michael Cooper contributed reporting.
Copyright 2007 The New York Times CompanyTechnology Voters’ Guide: John McCain
January 3, 2008Technology Voters’ Guide: John McCain Declan McCullagh, for News.com;Anne Broache, for News.comIraq, immigration, taxes, and health care probably have been the four most pressing topics of the 2008 presidential campaign. Technology has made nary an appearance.Sure, there have been the YouTube-ified debates, MySpace.com polls, record-setting fund-raising efforts, and the now-obligatory Google office visits.
But knowing where the candidates stand on high-tech topics like digital copyright, surveillance, and Internet taxes can be revealing, which is why we’ve put together this 2008 Technology Voters’ Guide.
In late November, we sent questionnaires to the top candidates–measured by funds raised and poll standings–from each major party. We asked each the same 10 questions.
Other candidates’ responses:
Clinton, Dodd, Edwards,
Paul, Obama.Not all candidates chose to respond: Republicans Mitt Romney, Mike Huckabee, Rudy Giuliani, and Fred Thompson rebuffed our requests, as did Democrats Joe Biden and Bill Richardson. In all such cases, we made repeated efforts to try to convince them to change their minds.
Read on for responses from Sen. John McCain, or check out CNET News.com’s election coverage roundup, featuring other Technology Voters’ Guide candidate reports.
Q: Politicians have been talking for years about the need for high-speed Internet access. Should this be accomplished primarily through deregulation and market forces, or should the federal government give out grants or subsidies, or enact new laws?
John McCain: I believe that we must promote competition and reduce regulation in order to secure lower prices and higher-quality services for consumers and encourage the rapid deployment of new technologies.I have been a leading advocate in the Senate for seeking market-based solutions to increasing broadband penetration. We should place the federal government in the role of stimulator, rather than regulator, of broadband services, remove state and local barriers to broadband deployment, and facilitate deployment of broadband services to rural and underserved communities.
Congress has considered Net neutrality legislation, but it never became law. Do you still support the legislation that was re-introduced in 2007 (S 215), which gives the FCC the power to punish “discriminatory” conduct by broadband providers?
McCain: In general, I believe that we need to move to a different model for enforcing competition on the Internet. Its focus should be on policing clearly anticompetitive behavior and consumer predation. In such a dynamic and innovative setting, it is not desirable for regulators to be required to anticipate market developments, intervene in the market, and try to micromanage American business and innovation.Telecommunications companies such as AT&T have been accused in court of opening their networks to the government in violation of federal privacy law. Do you support giving them retroactive immunity for any illicit cooperation with intelligence agencies or law enforcement, which was proposed by the Senate Intelligence Committee this fall (S 2248)?
McCain: The struggle against Islamic fundamentalism is the transcendent foreign-policy challenge of our time. I am committed to winning this battle, enhancing the stature of the United States as beacon of global hope, and to preserving the personal, economic, and political freedoms that are the proud legacy of the great sacrifices of our fathers.Every effort in this struggle and other efforts must be done according to American principles and the rule of law. When companies provide private records of Americans to the government without proper legal subpoena, warrants, or other legal orders, their heart may be in the right place, but their actions undermine our respect for the law.
I am also a strong supporter of protecting the privacy of Americans. The issues raised by S 2248, and the events and actions by all parties that the preceded it, reach to the core of our principles. They merit careful and deliberate consideration, fact-finding, and exploration of options. That process should be allowed to proceed before drawing conclusions that may prove to be premature.
If retroactive immunity passes, it should be done with explicit statements that this is not a blessing, there should be oversight hearings to understand what happened, and Congress should include provisions that ensure that Americans’ private records will not be dealt with like that again.
The 1998 Digital Millennium Copyright Act’s section restricting the “circumvention” of copy protection measures is supported by many copyright holders but has been criticized by some technologists as hindering innovation. Would you support changing the DMCA to permit Americans to make a single backup copy of a DVD, Blu-ray Disc DVD, HD DVD, or video game disc they have legally purchased?
McCain: The Internet and digital technology have provided widespread access to enormous quantities of information. This, in turn, made it necessary to update our copyright laws in 1998 to protect the rights of copyright holders to keep pace with the technological advances that characterize the Information Age.As digitization of commerce, education, entertainment, and a host of other online applications proceeds, international copyright agreements have to be maintained and updated while protecting the rights of copyright owners.
I believe now, as I did then, that knowledge and ideas are central parts of what make the U.S. economy productive and competitive. It is vital that this intellectual property be protected and defended. However, we must ensure that such protections are never so onerous as to stifle the very innovation they strive to safeguard.
The Department of Homeland Security has proposed extensive Real ID requirements restricting which state ID cards can be accepted at federal buildings and airports. Do you support those regulations as written, would you want to repeal Real ID, or would you prefer something in between?
McCain: The 9/11 Commission recommended that the federal government set standards for the issuance of birth certificates and sources of identification, such as driver’s licenses. Consistent with these recommendations, the Real ID act established federal guidelines to prevent fraud in the issuance and acquisition of identity documents. I support full implementation of Real ID but understand that states need to be given enough time and funding to implement the requirements.The Federal Trade Commission is reviewing the proposed merger of Google and DoubleClick. Some members of Congress have raised privacy concerns, while others have said the deal should proceed. What are your views? (Editors’ note: We posed this question before the FTC gave the merger unconditional approval on December 20.)
McCain: It is premature to draw conclusions on this specific transaction, prior to the conclusion of the FTC review. I am, however, a vocal advocate of antitrust laws and ensuring that antitrust agencies have the resources they need to protect the competitiveness of the American economy.Although I support the oversight capacity of the U.S. Congress, I believe that oversight should not be confused with the micromanagement of individual regulatory decisions and processes. I have encouraged the FTC to investigate this and other important mergers carefully to ensure the interests of competitiveness.
Recently, there’s been a lot of talk about sex offenders using social-networking sites. What, if any, new federal laws are needed in this area?
McCain: The Internet has a dark side–it can expose children to obscene, graphic, and violent content. Government must develop solutions that balance civil liberties against the compelling interest to protect the innocence of our children.While the first line of defense will always involve responsible parents, when it comes to protecting children, government must not shrink from its responsibilities. One thing that must be absolutely clear is that child pornographers and those who would prey on children will find no quarter in the darker recesses of the Internet. Government must implement and aggressively enforce laws to hunt down and jail peddlers of child pornography and sexual predators who stalk children on the Net.
This is why I have long fought to keep the Internet safe for our children…(and) recently sponsored the Safe Act of 2007, designed to clarify and enhance the current system for electronic-service providers to report online child pornography, and make the failure to report child pornography a federal crime.
I have also aggressively sought to curtail the online activities of sex offenders by sponsoring legislation to ensure that such criminals register additional information such as e-mail addresses on sex offender registries.
The Bush administration has supported legally requiring Internet service providers, and perhaps search engines and social-networking Web sites as well, to keep logs on who their users are and what they do. Do you support federal legislation, such as HR 837, to mandate data retention?
McCain: I continue to study the legislation in particular and the issue in general. It is apparent that some well-informed analysts in the ISP, tech, and privacy communities are skeptical of the feasibility and value of this proposal.At the same time, other interested parties, such as the National Center for Missing & Exploited Children, support the approach taken in the legislation. I understand both perspectives, believe that further study and alternative proposals are worth exploring, and look forward to finding the best path forward for all those involved.
Do you support enacting federal laws providing for any or all of the following: a) a permanent research-and-development tax credit, b) a permanent moratorium on Internet access taxes, and c) an increase in the current limits on H-1B visas?
McCain: We stand on the threshold of a new era: the innovation age. New information and communications technologies are the leading edge of technology innovations that will permeate every aspect of our society, and I am committed to federal policies that ensure America’s competitive edge in technology and innovation. Maintaining our tech edge requires robust basic research and sustained development efforts.I will support innovation by funding basic research, and reforming and making permanent the R&D tax credit. My leadership first kept the Internet tax-free, I recently sponsored legislation that extended that tax ban for seven years, and I seek to permanently ban taxing access to this source of innovation and growth.
I continue to be a strong supporter of H-1B expansion, but mere expansion is not enough. Reforms should eliminate the artificial limits and allow the Department of Labor to set a level of visas appropriate for market conditions.
We have to know: what’s your favorite gadget?
McCain: My slim, stylish gold Razr phone and I are inseparable.Obama And Huckabee win in Iowa
Todd Heisler/The New York TimesSupporters of Mike Huckabee at a caucus event in Des Moines.
January 3, 2008Obama and Huckabee Win in Iowa Vote By JOHN M. BRODER and ADAM NAGOURNEYSenator Barack Obama won the Iowa Democratic caucuses tonight in a stunning show of strength by a young African-American candidate who was virtually unknown to America three years ago. He defeated Senator Hillary Rodham Clinton, the former first lady, and former Senator John Edwards, the Democrats’ vice presidential nominee in 2004 by a substantial margin.
On the Republican side, Mike Huckabee, the folksy former Arkansas governor and Southern Baptist preacher, defeated the vastly better funded and organized Mitt Romney of Massachusetts, riding a wave of support by evangelical Christians who said they were drawn to Mr. Huckabee because they believed he shared their values.
The Iowa caucuses drew intense public interest and record turnout on the Democratic side, which featured three compelling candidates waging a fierce campaign that turned on the question of change versus experience. Democratic caucusgoers strongly endorsed Mr. Obama’s vow to change the nature of politics in Washington, decisively preferring his case to Mrs. Clinton’s emphasis on her experience in public life as a senator and the spouse of a president and a governor.
Mr. Romney conceded early in the evening after falling more than 10 percentage points behind Mr. Huckabee. Mr. Romney, who outspent Mr. Huckabee by more than four to one, conceded in an interview on Fox News. “Congratulations on the first round to Mike,” he said. But he described Iowa as the first inning of a “50-inning ballgame” and vowed to stay in it until the end.
Mr. Romney sought to frame his defeat as something of a comeback, saying he had trailed Mr. Huckabee by more than 20 points a few weeks ago. “I’ve been pleased that I’ve been able to make up ground, and I intend to keep making up ground, not just here but across the country,” he said.
The crowd at Huckabee headquarters was ebullient as television news programs called the race. One man shouted “serves you right for the negative ads” as Mr. Romney conceded in an interview on Fox News, and applause went up again when newscasters talked about Mr. Huckabee’s success turning out his evangelical base. Mr. Huckabee is expected to board a chartered jet for New Hamphire at 11:30 this evening — something that is almost an extravagance for his bare-bones campaign.
In a caucus at the Plymouth Congregational Church in Des Moines, a record 454 Democrats appeared. The enthusiastic crowd heavily favored Senator Barack Obama of Illinois. Jon Muller, 42, the chief financial officer of an education nonprofit group, was one of the Obama backers.
“One of the charges against Iowa is that we don’t really represent the rest of the country,” he said, alluding to the fact that blacks form less than three percent of the caucus participants. “Here’s a chance to make a statement about the inclusiveness of Iowa.”
A sample of early arrivals at the Democratic caucus sites told interviewers that the war in Iraq was the most important issue facing the country, followed closely by the economy and health care. A slim majority of the sample of Democratic caucusgoers said that they were looking for a candidate who could bring about needed change, while only one in five cited experience as the most important factor in deciding whom to support.
Those who cited health care as the top issue tended to support Mrs. Clinton, who also attracted strong support from older voters and women.
Those who decided whom to support in the last three days tended to back former Mr. Edwards.
About a third of Republicans interviewed before they cast their votes cited illegal immigration as the most important issue facing the country, followed by the economy and terrorism. The Republican sample included nearly 60 percent who identified themselves as evangelical Christians, who expressed support for Mr. Huckabee by a two-to-one margin over Mr. Romney.
Those who make up their minds in the past three days tended to support Mr. Romney.
As the first state to express its presidential preferences, Iowa has gained outsized importance even though relatively small numbers of its citizens turn out for the caucuses, which on the Democratic side, in particular, are conducted under arcane rules that reflect intensity of devotion to a candidate as much as sheer numbers of supporters.
Candidates of both parties spent much of the final days of the race trying to minimize expectations. The race on the Democratic side featured three prominent candidates, Senators Obama of Illinois and Clinton and former senator Edwards of North Carolina, each of whom had hopes of winning and fears of coming in third.
As the costliest campaign in the three-decade history of the Iowa caucuses headed to an unpredictable finish, thousands of volunteers and campaign aides from across the country descended on neighborhoods and towns to coax voters to caucus gatherings. Politics dominated the radio and television airwaves, with advertisements back to back from morning until night.
The most sophisticated presidential campaigns that have ever been waged in Iowa — fully engaged for much of the year — ended in a flurry of old-fashioned get-out-the-vote efforts. The Clinton campaign, for example, has enlisted 5,000 drivers to ferry voters to the caucuses, particularly elderly women, who form a critical well of support.
In the end, after a year of political speeches and nearly $35 million in Iowa television advertising, the most important work in the hours before the caucuses was taking place far away from the candidates. Campaigns established telephone hotlines designed to direct voters to their specific precincts.
The results in the Democratic caucuses do not reflect the actual percentage of people who expressed a preference for a particular candidate. Rather, they are the percentage of delegates allocated to each of the candidates based on a complex formula; the Democratic Party does not release the actual number of Democrats who caucus for each candidate.
The Republican results reflect a direct count of the preferences expressed by those who participated in the Republican caucuses.
Mirroring the unusual rush of the nominating calendar — the primary in New Hampshire is a mere five days away — the major candidates planned to pick up as soon as the caucus results were known and flew to New Hampshire to be on the ground for early morning rallies, television appearances and campaign stops. Mrs. Clinton’s campaign plane was scheduled to leave Iowa at midnight.
The one exception was Mr. Giuliani, who largely skipped the Iowa caucuses; he spent the day in Florida — the state where he has chosen to make his stand — and was heading to New Hampshire.
Reporting was contributed by Julie Bosman in Fort Madison, Cate Doty in Waterloo, Patrick Healy in Cedar Rapids, David D. Kirkpatrick in Fort Dodge, Michael Luo in Bettendorf, and Marc Santora in Derry, N.H.
Today’s Papers
The Jump Off
By Daniel Politi
Posted Thursday, Jan. 3, 2008, at 6:20 A.M. E.T.The New York Times, Washington Post, Los Angeles Times, and the Wall Street Journal‘s world-wide newsbox lead with Attorney General Michael Mukasey’s announcement that the Justice Department has opened a formal criminal investigation into the CIA’s destruction of interrogation videotapes. Mukasey said that after a preliminary inquiry that began Dec. 8, “there is a basis for initiating a criminal investigation of this matter.” The attorney general didn’t clarify what evidence might have been discovered or what crimes could be under investigation, but everyone agrees the main focus is likely to be obstruction of justice.
USA Today leads with news that the price of oil reached $100 a barrel yesterday for the first time. It didn’t stay there for long and ended up closing at $99.62. The NYT points out that the $100 mark apparently came courtesy of a “lone trader” who appeared to be “looking for vanity bragging rights.” Regardless, the price still increased $3.64 and USAT says it won’t be long before it reaches consumers, particularly since experts point out that gasoline prices usually rise in the spring.
Mukasey appointed John Durham, the No. 2 federal prosecutor in Connecticut, to lead the investigation. Both the LAT and NYT say that appointing someone from outside Washington was an “unusual move,” but everyone points out that it was a clear attempt to avoid any appearance of a conflict of interest. In fact, the U.S. attorney’s office in eastern Virginia, where the CIA’s headquarters is located, has recused itself from the case. The CIA’s inspector general also recused himself because he predicted that he would be called as a witness. No one has anything bad to say about Durham, a veteran prosecutor whom everyone describes as tough and relentless. He’s probably best known for leading an inquiry into allegations that FBI agents and police officers in Boston had ties with the mob.
The Post does point out that Durham is a registered Republican, but the LAT notes he’s largely seen as apolitical. Congressional Democrats criticized Mukasey’s decision not to name an independent special counsel, which means Durham won’t have the same broad powers as Patrick Fitzgerald, who recently investigated the leak of the identity of a CIA operative. Durham will report directly to the deputy attorney general, and the NYT points out the investigation will probably last several months and might not be over until after the end of the Bush presidency. Lawmakers vowed to press on with their own investigations, but the LAT says they will likely slow down as some witnesses could now be more reluctant to testify before Congress.
After so much waiting, it’s hard to believe it’s finally here. But it’s true; after the most expensive campaign in the history of the Iowa caucuses, tonight actual voters will state their preferences in a race that is still up in the air. All the papers front the last-minute efforts of the campaigns to convince Iowans that they should brave the subfreezing temperatures to caucus. The NYT points out that the vast difference in the level of excitement between the two parties was evident even on the last day as the Democratic contenders spoke to audiences of hundreds of people, while Republicans addressed much more intimate gatherings. The LAT says the Democratic candidates “shifted to a somewhat quieter tone after days of discord” and largely avoided mentioning their opponents by name.
On the Republican side, things were a bit more heated. Mike Huckabee suggested Mitt Romney was trying to buy an Iowa victory, and Romney criticized Huckabee for choosing to fly to California for an appearance on The Tonight Show With Jay Leno. The WP points out that some of the candidates were clearly turning their sights to New Hampshire, as Romney also criticized Sen. John McCain, who is his strongest rival in the Granite State. Sen. Barack Obama also seemed to be looking east as he made a plea to Republicans and independents. The NYT notes at the end of the story that “perhaps the biggest uncertainty” lies with Rep. Ron Paul, as some Republicans are worrying that he might turn out more supporters than anticipated.
The WP‘s Dan Balz has a helpful guide to the Iowa caucuses and lists eight questions that tonight’s contest could answer.
Back to Huckabee’s TV appearance for a moment. The NYT says the trip to California “added to the mystery behind his campaign strategy.” Also strange was that he didn’t seem to realize that he would have to cross a picket line to chat with Jay Leno. Huckabee appeared to be under the impression that the deal reached between the writers’ union and David Letterman’s production company applied to all the late-night shows. Huckabee “does not appear to be able to distinguish between Leno and Letterman and yet is running for president of the United States,” writes the Post‘s Lisa de Moraes. For her part, Clinton taped her appearance on Letterman’s Late Show so she didn’t have to leave Iowa.
The LAT catches late-breaking news out of Kenya, where police clashed with protesters who were gathering to stage the banned “million-man march” that was called by the opposition to protest the results of last week’s election. Police fired tear gas, but early-morning wire stories report that the crowds did not appear to be as big as many feared. The country’s main newspapers ran identical banner headlines: “Save Our Beloved Country.”
The NYT and LAT front, while the WP goes inside with, dramatic accounts that detail how a mob set fire to a church on Tuesday and killed up to 50 people. “The church turned into an oven,” says the LAT. The NYT notes that Western diplomats are trying to get the government and opposition leaders to the negotiating table, but neither seems open to compromise. “One of the most developed, promising countries in Africa has turned into a starter kit for disaster,” says the NYT.
The WP fronts, and everyone mentions, the latest out of Pakistan, where President Pervez Musharraf defended the decision to postpone the elections until Feb. 18 and announced that Scotland Yard will help investigate the killing of Benazir Bhutto. The WP points out that it’s unclear how much the Scotland Yard team will be able to contribute since the crime scene was compromised and there was no autopsy. The NYT says that the British investigators will probably concentrate on providing “technical support.”
In a strange op-ed piece, the LAT‘s Rosa Brooks tries to make a parallel between Bhutto passing on the leadership of her party to her son and the possibility that Clinton will be elected president. She even quotes Bilawal Bhutto’s Facebook profile: “I am not a politician or a great thinker. I’m merely a student.” The NYT‘s Lede blog revealed last night that the profile was a fake. Brooks isn’t alone as several news outlets also fell for the hoax.
Daniel Politi writes “Today’s Papers” for Slate. He can be reached at todayspapers@slate.com.Wednesday, January 02, 2008
Oil Hits $100 a Barrel for the First Time
January 2, 2008Oil Hits $100 a Barrel for the First Time By JAD MOUAWADOil prices reached the symbolic level of $100 a barrel for the first time on Wednesday, a long-awaited milestone in an era of rapidly escalating energy demand.
Crude oil futures for February delivery hit $100 on the New York Mercantile Exchange shortly after noon New York time, before falling back slightly. Oil prices, which had fallen to a low of $50 a barrel at the beginning of 2007, have quadrupled since 2003.
Futures settled at $99.62, up $3.64 on the day.
The rise in oil prices in recent years has been driven by an unprecedented surge in demand from the United States, China and other Asian and Middle Eastern countries. Booming economies have led to more consumption of oil-derived products like gasoline, jet fuel and diesel. Meanwhile, new oil supplies have struggled to catch up.
Oil markets have become increasingly volatile and unpredictable, with large swings in 2007 that analysts attributed partly to financial speculation, not just market fundamentals. Political tensions in the Middle East, where more than two-thirds of the world’s proven oil reserves are located, have also fueled the rise in prices.
Gasoline has lagged the rise in the price of oil. It stands at a nationwide average of $3.05 a gallon for regular grade, according to AAA, the automobile club. That is below the all-time peak in May of $3.23 a gallon, but it is 73 cents higher than at this time a year ago. Some analysts worry that gasoline could hit $4 a gallon by next spring if oil prices remain at high levels.
Oil is now within reach of its historic inflation-adjusted high reached in April 1980 in the aftermath of the Iranian revolution when oil prices jumped to the equivalent of $102.81 a barrel in today’s money.
Unlike the oil shocks of the 1970s and 1980s, which were caused by sudden interruptions in oil supplies from the Middle East, the latest surge is fundamentally different. Prices have risen steadily over several years because of a rise in demand for oil and gasoline in both developed and developing countries.
Gothic Monastery of Santa Clara-a-Velha
From Wikipedia’s newest articles:
- …that the Gothic Monastery of Santa Clara-a-Velha (pictured) in Coimbra, Portugal, stayed abandoned under mud and water for over 300 years before it was rescued in an archaeological intervention?
Human Rights Overview
..>
..>Human Rights Overview Dec 31, ’07 5:45 AM
by Sophie for group respecthumanlife..Human rights refers to “the basic rights and freedoms to which all humans are entitled, often held to include the right to life and liberty, freedom of thought and expression, and equality before the law.” The United Nations Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR) states, “All human beings are born free and equal in dignity and rights. They are endowed with reason and conscience and should act towards one another in a spirit of brotherhood.”
The modern human rights movement originates in World War II, but the concept can be identified in all major religions, cultures and philosophies. Ancient Hindu law (Manu Smriti), Confucianism, the Qu’ran and the Ten Commandments all outline some of the rights now included in the UDHR. The concept of natural law, guaranteeing natural rights despite varying human laws and customs, can be traced back to Ancient Greek philosophers, while Enlightenment philosophers suggest a social contract between the rulers and the ruled. The African concept of ubuntu is a cultural view of what it is to be human. Modern human rights thinking is descended from these many traditions of human values and beliefs.
Magna Carta or “Great Charter” was the world’s first document containing commitments by a sovereign to his people to respect certain legal rightsHistory of human rightsHuman rights in the ancient world
While it is known that the reforms of Urukagina of Lagash, the earliest known legal code (c. 2350 BC), must have addressed the concept of rights to some degree, the actual text of his decrees has not yet been found. The oldest legal codex extant today is the Neo-Sumerian Code of Ur-Nammu (ca. 2050 BC). Several other sets of laws were also issued in Mesopotamia, including the Code of Hammurabi (ca. 1780 BC), one of the most famous examples of this type of document_ It shows rules, and punishments if those rules are broken, on a variety of matters, including women’s rights, children’s rights and slave rights.
The prefaces of these codes invoked the Mesopotamian gods for divine sanction. Societies have often derived the origins of human rights in religious documents. The Vedas, the Bible, the Qur’an and the Analects of Confucius are also among the early written sources that address questions of people’s duties, rights, and responsibilities.
Persian Empire
The Achaemenid Persian Empire of ancient Iran established unprecedented principles of human rights in the 6th century BC under Cyrus the Great. After his conquest of Babylon in 539 BC, the king issued the Cyrus cylinder, discovered in 1879 and recognized by many today as the first human rights document_ The cylinder declared that citizens of the empire would be allowed to practice their religious beliefs freely. It also abolished slavery, so all the palaces of the kings of Persia were built by paid workers in an era where slaves typically did such work. These two reforms were reflected in the biblical books of Chronicles, Nehemiah, and Ezra, which state that Cyrus released the followers of Judaism from slavery and allowed them to migrate back to their land. The cylinder now lies in the British Museum, and a replica is kept at the United Nations Headquarters.
In the Persian Empire, citizens of all religions and ethnic groups were also given the same rights, while women had the same rights as men. The Cyrus cylinder also documents the protection of the rights to liberty and security, freedom of movement, the right of property, and economic and social rights.
Maurya Empire
The Maurya Empire of ancient India established unprecedented principles of civil rights in the 3rd century BC under Ashoka the Great. After his brutal conquest of Kalinga in circa 265 BC, he felt remorse for what he had done, and as a result, adopted Buddhism. From then, Ashoka, who had been described as “the cruel Ashoka” eventually came to be known as “the pious Ashoka”. During his reign, he pursued an official policy of nonviolence (ahimsa) and the protection of human rights, as his chief concern was the happiness of his subjects. The unnecessary slaughter or mutilation of animals was immediately abolished, such as sport hunting and branding. Ashoka also showed mercy to those imprisoned, allowing them outside one day each year, and offered common citizens free education at universities. He treated his subjects as equals regardless of their religion, politics or caste, and constructed free hospitals for both humans and animals. Ashoka defined the main principles of nonviolence, tolerance of all sects and opinions, obedience to parents, respect for teachers and priests, being liberal towards friends, humane treatment of servants, and generosity towards all. These reforms are described in the Edicts of Ashoka.
In the Maurya Empire, citizens of all religions and ethnic groups also had rights to freedom, tolerance, and equality. The need for tolerance on an egalitarian basis can be found in the Edicts of Ashoka, which emphasize the importance of tolerance in public policy by the government. The slaughter or capture of prisoners of war was also condemned by Ashoka. Slavery was also non-existent in ancient India.
Early Islamic Caliphate
- Many reforms in human rights took place under Islam between 610 and 661, including the period of Muhammad‘s mission and the rule of the four immediate successors who established the Rashidain Caliphate. Historians generally agree that Muhammad preached against what he saw as the social evils of his day, and that Islamic social reforms in areas such as social security, family structure, slavery, and the rights of women and ethnic minorities improved on what was present in existing Arab society at the time. For example, according to Bernard Lewis, Islam “from the first denounced aristocratic privilege, rejected hierarchy, and adopted a formula of the career open to the talents.” John Esposito sees Muhammad as a reformer who condemned practices of the pagan Arabs such as female infanticide, exploitation of the poor, usury, murder, false contracts, and theft. Bernard Lewis believes that the egalitarian nature of Islam “represented a very considerable advance on the practice of both the Greco-Roman and the ancient Persian world.”
Muhammad made it the responsibility of the Islamic government to provide food and clothing, on a reasonable basis, to captives, regardless of their religion. If the prisoners were in the custody of a person, then the responsibility was on the individual. Lewis states that Islam brought two major changes to ancient slavery which were to have far-reaching consequences. “One of these was the presumption of freedom; the other, the ban on the enslavement of free persons except in strictly defined circumstances,” Lewis continues. The position of the Arabian slave was “enormously improved”: the Arabian slave “was now no longer merely a chattel but was also a human being with a certain religious and hence a social status and with certain quasi-legal rights.”
Esposito states that reforms in women’s rights affected marriage, divorce, and inheritance. Women were not accorded with such legal status in other cultures, including the West, until centuries later. The Oxford Dictionary of Islam states that the general improvement of the status of Arab women included prohibition of female infanticide and recognizing women’s full personhood. “The dowry, previously regarded as a bride-price paid to the father, became a nuptial gift retained by the wife as part of her personal property.” Under Islamic law, marriage was no longer viewed as a “status” but rather as a “contract“, in which the woman’s consent was imperative. “Women were given inheritance rights in a patriarchal society that had previously restricted inheritance to male relatives.” Annemarie Schimmel states that “compared to the pre-Islamic position of women, Islamic legislation meant an enormous progress; the woman has the right, at least according to the letter of the law, to administer the wealth she has brought into the family or has earned by her own work.” William Montgomery Watt states that Muhammad, in the historical context of his time, can be seen as a figure who testified on behalf of women’s rights and improved things considerably. Watt explains: “At the time Islam began, the conditions of women were terrible – they had no right to own property, were supposed to be the property of the man, and if the man died everything went to his sons.” Muhammad, however, by “instituting rights of property ownership, inheritance, education and divorce, gave women certain basic safeguards.” Haddad and Esposito state that “Muhammad granted women rights and privileges in the sphere of family life, marriage, education, and economic endeavors, rights that help improve women’s status in society.”
Sociologist Robert Bellah (Beyond belief) argues that Islam in its seventh-century origins was, for its time and place, “remarkably modern…in the high degree of commitment, involvement, and participation expected from the rank-and-file members of the community.” This because, he argues, that Islam emphasized on the equality of all Muslims, where leadership positions were open to all. Dale Eickelman writes that Bellah suggests “the early Islamic community placed a particular value on individuals, as opposed to collective or group responsibility.”
Human rights in early modern era
The conquest of the Americas in the 16th century by the Spanish resulted in vigorous debate about human rights in Spain. The debate from 1550-51 between Las Casas and Juan Ginés de Sepúlveda at Valladolid was probably the first on the topic of human rights in European history. Several 17th and 18th century European philosophers, most notably John Locke, developed the concept of natural rights, the notion that people possess certain rights by virtue of being human. Though Locke believed natural rights were derived from divinity since humans were creations of God, his ideas were important in the development of the modern notion of rights. Lockean natural rights did not rely on citizenship nor any law of the state, nor were they necessarily limited to one particular ethnic, cultural or religious group.
Two major revolutions occurred that century in the United States (1776) and in France (1789). The Virginia Declaration of Rights of 1776 sets up a number of fundamental rights and freedoms. The later United States Declaration of Independence includes concepts of natural rights and famously states “that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their creator with certain unalienable rights, that among these are life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness.” Similarly, the French Declaration of the Rights of Man and Citizen defines a set of individual and collective rights of the people. These are held to be universal – not only to French citizens but to all men without exception.
1800AD to World War I
Philosophers such as Thomas Paine, John Stuart Mill and Hegel expanded on the theme of universality during the 18th and 19th centuries. In 1831 William Lloyd Garrison wrote in a newspaper called The Liberator that he was trying to enlist his readers in “the great cause of human rights” so the term human rights probably came into use sometime between Paine’s The Rights of Man and Garrison’s publication. In 1849 a contemporary, Henry David Thoreau, wrote about human rights in his treatise On the Duty of Civil Disobedience which was later influential on human rights and civil rights thinkers. United States Supreme Court Justice David Davis, in his 1867 opinion for Ex Parte Milligan, wrote “By the protection of the law, human rights are secured; withdraw that protection and they are at the mercy of wicked rulers or the clamor of an excited people.”
Many groups and movements have managed to achieve profound social changes over the course of the 20th century in the name of human rights. In Western Europe and North America, labour unions brought about laws granting workers the right to strike, establishing minimum work conditions and forbidding or regulating child labour. The women’s rights movement succeeded in gaining for many women the right to vote. National liberation movements in many countries succeeded in driving out colonial powers. One of the most influential was Mahatma Gandhi‘s movement to free his native India from British rule. Movements by long-oppressed racial and religious minorities succeeded in many parts of the world, among them the civil rights movement, and more recent diverse identity politics movements, on behalf of women and minorities in the United States.
The foundation of the International Committee of the Red Cross, the 1864 Lieber Code and the first of the Geneva Conventions in 1864 laid the foundations of International humanitarian law, to be further developed following the two World Wars.
Between World War I and World War II
The League of Nations was established in 1919 at the negotiations over the Treaty of Versailles following the end of World War I. The League’s goals included disarmament, preventing war through collective security, settling disputes between countries through negotiation, diplomacy and improving global welfare. Enshrined in its Charter was a mandate to promote many of the rights which were later included in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights.
The League of Nations had mandates to support many of the former colonies of the Western European colonial powers during their transition from colony to independent state.
Established as an agency of the League of Nations, and now part of United Nations, the International Labour Organization also had a mandate to promote and safeguard certain of the rights later included in the UDHR:
..>
“ the primary goal of the ILO today is to promote opportunities for women and men to obtain decent and productive work, in conditions of freedom, equity, security and human dignity. “ ..>—Report by the Director General for the International Labour Conference 87th Session
After World War II
“It is not a treaty…[In the future, it] may well become the international Magna Carta.” Eleanor Roosevelt with the Spanish text of the Universal Declaration in 1949Rights in War and the Geneva Conventions
- As a result of efforts by Henry Dunant, the founder of the International Committee of the Red Cross, the Geneva Conventions came into being between 1864 and 1949. The conventions safeguard the human rights of individuals involved in conflict, and follow on from the 1899 and 1907 Hague Conventions, the international community’s first attempt to define laws of war. Despite first being framed before World War II, the conventions were revised as a result of World War II and readopted by the international community in 1949.
The Geneva Conventions are:
- First Geneva Convention “for the Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in Armed Forces in the Field” (first adopted in 1864, last revision in 1949)
- Second Geneva Convention</STRONG> “for the Amelioration of the Condition of Wounded, Sick and Shipwrecked Members of Armed Forces at Sea” (first adopted in 1949, successor of the 1907 Hague Convention X)
- Third Geneva Convention “relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War” (first adopted in 1929, last revision in 1949)
- Fourth Geneva Convention “relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War” (first adopted in 1949, based on parts of the 1907 Hague Convention IV)
In addition, there are three additional amendment protocols to the Geneva Convention:
- Protocol I (1977): Protocol Additional to the Geneva Conventions of 12 August 1949, and relating to the Protection of Victims of International Armed Conflicts. As of 12 January 2007 it had been ratified by 167 countries.
- Protocol II (1977): Protocol Additional to the Geneva Conventions of 12 August 1949, and relating to the Protection of Victims of Non-International Armed Conflicts. As of 12 January 2007 it had been ratified by 163 countries.
- Protocol III (2005): Protocol Additional to the Geneva Conventions of 12 August 1949, and relating to the Adoption of an Additional Distinctive Emblem. As of June 2007 it had been ratified by 17 countries and signed but not yet ratified by an additional 68 countries.
All four conventions were last revised and ratified in 1949, based on previous revisions and partly on some of the 1907 Hague Conventions. Later conferences have added provisions prohibiting certain methods of warfare and addressing issues of civil wars. Nearly all 200 countries of the world are “signatory” nations, in that they have ratified these conventions. The International Committee of the Red Cross is the controlling body of the Geneva conventions (see below).
Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Appalled by the barbarism of World War II, the United Nations General Assembly adopted the Universal Declaration of Human Rights in 1948. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights (abbreviated UDHR) is a non-binding declaration adopted by the United Nations General Assembly (A/RES/217, 1948-12-10 at Palais de Chaillot, Paris). The UDHR urged member nations to promote a number of human, civil, economic and social rights, asserting these rights are part of the “foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world”. The declaration was the first international legal effort to limit the behavior of states and press upon them duties to their citizens following the model of the rights-duty duality.
..>
“ …recognition of the inherent dignity and of the equal and inalienable rights of all members of the human family is the foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world “ ..>—Preamble to the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, 1948
The UDHR was researched and written by a committee of international experts on human rights, including representatives from all continents and all major religions, and drawing on consultation with leaders such as Mahatma Gandhi. Canadian Law professor John Humphrey, one of the primary authors of the UDHR, ensured that it includes both civil and political rights and economic, social and cultural rights. It was predicated on the assumption that basic human rights are indivisible and that the different types of rights listed are inextricably linked. Though this principle was not opposed by any member states at the time of adoption (the declaration was adopted unanimously, with the abstention of the Soviet bloc, Apartheid South Africa and Saudi Arabia), this principle was later subject to significant challenges.
The onset of the Cold War soon after the UDHR was conceived brought to the fore divisions over the inclusion of both econonic and social rights and civil and political rights in the declaration. Capitalist states tended to place strong emphasis on civil and political rights (such as freedom of association and expression), and were reluctant to include economic and social rights (such as the right to work and the right to join a union). Socialist states placed much greater importance on economic and social rights and argued strongly for their inclusion.
The authors of the UDHR and many states wanted to go beyond the declaration of rights and create legal covenants which would put greater pressure on states to follow human rights norms. Because of the divisions over which rights to include, and because some states refused to ratify any treaties including certain rights (for example, the US refused to ratify any treaty including legally enforceable economic and social rights). Despite the Soviet bloc and a number of developing countries arguing strongly for the inclusion of all rights in a so-called Unity Resolution, the rights enshrined in the UDHR were split into two separate covenants, allowing states to adopt some rights and derogate others. Though this allowed the covenants to be created, it subverted the principle that all rights are linked which was central to the UDHR.
Although the UDHR is a non-binding resolution, it is now considered to be part of international customary law.
Human Rights Treaties
In 1966, the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR) and the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (ICESCR) were adopted by the United Nations, between making the rights contained in the UDHR binding on all states. However they only came into force in 1976 when they were ratified by a sufficient number of countries (despite achieving the ICCPR, a covenant including no economic or social rights, the US only ratified the ICCPR in 1992). The ICESCR commits 155 state parties to work toward the granting of economic, social, and cultural rights (ESCR) to individuals.
Since then numerous other treaties (pieces of legislation) have been offered at the international level. They are generally know as human rights instruments. Some of the most significant are:
- Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide (adopted 1948, entry into force: 1951)
- Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (CERD) (adopted 1966, entry into force: 1969)
- Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW) (entry into force: 1981)
- United Nations Convention Against Torture (CAT) (adopted 1984, entry into force: 1984)
- Convention on the Rights of the Child (CRC) (adopted 1989, entry into force: 1989)
- International Convention on the Protection of the Rights of All Migrant Workers and Members of their Families (ICRMW) (adopted 1990)
- Rome Statute of the International Criminal Court (ICC) (entry into force: 2002)
Philosophies of human rights
Several theoretical approaches have been advanced to explain how and why human rights become part of social expectations.
One of the oldest Western philosophies on human rights is that they are a product of a natural law, stemming from different philosophical or religious grounds.
Other theories hold that human rights codify moral behavior which is a human social product developed by a process of biological and social evolution (associated with Hume). Human rights are also described as a sociological pattern of rule setting (as in the sociological theory of law and the work of Weber). These approaches include the notion that individuals in a society accept rules from legitimate authority in exchange for security and economic advantage (as in Rawls) – a social contract.
Natural rights
Natural law theories base human rights on a “natural” moral, religious or even biological order which is independent of transitory human laws or traditions.
Socrates and his philosophic heirs, Plato and Aristotle, posited the existence of natural justice or natural right (dikaion physikon, –??–??? –?–????, Latin ius naturale). Of these, Aristotle is often said to be the father of natural law, although evidence for this is due largely to the interpretations of his work of Thomas Aquinas.
The development of this tradition of natural justice into one of natural law is usually attributed to the Stoics.
Some of the early Church fathers sought to incorporate the until then pagan concept of natural law into Christianity. Natural law theories have featured greatly in the philosophies of Thomas Aquinas, Francisco Suárez, Richard Hooker, Thomas Hobbes, Hugo Grotius, Samuel von Pufendorf, and John Locke.
In the Seventeenth Century Thomas Hobbes founded a contractualist theory of legal positivism on what all men could agree upon: what they sought (happiness) was subject to contention, but a broad consensus could form around what they feared (violent death at the hands of another). The natural law was how a rational human being, seeking to survive and prosper, would act. It was discovered by considering humankind’s natural rights, whereas previously it could be said that natural rights were discovered by considering the natural law. In Hobbes’ opinion, the only way natural law could prevail was for men to submit to the commands of the sovereign. In this lay the foundations of the theory of a social contract between the governed and the governor.
Hugo Grotius based his philosophy of international law on natural law. He wrote that “even the will of an omnipotent being cannot change or abrogate” natural law, which “would maintain its objective validity even if we should assume the impossible, that there is no God or that he does not care for human affairs.” (De iure belli ac pacis, Prolegomeni XI). This is the famous argument etiamsi daremus (non esse Deum), that made natural law no longer dependent on theology.
John Locke incorporated natural law into many of his theories and philosophy, especially in Two Treatises of Government. Locke turned Hobbes’ prescription around, saying that if the ruler went against natural law and failed to protect “life, liberty, and property,” people could justifiably overthrow the existing state and create a new one.
The Belgian philosopher of law Frank van Dun is one among those who are elaborating a secular conception of natural law in the liberal tradition. There are also emerging and secular forms of natural law theory that define human rights as derivative of the notion of universal human dignity.
The term “human rights” has replaced the term “natural rights” in popularity, because the rights are less and less frequently seen as requiring natural law for their existence.
Social contract
The Swiss-French philosopher Jean-Jacques Rousseau suggested the existence of a hypothetical social contract where a group of free individuals agree for the sake of the common good to form institutions to govern themselves. This echoed the earlier postulation by Thomas Hobbes that there is a contract between the government and the governed – and led to John Locke‘s theory that a failure of the government to secure rights is a failure which justifies the removal of the government.
Reciprocity
The Golden Rule, or the ethic of reciprocity states that one must do unto others as one would be treated themselves; the principble being that reciprocal recognition and respect of rights ensures that one’s own rights will be protected. This principle can be found in all the world’s major religions in only slightly differing forms, and was enshrined in the “Declaration Toward a Global Ethic” by the Parliament of the World’s Religions in 1993.
Other theories of human rights
Some have attempted to construct an interests theory defense of human rights. For example the philosopher John Finnis argues that human rights are justifiable on the grounds of their instrumental value in creating the necessary conditions for human well-being. Some interest-theorists also justify the duty to respect the rights of other individuals on grounds of self-interest (rather than altruism or benevolence).
The biological theory considers the comparative reproductive advantage of human social behavior based on empathy and altruism in the context of natural selection.
Concepts in human rights
Indivisibility and categorization of rights
The most common categorization of human rights is to split them into civil and political rights, and economic, social and cultural rights.
Civil and political rights are enshrined in articles 3 to 21 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and in the ICCPR. Economic, social and cultural rights are enshrined in articles 22 to 28 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and in the ICESCR. The UDHR included both economic, social and cultural rights and civil and political rights because it was based on the principle that the different rights could only successfully exist in combination:
..>
“ The ideal of free human beings enjoying civil and political freedom and freedom from fear and want can only be achieved if conditions are created whereby everyone may enjoy his civil and political rights, as well as his social, economic and cultural rights “ ..>—International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights and the International Covenant on Economic Social and Cultural Rights, 1966
This is held to be true because without civil and political rights the public cannot assert their economic, social and cultural rights. Similarly, without livelihoods and a working society, the public cannot assert or make use of civil or political rights (known as the full belly thesis)
Although accepted by the signaturies to the UDHR, most of them do not in practise give equal weight to the different types of rights. Western cultures have often given priority to civil and political rights, sometimes at the expense of economic and social rights such as the right to work, to education, health and housing. For example, in the United States there is no universal access to healthcare free at the point of use. That is not to say that Western cultures have overlooked these rights entirely (the welfare states that exist in Western Europe are evidence of this). Similarly the ex Soviet bloc countries and Asian countries have tended to give priority to economic, social and cultural rights, but have often failed to provide civil and political rights.
Opponents of the indivisibility of human rights argue that economic, social and cultural rights are fundamentally different from civil and political rights and require completely different approaches. Economic, social and cultural rights are argued to be:
- positive, meaning that they require active provision of entitlements by the state (as opposed to the state being required only to prevent the breach of rights)
- resource-intensive, meaning that they are expensive and difficult to provide
- progressive, meaning that they will take significant time to implement
- vague, meaning they cannot be quantitatively measured, and whether they are adequately provided or not is difficult to judge
- ideologically divisive/political, meaning that there is no consensus on what should and shouldn’t be provided as a right
- socialist, as opposed to capitalist
- non-justiciable, meaning that their provision, or the breach of them, cannot be judged in a court of law
- aspirations or goals, as opposed to real ‘legal’ rights
Similarly civil and political rights are categorized as:
- negative, meaning the state can protect them simply by taking no action
- cost-free
- immediate, meaning they can be immediately provided if the state decides to
- precise, meaning their provision is easy to judge and measure
- non-ideological/non-political
- capitalist
- justiciable
- real ‘legal’ rights
In The No-Nonsense Guide to Human Rights Olivia Ball and Paul Gready argue that for both civil and political rights and economic, social and cultural rights it is easy to find examples which do not fit into the above categorisation. Amongst several others, they highlight the fact that maintaining a judicial system, a fundamental requirement of the civil right to due process before the law and other rights relating to judicial process, is positive, resourse-intensive, progressive and vague, while the social right to housing is precise, justiciable and can be a real ‘legal’ right.
Another categorization, offered by Karel Vasak, is that there are three generations of human rights: first-generation civil and political rights (right to life and political participation), second-generation economic, social and cultural rights (right to subsistence) and third-generation solidarity rights (right to peace, right to clean environment). Out of these generations, the third generation is the most debated and lacks both legal and political recognition. This categorisation is at odds with the indivisibility of rights, as it implicitly states that some rights can exist without others. Prioritisation of rights for pragmatic reasons is however a widely accepted neccessity. Human rights expert Philip Alston argues:
..>
“ If every possible human rights element is deemed to be essential or necessary, then nothing will be treated as though it is truly important. “ ..>—Philip Alston
He, and others, urge caution with prioritisation of rights:
..>
“ …the call for prioritizing is not to suggest that any obvious violations of rights can be ignored. “ ..>—Philip Alston
..>
“ Priorities, where necessary, should adhere to core concepts (such as reasonable attempts at progressive realization) and principles (such as non-discrimination, equality and participation. “ ..>—Olivia Ball, Paul Gready
Some human rights are said to be “inalienable rights.” The term inalienable rights (or unalienable rights) refers to “a set of human rights that are fundamental, are not awarded by human power, and cannot be surrendered.”
The adherence to the principle of indivisibility by the international community was reaffirmed in 1995:
..>
“ All human rights are universal, indivisible and interdependent and related. The internationl community must treat human rights globally in a fair and equal manner, on the same footing, and with the same emphasis “ ..>—Vienna Declaration and Program of Action, World Conference on Human Rights, 1995
This statement was again endorsed at the 2005 World Summit in New York (paragraph 121).
Universalism vs cultural relativism
The UDHR enshrines, by definition, rights that apply to all humans equally, whichever geographical location, state, race or culture they belong to.
Proponents of cultural relativism suggest that human rights are not all universal, and indeed conflict with some cultures and threaten their survival.
Rights which are most often contested with relativistic arguments are the rights of women. For example Female genital mutilation occurs in different cultures in Africa, Asia and South America. It is not mandated by any religion, but has become a tradition in many cultures. It is considered a violation of women’s and girl’s rights by much of the international community, and is outlawed in some countries.
Universalism has been described by some as cultural, economic or political imperialism. In particular, the concept of human rights is often claimed to be fundamentally rooted in a politically liberal outlook which, although generally accepted in Europe, Japan or North America, is not necessarily taken as standard elsewhere.
For example, in 1981, the Iranian representative to the United Nations, Said Rajaie-Khorassani, articulated the position of his country regarding the Universal Declaration of Human Rights by saying that the UDHR was “a secular understanding of the Judeo-Christian tradition”, which could not be implemented by Muslims without trespassing the Islamic law. The former Prime Ministers of Singapore, Lee Kuan Yew, and of Malaysia, Mahathir bin Mohamad both claimed in the 1990s that Asian values were significantly different from western values and included a sense of loyalty and foregoing personal freedoms for the sake of social stability and prosperity, and therefore authoritarian government is more appropriate in Asia than democracy. This view is countered by Mahathirs former deputy:
..>
“ To say that freedom is Western or unAsian is to offend our traditions as well as our forefathers, who gave their lives in the struggle against tyranny and injustices. “ ..>—A Ibrabim in his keynote speech to the Asian Press Forum title Media and Society in Asia, 2 December 1994
and also by Singapore’s opposition leader Chee Soon Juan who states that it is racist to assert that Asians do not want human rights.
An appeal is often made to the fact that influential human rights thinkers, such as John Locke and John Stuart Mill, have all been Western and indeed that some were involved in the running of Empires themselves.
Relativistic arguments tend to neglect the fact that modern human rights are new to all cultures, dating back no further than the UDHR in 1948. They also don’t account for the fact that the UDHR was drafted by people from many different cultures and traditions, including a US Roman Catholic, a Chinese Confucian philosopher, a French zionist and a representative from the Arab League, amongst others, and drew upon advice from thinkers such as Mahatma Gandhi.
Michael Ignatieff</EM> has argued that cultural relativism is almost exclusively an argument used by those who wield power in cultures which commit human rights abuses, and that those who’s human rights are compromised are the powerless. This reflects the fact that the difficulty in judging universalism versus relativism lies in who is claiming to represent a particular culture.
Although the argument between universalism and relativism is far from complete, it is an academic discussion in that all international human rights instruments adhere to the principle that human rights are universally applicable. The 2005 World Summit reaffirmed the international community’s adherence to this principle:
..>
“ The universal nature of human rights and freedoms is beyond question. “ ..>—2005 World Summit, paragraph 120
Human rights vs national security
National loyalties have been described as a destructive influence on the human rights movement because they deny people’s innately similar human qualities. But others argue that state sovereignty is paramount, not least because it is often the state that has signed up to human rights treaties. Commentators’ positions in the argument for and against intervention and the use of force by states are influenced by whether they believe human rights are largely a legal or moral duty and whether they are of more cosmopolitan or nationalist persuasion.
With the exception of the non-derogable human rights (the four most important are the right to life, the right to be free from slavery, the right to be free from torture and the right to be free from retroactive application of penal laws), the UN recognises that human rights can be limited or even pushed aside during times of national emergency – although
..>
“ the emergency must be actual, affect the whole population and the threat must be to the very existence of the nation. The declaration of emergency must also be a last resort and a temporary measure “ ..>—United Nations. The Resource
Rights that cannot be derogated for reasons of national security in any circumstances are known as peremptory norms or jus cogens.
Legal instruments and jurisdiction
The human rights enshrined in the UDHR, the Geneva Conventions and the various enforced treaties of the United Nations are theoretically enforceable in law. In practice, many rights are are very difficult to legally enforce due to the absence of consensus on the application of certain rights, the lack of relevant national legislation or of bodies empowered to take legal action to enforce them.
There exist a number of internationally recognized organisations with worldwide mandate or jurisdiction over certain aspects of human rights:
- The International Court of Justice is the United Nations‘ primary judiciary body. It has worldwide jurisdiction.
- The International Criminal Court, though not recognised by all members of the UN, is the body responsible for investigating and punishing Crimes against humanity. It has worldwide jurisdiction, with a mandate to bring to justice perpetrators of crimes against humanity having occurred before its creation in 2002.
Both these courts exist to take action where the national legal system of a state is unable to try the case itself. If national law is able to safeguard human rights and punish those who breach human rights legislation, it has primary jurisdiction.
In over 110 countries National human rights institutions (NHRIs) have been set up to protect, promote or monitor human rights with jurisdiction in a given country. Not all of them are compliant with the United Nations advisory standards as set out in the 1993 Paris Principles, but the number and effect of these institutions is increasing.
A deconstructionist critique has been levied at the discourse of human rights by many scholars of critical legal studies. They argue that the logic of liberal human rights discourse is often circular and internally inconsistent, allowing for it to be easily manipulable. Moreover, they argue that human rights discourse often limits actors capacity to conceptualize radical, non-juridical, change.
State and Non-State Actors
Human rights are the responsibility of, and abuses are committed by, both state and non-state actors. Multi-national companies play an increasingly large role in the world, and are responsible for a large number of human rights abuses. Individuals can also be responsible, in particular for crimes against humanity. Although the legal and moral environment surrounding the actions of governments is reasonably well developed, that surrounding multi-national companies is both controversial and ill-defined. No international treaties exist to specifically cover the behaviour of companies with regard to human rights.
Theory of value and property
Henry of Ghent articulated the theory that every person has a property interest in their own body. John Locke uses the word property in both broad and narrow senses. In a broad sense, it covers a wide range of human interests and aspirations; more narrowly, it refers to material goods. He argues that property is a natural right and it is derived from labour.” In addition, property precedes government and government cannot “dispose of the estates of the subjects arbitrarily.” To deny valid property rights according to Locke is to deny human rights. The British philosopher had significant impacts upon the development of the Government of the UK and was central to the fundamental founding philosophy of the United States of America. Karl Marx later critiqued Locke’s theory of property in his social theory.
Reproductive rights are a subset of human rights relating to sexual reproduction and reproductive health, often held to include the right to control one’s reproductive functions, such as the right to reproduce (as in opposition to compulsory sterilization and forced contraception), as well as the right to not reproduce (including support for access to birth control and abortion), the rights to privacy, medical coverage, contraception, family planning and protection from discrimination, harassment and gender-oriented harm.
International discourse on reproductive rights first began with the United Nation’s 1968 International Conference on Human Rights. The sixteenth article of the Proclamation of Tehran states, “Parents have a basic human right to determine freely and responsibly the number and the spacing of their children.” Reproductive rights advocates work to secure affordable access to abortion, contraception, as well as education about contraception and sexually transmitted infections, and freedom from coerced sterilization and contraception, for both men and women. In addition, reproductive rights advocates endeavor to protect all women from harmful gender-based practices. Examples include cultural practices such as female genital cutting, or FGC, as well as state, customary and religious laws that contribute to women’s political and economic disenfranchisment.
Human rights violations
Human rights violations are abuses of people in ways that abuse any fundamental human rights. It is a term used when a government violates national or international law related to the protection of human rights. According to the Universal Declaration of Human Rights fundamental human rights are violated when, among other things:
..>
..>- A certain race, creed, or group is denied recognition as a “person”. (Articles 2 & 6)
- Men and women are not treated as equal. (Article 2)
- Different racial or religious groups are not treated as equal. (Article 2)
- Life, liberty or security of person is threatened. (Article 3)
- A person is sold as or used as a slave. (Article 4)
- Cruel, inhuman or degrading punishment is used on a person (such as torture). (Article 5) (See also Prisoners’ rights)
- Victims of abuse are denied an effective judicial remedy. (Article 8)
- Punishments are dealt arbitrarily or unilaterally, without a proper and fair trial. (Article 11)
- Arbitrary interference into personal, or private lives by agents of the state. (Article 12)
- Citizens are forbidden to leave or return to their country. (Article 13)
- Freedom of speech or religion is denied. (Articles 18 & 19)
- The right to join a trade union is denied. (Article 23)
- Education is denied. (Article 26)
Human rights violations and abuses include those alleged by non-governmental organizations, such as Amnesty International, Human Rights Watch, World Organisation Against Torture, Freedom House, International Freedom of Expression Exchange and Anti-Slavery International that collect evidence and documentation. Only a very few countries do not commit significant human rights violations, according to Amnesty International. In their 2004 human rights report (covering 2003) the Netherlands, Norway, Denmark, Iceland and Costa Rica are the only (mappable) countries that did not violate at least some human rights significantly.
Some people believe human rights abuses are more common in dictatorships or theocracies than in democracies because freedom of speech and freedom of the press tend to uncover state orchestrated abuse and expose it. Nonetheless human rights abuses do also occur in democracies.
Many suggest the basic problem in dealing with Human Rights is the lack of understanding of the basic laws of fiduciary control. International equity expert Professor Paul Finn has underlined, “the most fundamental fiduciary relationship in our society is manifestly that which exists between the community (the people) and the state, its agencies and officials. “
In equity, a politician’s fiduciary obligations are not only comprised of duties of good faith and loyalty, but also include duties of skill and competence in managing a country and it’s people.
It is widely agreed that government is a ‘trust structure’ created by people to manage the needs of society. The relationship between government and the governed is clearly a fiduciary one. Yet rules such as Sovereign Immunity or Crown and Judicial Immunity are now being targeted as the very the tools of oppression that are preventing those being abused from taking action against the person controlling the laws of a country. Originating from within the Courts of Equity, the fiduciary concept was partly designed to prevent those holding positions of power from abusing their authority.
Modern arguments suggest any judicial, political or government control over the interests of people engenders moral obligations of the highest responsibility and trust. Actors’ conduct should therefore be judged by the most exacting fiduciary standards. The fiduciary relationship arises from the governments ability to control people with the exercise of that power. In effect, if a government has the power to abolish any rights, it is equally burdened with the fiduciary duty to protect such an interest because it would benefit from the exercise of its own discretion to extinguish rights which it alone had the power to dispose of.
Credits
Articles from Wikipedia.com
Photo by Osvaldo Zoom
Mob Sets Kenya Church on Fire, Killing Dozens
Evelyn Hockstein for The New York TimesMembers of two tribal groups threw rocks at one another across barricades on Tuesday in the Mathare slum of Nairobi, Kenya
January 2, 2008Mob Sets Kenya Church on Fire, Killing Dozens NAIROBI, Kenya — Dozens of people seeking refuge in a church in Kenya were burned to death by a mob on Tuesday in an explosion of ethnic violence that is threatening to engulf this country, which until last week was one of the most stable in Africa.
According to witnesses and Red Cross officials, up to 50 people died inside the church in a small village in western Kenya after a furious crowd doused it with gasoline and set it on fire.
In Nairobi, the capital, tribal militias squared off against each other in several slums, with gunshots ringing out and clouds of black smoke wafting over the shanties. The death toll across the country is steadily rising.
Witnesses indicate that more than 250 people have been killed in the past two days in bloodshed connected to a disputed election Kenya held last week.
The European Union said Tuesday that there was clear evidence of ballot rigging, and European officials called for an independent investigation. Kenya’s president, Mwai Kibaki, who won the election by a razor-thin margin, has refused such an inquiry.
Government officials said Tuesday that they would crack down on anyone who threatened law and order, and they banned political rallies. Meanwhile, Raila Odinga, the opposition leader who lost the election, has vowed to hold a million-person march on Thursday, which many Kenyans fear could become a bloodbath.
The Kenya celebrated for its spectacular wildlife and robust economy is now a land of distress. Tens of thousands of people have fled their homes, and some are so frightened that they have crossed into Uganda.
“We’ve had tribal fighting before, but never like this,” said Abdalla Bujra, a retired Kenyan professor who runs a democracy-building organization.
As for the people burned alive in the church, Mr. Bujra echoed what many Kenyans were thinking: “It reminds me of Rwanda.”
While the bloodshed of the past few days in Kenya has fallen far short of the Rwandan genocide in 1994, many Kenyans are worried that it is spiraling out of control.
The violence has been a mix of hooliganism, political protest and ethnic bloodletting. Most of the victims have been Kikuyus, the tribe of the president and Kenya’s traditional ruling class. Kikuyus have dominated business and politics since independence in 1963. They run shops, restaurants, banks and factories across Kenya, from the Indian Ocean coast to the scenic savannah to the muggy shores of Lake Victoria in the west.
They make up only 22 percent of the population and are part of Kenya’s mosaic of roughly 40 ethnic groups, which have intermarried and coexisted for decades. But the election controversy has created a new dynamic in which many of Kenya’s other tribes, furious about the ballot rigging that may have kept Mr. Kibaki in power, have vented their frustrations against them.
“We are easy targets,” said Stephen Kahianyu, a Kikuyu, staring at the embers of his home in Nairobi that was burned to the ground on Saturday.
Over the past few days, Kikuyus have fled to police stations and churches for protection.
On Monday night, several hundred Kikuyus barricaded themselves inside the Kenya Assemblies of God church in Kiambaa, a small village near the town of Eldoret. The next morning, a rowdy mob showed up.
According to witnesses, the mob was mostly Kalenjins, Luhyas and Luos, Mr. Odinga’s tribe, which makes up about 13 percent of the population. They overran Kikuyu guards in front of the church and then pulled out cans of gasoline. There were no police officers around, witnesses said, and no water to put the fire out.
Most people escaped. But in addition to those killed, dozens were hospitalized with severe burns. Witnesses said most of the people hiding inside had been women and children.
The Eldoret area has become a killing zone. Residents say dozens of Kikuyus have been hacked to death, including four who were beheaded on Monday.
In Nairobi, a much-feared Kikuyu street gang called the Mungiki seems to be taking revenge. According to residents in a Luo area, the Mungiki, who are said to take an oath in which they drink human blood, were sweeping through the slums and killing Luos.
The government is now blaming Mr. Odinga for the violence.
“This isn’t random,” said Alfred Mutua, a government spokesman. “This is part of Raila’s plan to create hysteria and trouble and make us declare a state of emergency,” which Kenya seems to be rapidly approaching, with curfews in several areas and a ban on live news media coverage.
Western diplomats have been urging the political leaders to reconcile, but the lines between those leaders seem to be only hardening.
Mr. Odinga said he would not talk to Mr. Kibaki until the president admitted that he had lost the election.
Still, he urged his followers to calm down. “This is tarnishing our image as democratic and peaceful seekers of change,” Mr. Odinga said.
Mr. Odinga and Mr. Kibaki ran together in 2002, in what was considered Kenya’s first free election. The tribal alliance they built steamrolled Kenya’s governing party and was a watershed moment. But the two fell out soon afterward, and diplomats here said that it has been very difficult trying to broker a truce.
“We just want them to meet,” said Bo Jensen, the Danish ambassador to Kenya. “But at the moment they’re quite far from each other.”
The election did not start off badly. A record number of Kenyans, nearly 10 million, waited in lines miles long on Thursday to scratch an X next to their chosen candidate.
Mr. Kibaki, 76, vowed to keep growing Kenya’s economy, one of the strongest in Africa, partly because of its billion-dollar tourist trade. Mr. Odinga, 62, ran as a champion of the poor and promised to end the tradition of Kikuyu favoritism.
Voting followed tribal lines, with a vast majority of Luos going for Mr. Odinga and up to 98 percent of Kikuyus in some areas voting for Mr. Kibaki.
Tribes, obviously, do matter in Kenya. But for the most part, the country has escaped the widespread ethnic bloodletting that has haunted so many of its neighbors, like Rwanda, Congo, Sudan and Ethiopia. In Kenya, the Kikuyu elite has shared the spoils of the system with select members of other tribes, which has helped defuse resentment.
That has led to decades of stability and is a reason why most Kenyans, including Mr. Bujra, the retired professor, do not think their country will end up like Rwanda, where nearly one million people were killed. Clearly, Kenya is a long way from that.
“In Rwanda, the conflict was between a small minority and a large majority,” he said, referring to the history of Tutsis dominating the Hutu majority. “Here, it is different, because many tribes have a stake.”
But election time in this country, where politics and tribe are so intertwined, is often bloody. Hundreds of people were killed in tribal clashes surrounding the 1992 and 1997 elections. And this time, passions were as high as ever.
The early results showed Mr. Odinga well ahead and more than half of Mr. Kibaki’s cabinet losing their Parliament seats and therefore their jobs.
But when Mr. Odinga’s lead began to vanish as further results were announced over the weekend, his supporters suspected that something was amiss. It was slow-motion theft to them, and they began to riot.
Even before Kenya’s election commission declared Mr. Kibaki the winner on Sunday, election observers said the president’s party had changed tally sheets to reflect more votes than were cast on election day. In some areas, there were more votes for the president than registered voters.
On Tuesday, Samuel Kivuitu, the election chairman, said he had been “under undue pressure” to certify the results.
Western governments, including the United States, are calling for a vote recount.
“It’s the only way forward,” said Graham Elson, the deputy chief of the European observer delegation.
Kennedy Abwao contributed reporting from Nairobi, and Matthew L. Wald from Washington.
Maureen Dowd Deign or Reign?
Fred R. Conrad/The New York TimesMaureen Dowd
January 2, 2008Op-Ed Columnist Deign or Reign? By MAUREEN DOWDAMES, Iowa
Edith Wessel, an 80-year-old white-haired retired nurse, moved slowly up the aisle with her walker after listening to Hillary make her pitch.
She told one of the Hillary volunteers that she had “great admiration” for the senator, but also great doubts about whether her strong negatives would sink her in the general election.
“I can’t understand why people dislike her so much,” Mrs. Wessel said.
The volunteer assured the wavering caucusgoer that the Republicans will slime anyone who gets the nomination and that Hillary has more experience wrestling them than her rivals.
Mrs. Wessel is torn. She likes Obama but worries about his experience. She likes Hillary but worries about her baggage.
The presidential anglers here are dancing on the head of a pin. The Democratic race — three lawyers married to lawyers who talk too much — is very tight and very volatile. Even the jittery pack of seasoned political operatives gazing into their BlackBerrys doesn’t seem to have a clue which way the Iowa snowdrifts are blowing.
Across town, Nancy Hibbs, a 57-year-old nurse, came to listen to John Edwards give his son-of-a-mill-worker rant against corporate greed, complete with a sneer aimed at Obama that anyone who thinks you can “just nice” the carnivorous Republican fat cats into submission is in “Never-Never Land.”
Ms. Hibbs had decided after seeing Barack Obama a year ago that she would vote for him. She saw him again Monday night in Ames and felt even more certain that he was the one. After listening to Edwards for 40 minutes on Tuesday, she up and changed her mind, deciding to vote for him.
“You can tell in his voice he’s not playing the game, you can hear his moral commitment,” she said. “We need a big turnaround.”
And what about Hillary? “I don’t want the same old entrenched politics,” she replied, adding emphatically, “And I don’t want Bill in the White House again.”
But Bill very much wants to be in the White House again. He is going around the state relentlessly, giving a speech as tightly choreographed with Hillary’s as a “Dancing With the Stars” routine.
“Miss Bill? Vote Hill!” reads one button being sold outside their events. By the time Bill and Hill are finished with you, you could be forgiven for thinking that she had personally forged the peace accord in Northern Ireland while socking away the $127 billion Clinton budget surplus and dodging bullets en route to ending ethnic cleansing in Bosnia.
The Big Dog pushed the experience card hard. “Whatever’s fixin’ to happen,” whether it’s something like 9/11, Katrina or Pakistan, he said, Hillary is better equipped to face it.
As to the health care debacle, he said, “Every president will fail at something or another.” It’s how they dust themselves off that counts.
And whether she has learned from her mistakes, of course, is the heart of the matter, and something that voters can never really know — even if they study up as much as Iowans.
Has Hillary truly changed, and grown from her mistakes? Has she learned to be less stubborn and imperious and secretive and vindictive and entitled? Or has she merely learned to mask her off-putting and self-sabotaging qualities better? If elected, would the old Hillary pop up, dragging us back to the dysfunctional Clinton kingdom? She is speaking in a soft, measured voice in these final days, so that, as with Daisy Buchanan, you have to lean in to listen. But is she really different than she was in the years when she was so careless about the people around her getting hurt by the Clinton legal whirlwind that she was dubbed the Daisy Buchanan of the boomer set?
The underlying rationale for her campaign is that she is owed. Owed for moving to Arkansas and giving up the name Rodham, owed for pretending to care about place settings and menus when she held the unappetizing title of first lady, owed for enduring one humiliation after another at the hands of her husband.
Oddly, Barack and Michelle Obama also radiate a sense that they are owed. Not for a lifetime of sublimation and humiliation, but for this onerous campaign, for offering themselves up to save and uplift the nation, even though it disrupted their comfortable lives.
Michelle told Vanity Fair that Americans would have only one chance to anoint her husband, vowing “it’s now or never” and explaining “there’s an inconvenience factor there” and a “really, really hard” pressure and stress on the family that can only be justified if her husband can win the presidency and “change the world.”
She told a group gathered at a nursing home in Grinnell on Monday that “Barack is one of the smartest people you will ever encounter who will deign to enter this messy thing called politics.”
So it comes down to this: Will Queen Hillary reign? Will Prince Barack deign? And who is owed more?
Thomas L. Friedman is on book leave.
Record-Setting Night, Perfect Finish for Patriots
John Dunn for The New York TimesTom Brady and the Patriots defeated the Giants, 38-35, to finish the regular season at 16-0
December 30, 2007Patriots 38, Giants 35 Record-Setting Night, Perfect Finish for Patriots EAST RUTHERFORD, N.J. — The New England Patriots‘ season began here with a scandal and, of course, a victory. Fifteen games — and fifteen victories — later, they exited Giants Stadium again Saturday night, this time not with a stain on their dynasty but with a new, unblemished addition to it.
Their 38-35 victory over the Giants completed a perfect regular season, the first in 35 years. The Patriots (16-0) are the fourth team in N.F.L. history to finish a regular season without a loss. But only one team is the standard for perfection: the 1972 Dolphins, who went 14-0 in the regular season and won Super Bowl VII to finish 17-0. The Patriots will try to do the Dolphins two better. A 19th victory, in Arizona on Feb. 3, would also bring the Patriots their fourth Super Bowl title of the decade.
The Giants (10-6) put up more of a fight than almost anyone imagined they would, trading scores with football’s most prolific offense until the Patriots took control in the fourth quarter. Quarterback Eli Manning had one of the best big-game performances in his career, completing 22 of 32 passes for 251 yards and 4 touchdowns.
“That was some way to finish this season,” said Patriots Coach Bill Belichick, who shed his dour image to reveal a smile. “They gave us all we could handle. It’s a great feeling. I’m happy. You work all year to try to win. To be able to win them all is great.”
Belichick’s coaching career took off during his years as a Giants assistant coach under Bill Parcells. But Belichick’s darkest coaching moment occurred here, too. In the first game of the season, a video camera operator working for the Patriots was caught taping signals by Jets coaches, a violation of N.F.L. rules that cost the Patriots a first-round draft pick and Belichick $500,000.
The Patriots, for the first time since their dynasty began in 2001, heard their achievements called into question. But a perfect season and a championship would be a tribute only to the Patriots’ excellence. The Patriots insisted the entire season that the incident had not provided motivation, and in truth, they did not need much more ammunition than an offense that will go down as one of the greatest in history.
Fittingly, it was a record-breaking touchdown pass from Tom Brady to Randy Moss that gave the Patriots the lead in the fourth quarter. One play after a wide-open Moss had dropped a pass at the Giants’ 15-yard line, Brady went back to him, finding Moss streaking down the right sideline alone. Moss looked back over his left shoulder at about the 20-yard line, reeled the ball in and glided into the end zone for a 65-yard touchdown reception.
The tandem of Brady and Moss has electrified the N.F.L. this season, and this touchdown will be immortalized. It was Brady’s 50 touchdown pass, breaking the record set by Peyton Manning three seasons ago, and it was Moss’ 23rd touchdown reception, breaking a record held by Jerry Rice since 1987.
The game was all but meaningless for the Giants, who last week had secured the fifth seed in the National Football Conference playoffs. But in a decision that prompted much discussion — and some head-scratching — Coach Tom Coughlin elected to play his starters in the game, risking injury but producing a dramatic battle.
The Giants, playing emotional but pressure-free football, scored more points, 21, against the Patriots than any other team had in the first half this season. They took a 21-16 lead into the locker room at halftime on the back of two scintillating drives led Manning and one electrifying kickoff return that was aided by a celebration penalty on the Patriots.
That penalty came after the Patriots’ first touchdown, a 4-yard reception by Moss. That touchdown broke the season scoring record, established by the 1998 Vikings, the team on which Moss, then a rookie, first made his mark.
That Vikings team finished 15-1 but did not make it to the Super Bowl. That same season, the Denver Broncos began the season 13-0 before coming to Giants Stadium. That day, an overmatched Giants team stunned the Broncos, 20-16, ending their run at perfection.
Because this game had no playoff implications for the Giants, this seemed like an opportunity for the Patriots to cruise untouched into the postseason. Instead, they received one of their biggest scares of the season, with the Giants taking a page from the Philadelphia Eagles, who also challenged the Patriots in a 31-28 loss last month. They pressured Brady; they banged the receivers; they ran the ball effectively; and with five minutes remaining in the third quarter, the Giants held a 12-point lead.
But the Patriots have left the rest of the N.F.L. in their wake because they are relentless. They beat the Ravens on Dec. 3 by repeatedly converting fourth downs in the game’s closing moments. On Saturday night, the Patriots marched for a touchdown by Laurence Maroney to close within 28-23 with four minutes left in the third. Then the defense, which had been gashed by the Giants’ running game and by Manning’s inspired passing, held the Giants by unleashing wave after wave of pressure on Manning.
As the fourth quarter began, the Patriots were in a familiar place for the second half of the season: driving to take the lead. The running game, a problem for much of the season, was squashed repeatedly, a cause for concern entering the bad-weather weeks of the playoffs. But Brady was able to complete enough short- and medium-range passes — to Wes Welker and Kevin Faulk — that the early lack of the deep passes. On third and 10 from the Giants 28, towels waved on the Giants’ bench and the crowd roared as Moss, hounded with pressure in his face from the line of scrimmage, could not reach high enough for a Brady pass.
When the Giants went nowhere on their next drive, it opened the door for the Patriots. Other opponents had seen this moment before, the one where the Patriots are given just enough wiggle room to kick the door of victory open. With one more spectacular Brady-to-Moss moment for the highlight reel and an Ellis Hobbs interception on the left sideline — the lone turnover of the night — the Patriots grabbed the game from the Giants’ grasp and clutched it hard to their chests.
“We didn’t get blown out,” Giants linebacker Antonio Pierce said. “We covered the spread, but obviously you can tell that the Giants are going to go out there and play hard, give it our all, and do that for four quarters. Just a couple of mistakes, one mistake on offense and one mistake on defense, and that’s the game.”
When Maroney, who will surely be called on more and more as the weather worsens, charged into the end zone with 4 minutes 36 seconds remaining, the Patriots had scored 22 unanswered points and taken a 38-28 lead. On the sideline, the Patriots began to bounce on their toes, sensing, at last, how close — how perfect — they were.
“How many teams can say they went 16-0?” cornerback Ellis Hobbs said. “And I guarantee you, choke would have been all over the TV if we had lost.”
In past seasons, a few of the 1972 Dolphins commemorated the moment when the final undefeated team loses with a toast. The Champagne remains on ice this season. The New England Patriots are the toast of football.
Surge in Off-Roading Stirs Dust and Debate in West
Sandy Huffaker for The New York TimesIMPERIAL SAND DUNES, CALIFORNIA Registrations of all-terrain vehicles in Riverside County, a few hours from the dunes, have gone up fourfold in recent years.
December 30, 2007Public Lands Surge in Off-Roading Stirs Dust and Debate in West DURANGO, Colo. — In the San Juan National Forest here, an iron rod gate is the last barrier to the Weminuche Wilderness, a mountain redoubt above 10,000 feet where wheels are not allowed.
But the gate has been knocked down repeatedly, shot at and generally disregarded. Miles beyond it, a two-track trail has been punched into the wilderness by errant all-terrain-vehicle riders who have insisted on going their own way, on-trail or off.
From Colorado‘s forests to Utah‘s sandstone canyons and the evergreen mountains of Montana, federally owned lands are rapidly being transformed into the new playgrounds — and battlegrounds — of the American West.
Outdoor enthusiasts are flocking in record numbers to lesser-known forests, deserts and mountains, where the rules of use have been lax and enforcement infrequent.
The federal government has been struggling to come up with plans to accommodate the growing numbers of off-highway vehicles — mostly with proposed maps directing them toward designated trails — but all-terrain-vehicle users have started formidable lobbying campaigns when favorite trails have been left off the maps.
Even with the plans, federal officials describe an almost impossible enforcement situation because the government does not begin to have the manpower to deal with those who will not follow the rules.
To keep the lawbreakers in check, said Don Banks, the deputy state director in Salt Lake City for the federal Bureau of Land Management, the biggest land owner in states like Utah and Nevada, “You’d have to have Patton’s army.”
The growing allure of the federal lands coincides with marked changes in how people play, with outdoor recreation now a multibillion-dollar industry. It also comes at a time, according to data compiled by Volker C. Radeloff of the University of Wisconsin, when more than 28 million homes sit less than 30 miles from federally owned land that millions of people increasingly view as their extended backyards.
“Forty years ago when I was out cowboying I never saw a soul,” said Heidi Redd, who operates the Dugout Ranch near Canyonlands National Park in southeastern Utah. “Now it’s at a point where you realize the public land is not yours, you’re just one of the users. And whether it’s A.T.V.’s, horses or climbers, it’s a traffic jam.”
Any user can contribute to the traffic jam, but the off-highway vehicles do damage disproportionate to their numbers. In addition to loud engines, they have soft tires and deep treads that bite more deeply than a foot or a hoof. When they go off-trail, consequences often follow: erosion, destruction of fragile desert soils or historical artifacts, and disturbance of wildlife habitats.
The temptation to go off-trail, legally or not, comes from the desire for variety, federal land managers say. “The more a route is used, the less challenging it becomes,” said Mark Stiles, the San Juan forest supervisor. “You end up getting lots of little spurs off the main route.” Even a few errant riders, he said, “can do a lot of damage.”
Soaring Numbers of Visitors
The federal government does a spotty job counting the visitors to public lands — most do not have traditional visitor centers or staffed entry gates — but recent estimates by federal land managers in Utah signal the trend.
About 2.7 million people participated in outdoor activities on federal lands near Arches National Park so far this year, roughly double the estimates for 2000. And the number of participants in off-highway vehicle trips grew twice as fast as those in other activities, including things like rafting and sightseeing.
This explosive growth — coming at a time when attendance at many of the country’s prized national parks has been below historic highs — has reignited the debate over just what should be done with the country’s public lands.
In eastern Utah, six offices of the federal land management agency recently released proposed land-use plans that, among other things, cover recreational uses and the closing of areas to all-terrain vehicles. The proposals have drawn fierce reactions.
Campaigns to save popular trails have cropped up on the Internet. “Help us Save Factory Butte,” says one appeal, in reference to a rock formation, a favorite of daring motorcyclists, that was closed on an emergency basis last year to protect cactuses. Another appeal says that a proposal to fence off cottonwood trees at White Wash Dunes near Moab, Utah, a popular playground for all-terrain vehicles, “must be opposed, en masse, by the off-highway community.”
On the other side, opponents of the trails have been alarmed that the proposed networks of authorized paths would permanently eliminate large areas of Utah’s unroaded wild lands from consideration as federally protected wilderness areas.
Members of the Southern Utah Wilderness Alliance, an environmental group that wants greater restrictions placed on motorized users, have tallied the total miles of motorized trails that would be allowed (about 15,000 miles) and the number of currently roadless acres that would no longer be eligible for federal wilderness protections (more than 2.5 million acres).
Lawyers for the group estimate that 82 percent of the lands in Utah that the Bureau of Land Management said had wilderness character in 1999 are now open for energy, mining or motorized recreation.
“Everybody’s losing something they thought they had,” said Clifton Koontz, an avid dirt motorbike rider and co-founder of Ride With Respect, a group that teaches people about the bikes and how to minimize damage to the environment.
A Delicate Balancing Act
The preservation movement that coalesced around John Muir in the late 19th century focused on setting aside public lands, first as parks, then wildlife refuges, then after passage of the 1964 Wilderness Act, as wilderness areas “untrammeled by man.”
But by the 1990s, federal designations were increasingly disputed by the mining and energy industries. Groups representing makers and riders of off-highway vehicles also had objections, casting the suggested wilderness designations as hostile acts designed to strip riders of their rights.
“They want everybody out,” said Russ Englund, who owns a motorcycle shop outside the Bitterroot National Forest, which straddles the Montana-Idaho border and is one of the many flash points. “They think it has to be kept in this pristine state. These people don’t even use it.”
Riders of all varieties complain that their critics are off the mark, that motorized sports are about more than a handful of renegades. They say the activities are enjoyed in large part by law-abiding families, and that the motorized vehicles allow older people and the infirm to visit beautiful and remote places otherwise inaccessible to them.
“I don’t like being looked at as a bad guy all the time,” said Bob Turri, 79, who likes to ride his all-terrain vehicle near his home in Monticello, in southeastern Utah.
On a recent trip to Hidden Canyon, 20 miles from Moab and two miles from the nearest paved road, Mr. Koontz of Ride With Respect said it was possible to design trails that separated the machines from the wildlife.
Bighorn sheep sometimes visit Hidden Canyon, and Mr. Koontz pointed to the faint sheep tracks crossing the imprint of tires.
“You build the trails below the ridgelines,” he said, explaining that sheep, when startled, are more comfortable heading up to ridges rather than down into canyons, and therefore would naturally stay away from the riders.
But federal managers say the outlaw fringe of motor-vehicle users is driving the need for more regulation. While sales of all-terrain vehicles have dipped slightly since 2004, the slippage comes after astronomical growth. Registrations of all-terrain vehicles and motorbikes in California, Colorado, Idaho and Utah tripled from 1998 to 2006; in Riverside County, east of Los Angeles and a couple hours’ drive from the popular Algodones Dunes, registrations went up fourfold. In Wyoming, the registration increases were starker: up fivefold, to 45,000, from 2002 to 2006.
Many motorized users say wealthy homeowners are selfish, pushing for restrictions to preserve postcard views. So-called quiet users, those who do not use motorcycles or all-terrain vehicles, often portray those riders as reckless people in their 20s who seek out meadows simply to shred them.
Not So Black and White
In truth, there are some young thrill-seekers and wealthy armchair environmentalists, but the demographics on both sides are complicated.
Many all-terrain-vehicle riders take their grandchildren with them and go fishing. In Utah, where in some rural counties there is one off-highway vehicle for every three or four people, 8-year-olds ride scaled-down versions and older people use them for Sunday outings.
Many quiet users, meanwhile, are not rich newcomers but longtime locals who spent their lives in the forest. One of them, Tom Powers, a backcountry hunter in Montana who first hunted elk in the Bitterroot as a young man in 1969, still takes his horse into the woods, but less than before, to avoid the summertime traffic of motorcycles, pickups and all-terrain vehicles.
“They’ve ruined what used to be a quality experience in the backcountry, where you were just up there with nature,” Mr. Powers said.
The list of complaints is long and varied.
Though some hunters enjoy all-terrain vehicles, others complain that hunters using them get so close that their engines spook the game.
“There are so many of these machines,” said Dave Petersen, a bow hunter who monitors public lands issues here in Durango for the environmental group Trout Unlimited. “It’s made our big public lands much smaller, for the wildlife and for us.”
Environmentalists worry about the destruction of fragile soils and erosion, when outsize Western rainfalls course through the ruts left by hill-climbing all-terrain vehicles. There are also concerns for streams, rivers and wetlands, precious resources in the arid West and magnets for those who think all-terrain-vehicle riding is best when muddy. “They wouldn’t do this in their backyard,” said Liz Thomas, a lawyer for the Southern Utah Wilderness Alliance. “But it’s not their backyard.”
Trespassing is another problem. Since most land used for outdoor recreation is publicly owned, some riders and hikers pay little heed to “No Trespassing” signs on property that abuts popular federal lands. The hikers are not hard to identify and prosecute, but the all-terrain-vehicle riders can be. A Colorado man, Joe Jepson, ordered two riders off his land last year. One ran him down, breaking his leg. The riders were never identified.
Perhaps the biggest damage to the sport’s reputation has come from mass holiday gatherings that have turned ugly or dangerous on public lands like Algodones Dunes in California, a favorite spot at New Year’s. Last Easter weekend at the Little Sahara sand dunes in Utah — a popular spring-break getaway like Florida’s beaches — there was a near-riot, with, among other things, drunken riders forcing women to expose their breasts. A.T.V. fans argue that drunken rowdies are not unique to any particular group.
“We have two groups, one that wants to be quiet and then one that wants to have motorized use,” said Mary Laws, the recreation program manager for Bitterroot National Forest. “They both want to be in the forest, so we get the great task of coming up somewhere in the middle.”
Recent Comments